Full text of "Botanical abstracts"

See other formats

iiiiii

,:i;.

iliis

ill

!![>""•

ssm

Botanical Abstracts

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international

field of botany in its broadest sense.

VOLUME VII
FEBRUARY, 1921-APRIL, 1921

PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies

interested in plants.

BALTIMORE, U. S. A.

WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY

1921

)(6

nsLt

Williams & Wilkins Company

Baltimore, U. S. A.

THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED

AND

THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL

{Tht Members of the Executive Committee for 1921 are indicated by asterisks)

American Association for tlie Advancement
of Science, Section G.
R. A. Harper, Columbia University,
New York City.

B. E. Livingston, Jolins Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore, Maryland.

Botanical Society of America, General
Section.
H. A. Gleason, New York Botanical

Garden, New York City.
*B. M. Davis, University of Michigan,
Ann Arbor, Michigan.
Botanical Society of America, Physiologi-
cal Section.
Otis F. Curtis, Cornell University,

Ithaca, New York.
*B. M. Duggar (Chairman of the Board),
Missouri Botanical Garden, St. Louis,
Missouri.
Botanical Society of America, Systematic
Section.
Marshall A. Howe, New York Botani-
cal Garden, New York City.
J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical
Garden, New York City.
Botanical Society of America, Mycological
Section.

C. H. Kauffman, University of Michi-
gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

Bruce Fink, Miami University, Oxford,
Ohio.

American Society of Naturalists.
H. H. Bartlett, University of Michigan,

Ann Arbor, Michigan.
*J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental
Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, L. I.,
New York.
Ecological Society of America.

H. L. Shantz, U. S. Bureau of Plant

Industry, Washington, D. C.
*Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory,

Paleontological Society of America.

Arthur Hollick, 61 Wall Street, New

Brighton, New York.
E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University,

Baltimore, Maryland.

American Society of Agronomy.

C. B. Hutchinson, Cornell University,

Ithaca, New York.
C. A. Mooers, University of Tennessee,

Knoxville, Tennessee.

Society for Horticultural Science.
V. R. Gardner, University of Missouri,

Columbia, Missouri.
E. J. Kraus, University of Wisconsin,

Madison, W^isconsin.

American Phytopathological Society.
L. R. Jones, University of Wisconsin,

Madison, W^isconsin.
*DoNALD Reddick, Cornell University,
Ithaca, New York.

Society of American Foresters.

Raphael Zon, U. S. Forest Service, Wash-
ington, D. C.

J. S. Illick, Pennsylvania Department
of Forestry, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania.

American Conference of Pharmaceutical
Faculties.
Heber W. Youngken, Philadelphia Col-
lege of Pharmacy and Science, Phila-
delphia, Pennsylvania.
Henry Kraemer.

Canadian Society of Technical Agricultur-
ists.
W. P. Thompson, University of Sas-
katchewan, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan.
B. T. Dickson, Macdonald College,
Macdonald College, Quebec.

Royal Society of Canada.
No elections.

Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona.

At large.
W. A. Orton, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C

111

BOARD OF EDITORS AND ASSISTANT EDITORS

FOR VOLUME VII

Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston

The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore

Associate, Lon A. Hawkins

U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.

EDITORS FOR SECTIONS

Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of
Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. —
Assistant Editor, Mart R. Burr, U. S.
Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,
D. C.

Bibliography, Biography, and History.
Neil E. Stevens, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C.

Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager,
Brooklyn Botanic Garden, Brooklyn,
New York. — Assistant Editor, Alfred
GuNDERSEN, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,
Brooklyn, New York.

Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University
of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin. —
Assistant Editor, Geo. S. Bryan, Uni-
versity of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.

Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C.
CowLES, The University of Chicago,
Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant Editor, Geo.
D. Fuller, The University of Chicago,
Chicago, Illinois.

Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael
ZoN, U. S. Forest Service, Washington,
D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V. Hofmann,
U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Experi-
ment Station, Stabler, Washington.

Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton
University, Princeton, New Jersey. —
Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly, Pennsyl-
vania State College, State College, Penn-
sylvania.

Horticulture. J. H. Gourley, West Virginia
University, Morgantown, West Virgmia.
— Assistant Editor, H. E. Knowlton,
West Virginia University, Morgan town,
West Virginia.

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications.
Burton E. Livingston, The Johns
Hopkins University, Baltimore, Mary-
land.— Assistant Editor, Sam F. Tre-
LEASE, The Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore, Maryland.

Morphology, Anatomy, and Histology of
Vascular Plants. E. W. Sinnott, Con-
necticut Agricultural College, Storrs,
Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E. N
Transeau, Ohio State University,
Columbus, Ohio.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes.

Alexander W. Evans, Yale University,
New Haven, Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi,
Lichens, Bacteria, and Myxomycetes.
H. M. FiTZPATRicK, Cornell University,
Ithaca, New York.— Assistant Editor,
Carlos E. Chardon, Cornell University,
Ithaca, New York.

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History.
Edward W. Berry, The Johns Hopkins
University, Baltimore, Maryland.

Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agri-
cultural College, East Lansing, Michi-
gan.— Assistant Editor, C. W. Bennett,
Michigan Agricultural College, East
Lansing, Michigan.

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy.
Heber W. Youngken, Philadelphia
College of Pharmacy and Science, Phila-
delphia, Pennsylvania. — Assistant Edi-
tor, E. N. Gathercoal, 701 South Wood
Street, Chicago, Illinois.

Physiology. B. M. Dugqar, Missouri
Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. —
Assistant Editor, Carroll W. Dodge,
Brown University, Providence, Rhode

Island.

Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau
of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C. —
Assistant Editorj F. M. Schertz, U. S.
Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,

D. C.

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M.
Greenman, Missouri Botanical Garden,
St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor,

E. B. Payson, Missouri Botanical Gar-
den, St. Louis, Missouri.

BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1921
J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York

H. O. BucKMAN R. Hosmer

W. H. Chandler L. Knudson
A. J. Eames E. G. Montgomery

R. A. Emerson D. Reddick

H. M. Fitzpatrick L. W. Sharp
K. M.Wiegand
R. S. Harris, Secretary

CONTENTS

The Societies Represented and the Members of the Board of Control Page iii

The Board of Editors and Assistant Editors for Volume VII Page iv

Sections:

Agronomy Entries 1-63, 566-684, 1528-1588

Bibliography, Biography, and History Entries 64-76, 685-710, 158&-1606

Botanical Education Entries 77-99, 711-718, 1607-1610

Cytology Entries 719-739, 1611-1617

Forestry and Forest Botany Entries 100-156, 740-838, 1618-1667

Genetics Entries 157-249, 839-943, 1668-1854

Horticulture:

Fruits and General Horticulture Entries 250-291, 944-1009, 1885-1945

Floriculture and Ornamental Horticulture Entries 292-311, 1010-1025, 1855-1884

Vegetable Culture Entries 312-313, 1026-1035, 1946-1953

Horticultural Products Entries 314-315, 1036-1047, 1954-1956

Morphology, Anatomy, and Histology of Vascular Plants Entries 31&-337, 1048-1077,
1957-1967

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes Entries 338-354, 1078-1096, 1968-1977

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria, and Myxomycetes:

Fungi Entries 355-370, 1978-1991

Lichens Entries 371-372, 1992-1995

Bacteria Entries 373-377, 1996-2001

Myxomycetes Entries 2002-2004

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History Entries 378-395, 1097-1124, 2005-2016

Pathology :

Plant Disease Survey (Reports of Disease Occurrence and Severity) Entries 1125-

1138, 2017-2020
The Pathogene (Biology, Infection Phenomena, Dispersal) Entries 1139-1149,

2021-2028
The Host (Resistance, Susceptibility, Morbid Anatomy, and Physiology) Entries
1150-1167, 2029-2031

Descriptive Plant Pathology Entries 1168-1213, 2032-2049

Eradication and Control Entries 1214-1255, 2050-2061

Regulatory Measures Entries 1256-1259

Miscellaneous (Methods, Cognate Researches, etc.). .Entries 1260-1275, 2062-2074

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy Entries 1276-1289, 2075-2111

Physiology :

General Entries 396-400, 2112

Protoplasm, Motility Entries 1290-1291, 2113-2114

Diffusion, Permeability, Adsorption Entries 1292-1296, 2115-2117

Water Relations Entries 1297-1298, 2118-2119

Mineral Nutrients Entries 401-406, 1299, 2120-2126

Photosynthesis Entries 1300-1301, 2127-2131

Metabolism (General) Entries 407-419, 1302-1328, 2132-2141

Metabolism (Nitrogen Relations) Entries 1329-1336, 2142-2145

Metabolism (Enzymes, Fermentation) Entries 420-421, 1337-1351, 214&-2153

Metabolism (Respiration) Entries 1352-1354

Organism as a Whole Entries 422-426, 1355-1358, 2154-2156

Growth, Development, Reproduction Entries 427-430, 1359-1363, 2157-2162

Movements of Growth and Turgor Changes Entries 431, 1364-1366, 2163-2166

Germination, Renewal of Activity Entries 432-433, 1367-1368

VI CONTENTS

Temperature Relations Entries 434-435, 1369-1370, 2167

Radiant Energy Relations Entries 436-437, 1371-1373, 2168-2171

Toxic Agents Entries 438-440, 1374-1378, 2172-2174

Physiology of Disease Entries 441-442, 1379

Miscellaneous Entries 443-446, 1380-1385, 2175-2176

Soil Science:

General Entries 1386-1397, 2177-2180

Soil Acidity Entries 447-450, 1398-1401

Influence of Biological Agents Entries 451-456, 1402-1407, 2181-2184

Fertility Studies Entries 457-467, 2185-2189

Fertilization Entries 1408-1413

Fertilizer Resources Entries 1414-1420

Moisture Relations Entries 468-472

Peat Entries 473^76

Miscellaneous Entries 477-480

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants:

General Entries 481-496

Spermatophytes Entries 503-551, 1421-1498, 2190-2259

Pteridophytes Entries 497-502

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications Entries 552-565, 1499-1527, 2260-2271

Index to Authors' Names appearing in Volume VII Pa^e 335

ERRATA

Volume VII

Entry 29. For Gerome read Gerome.

Entry 72. For Morris, J. C. read Morris, Daniel.

Entry 169. For Brierly, W. G. read Brierley, W. G.

Entry 263. For Gunliffe read Cunliffe.

Entry 357. For Brierly, W. B. read Brierley, W. B.

Entry 358. For Brierly, William B. read Brierley, William B.

Entry 783. For Flury, Philip read Flury, Philipp.

Entry 783. For Gebierte read Gebiete.

Entry 784. For Gebierte read Gebiete.

Entry 785. For Bikar read Bihar.

■ Entry 1564. For Mendes, F. C. Correa read Correa Mendes, F, C.

Cover page, Vol. 7, No. 2. For Schantz read Shantz.

Vol. VII

FEBRUARY, 1921
ENTRIES 1-565

No. 1

Botanical Abstracts

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international

field of botany in its broadest sense

PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

A democratically constituted organization, with members representing manj' societies

interested in plants.

THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED

AND

THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL

(The Executite Committee for t9t0 are indicated ly aateriakt)

American Association for the Advancement
of Science, Section G.
•B. E. Livingston, Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, Baltimore, Maryland.

A. F. Blakeslee, Station for Experimental
Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long
Island, New York.

Botanical Society of America, General
Section.

B. M. Davis, University of Michigan, Ann
Arbor, Michigan.

•R. A. Harper, Columbia University,
New York City.

Botanical Society of America, Physiology
Section.
B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical

Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.
W. J. V. OsTERHOUT, Harvard University,
Cambridge, Massachusetts.

Botanical Society of America, Systematic

Section.
J. H. Barnhart, New York Botanical

Garden, Bronx Park, New York City.
A. S. Hitchcock, U. S. Bureau of Plant

Industry, Washington, D. C.

American Society of Naturalists.

J. A. Harris, Station for Experimental

Evolution, Cold Spring Harbor, Long

Island, New York.
E. M. East, Harvard University, Bussey

Institution, Forest Hills, Boston,

Massachusetts.

Ecological Society of America.
Forrest Shreve, Desert Laboratory,
Carnegie Institution, Tucson, Arizona.
•Geo. H. Nichols, Yale University, New
Haven, Connecticut.

At large.
W. A.Orton.U.S.
try, Washington

Paleontological Society of America.

E. W. Berry, Johns Hopkins University,
Baltimore, Maryland.

F. H. K.vowlton, U. S. National Museum,
Wa.shington, D. C.

American Society of Agronomy.
C. A- MooERS, University of Tennessee,

Knoxville, Tennessee.
E. Cr. Montgomery, Cornell University,

Ithaca, New York.

Socieh' for Horticultural Science.
*E. J. Kr.\us, University of Wisconsin,

Madison, Wisconsin.
W. A. McCuE, Delaware Agricultural
Experiment Station, Newark, Dela-
ware.

American Phytopathological Society.
*DoNALD Reddick {Chairman of the Board),
Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.
C. L. Shear, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C.

Society of American Foresters.
J. S. Illick, State Forest Academy,

Mount Alto, Pennsylvania.
Barrington Moore, American Museum

of Natural History, New York City.

American Conference of Pharmaceutical
Faculties.

Henry Kraemer, University of Michi-
gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

WoRTLEY F. RxJDD, Mcdical College, Rich-
mond, Virginia.

Royal Society of Canada.
No elections.

Bureau of Plant Indus-
, D. C.

WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY

BALTIMORE, U. S. A.

Entered as Becond-claes matter, November 9, 1918, at the post ofiBce at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of

March 3, 1879

Price, net postpaid, per volume

$3.00 United States, Mexico, Cuba
Canada
Other countries

r$3.00

s: < S3.12

i $3.25

CONTENTS

Agronomy 1-63

Bibliography, Biography and History 64-76

Botanical Education 77-99

Forest Botany and Forestry 100-156

Genetics 157-249

Horticulture 250-315

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants 316-337

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 338-354

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria and Myxomycetes 355-377

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History 378-395

Physiology . 396- 446

Soil Science 447-480

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants 481-551

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 552-565

BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1920

AND ASSISTANT EDITORS
Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston

The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore

Associate, Lon A. Hawkins

U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.

EDITORS FOR SECTIONS

Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, Mart R.
Bdrr, XJ. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,
DC.

Bibliography, Biography and History. Lincoln W.
Riddle, Harvard University, Cambridge, Massa-
chusetts.

Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn
Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant
Editor, Alfred Gdndersen, Brooklyn Botanic
Garden, Brooklyn, New York.

Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin,
Madison, Wisconsin. — Assistant Editor, Geo. S.
Brtan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.

Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The
' University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois. — Assistant
Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago,
Chicago, Illinois.
Forest Botany and Forestry. Raphael Zon. U. S. Forest
Service, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, J. V.
HoPMANN, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex-
periment Station, Stabler, Washington.

Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University,
Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly,
Pennsylvania State College, State College, Penn-
sylvania.

Horticulture. J. H. Gourlet, West Virginia Univer-
sity, Morgantown, West Virginia. — Assistant Editor,
H. E. Knowlton, West Virginia University, Morgan-
town, West Virginia.

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E.
Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University, Balti-
more, Maryland.

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants.

E. W. Sinnott, Connecticut Agricultural College,

Storrs, Connecticut.
Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E._N. Tranbbad.

Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio.
Morphology ana Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexandeb

W. Evans. Yale University. New Haven. Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria
and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick. Cornell
University, Ithaca, New York.

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W,
Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore,
Maryland.

Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col-
lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W.
Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East Lans-
ing, Michigan.

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. Heber W.
YouNGKEN, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and
Science ,Philadelphia,Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor,

E. N. Gathercoal, University of Illinois, Urbana,
Illinois.

Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden,
St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W.
Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island.

Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor,

F. M. ScBERTZ, U.S.Bureauof Plant Industry, Wash-
ington, D. C.

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Mis-
souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri. —
Assistant Editor, E. B. Payson, Missouri Botanical
Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.

BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1920

J. R. Schramm, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York

H. O. BucKMAN L. Knudson

W. H. Chandler E. G. Montgomery

A.J. Eames D. Reddick

R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp

H. M. FrrzPATRiCK K. M. Wiegand

R. Hosmer

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

A monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international field of

botany in its broadest sense. . IRUAW

UNDER THE DIRECTION OF NEW VOR?:

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.BOTANJC'^.-

Burton E. Livingston, Editor-in-Chief
The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Maryland

Vol. VII FEBRUARY, 1921 No. 1

ENTRIES 1-565

AGRONOMY

C. V. Piper, Editor
Mary R. Burr, Assistant Editor

\. Anonymous. Planteavlen i 1919. [Plant production in 1919.] Tidsskr. Landoko-
nomi (Kjobenhavn) 1920:' 2S4-298. 1920.— During the last two years of the world war and the
first year following the war, the shortage of grass seed and red clover seed was acute, resulting
in a greatly decreased acreage of grass and clover during 1919. The opinion is ventured
that the decrease is temporarj^, since heavy importation of seed was received from the United
States during the spring of 1920. As compared with pre-war planting, the 1919 acreage of
wheat was decreased; rye was about the same; barley was increased slightly; sugar beets
were increased about 20 per cent; potatoes about 35 per cent; and the area planted to vege-
tables was considerably increased. The harvest of 1919 is described; it is stated to have
averaged about 107 per cent of normal. — Albert A. Hansen.

2. Anonymous. Cultivation of main crop potatoes. Jour Dept. Agric. Ireland 20: 217-
227. 1920.

3. Anonymous. Field experiments, 1919. Jour. Dept. Agric. Ireland 20: 167-174.
1920. — Summarizes results of variety tests made in Ireland with barley, mangels, oats, pota-
toes, turnips, and wheat. — Donald Folsom.

4. Anonymous. Notes. Nature 105:80-81. 1920.— Note on organization of British
Empire Sugar Research Association to further the development of the industry. — 0. A.

Stevens.

5. Anonymous. American books on agriculture. [Rev. of : Gehrs, John H. Productive
agriculture, xii + 426 p. Macmillan & Co.: London, 1917.] Nature 104: 495-496. 1920.—
A textbook for "school children of the upper classes who propose to take up farming as the
business of their lives." — O. A. Stevens.

6. Anonymous. Sulphur as a fertilizer for wheat. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:
462. 1920. — Results of 4 years' trials at Cowra gave negative results. — L. R. Waldron.

7. Anonymous. Applied plant morphology. [Rev. of: Barber, C. A. Studies in Indian
»- sugar canes. Mem. Dept. Agric. India Bot. Ser. 10: 39-153. 1919.] Nature 104: 578. 1920.
^ — A study of the underground branching of the plant of wild and cultivated forms of sugar
: — cane and an attempt to correlate morphological characters with economic values. This is

referred to as the fourth paper on the Indian sugar canes. — 0. A. Stevens.
^ 1 " .

'^ BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. vn, NO. 1

2 AGRONOMY Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

•

8. Anonymous. (Reichs ausschuss fur Ole und Fette.) Zur Frage des Anbaues und
der Akklimatissation der Soja in Deutschland. [Concerning the cultivation and the acclima-
tization of the soy bean in Germany.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18:3&-38. 1920. —
The bureau of fats and oils in its search for new fats and oils since the war made a thorough
study of the advisabilty of introducing the soy bean on a large scale, but has reached the
conclusion that regardless of its longer vegetative period, it does not approach in yield the
common dwarf bean (Phaseolus nanus). Late ripening crops of the soy bean developed very
little or no seed at all. There is little hope that further experimentation in cultivating and
breeding will result in producing a soy bean ripening early enough and producing large
enough yields to make its planting in the most favorable parts of Germany a success. —
J. Roeser.

9. Anonymous. Cane experiment in St. Croix. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 180, 181,
196. 1920. — A review of the work done with sugar cane at the Slob Experimental Station
during 1919-20, as reported by Eduard Gedde, manager. Results of experiments show that
it is advantageous to plant canes equal distances apart in both directions. Cane planting
experiments with cuttings obtained from plant, first, and second ratoon canes, gave results
in favour of those taken from first ratoons, since these gave 4 tons more per acre than those
from plant canes and llf tons more than those from second ratoons. Carefully conducted
comparative experiments with planting cane in flat and banked plats gave results in favor of
the former from the points of view of yield and of cultivation costs. — J. S. Dash.

10. Anonymous. Agriculture and industries in the Turks and Caicos Islands. Agric.
News [Barbados] 19: 3. 1920. — This is a review of G. W. Smith's 1918 report as Commis-
sioner for the Turks and Caicos Islands. Mention is made of the introduction into the
colony of seeds of both Sea Island and Upland strains of cotton which were brought by set-
tlers from the United States who were granted lands there by the British Government after
the American War of Independence. Never cultivated, plants from these seeds were allowed
to grow at will in waste places near the settlements "Where amid cactus shrub they pursued
for over a century a struggle for existence, evolving eventually a type of cotton plant that
for hardiness, freedom from disease and heavy cropping qualities, under almost unbelievable
conditions of sterility and neglect, cannot, it is believed, be surpassed anywhere." — J. S. Dash.

11. Anonymous. Seedling canes experimented with in Antigua in 1919. Agric. News
[Barbados] 19: 7. 1920. — In this review of a report on sugar cane presented to the Agricul-
tural and Commercial Society by A. E. Collens, it is stated that the White Transparent
is the variety most cultivated. As plant cane, its calculated yield for 1919 was 15.45 tons of
cane per acre; and as ratoons, 12.06 tons. The calculated sucrose content was 2.11 pounds,
and 1.99 pounds per gallon of juice, respectively. In the experiments, B. 6308 came first as
plant cane with an average of 23.4 tons of cane per acre and 2.08 pounds sucrose per gallon.
The best ratooning cane was found to be B. 10650. — J. S. Dash.

12. Atkinson, Esmond. Weeds and their identification. New Zealand Jour. Agric.
20: 168-171. 1 pi. 1920. — This article deals with perennial Sow Thistle (Sonchus arvensis).
The plant and its habits are described. It has been in New Zealand for many years. It
need not be considered serious in pastures, as sheep eat it readily. In cultivated land the
weed may be eradicated by the use of a smothering crop, such as oats and tares, or Wearora
vetchling; or the land may be put into grass for a couple of years. — N. J. Giddings.

13. Breakwell, E. Improvement of sweet sorghimis. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31:549-551. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 168.

14. Breakwell, E. Popular description of grasses. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31: 507-512. 2 fig. 1920. — Deals with the introduced Chloris grasses and describes in some
detail the agronomic relations of Rhodes grass (Chloris gayana). The annual C. virgata is
not considered of much economic importance. — L. R. Waldron.

No. 1, February, 1921] AGRONOMY 3

15. Brown, Ernest B. Relative yields from broken and entire kernels of seed corn.
Jour. Amer. See. Agron. 12: 196-197. 1920.— A lower percentage of the broken seed germi-
nated, and the seedlings were weaker than those produced by whole kernels. In weight of
ear and yield per plant the broken seed produced consistently less than did the entire seed.
The broken seed produced 7.6 bushels less per acre than did the entire seed.— F. M. Schertz.

16. Bruce, J. L. Rotation of crops. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20:94-96. 1920.— A
6-year rotation for dairj- farms is suggested. This included 3 years in grass; 1 year in roots;
1 year in flax, barley, beans, potatoes, linseed, etc.; and 1 year in oats and tares.— iV. J.
Giddings.

17. C, C. The roast beef of old England. [Rev. of: Mackenzie, R. J. J. Cattle and the
future of beef production in England. With a preface and chapter by F. H. R. Marshall.
xi^-168 p. University Press. Cambridge, 1919)]. Nature 105:62-63. 1920.— Author
considers a supply of prime beef necessary to a sound system of agriculture. The increase of
plow-land at expense of grass-land during the war is now in process of reversal, and this may
proceed at an increasing rate unless there is evidence of greater profit in crops other than
grass. — 0. A. Stevens.

18. Calvino, Mario. Estudio sobre el cultivo de la soya en Cuba. (A study regarding
the cultivation of the soy bean in Cuba.) Rev. Agric. Com. y Trab. [Cuba] 3: 124-131. 9 fig.
1920.— Trials of 13 varieties of soy beans {Soja max L.) are described with reference to germi-
nation, time of emergence, length of growing season, yield and nutritive value.— i^*. M.

Blodgett.

19. Cockayne, L. An economic investigation of the montane tussock— grassland of New
Zealand. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 82-94. // fi^. 1920.— Several depleted areas which
have been protected by rabbit-proof fences are showing great improvement. A reasonable
amount of pasturing apparently does not interfere with the regeneration. Valuable forage
grasses spread from the tussocks, and many seedling plants soon develop. The plants
found in these areas are listed. — ^V. /. Giddings.

20. CoLWELL, W. R. Under irrigation with bore water. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31 : 476-477. 2 fig. 1920. — Excellent returns were obtained from Sudan grass at the Coon-
amble Experiment Farm with the assistance of irrigation from bore water.— L. R. Waldron.

21. Downing, R. G. Sugar-beet growing in Victoria. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31:463-465. 1920.— Summary of results showing profits made by farmers and how sugar-
beet production is related to other phases of crop production.— L. R. Waldron.

22. Faber, Harald. Foreword by Sir Robert Greig. Forage crops in Denmark.
ix + 100 p. Longmans, Green and Co. : London, 1920.— This volume, written in English,
describes the progress that has been made in recent years in the improvement and culture
of forage crops and the development of the trade in guaranteed seeds in Denmark. The book
is of unusual interest to all engaged in the development and utilization of improved crops
and in the betterment of the seed trade. One-half of the work is devoted to root crops. Fol-
lowing the investigations of Fjord published in 1890, which showed that the dry matter in
roots was equal in feeding value to grain for cows and swine, the acreage of root crops in
Denmark has been increased sevenfold; namely, from 95,000 acres in 1888 to 678,000 acres in
1919. Before this time breeding of improved root crops had made considerable progress, the
iniative being due both to progressive farmers and to enterprising seed firms, who later
formed the "Society for the Production of Home-Grown Seed." The success achieved in
developing and establishing improved strains of root crops has been remarkable, and since
1894 has been assisted by the government. The methods employed are described in detail.—
The improvement of grasses in Denmark began with the work of P. Nielsen in 1869. He
introduced the system of testing grasses in small duplicate plats instead of in large fields,

4 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

and in 1896 became the first director of the state experimental farm at Tystofte. With this
work began the systematic testing of grass seeds of different strains and from various coun-
tries, and the development of special seed farms was a subsequent outgrowth of this move-
ment. Later a system was introduced of making comparative trials of lots of grass and
clover seed submitted by growers and dealers. This has stimulated the selection of special
high-yielding strains, especially of grasses and of white clover, of which the Mors strain is
best. In the trials, samples of orchard grass (cocksfoot), Italian rye-grass, meadow fescue,
tall oat-grass, timothy, red clover, white clover, and bird's-foot trefoil were tested. So far
as reported, the native Danish strains were in every case the best. — The last chapter is devoted
to the development of trade in guaranteed seeds. This again was initiated by farmers and
seedsmen, but later its control was taken over by the government. The success of the whole
movement is indicated not only by the much increased acreage of high-yielding forage crops,
but also by the fact that Denmark now exports much seed, while formerly it was a large
importer. — C. V. Piper.

23. Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept. Agric. [Restrictive legislation and
notices of quarantines in U. S. A.] Service and Regulatory Announcements 68: 52-111. 1920.

24. Fisher, M. L. The dormant period of timothy seed after harvesting. Proc. Indiana
Acad. Sci. 1918: 276-279. 1920. — Reports in 2 tables results of timothy seed germination.
After 25 days the germinating percentage of seeds from individual heads averaged 98.2 per
cent while in mass selections it was 88 per cent. Three or 4 weeks after harvesting, timothy
seed has reached its maximum germinating power. — F. A. Anderson.

25. FuRBY, E. Wheat experiments for hay. Yanco experiment farm, 1919. Agric. Gaz.
New South Wales 31 : 467-471. 1920. — Several standard varieties of wheat were used. Early
sowing gave best results. — L. R. Waldron.

26. Gasser, G. W. Report of the work at Rampart station. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp'
Sta. 1917: 34-57. PI. S-4- 1919. — Reports on the behavior of alfalfa {Medicago falcata and
M. sativa), bird vetch (Vicia cracca), field peas, chick pea (Cicer arietinum), clover {Trifo-
Uum pratense and T. lupinaster), winter and spring wheat, winter and spring rye, barley,
oats, buckwheat, hemp, millet, flax, and potatoes. Nearly all the winter wheat was killed
by freezing, but rye was not. Spring rye matured too late. Barley, oats, and most varie-
ties of spring wheat matured well. This station is devoted chiefly to grain breeding, and a
large proportion of the varieties grown originated here. Two fruits — the first grown in the
interior of Alaska — were produced on a Siberian Crab tree. Strawberries of varieties bred
at Sitka have survived several winters and have fruited abundantly. Reports are also given
on garden vegetables and annual flowering plants. — J. P. Anderson.

27. Georgeson, C. C. Reports from seed and plant distribution. Rept. Alaska Agric.
Exp. Sta. 1917: 86-90. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 269.

28. Georgeson, C. C. Summary of the work at the several stations. Rept. Alaska
Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 5-33. 2 pi. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 270.

29. G^rome, J. Essais de culture de Pommes de terre avec des tubercules appauvris ou
anormaux (1919). [An experiment.in growing potatoes from depauperate or abnormal tubers.]
Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 677-681. 1919.— Results of this experiment in the vicinity
of Paris with 9 varieties are given in tabular form. "Early rose" proved most satisfactory,
and "Up to date" and "Prime bretonne" gave encouraging results. — E. B. Payson.

30. Hamblin, C. O. To infect lucerne seed with nodule organism. Agric. Gaz. New
South Wales 31:466. 1920. — Recommends using soil from an old lucerne (alfalfa) field,
allowing the soil to dry well in the shade. The author states that the bacteria from artificial
(laboratory) cultures are weaker than those produced under natural conditions. — L. R.
Waldron.

No. 1, February, 1921]

AGRONOMY

31. Hanly, Joseph. Some notes on crop rotations. Jour. Dept. Agric. Ireland 20: 184-
189. 1920. — Discusses crop rotation in regard to its historical development, its advantages,
and the types practiced in Ireland. — Donald Folsom.

32. Harlan, Harry V. Smooth-awned barleys. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 12:205-208.
1920. — A report on the introduction of smooth-awned barley and the progress that has been
made. It is predicted that a high-yielding smooth-awned barley will be developed. — F. M.
Schertz.

33. Harshberger, Johx W. Text-book of pastoral and agricultural botany for the study
of the injurious and useful plants of coimtry and farm, ix + 294 p., 1 pL, 120 fig. P. Blakis-
ton's Sons and Co. : Philadelphia, 1920. — This book is based on a course in botany given to
veterinary students in the University of Pennsylvania. Nine chapters are devoted to pois-
oning by plants, one to feeds and feeding, three to grasses, three to legimies, one to weeds,
and one to agricultural seeds. — C. V. Piper.

34. Maidex, J. H. Chats about the prickly pear. No. 5. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31:557-562. 1920. — Mainly extracts from well-known bulletins by two American authors,
Hare and Griffiths, on value and methods relative to Opuntia spp. as feed for live stock. —
L. R. Waldron.

35. Maughan, Howard J. Factors affecting the depth of planting various crops.
(Abstract.) Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 20fr-207. 1918.

36. McCauley, C. Sudan grass in western districts. At Cowra experiment farm. Agric.
Gaz. New South Wales 31: 473-475. 1920.— Detailed financial statement is given of results
from 20 acres of this grass, showing it to have been very profitable. An analysis of Sudan-
grass silage is given. — L. R. Waldron.

37. MooMAW, Leroy. Report for the Dickinson substation for 1919. North Dakota
Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 138. 24 p., 6 fig. 1920.— Weather data relative to temperature, precip-
itation, wind velocity, and length of growing season are presented, as well as annual and
average yields of different varieties of various crops. In an excessively dry season following
two dry seasons Russian thistle {Salsola kali iragiis)pToduced 5.7 tons per acre of air-dry
material (hay). — L. R. Waldron.

38. Moore, C. C. Technic of potato starch manufacture.
22-23; 31: 8, 9, 20, 22-23. 1920.

Potato Mag. 2'^: 10, 11, 20,

39. MoREiLLOx, M. Influence de I'ombrage sur la valeur des gazons dans les pSturages
boises. [The influence of shade upon the value of the grasses in wooded pastures.] Jour.
Forest. Suisse 70: 131-142. 1919. — A discussion of Swiss alpine meadows at altitudes from
1100 to 1650 meters. As a result of the shade of trees in these alpine pastures, there is not
only a reduction in the percentage of good forage plants but also in the quantity of fodder
harvested. Under spruce the loss in dry fodder is 88 per cent by weight and under larch
at the same station from 30 to 45 per cent of that in open ground. The shade is also injurious
to the qualitative value of the fodder. In Zurich and Grisons the following figures were
obtained.

Weights represent kilograms per are;

i.e., zij acre

PABCF.I.T.E

PBOTEIN

FAT

SOLUBLE

SUBSTANCES, NON-

NITBOGENOU8

TOTAL

Open

4.55
3.67

1.43

1.05

15.24
10.55

21 22

Shaded

15 27

6 AGRONOMY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

In a pasture with spruce trees 20 meters apart the forage will lose 60 per cent in weight and
30 per cent in quality; its end value is therefore but 20 per cent of the end value of forage
grown in full sunlight. In conclusion, specific recommendations are presented for improving
the management and administration of Swiss alpine pastures.— C. /. Kraebel.

40. Murray, J. Alan. The classification of cattle foods. [Abstract.] Rept. British
Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:383. 1920.

41. Oldershaw, a. W. The value of lupines in the cultivation of poor light land.
[Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 380-381. 1920.

42. Pitt, J. M. Farmers' experiment plots. 1919-20. Central Coast. Agric. Gaz. New
South Wales 31: 539-547. 1920. — Experiments included variety trials, fertilizer trials, and
size of seed piece, depth and rate of planting. — L. R. Waldron.

43. Porter, W. R. Thirteenth and fourteenth annual report of the state demonstration
farms 1918 and 1919. North Dakota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 135. 84 p., 1 fig. 1920.— Detailed
results are given from 22 farms, including cost of production; a summary of results for 10 years
is presented for 9 of the farms. Wheat has yielded 16.9 bushels per acre for 14 years, which is
54 per cent higher than the state average for the same period. — L. R. Waldron.

44. Pratt, Hiram E. Report of work at Kodiak live stock and breeding station. Rept.
Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 72-81. 1919. — Reports on field and forage crops grown at the
station. Twelve varieties of potato were tested. The following native plants were used
for silage, beach rye (Elymus mollis), beach sedge {Car ex cryptocarpa) , bluetop {Calama-
grostis langsdorffi) , and fireweed {Epilobium angustifolium) . These do not stand continual
cutting well, but the yield is maintained if cutting is done only in alternate years. Native
bluetop is the chief hay grass; but coarse bluegrass (Poa glumaris), Kentucky bluegrass
{Poa pratensis), and wild barley (Hordeum horeale) occur mixed with bluetop, and make
good hay. Analyses of Calamagrostis langsdorffi,, Carex cryptocarpa, and Elymus mollis
are given and compared with such standard grasses as Poa pratensis, Agrostis alba, and
Phleum pratense. — J. P. Anderson.

45. Pridham, J. T. The selection of promising wheat plants. Agric. Gaz. New South
Wales 31: 548. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 234.

46. Ramsay, A. A. Sorghum as a possible source of industrial alcohol. Agric. Gaz. New
South Wales 31:479-484. 1920. — Experiments were conducted at Hawkesbury Agricultural
College with different varieties of sorghum. Results are given in detail of the field data,
percentage of juice expressed, its analysis, amount of alcohol produced, and composition of
megass. It was found for most varieties that the market value of the alcohol obtained would
not pay for the cost of cutting and transporting the cane to the factory. Even with the
best variety the margin was only about Is. per ton. Production of alcohol in this manner
can not be considered a feasible undertaking. — L. R. Waldron.

47. Reed, George M. Varietal resistance and susceptibility of oats to powdery mildew,
crown rust, and smuts. Missouri Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 37. 3-41. 1920.

48. Roberts, George, and A. E. Ewan. I. Report on soil experiment fields. II.
Maintenance of fertility. Kentucky Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 228:89-131. 1920.— See Bot.
Absts. 7, Entry 463.

49. Round, Lester A. Experiments with potato silage. Potato Mag. 3^:6-7, 29-31.
2 fig. 1920.

No. 1, February, 1921] AGRONOMY 7

50. Shepherd, A. N. Summer green fodder trials. Murrumbridgee irrigation area, 1919-
1920. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 554-556. 1920. — General cultural notes for sorghum
and maize grown for summer green fodder, and the yields obtained at the various places of
experimentation. The heaviest yield was 25.5 tons per acre with Sorghum saccharatum
following lucerne. — L. R. Waldron.

51. Snodgrass, M. D. Report of the work at Fairbanks station. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp.
Sta. 1917: 57-72. PI. 5-7. 1919. — Ninety-five acres were cropped with small grain and five
acres with root crops. Nearly all the winter grain was killed by freezing. Owing to drought
in May and first half of June, spring grains yielded only half as much as usual. This drought
also caused uneven germination and consequent uneven ripening. Three varieties of spring
wheat, 2 of oats, and 2 of barley were grown under field conditions, and larger numbers were
grown in small plots or in head-to-row tests. A spring wheat originally received from
Irkutsk, Siberia, in 1914, and known as H. G., is considered the best wheat for the region.
Grown under different rotations and exposures, it showed considerable differences in yield.
Japanese buckwheat was successfully grown. Reports are given on the behavior of field peas,
alfalfa, and clover. Red clover winter kills, but grew 24-30 inches high by September 7 from
spring seeding. Grains are grown for hay. Calamagrostis langsdorffi. produces the native
hay. The potato is the chief money crop of the region. Results of the tests at the station
are given. Some potato blight and a verj^ little scab were present. Petrowski turnip is
another important crop of this region, and seed is grown and distributed by the station.
Notes are given on garden vegetables and on flowers; also on strawberries, red raspberries,
and native berries. Twenty-five requests for seed were filled. — J. P. Anderson.

52. Snodgrass, M. D. Cooperative work. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917:84-86.
1919. — Gives report of cooperative work among the farmers of the Matanuska valley and the
Anchorage-Knik region in southern Alaska. — J. P. Anderson.

53. SoMERViLLE, W. [Presidential address.] Grass. Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci.
1919: 364-379. 1920. — From the experiments which have been carried out, the following
conclusions may be drawn: "(1) That the quality of a pasture is not primarily dependent
on its botanical composition, though, as a rule, the presence of white clover, and other
Leguminosae is indicative of high feeding value. (2) That poor pastures, especially on
clay soil, can be rapidly and profitably improved by the use of phosphates, especially basic
slag. (3) That, as a rule, phosphates alone are suflBcient to effect and maintain the improve-
ment, and that, of supplementary substances, potash and lime are occasionally worthy of
attention. (4) That the improvement of poor pasture is very dependent on the presence of
Leguminosae, and especially of white clover. (5) That renovating with the seed of wild
white clover may, in the absence of natural Leguminosae, be a necessary preliminary or con-
current operation. (6) That cake can rarely be used at a profit, and that, as an agent in
improving poor pasture, it occupies an unsatisfactory position. (7) That nitrogen, whether
in the form of artificial manure, or as cake residues, when added to phosphates for pasture,
is always unnecessary and frequently detrimental. (8) That, in the case of hay on per-
manent grass land, equal weights of produce may have very different feeding values. (9)
That few forms of agricultural expenditure are more certain in their results than the judicious
use of manures on grass land, and that the meat and milk producing capacity of the country
can be largely and rapidly increased, with great pecuniary gain to the farmer, and still
greater economic advantage to the nation." — C. L. Wilson.

54. Syme, J. E. The grain wheats for central western districts. Farmers' experiment
plots, 1909-1919, summarized. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:533-538. 1920.— "Federa-
tion," "Marshall No. 3." "Cranberra" and "Hard Federation" did best.— L. R. Waldron.

55. Syme, J. E. In a dry season at Parkes. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 477-478.
1920. — Discusses Sudan grass and considers it valuable. — L. R. Waldron.

8 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

56. Truax, H. E. United States grades for potatoes. Potato Mag. 3i: 15. 1920.

57. Watts, George. Cotton growing in the British Empire. Nature 104: 694^696.
1920. — British mills are said to be adapted to use of American long-staple cottons and unable
to use the shorter staples of India and other countries. Definite organization of a research
institution is needed. The following suggestions were made: To establish in Manchester a
college of cotton where experts and planters can be trained; to promote intensive study of
races of all species of Gossypium, with careful records of all plantings; to establish branch
colleges in the more important centers of cultivation to complete training for local condi-
tions; to replace cultivation by natives on a small scale with plantations directed by trained
people. Success of American cotton is attributed to the fact that the work was undertaken
by intelligent farmers who evolved new and superior stocks and who did not have to contend
with vested interests of native cultivators. — 0. A. Stevens.

58. Wenholz, H. Papago: A new variety of sweet corn. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31:552-553. 1 fig. 1920. — Seed was secured from Arizona. The variety is said to be
remarkable because of the resistance of its pollen to dry heat. It is very late, of fair quality,
and promising for Australian conditions. — L. R. Waldron.

59. Wenholz, H. Sweet corn. Variety trial, 1919-1920. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31:585-589. 1920. — Fourteen varieties were tested, the seed coming from America. They
averaged in yield 487 dozen ears per acre. The best yielding was Mammoth White Cory with
850 dozen ears, weighing 5.5 tons. Varieties are described and recommendations made. —
L. R. Waldron.

60. Wenholz, H. Soil improvement for maize. I. Manures and fertilizers. Agric-
Gaz. New South Wales 31: 495-501. 1920. — A report of results secured from the application
of commercial fertilizers, especially phosphorus, upon maize for grain and fodder in various
districts of the province. Trials were made upon farmers' experiment plats. Usually the
application of the phosphorus in the shape of superphosphate showed a profit. — L. R. Waldron.

61. Wenholz, H. Pop-corn variety trial, 1919-1920. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:
562. 1920. — An average yield of 40 bushels per acre is recorded. — L. R. Waldron.

62. Wheeler, H. J. Delayed application of fertilizer. Potato Mag. 21^:5, 38. 1 fig.
1920. — Late application of fertilizer increased yield of potatoes in Wisconsin over that of
unfertilized fields. — Donald Folsom.

63. ZiELSTORPP, W. Einsaiierungsversuch im Deutschen Futterturm mit anschliessen-
dem Fxitterungsversuch. (Ensiling experiment in German silo with connected feeding experi-
ment.) Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Gesell. 35:563-565. 1920.— A comprehensive series of
experiments have been planned to determine the value of different methods of ensiling. The
German farmer is chiefly interested in the ensiling of grass and clover in order to save this
feed when weather conditions render it impossible to make hay. One experiment made
under such conditions is described. Timothy that had already become quite old because
the weather did not permit of cutting was ensiled. Feeding experiments with the ensilage
produced showed that 100 kgm. of the ensilage had the same feeding value for milk cows as
170 kgm. of mangels. — A. J. Pieters.

BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY

Neil E. Stevens, Editor

64. Anonymous. Dansk Landbolovgivning efter 1849. [Danish farm laws since 1849.]
Tidsskr. Landokonomi (Kjobenhavn) 1920': 265-283. 1920.— A discussion of the agricul-
tural laws passed by the Danish legislature since 1849. Particular attention is paid to the
good and bad effects which these laws have had upon the farmers. — Albert A. Hansen.

No. 1, February, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY, HISTORY 9

65. Anonymous. The New Zealand science congress, 1919. Nature 104: 516-518. 1920.
A review of some papers, including presidential address of L. Cockayne, being an historical
account of the institute. Notes that 654 papers on botany have been published in the first 50
volumes of transactions of the institute. — O. A. Stevens.

66. Anonymous. Publications of the staff, scholars and students of The New York
Botanical Garden during the year 1919. Jour. New York Bot, Gard. 21: 65-72. 1920.

67. C, N. R. Scientific biography. [Rev. of: Bower, F. O. Joseph Dalton Hooker.
63 p. Macmillan and Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 104:562. 1920.— "Scholarly but not
interesting." — 0. A. Stevens.

68. Eberhard, Julius. Die Technik der Naturverjungung sinst und jetzt. Ein forst-
geschichtliche Studie. [The technique of natural reproduction formerly and now.] Forstwiss.
Centralbl. 42: 161-183, 204-226. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 116.

69. Freeman, W. G. The centenary of the Royal Botanic Garden, Trinidad. Agric.
News [Barbados] 19: 36-37. 1920. — Sections of a paper originally contributed to the Trini-
dad Guardian, are reproduced. The Garden shares with those of Calcutta and Sydney the
distinction of being the only ones in the British Colonial Empire which have reached 100
years or more of unbroken activity. Some account is given of the progress of the Garden
under different Curators. — J. S. Dash.

70. Gleason, H. a. Organization of the American iris society. Jour. New York Bot.
Gard. 21: 39-40. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 302.

71. Luisier, a. 0 P. Fernando Theissen, S. J. Broteria, Ser. Bot., 18: 73-78. 1920. —
Father Theissen was killed early in September, 1919, by falling over a precipice while col-
lecting alone near P'eldkirch, Vorarlberg. He was born in Krefeld, Rhenish Prussia, July
27, 1877. A member of the Society of Jesus, he taught first in Brazil, later in several parts
of central Europe. Father Theissen was a mycologist, contributing to many journals,
especially the Annales Mycologici. Thiessenula Sydow and Theissenia Maublanc, were
named in his honor. — A bibliography of 51 titles and notice of a posthumous work on the
lichens of Vorarlberg is appended. — E. B. Chamberlain.

72. Morris, J. C. [Presidential address.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 316-331.
1920. — A review of recent British work in pure and applied botany, such as agronomy, pathol-
ogy, and genetics. The application of pure botany to questions of economic importance is
presented in the development of more valuable varieties of wheat, cotton, sugar cane, and
rubber, and in improving the quality of the production of cacao, flax, and other crops.
A reference is made to the prominent place which ecological studies will take in the future of
botany. Recent work in tropical botany receives especial emphasis. The article is in gen-
eral a summing-up of the great influence of botany upon the welfare of the human race. — A
necrological review is presented.— C. L. Wilson.

73. P(rain), D. James William Helenus Trail. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London] 1919:
378-388. 1919.— See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 955.

74. Small, J. K. Of grottoes and ancient dunes. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 25-38,
45-54. PL 2U-2U- 1920.

75. Th^riot, I. Vandalisme et solidarite scientifique, [Ruthlessness and scientific
brotherhood.] Rec. Publ. Soc. Havraise Etudes Diverses 87: 131-135. 1920.— An account
of the partial destruction and loss of the moss collections and drawings of Jules Cardot
of Charleville. Quotations from Cardot's letters give an account of the state of his col-
lection upon return to Charleville. The action of English and American bryologists in
raising funds for the purchase of Cardot's remaining herbarium on behalf of the Museum
of Paris is described. [Cf. Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 2407.]—^. B. Chamberlain.

76. W., A. S. Robert Etheridge. Nature 104: 700-701. 1920.— Brief biography. Direc-
tor of Australian Museum since 1895. Noted for work in palaeontology. — O. A. Stevens.

10 BOTANICAL EDUCATION [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

BOTANICAL EDUCATION

C. Stuart Gager, Editor
Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor

77. Anonymous. Awbury Arboretum. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Rec. 9: 23-24. 1920. —
Digest of article in Bull. Geog. Soc. Philadelphia (July, 1919). Awbury Arboretum com-
prises over 30 acres at Washington Lane Station, near Philadelphia. It has been endowed
by Caroline E. Pope and other members of the Pope family as an arboretum and refuge
for migratory birds. — C. S. Gager.

78. Anonymous. Botanical guides. [Rev. of: Cook, M. T. Applied economic botany:
based upon actual agricultural and gardening projects, xviii + 261 p. J. B. Lippincott Co. :
Philadelphia and London, 1919. (Farm Life Text Series.) See also Bot. Absts. 3, Entries
491.] Nature 105: 34-35. 1920. — Title is misleading; book as a whole is disappointing.
— 0. A. Stevens.

79. Anonymous. Botanical guides. [Rev. of: (1) Sulman, A. E. Some familiar wild
flowers, ii + 65 p. (2) Australian wild flowers, ii + 67 p. Angus and Robertson: Syd-
ney (no dates). (3) Sulman, Florence. A popular guide to the wild flowers of New South
Wales. Vol. 2, xxi + 2^9 p., 71 pi. Same publisher, 1919.] Nature 105: 35. 1920.

SO. Anonymous. Museums and the state. Nature 105 : 68-70. 1920. — Communications
from 5 persons in response to article of March 11. — 0. A. Stevens.

81. Anonymous. The state and the national museums. Nature 105:29-31. 1920. — A
survey of British museums and plans for their futures. Separate museums have arisen in
response to conditions rather than by a broad and general plan. Coordination is needed to
enable each to fill a distinct and useful place. — 0. A. Stevens.

82. Anonymous. The value of Botanic Gardens. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 193, 194.
1920. — It is pointed out that the value of these institutions "for the advancement and
diffusion of a knowledge and love of plants" has only recently been appreciated to any extent;
and in small communities it has not yet been realised. The writer considers that a botanic
garden contributes to the well-being of the people from the social, educational, and scientific
points of view. — J. S. Dash.

83. Anonymous. Prospectus of courses offered by the Brooklyn Botanic Garden, 1920.
Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Rec. 9: 1-18. 1920.

84. Anonymous. Education and research chiefly in relation to sugar and rice. Agric.
News [Barbados] 19: 167, 182. 1920. — In the course of a visit to Havana and New Orleans,
the Scientific Assistant to the Imperial Department of Agriculture for the West Indies,
W. R. DuNLOP, made a number of observations, of which an account is here given. A descrip-
tion is given of the various sugar and rice experimental stations visited, and also certain of
educational institutions devoted to agriculture. — J. S. Dash.

85. Anonymous. Fern study. Nat. Study Rev. 16: 235-257. 1920. — A very elementary
presentation of the principal facts about the structure, growth, and life-history of ferns,
with simple key and descriptions. — W. L. Eikenberry.

86. BoYNTON, K. R. Vocational education in gardening for disabled and convalescent
soldiers and sailors. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21 : 87-94. 1920.

87. Brown, J. G. A new economic botany. [Rev. of: Cook, Mel T. Applied economic
botany, xviii + 261 p. J. B. Lippincott Co.: Philadelphia and London, 1919.] Plant
World 22: 309-311. 1919.

No. 1, February, 1921] BOTANICAL EDUCATION 11

88. CowELL, Arthur Westcott. Awbury Arboretum Address, Bull. Geog. Soc.
Philadelphia 17: 98-102. July, 1919. — Gives brief outline of planting plans, which include a
rose garden and a rhododendron vale. "The system of naming is that which will be found of
greatest advantage to average people and students and nursery men, and the names adopted
by the Committee upon Standardized Plant Names have been used. These are the terms
found in most botanies and in the Cyclopedia of Horticulture." — C. S. Gager.

89. Engler, a. Bericht iiber den Botanischen Garten und das Botanische Museum zu
Berlin-Dahlem. vom 1. April 1918 bis zum 31. Marz 1919. [Report on the Botanical Gar-
den and Botanical Museum at Berlin.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 331-344. 1919.

90. Engler, A. Bericht uber den Botanischen Garten und das Botanische Museum zu
Berlin-Dahlem. vom 1. April 1919 bis zum 31. Marz 1920. [Report on the Botanical Garden
and Botanical Museum at Berlin.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 455-466. 1920.

91. G[ager], C. S. Prospects for a new national botanic garden. Brooklyn Bot. Gard.
Rec. 9: 20-22. Jan., 1920.

92. Garrett, A. 0. The influence of biological investigations upon the other sciences.
Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 68-77. 1918.

93. Harshberger, John W. Text-book of pastoral and agricultural botany for the study
of the injurious and useful plants of country and farm, ix + 294 P-, 1 pl-, 120 fig. P. Blakis-
ton's Sons & Co. : Philadelphia, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 33.

94. Karraker, P. E. Notes on the conference on elementary soil teaching, held at Lex-
ington, Kentucky, June, 1920. Soil Sci. 10: 247. 1920.— The elementary work on soils should
be a course of 5 semester hours credit given in the sophomore year. The minimum pre-
requisites should be one year of general inorganic chemistry, one term of general geology,
and high school or college physics. At least three-fifths of the time should be spent in lec-
ture or recitation, and a standard textbook should be used. — W. J. Robbins.

95. Lankester, E. Ray. Museums and the state. Nature 105:100-101. 1920.—
Favors separation of botany, zoology, etc. in distinct museums. The main purpose of a
museum is the acquisition, preservation, and study of specimens of scientific value. Public
exhibition is a secondary but important function. Materials for exhibition should be lim-
ited in amount but selected and displayed to the best possible advantage. The author
would like to see the system used at the American Museum of Natural History in New York
introduced (in British museums) but thinks it still gives too much space to public exhibition.
Part of article and two others under same title (pp. 101-102) by J. Stanley Gardiner and
W. M. Tattersall relate more particularly to organization and management. — 0. A. Stevens.

96. Mangham, Sydney. Method and substance of science teaching: The neglect of bio-
logical subjects in education. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:336. 1920.

97. Snyder, Ray P. The school garden as a means of education. Brooklyn Bot. Gard.
Rec. 9:91-100. July, 1920.

98. Victorian. Popular Science. Nature 104: 630. 1920. The author agrees with
review entitled Scientific Biography [See: Bower on Hooker. Nature 104: 562. 1920.)].
He thinks real workers should give some time to popular articles, perhaps one lecture a year
which could be published at a popular price. — 0. A. Stevens.

99. Wentz, John B. An outline of an undergradixate course in grain grading. Jour.
Amer. Soc. Agron. 12: 198-204. 1920.— An outline of the course as presented at Maryland
State College. It includes grading of corn, wheat, and oats; laboratory practice; and appa-
ratus used.— i^. M. Schertz.

12 FORESTRY ]Bot. Absts., Vol. VII,

FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY

Raphael Zon, Editor
J. V. HoFMANN, Assistant Editor

100. Anonymous. AUgemeine Bedingungen fiir die Verpachtung forststaatlicher Jagden
in Preussen. [Leasing of hunting rights on Prussian State Forests.] Forstwiss. Centralbl.
42: 100-105. 1920. — In general, hunting is managed by the State forest authorities, but in a
few cases is leased to private individuals. The conditions and forms governing such leasing
are given. — W. N. Sparkawk.

101. Anonymous. Facts about depletion of our forests. Amer. Forest. 26:433-435.
1920.

102. Anonymous. Forestry in France. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 141-142. 1920. —
A description is given of the French method of silvicultural management of a practically
normal beech forest of 26,000 acres having a negligible admixture of oak in the State forest
in the neighborhood of Lyons-la-F6ret in the Department Eure. The present method of
regulation' is based on the uniform compartment system with natural regeneration. — C. F.
Korstian.

103. Anonymous. Industrial research in forest products. Amer. Forest. 26:401-407.
7 fig. 1920. — A brief of the work of -the Forest Products Laboratory, Madison, Wisconsin. —
Chas. H. Otis.

104. Anonymous. Kurze tJbersicht fiber die wichtigsten Kennzeichen der verschiedenen
Larchenarten. [A brief review of the most important characteristics of the various Larch
species.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18:46-51. 1920. — This brief review con-
tains a key for the cones of the 19 species and varieties in the Larch family, a key for the
needles and twigs, and a brief description of each species or variety. — /. Roeser.

105. Anonymous. Progress of the purchase of Eastern national forests. Amer. Forest
26:454-460. 2 maps, 4- fig- 1920. [From report prepared by the National Forest Reserva-
tion Commission.]

106. Anonymous. The utilization of sand wastes. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 138-
139. 1920. — A brief review is given of the experience of France in the fixation and econotnic
utilization of barren areas of shifting sand in the Landes through the planting of cluster
pine {Pinus pinaster), and a plea is made for the adoption of similar measures in Australia. —
C. F. Korstian.

107. Anonymous. Die Verhandlungen der Preussischen Landesversammlung iiber den
Staatshaushaltsplan der Forstverwaltung. [Action in the Prussian legislature on the Forest
Service budget.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 106-114. 1920.— By the Versailles treaty there
was a definite loss to Prussia of 581,513 hectares of forest with an income of 23,459,000 marks,
besides a possible loss of 346,862 hectares and income of 24,519,858 marks in the plebiscite
areas, and 34,958 hectares and 2,208,000 marks in the districts of Aachen and Trier. Although
wood prices have risen along with all other prices, the Forest Service must try to keep them
down within reason. It is proposed to cut one-third more wood than usual to supplj^ fuel
needs, especially of the bakers; but in many places increased production of fuelwood will
have to be made at the expense of construction timber or mine timbers. Receipts from tur-
pentining brought in a considerable revenue, but can be counted on only so long as the indus-
try is needed to supply domestic requirements and is profitable. A demand has arisen for
more agricultural land, with the tendency to demand clearing of parts of the State forests.
There is also considerable deforestation of private forests, so that a law is under consid-
eration giving the government authority to regulate such clearing and requiring that all
forests of more than 15 hectares be subject to State supervision. The question of salaries

No. 1, February, 1921] FORESTRY 13

and allowances is very pressing, as illustrated by the allowance granted Oberforster for
maintenance of teams — 3000 marks in 1917 and 6000 marks in 1918, while the actual cost of
keeping a team is now 9000 marks per year. In connection with the salary question it was
stated that between October 1, 1918, and October 1, 1919, forest vandals killed 13 forest
oflScers and wounded 3 others. — W. N. Sparhawk.

108. Anonymous. Vorschriften uber das Wirtschaftsland (Dienstiandereien) der Forst-
dienststellen in Preussen. [Regulations regarding farm land connected with Forest Service
positions in Prussia.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 69-73. 1920. — Most forest officers are granted
a small area of garden, meadow, or pasture, in order to enable them to keep teams, raise at
least part of their own food, especially in outlying districts, and also to make them reason-
ably independent of the local population. They are supposed not to raise anything to sell.
Rules are given concerning the granting of such land, its cultivation, fencing, etc. — W. N.
Sparhawk.

109. Barbey, a. Congres de la Societe forestiere de Franche-Comte et Belfort. Jour.
Forest. Suisse 71 : 50-54. 1920. — The first post-war meeting of this French forestry society
was devoted to an examination of the forest of Haguenau, Alsace. Comprising 13,699 hec-
tares, this forest is fifth in rank of French domanial forests and is conjointly owned by the
state and by the village of Haguenau. Originally put under systematic management by
the French in 1845, it was radically changed during German control (1874-1919) through the
application of German systems employing artificial reforestation. Details of German mal-
administration from the French viewpoint are described. The effort of the French foresters
in resuming control will be to bring the forest again under the regime of natural reproduc-
tion according to the best traditions of forestry in France. — C. J. Kraebel.

110. Barbey, A. Un parasite des pousses du chene. [A parasite of oak shoots.] Jour.
Forest. Suisse 70: 129-131. Sept.-Oct., 1919. — Stenolechia gemmdla L., also known as
Poecilia nivea Han. — C. J. Kraebel.

111. Beath, O. a. Poisonous Plants. Proc. Soc. Promotion Agric. Sci. 39: 39-47. 1919.
See Bot. Ansts. 6, Entry 475.

112. Bell, T. R. Administration report of the forest circles in the Bombay Presidency
(including Sind) for 1918-19. ISS p. Bombay, 1920.— The usual annual report on forest
operations in the province. From 66.6 per cent to 94.3 per cent of the total forest areas is
open to grazing. The opening of some of the areas closed to grazing, owing to fodder famine,
caused considerable damage to coppice growth. During the year the gross revenue increased
17 lakhs (lakh = 100,000 Rs.) over the preceding year and by 30 lakhs over the average of the
preceding 5 years. The past year the net revenue equalled 46.3 per cent of the gross revenue.
Caesalpinia brevifolia, the pods of which contain 50 per cent tannin and having a tannin
value superior to Divi-divi {Caesalpinia coriaria), has been recommended for experimental
cultivation in dry regions. Later it is expected to try this species out on a commercial
scale in the successful regions. A private company is planning to test the possibilities of
the manufacture of bamboo paper pulp on a commercial basis for a period of 2 years. In
timber seasoning experiments good results were obtained by alternate water and air treat-
ment of certain species, and definite recommendations as to methods have been made. On
the subject of organization, the following statements are made: "There is no doubt that the
divisions existing are too large in extent for management by a single Divisional Forest Officer
and their area will have to be reduced in the near future. Regeneration work has never been
satisfactory owing to want of staff for supervising — also for execution. And under the new
proposed system of clear-cutting about to be introduced in revised working plans, even
requirements for silvicultural operations recognized up to the present will be insufficient.
Everything, the whole future of the for st, will depend upon adequate, highly trained super-
vision. For effectiveness, it will have to be European too; the forest life and strenuous,
physical exertion entailed make that an absolute sine qua non for successful issue. The ordi-

14 FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

nary, intensively-worked division should certainly not exceed 200 square miles in area,
whereas they are now well over 400. The sooner this is recognized, the better." Appended
to the report are a number of tables of statistics on forest and administrative subjects. —
E. R. Hodson.

113. Bernbeck. Das Wachstum im Winde. [Growth and wind.[ Forstwiss. Centralbl.
42 : 27-40, 59-69, 93-100. 1920. — The author discusses the adaptation of vegetation to wind
and the effects of wind on vegetation, with especial reference to forest growth. Adaptation
is to enable the plant to withstand the physical impact of wind, or to prevent excessive evap-
oration from the plant tissues, or both. Wind firmness is not an inherent characteristic of
any given species, although the tendency toward windfirmness may be inherited; thus a fir
grown in the open may be much more wind-firm than an oak grown in a dense stand pro-
tected from wind. Under the right conditions any tree can develop a wind-firm form. This
fact can be utilized in silvicultural management, so as to minimize loss from windfall.
(35,000,000 cubic metres of timber, principally coniferous, was blown down in Germany dur-
ing the last century.) Wind climate often governs the geographical distribution of trees.
For instance, conifers are most liable to injury during the winter months; so sites exposed to
continuous winter storms (if fertile enough to allow tall tree growth) are usually occupied by
hardwoods, while mountain slopes and plateaus where heavy early summer winds prevail
are occupied by conifers. Wind affects the growth and form of trees not only indirectly,
by its influence on such site-factors as soil moisture, transpiration, temperature, and expos-
ure of foliage to the light, but also directly, by its physical effect on the plant tissues. Inter-
nal stresses and friction between the fibres result in eccentric growth, and also help to stunt
the tree by interrupting sap-flow and by affecting cell structure and turgescence. Inves-
tigations made at Bonn showed clearly that the stunting effect of wind increases rapidly with
wind velocity. — W. N. Sparhawk.

114. Bernberk. Die Wasserversorgung der Pflanzen im Winde. [The supply and main-
tenance of water in plants during wind.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 121-141.
1920. — The physiological action of the mechanical strength of winds in relation to trans-
piration is manifested in an increase in the amount of moisture given off. The rate of this
increase is, in general, governed by the conditions of firmness or stability and inflexibility
as opposed to the attacking force of the wind. The following are three ways in which the
mechanical action of the wind leads to an increase in water loss: (1) The intercellular gas
renews itself in spite of reaction of the stomata, whereby an increase in intercellular trans-
piration is involved. (2) An excess of pressure in water conducting tissue is occasioned by
torsion, pressure, etc. This forces water out of the lumen and membranes of cells subject
to the higher pressure into cells under lower pressure, into the intercellular spaces, or
through the epidermis into the free atmosphere. This internal pressure in very strong winds
can become so great that the cell walls are burst. (3) The water permeability of the outer
epidermal wall and the periderm is decreased by deformations. — The quantity of transpiration
is strongly influenced by the humidity of the air. Death through excessive water losses and
poor conduction reaches its maximum with the lowest relative humidity. Young tender
organs are not as unprotected against wind, transpiration, and frost as may be supposed.
The younger and the richer the tender-walled cells are in plasma, the more resistant are they
to wind pressure. The period of greatest susceptibility is immediately after the period of
greatest vegetative activity. The spiral grain in trees much exposed is due to the mechanical
action of the wind. The best protection against the mechanical action of wind, ^s illustrated
by the palms and grasses, consists in a flexibility, which allows the plant to bend before the
wind. — J. Roeser.

115. Burns, George P. Eccentric growth and the formation of redwood in the main
stem of conifers. Vermont Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 219. 10 p., 4 pi, 10 fig. 1920.— See Bot.
Absts. 7, Entry 318.

No. 1, February, 1921] FORESTRY 15

116. Eberhard, Julius. Die Technik der Naturverjiingung. einst und jetzt. Eine
forstgeschichtliche Studie. [The technique of natural reproduction formerly and now.] Forst-
wiss. Centralbl. 42:161-183, 204-226. 1920.— The author describes the development of
silvicultural systems, beginning with the primitive irregular selection cutting. Hundes-
HAGEx developed the shelterwood system (Dunkelschlagbetrieb) with preliminary seed
cuttings, with later cuttings to give light for the seedlings, and with final removal cuttings
after the young growth is well established and able to thrive in the open. Natural repro-
duction was relied on almost entirely, being considered cheaper and more satisfactory than
artificial restocking. After Hundeshagen, silviculturists gradually abandoned the idea of
natural restocking, and adopted clear cutting with planting. Gayer and H. Mayer de-
scribed methods similar to those of Hundeshagen, except that they provided for less frequent
but much heavier early fellings, which resulted in less satisfactory reproduction and in more
loss from windfall. Borggreve's method was more like Hundeshagen's, but delayed the
later cuttings longer. Gayer described a group selection cutting (Femelschlagbetrieb) in
some respects similar to the shelterwood system, but much less satisfactory. Engler
advised a combination of group selection and shelterwood, especially for mixed stands con-
taining tolerant and less tolerant species. Gayer also developed a strip shelterwood sys-
tem, resulting in a stand with regular age-gradations in parallel strips. Wagner's selection
strip or selection border cutting (Blendersaumschlag) provides for reproduction of tolerant
species under the stand by making thinnings or selection cuttings, then for clearing strips
so that the intolerant species can reproduce. Mayr described a system which he consid-
ered applicable to most of the irregular forests of the world, especially those containing many
species, including the forests of the tropics. He provided for reproducing a tolerant under-
story at about the middle of the rotation, followed by occasional thinnings of the over-story
to prevent natural losses, and fairly heavy seed cuttings at the end of the rotation, just before
or just after the seed falls. The old stand is then to be removed in one or two fellings, within
5 or 6 years. Kubelka, in his selection-strip system (Femelstreifenbetrieb) gets reproduction
by opening holes in alternate strips, and gradually enlarging them. Kalitsch's Barenthorn
system and the author's wedge shelterwood system (formerly called Abrucksaumschlag,
more recently Schirmkeilschlag) are very similar in providing for very frequent — annual
if possible — cuttings through the stand, which do not break the canopy. The last method is
particularly distinguished by the form of removal cuttings, which are developed in wedge
form, beginning in the middle of the stand, so that logging will not injure established repro-
duction. In the author's opinion, the present German silvicultural practice (which has also
been carried to Russia by foresters trained in German schools) is far behind that at the begin-
ning of the 19th century. The prevailing forest form has changed during the last 200 years
from a straight selection forest to extensive pure even-aged forests produced artificially.
It is now returning gradually to a modified selection form, very much more intensively culti-
vated than formerly, with mixed stands and natural reproduction. — W. N. Sparhawk.

117. Endres. [Rev. of: Redslob, Kurt, and Heinrich Horns chu. Das neue Thiir-
ingen. Heft 5, Aufgaben der Thiiringer Forstwirtschaft. [Problems of Thuringian forestry.]
Erfurt, 1919.] Forstwiss. Centralbl 42: 194-195. 1920.— The new State of Thuringia (Thur-
ingen) comprises the former states: Saxe-Weimar, Saxe-Meiningen, Saxe-Altenburg, Saxe-
Gotha, Schwarzburg-Sondershausen, Schwarzburg-Rudolstadt, Reuss (both). It has 403,000
hectares of forest, divided into: crown forest, 13 per cent; state forest, 37 per cent; communal
forest, 13.9 per cent; institutional forest, 1.3 per cent; cooperative forest, 4.5 per cent; pri-
vate forest, 30.3 per cent. It is proposed that large private holdings, under management
of technically trained foresters, be subject to state supervision, and that smaller tracts be
acquired by the public (state or communes). Endres does not believe that this proposal
will appeal to the peasants. He considers too optimistic the hopes of the author for great
increase of returns through chemical utilization of forest by-products. Noteworthy is the
proposed organization of forest research, with about six main branches, all manned exclu-
sively by trained foresters. These are to have parallel units set aside in the field, for prac-

16 FORESTRY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VII,

tical trial of the results of research. It is also proposed to establish chairs of forestry at the
University of Jena, for training of forest officers, and to found a forest and game museum. —
W. N. Sparhawk.

118. Fabricius, L. [Rev. of: Munch, E. Naturwissenschaftliche Grundlagen der
Kiefernharznutzung. (Biological basis of resin production from Scotch pine.) Julius
Springer: Berlin, 1919.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:157-159. 1920.— The German turpentine
industry, which only began in 1915, has in four years developed into an important industry;
and the improved methods devised as the result of intensive research have increased pro-
duction very greatly over the cruder methods formerly used in Austria and even over the
French and American methods. Strict application of all that has been learned will result
in a yield of resin four times as great as that obtained by the methods used in 1915. Munch's
book covers the ground very thoroughly, both from scientific and practical points of view. —
W. N. Sparhawk.

119. Fabricius, L. Waldbau-Lehrgang im Gebiet des Langenbrander Schirmkellschlages.
[Silvicultural excursion in the home of the Langenbrand wedge-shelterwood cutting.] Forst-
wiss. Centralbl. 42 : 233-237. 1920. — The author describes the silvicultural system used by
De. Eberhard in the Langenbrand forest (Wurttemberg). This consists of a preparatory
stage, in which the stand is prepared for reproduction by repeated moderate thinnings,
and a stage of removal cuttings beginning about 5 years after reproduction is established.
The preparatory cuttings are intended primarily to get rid of raw humus, which may also be
removed by hand either over the whole area or in seed-spots. These cuttings also make room
for reproduction, especially of tolerant species, to start. The removal cuttings are rather
light, and repeated every year if practicable. They begin in the interior of the stand and
progress outward, beginning with small openings, which are gradually enlarged into a wedge
shape with the point toward the wind. The shape of opening is not definite, but may be
varied to suit local conditions. Damage from storms and logging is reduced to a minimum,
and natural reproduction is very successful. Of the whole area, 92 per cent has been repro-
duced naturally. The principal characteristic which distinguishes this from certain other
methods is the shape and arrangement of the cuttings so as to eliminate damage from logging
and from winds. — W. N. Sparhawk.

120. Farrington, H. A. Annual progress report on forest administration in the presi-
dency of Bengal for 1918-19. 51 p. Calcutta, 1920. — The usual annual report dealing with
forest operations in the province. It is reported that 16 per cent of the reserved forests and
3 per cent of the protected forests were open to grazing, and that the entire area of the
unclassed forest is always open for this purpose. Unrestricted grazing and lack of fire pro-
tection caused the Muli bamboo to fail in re-establishing itself properly after seeding. Wher-
ever cattle have access (practically on all areas within a mile of the forest boundary) seedling
regeneration of most kinds of trees is destroyed. It is necessary to fence planted areas to
protect them from damage by cattle grazing. In the unfenced hills natural regeneration is
entirely destroyed by cattle. Above 5,500 feet in altitude natural reproduction in coppice
fellings is not successful and must be supplemented by planting. At lower elevations the
coppice system produces excellent results. Burned areas in coppice cuttings give success
with a large number of species, including seedlings of Mallata, Toon, and other species.
Experiments were undertaken with growing blue gum {Eucalyptus globulus) for fuel purposes.
At the close of the year there were 50 forest villages, totaling an area of 7508 acres. The
surplus at the close of the year was 1,121,760 Rs. Twenty-one form tables and a map of the
province are appended. In chapter seven is given a review of forest administration in Bengal
for the preceding 5-year period. — E. R. Hodson.

121. Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept. Agric. [Restrictive legislation and
notices of quarantines in U. S. A.] Service and Regulatory Announcements 68: 52-111. 1920.

No. 1, February. 1921] FORESTRY 17

122. Garr, H. D., and George E. E'we. Hemlock bark (Tsuga canadensis) for pharma-
ceutical purposes. Jour. Amer. Pharm. Assoc. 9:567-573. S fig. 1920. — See Bot. Absts. 6,
Entry 819.

123. Ginzberger, A. Zwei neue Standorte der gefeldert-rindigen Buche, Fagus silvatica
var. quercoides Pers., in Mittel Italien und Slavonien. [Two new site-localities of the grooved-
barked beech, Fagus silvatica, var. quercoides Pers., in central Italy and in Slavonia.] Natur-
•wiss. Zei schr. Forst-u. Landw. 18:39-41. 1920.

124. Hay, R. Dalrymple. Progress of forestry under independent management in New
South Wales. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 151-156. 1920. — A record of established progress
in forest management by the Forestry Commission of New South Wales following a needed
reform is given under these topics: classification, demarkation and organization, fire protec-
tion, utilization and regeneration of hardwood forests, publicity work, forest grazing, fores-
try statistics, forestry education, coniferous plantations, research, and forest revenue. —
C. F. Korstian.

125. Henry, Augustine. The afiforestation of water catchment areas. [Abstract.]
Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 337. 1920.

126. Hirst, E. C. State forest fire protection. Amer. Forest. 26: 408-409. 1920.

127. HoDSON, E. R. Some present day problems in forestry. Utah Acad. Sci. 1: 45-54.
1918. — Paper presented to the Academy in April, 1911.

128. Hohenadl, W. Die Hebung der Alpwirtschaft. [Promotion of the alpine dairy
business.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:41-59. 1920. — The author contrasts the development
of the dairy industry in Allgau with that in Upper Bavaria. The difference is to a consider-
able extent traceable to the difference in character of ownership of the mountain pastures
as well as of the mountain forests. This industry is in very close contact with the forest
industry, and foresters are especially favorably situated for taking the lead in promoting
better methods and more conservative, and at the same time, more intensive utilization. —
W. N. Sparhawk.

129. HuTCHiNS, D. E. Insignis-pine disease. Jour. Agric. New Zealand 16: 37. 1918. —
See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 1273.

130. JuDD, C. S. The kauri pine. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17: 167-169. PI. 1.
1920. — This is reported as being the most promising and widely useful tree for planting in the
Hawaiian Islands for the purpose of producing lumber. This species, Agathis australis
shows a rapid growth in the Islands, "averaging a growth of 1 inch in diameter every 4|
years." It was introduced into Hawaii about forty years ago. — Stanley Coulter.

131. Korstian, C. F. Value of scientific research in forestry. Utah Acad. Sci. 1: 186-
194. 1918.

132. Leiningen-Westerburg, (Graf zu). Rauchschaden und einschlagige bodenkund-
liche Fragen. [Smoke injury and related matters of soil science.] Forstwiss. Centralbl.
42: 18-93. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 459.

133. Mackay, H. Forestry in Victoria. Australian Forest. Jour. 3:147-150, 179-182.
1920. — The second and third installments of a continued article. The silviculture of eucalyp-
tus forest- is briefly treated. The following methods of cutting are advocated as the simplest
and best forms of management for adaptation in Australia: (1) clear cutting; (2) modified
selection; (3) for young forest, coppice with standards, or a modification of the shelterwood
compartment system; (4) simple coppice, or the clear cutting of pole timber. A rotation of
20 to 30 years for a box and ironbark forest will produce pole timber from 6 to 9 inches in
diameter, with some 12-inch timber. The progress made in plantation work and in gifts of
trees for shelterbelts to small settlers is noted. — C. F. Korstian.

18 FOKESTKY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

134. Maxwell, Hu. The uses of wood. Wood for musical instruments. Amer. Forest.
26:532-539. 16 fig. 1920.

135. MoEEiLLON, M. Dommages causes aux forSts du canton de Vaud par le foehn des 4
et 5 Janvier 1919. [Damage to the forests of Vaud (Switzerland) by the foehn of January 4
and 5, 1919.] Jour. Forest. Suisse 71 : 41-44. 1920.— A brief presentation of reasons why this
wind should have caused local wind-throw although the foehns of other years have never
been known to do so. — C. J. Kraebel.

136. MoEEiLLON, M. Influence de I'cmbrage sur la valeur des gazons dans les paturages
boises. [The influence of shade upon the value of grasses in wooded pastures.] Jour. Forest.
Suisse 70: 131-142. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 39.

137. NiKLAS, H. Die Bedeutung der Geologie fdr die Land- und Forstwirtschaftliche
Bodenkunde. [The significance of the science of geology with relation to agricultural and
forest soil science.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u, Landw. 18: 22-35. 1920.— See Bot. Absts.
7, Entry 478.

138. NiKLAS, H. tJbersicht uber Bayens Bodenverhaltnisse. [Summary of Bavarian soil
conditions.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 123-135. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 461.

139. Pack, Chas. L. Fire protection and more public forest land. Amer. Forest. 26:
526-528. 1920.

140. PiETSCH, Albert. Wie erklart sich das lange Hangenbleiben der Blatter an einigen
phanerogamen Holzgewachsen im Herbste 1919? [What is the explanation for the late reten-
tion of the foliage of several phanerogamous woody plants in the fall of 1919?] Naturwiss.
Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 150-155. 1920.— A combination of adverse conditions— a late
spring, a cool summer, a wet October, and an early November frost — was responsible for the
rather extraordinary retention of the foliage in the pear {Pirus communis), red thorn (Cra-
taegus monogyna), the garden rose, blackberry (Rubus caesius), and peach {Prunus persica)
in the fall of 1919. The explanation lies in the meteorological conditions through the year. —
J. RoQser.

141. Prantner, E. F. The forests of a new republic. Amer. Forest. 26: 522-525. 9 fi^.y
1 map. 1920. — A brief discussion of forest conditions in Czechoslovakia. — Chas. H. Otis.

142. Recknagel, A. B. New York's forests and their future. Amer. Forest. 26: 518-521.
4fig.,l table. 1920.

143. Roth, Filibert. Another word on "light burning." Amer. Forest. 26:548, 572.
1920.

144. Rubner, K. Forstliche Standortsgewachse im westlichen Moranengebiet Bayerns.
[Vegetation as forest site indicators in Bavaria.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 135-144. 1920.—
The author discusses Cajander's theory that forest sites can be classed into a very few types
based on key plants, such as Oxalis, Vaccinium myrtillus, and Calluna, regardless of eleva-
tion, soil conditions, latitude, or other factors, and that the growth of the same species within
one type wherever located is about the same, but is very different in different types. Rubner
does not believe that such general classification, even with the subtypes Cajander proposed,
can be made to apply to a large region, but believes that each locality will have certain plants
that indicate the character of the different sites, which may or may not be common to other
localities. He illustrates this by discussing the vegetation under the forests in the districts
of Betzigau, Ottobeuren, Sachsenried, and Denklingen, which is the optimum spruce region in
Bavaria and possibly in all Germany, with yields far above the average for Quality I sites.
Indicator plants show particularly the humus conditions; i.e., whether the soils are mild,
with normal decomposition of humus, or whether they are becoming acid with raw humus.

No. 1, February, 1921] FORESTKY 19

Such plants may be guide-plants, practically always found on a particular kind of soil; acces-
sory indicators, frequently present but often missing; and regional indicators, found only in
certain regions. Plants indicative of mild soils are Oxalis acetosella, Asperula odorata, Im-
paliens noli-me-tangere, Galium rolundifolium, Elymus europaeus, Milium effusum, Brachtj-
podium silvaticum, Carex silvatica, Catharinea undulata, Mnium undulatum, Hypnum spp.
Indicators of beginning or continuing raw humus formation are: Vaccinium myrtillus, Fes-
tuca silvatica, Lycopodium annotinum, Polytrichum formosum, Dicranum scoparium. This
matter deserves much more attention from forest investigators, since it has a very direct
bearing upon silvicultural practice, especially in connection with natural reproduction and
with methods of thinning.— W. N. Sparhawk. .

145. RuBNER, K. Holzpreise in Suddeutschland in fruherer Zeit. [Wood prices in
South Germany in former times.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:226-233. 1920.— The author
discusses prices of wood (chiefly firewood) in various localities, going as far back as 1630 in
some instances. Especially noteworthy is a rapid increase in prices about the middle of the
nineteenth century, which was attributed by some to increased population, rise of wood-
using industries, and decreased wood production, and by others to an era of speculation.
Just as relief came then through the development of railroads and the rise of a world trade in
wood, so can relief from present abnormal wood prices, which are also due to a considerable
degree to speculation coupled with inadequate supplies, come only with the resumption of
imports from Russia or other exporting countries.— PF. N. Sparhawk.

146. ScHEiDTER, Franz. Schlagruhe und Russelkafer. [Suspension of cuttings and
weevil damage.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:144-150. 1920.— The author discusses the life
history of the weevil, and shows that it can not be eliminated from a forest by temporarily
suspending cuttings, as has been proposed. Contrary to general belief, the beetle flies for
long distances during the mating period, and may attack newly planted trees far away from
any cutting area. Suggested control measures include cleaning up cuttings, with grubbing
out of stumps as soon as possible after logging; smearing of individual trees, where practic-
able, with bands of glue or tar; and the construction of traps by blazing fresh stumps just
above the ground and covering the blazes with loose bark, from beneath which the beetles
can be scooped up daily or more often. — W. N. Sparhawk.

147. ScHMAUss, A. Uber Sturmgefahrdungen. [Concerning storm damage.] Forstwiss.
Centralbl. 42: 189-194. 1920.— Prevailing winds in central Europe being from the southwest
or west, trees are ordinarily adapted to resists winds from those directions, and are likely
to be wind-thrown only by winds from other quarters. Storms from the east or northeast
would be most destructive, but they are exceedingly rare. Those from the southwest— of
which the fohn winds are most common— are seldom strong enough to do great damage, so
that only the fairly strong winds— 20 meters per second and over— from the northwest need
be considered in forest management. The origin and behavior of these winds is discussed in
some detail. It is concluded that the best direction for succession of cuttings is from north-
east to southwest, since this will favor reproduction and at the same time will allow a mini-
mum of damage from northwest winds. — W. N. Sparhawk.

148. ScHREiNER. Blitzschaden an einer liegenden Eiche. [The work of lightning on a
fallen oak.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 42-43. 1920.— The author records a
phenomenon which he has not encountered in any of his previous practice. The oak stem in
question was 7.4 meters long and 0.46 m. in diameter, DIB. The tree had died and fallen
and the rotten butt had been removed, while the remaining section on the ground was sound.
One-half of the stem was free of limbs. The woody fibers were straight; no twisted grain
was in evidence. The stem lay in the midst of a thin stand of beech about 30 meters high.
Lightning struck directly on the fallen stem, and ran the full length of it, making a three
quarters revolution. Since it could not have followed the grain, it is thought the curvature
of the stroke was due to the attraction from the damp portion of the stem lying against the
soil. The soil is derived from sandstone. — J. Roeser.

20 FORESTRY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

149. S(chupfer). Englands Waldpolitik vor und nach dem Kriege. [England's forest
policy before and after the war.] [Chiefly a discussion of an article by Ivar Tragardh in Svenska
Dagbladet, 1919, No. 344.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42:150-156. 1920.— England's power
depends on her fleet, which requires coal; the latter cannot be obtained without a supply of
mine timbers. These had hitherto been obtained cheaply from France and Scandinavia,
but just prior to the war increasing prices had made people begin to think of the home forests,
which were mostly hardwoods except for small areas of conifers in Scotland. Early in the
eighteenth century it had been decided to plant 100,000 acres with oak for ship timbers, and
by 1823 half of this area was planted. Then the coming of steel ships put an end to this
project. With the outbreak of the World W^r, there was great difficulty in getting sufficient
timber; half of England's forests were cut down, and the rest would have been cut down if the
material could have been got out easily. Of the monthly consumption of 100,000 tons of
mine timber, England supplied 40,000 tons and France the rest. From 1916 to 1918 about
17,000,000 tons of timber were cut, or more than 20 years' normal cut. The report of the
Forestry Subcommittee of the Ministry of Reconstruction is outlined. The measures recom-
mended were adopted in the law of September 1, 1919, which created a Forest Commission
with broad powers and an appropriation of £3,500,000. The reviewer suggests that estimates
of costs and of returns may be somewhat optimistic, and that allowance was not made for a
possible future drop in prices as home production increases, but points out that there are
other advantages, such as insuring an emergency supply as well as making productive large
areas of waste land, whose value cannot be estimated. — W. N. Sparhawk.

150. ScnusTER, Matjhaus. Die wirtschaftliche Hegung urid Ausnutzung der bayeris-
chen Hohen Rhon. [The economic development and use of the Bavarian High Rhon.] Natur-
wiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 1-10. 1920. — The Bavarian High Rhon Mt. region is
noted for its large areas of unused meadowland, which because of soil and location are unfit
for agricultural use. During the war, and for a considerable time previous, this territory
had been practically neglected. It is known that as late as the end of the eighteenth century,
the region was one of considerable economic importance; this was due chiefly to the efforts of
the abbots of Fulda, who developed the limited mineral resources and the numerous springs
around Briickenau, and also made use of the large, uncultivated meadows in the mountains
as pastures for horses and cattle. At present, the whole region is dead and awaits a resurrec-
tion. Its agricultural value is low; it has no great advantage over other areas in its mineral
resources. The extensive mountain meadows, however, can and must be utilized for cattle
grazing, in order to assist in the economic restoration of industrial Germany. — J. Roeser.

151. Taylor, T. W. Kurrajong as a fodder tree. Australian Forest. Jour. 3: 186-188.
1920. — The cultivation of kurrajong {Sterculia diver sijolia) for fodder purposes is advocated.
This species is one of the best fodder trees as a stand-by in times of drought, as well as a
tree that is very ornamental and useful for shade purposes on the open plains. — C. F.
Korsiian.

152. TuBEUF, Karl Freiherr von. Uber die Zweckmassigkeit der Zusammenlegung
Kleinparzellierten Waldbesitzes. [Concerning the necessity of consolidating small parcelled-off
forest holdings.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 155-162. Fig. 1-3. 1920.— The
author describes three examples of forest areas, subdivided into small holdings with dis-
tinct division lines, which he found on the foothills of the Alps; namely, at Fiissen, at Kohl-
grub, and at Brannenburg. In the case of the first two, where long strips of forest, each pri-
vately owned, are separated by strips of meadowland; the forest is injurious to the growth of
grass in the meadows; the open meadows leave the forest open to severe damage by windfall,
etc. ; and there is no system or definite plan of utilization of the forest product. In the last-
mentioned case, a steep mountain side of approximately 155 ha is parcelled into 60 separate
holdings, these being in narrow strips parallel to the slope and separated by wide lanes, 10-30
meters wide. Some of the strips themselves are but 8 meters wide. The consolidation of the
holdings on the tract under one management will mean uniform management and harvesting

No. 1, February, 1921] FORESTRY 21

of product and closer utilization of the soil, since all of the lanes but one will be allowed to
regenerate. The revenue derived would be pro-rated according to the area held by each
member of the association or ownership, and the yield would be increased five or six times.
Statistics show that the average yield from small holdings is 2 cubic meters of wood per year
per ha, while on state forests, it amounts to 4^Q cubic meters. In North Germany, the
formation of forest associations by direct state aid is desirable to secure reforestation on the
large plains; in South Germany it is desirable in order to prevent the damage resulting from
parcelling of woodlands into small tracts; and in the mountains in order to introduce uniform
and efficient methods of logging. The demands of the time call for utmost utilization of the
soil.—/. Roeser.

153. WiLBRAND. Eichenhochwald. [Oak high forest.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 183-
189. 1920. — Oak is one of the most valuable and necessary woods, and is in great demand,
especially in large sizes. It should always be grown to produce large-sized material, and the
smaller sizes wanted can be obtained as by-products, from thinnings. For short rotations
spruce, pine, and beech are more profitable. Oak grows slowly, and needs plenty of light.
It should always be grown in pure stand (during the first part of the rotation) ; and best results
follow clear cutting of small areas, with planting, and cultivation of garden crops for two
years between the rows. After the stems have made their height-growth and the crowns
have begun to form, thinnings should commence, and should follow every 4 or 5 years, so
as to keep the crowns of the reserves always free and prevent dying off of even the lower
branches. This will prevent dead knots. Beech can be under-planted when the boles have
reached their full height, after the crowns have started to spread. This method will result
in the maximum possible clear bole, in regularly spaced annual rings, which is an advantage
for many purposes, and in reasonably fast growth. — W. N. Spar hawk.

154. Zeller, S. IM. Hvmiidity in relation to moisture imbibition by wood and to spore
germination on wood. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 7:51-74. PI. 1, 5 Jig. 1920. — See Bot.
Absts. 7, Entry 400.

155. ZiMMER, W. J. The need of softwood introduction. Australian Forest. Jour. 3:
184-185. 1920. — A brief discussion of the demand for softwoods, and an argument for more
extensive planting of pines. In a list of trees reported to be growing in the State Nursery
at Macedon, Victoria, many of which measure up to 108 feet in height and a stem girth of
more than 9 feet, ten North American conifers are noted. — C. F. Korstian.

156. ZoN, Raphael. Forests and human progress. Geog. Rev. 10: 139-166. 1920.— The
author recognizes three stages in the development of man's relation to the earth's forested
areas from prehistoric times until the present. These stages are designated: (1) Civilization
dominated by forests, (2) civilization overcoming the forests, and (3) civilizati n dominating
forests. While forming a natural sequence, it is pointed out that the stages made unequal
progress in different parts of the earth. For illustration. Central Africa and South America
are now in the first stage; a considerable part of North America and Asia are in the second;
but in Europe and parts of the United States the third stage is reached. The first stage deals
with prehistoric and early historic man. It is traced through indirect means, as the migra-
tion of races, the configuration of ancient forests, and from folk lore, myth, and the vestiges
of primitive religions. The second stage denotes man's progress in the production and use
of tools of an advanced and eflficient type, and shows an increasing pressure for tillable land.
This stage lies for the most part within the historic period, although place names in certain
parts of Europe are excellent indirect evidence of the progress of early clearings and forest
settlements. The third stage shows civilization triumphant over its ancient enemy, and
brings the story down to modern times. It deals with current movements and the immediate
past. — E. R. Hodson.

22 GENETICS [BoT. Absts.. Vol. VII,

GENETICS

G. H. Shull, Editor
. J. P. Kelly, Assistant Editor

157. Anonymous. [Rev. of: (1) Harrison, J. W. Heslop. A preliminary study of the
effects of administering ethyl alcohol to the lepidopterous insect, Selenia bilunaria, with par-
ticular reference to the offspring.- Jour. Genetics 9: 39-52. Dec, 1919. (2) Duerden, J. E.
Methods of degeneration in the ostrich. Jour. Genetics 9:131-193. PI. 5-6, 8 fig. Jan.,
1920.] Nature 104:609. 1920.

158. Anonymous. Vagledning pa forsSksfSlten 1920 vid Svalof och filialerna. [Guide to
the experimental fields of Svalof and its branch experimental stations, for the year 1920.]
1.45 X 200 mm., 52 p., 1 map. Landskrona, 1920.— Pamphlet intended as a manual for visitors.
During this year 14,059 plots (of which 94 are mass-cultures) have been laid out.— -K". F.
Ossian Dahlgren.

159. Bach, Siegfried. Zweierlei Weisslinge bei Mais. [Two kinds of albinos in maize.]
Zeitschr. Pflanzenzlicht. 7:238-241. June, 1920.— From open-pollinated ears of maize, the
author reports the occurrence of two types of albinistic seedlings. One ear produced 170
green and 4 pure white seedlings, the latter dying within a month's time. The other ear
produced 160 green and 5 partially green (striped) plants which died in two months. The
low proportion of albinistic seedlings is due to random open-pollination with a small amount
of natural self-pollination. Author assumes that chlorophyll content in maize is dependent
upon at least two pairs of factors, XX and Y Y; and that the parent ears noted above had the
genotypic formulae XX Yy and XyYY respectively.—^. W. Lindstrom.

160. Baumann, E. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Rapspflanze und zur Ziichtung des Rapses.
[Contributions to a knowledge of the rape plant and to the breeding of rape.] Zeitschr. Pflanzen-
zlicht. 6: 139-184. 2 figs. Dec, 1918.— A program for improving the rape plant was fol-
lowed through a period of nine seasons (1909-1917), together with a study of the inheritance of
certain characters influencing the performance of the plant under a variety of weather con-
ditions. Of the qualities concerned in making for a larger gross yield, and greater desira-
bility of product, the adaptation of different varieties to climate, particularly with reference
to the time of resumption of growth in spring and the latest occurrence of spring frost, was
found to be of much practical importance. Of primary interest, also, were found the capacity
of varieties to resist insect attack, and to occupy gaps in the stand by the development of
branches. A detailed study of external morphology showed that the taller the plant, the
greater was the number of internodes, and the higher the insertion of the latter on the axis.
The increase in length of lateral branches of the first order from tip toward base begins as a
straight line function, but toward the end is lessened considerably. A similar relation
obtains in the case of branches of the first and higher orders. Generally, in plants having a
long axial stem, the prunary and secondary branches are shorter, and the inflorescence more
crowded.- Plants of the higher continuity states, possess in a larger measure the qualities
making for increased productivity, as the different morphological elements tending toward
greater yield are more numerous and better differentiated. Adaptation to a particular cli-
mate is largely contingent on the capacity to form a vigorous healthy growth in fall, and to
develop shoots rapidly in spring, through which damage by late frosts and insects is resisted.
An excessively vigorous growth, on the other hand, may bring about a spindling condition,
encourage decay, and render the crop more subject to late spring frosts. In all cases, varie-
ties and races requiring the longer periods for maturing gave the greater yields. The per-
formance of species or genera making for adaptability to climate is an expression of the
irritability of its cells to thermal stimuli. The importance of physiological data derived from
breeding experiments to the ecology and the distribution of plants is emphasized.— C/iar/es
Drechsler.

No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 23

161. Becker, J. BeitrSge zur Ziichtung der Kohlgewachse. [Contribution to the breeding
of the Brassicas.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 7:91-99. Dec, 1919. — Discusses the necessity
of seed selection. Outlines a method whereby the four best plants are selected from a good
variety. These four plants are over-wintered and planted together the following year.
Pods from each plant are harvested separately, and each pod is handled as a unit. Seeds of
each are sown the following spring, and each individual seedling is grown in a pot and trans-
planted to the field. Undesirable lines and plants are eliminated after taking careful data
on plant characters, production, and food value. The ten best plants are selected, and
the following year the four best are again grown in an isolation plot. A second selection
of plants is made in the fall and carefully over-wintered. These produce seed for the main
crop. A single Brassica plant produces 2100 to 15,000 seeds — sometimes as high as 36,000. —
The writer favors the use of plants for seed production which themselves have produced
well-developed heads. States that different sorts should be 400 to 500 meters apart in the field
to prevent cross-pollination. — H. K. Hayes.

162. Becker, J. Serologische Untersuchungen auf dem Gebiete von Pflanzenbau und
Pflanzenzucht. [Serological investigations in the realms of plant culture and plant breeding.]
Landwirtsch. Jahrb. 53:245-276. 1919.— By the use of serums prepared by injecting plant
extracts into animals it is possible to distinguish between seeds which are so nearly alike
that by examination it is difficult to classify them; for example, seeds of Brassica napus and
B. rapa. It is also believed that it will be possible to determine genetical differences, by
this means, where no morphological differences can be made out, in closely related individuals.
— D. F. Jones.

163. Blakeslee, a. F. Unlike reaction of different individuals to fragrance in Verbena
flowers. Science 48:298-299. Sept. 20, 1918.— On the basis of susceptibility to the fra-
grance of two varieties of Verbena, A and B, 48 persons could be classified into two groups.
The one group, of 32 persons, was susceptible to fragrance in variety A but not to any in
B; for the other group or 16 persons the reverse was true. — Edgar Altenburg.

164. Blaringhem, L. Couleur et sexe des fleurs. [Color and sex of flowers.] Compt.
Rend. Soc. Biol. 83:892-893. June, 1920.— Many horticultural varieties of Sweet William,
Dianthus barbatus, are hybrids, and sometimes show hybrid origin by a mosaic splitting, which
appears only on a few shoots and only on old plants. One remarkable plant showed, during
two seasons, color changes in the petals which ran parallel with the sexual development of
each flower. D. barbatus is hermaphroditic and protandrous. During 5-8 days while an-
thers are shedding petals are white. Within subsequent 24-48 hours stigmas become func-
tional, and petals turn bright red. This abrupt change should furnish a convenient index
in a study of the inheritance of those physiological conditions which are associated with the
sexes. — Merle C. Coulter.

165. Blaringhem, L. Heredite et nature de la pelorie de Digitalis purpurea L. [Heredity
and nature of the peloria of Digitalis purpurea L.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 171: 252-254.
July, 1920.

166. Blaringhem, L. Variations de la sexualite chez les composees. [Variations in sexu-
ality in the Compositae.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83 : 1060-1062. July, 1920.— Author
recalls supposition of Hildebrand and van Uexkull-Gtllenband to effect that common
composites are in state of evolution away from hermaphroditism. This opinion was based
on existence of florets in intermediate conditions. Author says his observations on Cen-
taureas of jacea group do not support such an hypothesis. Plants from four stations gave
evidences of having resulted from hybridization of C. jacea and C. nigra. In the sterile
(peripheral) flowers there was pollen sterility and variation in degree of ciliation of a cer-
tain part of the achene; and there were appendages, such as free stamens or deformed styles.
~J. P. Kelly.

24 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

167. Bower, F. O., J. Graham Kerr, and W. E. Agar. Lectures on sex and heredity
delivered in Glasgov/, 1917-1918. 16mo vi+llQ p., 49 fig. Macmillan Co.: London, 1919.
— Distinctly popular; profusely illustrated. Introduction: Terms defined (prefers "syngamy"
to fertilization); nature and function of sex discussed; its features contrasted with asexual
reproduction. (1) Origin of sex in plants: Origin and differentiation of sex illustrated by
Ulothrix, Ectocarpus spp., Fucus spp.; likens primitive isogamous plants to plant proletariat,
producing numerous offspring with little physiological capital, so that each individual when
produced must depend chiefly on its own efforts. Heterogamous forms, with well-nourished
eggs, are capitalists whose progeny start life with an inheritance. Parallel evolution in several
lines indicates that advantage is with latter; sex process in fern and angiosperm is described.
(2) Effect of fixed position on sexuality of plants : detailed discussion of fertilization mechanism
in fe ns, pollination and pollen-tube growth in angiosperms; advantages of "nursing habit" in
latter for their embryos. (3) Reproductive process in animals: some general principles;,
differentiation of sex illustrated by Copromonas, Stylorynchus, Plasmodium; in Copromonas,
discusses auto-intoxication which comes after generations of a sexual reproduction, and how
unfavorable conditions favor the sex act ; sketches embryology in higher animals, early differ-
entiation of gonads, continuity of germ-plasm, inheritance of acquired characters. (4) Modi-
fications of reproductive process as adaptations to life on land : adaptations by various frogs
and toads, representing "attempts to get rid of the free aquatic existence during the early
stages of the life-history;" gross embrj^ology of chick; monotremes, marsupials, higher mam-
mals; transplantation of ovaries; transmission of disease from mother to offspring. (5) Hered-
ity: Physical basis of heredity, using Cyclops as example; Darwin's pangenesis, Galton's and
Weism Ann's views; isolation of germ-plasm in Cyclops; inheritance of acquired characters;
Mendel's law, with Andalusian fowl as example; dominance illustrated by red X white
Antirrhinum [?]. (6) Heredity in man: Mendelian inheritance of brachydactyly; Galton
and Pearson laws applied to inheritance of stature, insanity, special ability, assertiveness,
popularity; dangers from multiplication of unfit, and differential birth-rates favoring non-
intellectuals. — Merle C. Coulter.

168. Breakwell, E. Improvement of sweet sorghums. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31:549-551. 1920. — Summary of methods for securing improved strains. — L. R. Waldron.

169. Brierly, W. G. Report of the division of horticulture. Minnesota Sta. Rept.
1919: 49-54. 1919. — Outlines the work on inheritance of fruit characters, on sterility in fruits,
on breeding for hardiness, and on breeding and selection of vegetables. — H. K. Hayes.

170. Burns, W. Some aspects of plant genetics. Agric. Jour. India 15: 250-281. 1920.

171. Carroll, Mitchel. An extra dyad and an extra tetrad in the spermatogenesis of
Camnula pellucida (Orthoptera) ; nximerical variations in the chromosome complex within the
individual. Jour. Morph. 34: 375-455. H pi. Sept. 20, 1920. — Ten specimens of Cam-
nula pellucida, an orthopteran of the family Acrididae, were used in this investigation. Of
these, five were seemingly unique in their cytological phenomena. Conjugation during
maturation of a homologous pair of supernumerary chromosomes and the occurrence of
"indisputable instances" of definite numerical variations within the individual in germinal
chromosome complexes in non-pathological tissue are the main things considered in the
paper. — The normal constituents of the complex are constant in number, and the aberrant
condition is due to the presence of a varying number of supernumeraries in different cells
within an individual. This variation is not constant for the gonad, but is constant for the
cyst, and probably constant for the follicle until after the first spermatocyte mitosis. — The
supernumeraries are all homologous in size, form, and behavior, and are apparently geneti-
cally related. Within one individual the extra element may be absent in some complexes,
unpaired in some, paired in others, and present in triplicate in still others. If unpaired, it
divides in only one division, usually the second. It is a matter of chance as to whether or
not it goes with the accessory chromosomes. If the supernumerary is paired it behaves as
any ordinary chromosome. If present in triplicate, two of the elements synapse and behave

No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 25

like an ordinary chromosome, while the other behaves in the manner described for the un-
paired condition. Three cases of nondisjunction were observed. In two instances it was
a matter of the non-disjunction of the dyads of the supernumerary tetrad in the first matura-
tion division. The third is a "case of either maturational equational non-disjunction or a
peculiar type of reductional non-disjunction of the chromatids of the extra tetrad." — The
occurrence and behavior of the supernumeraries without non-disjunction make it possible to
have six kinds of spermatozoa; and should non-disjunction take place, two extra classes are
possible. Since non-disjunction occurs, it must duplicate a whole or a part of one of the
elements of a normal complex. It is obvious that the behavior of the supernumeraries must
influence the Mendelian ratios in any system of allelomorphs which may be carried by them,
since certain loci may exist in a double, treble, quadruple, or quintuple condition. These
various valences may be present in different germ cells of the same individual. — Mary T.
Harman.

172. Castle, W. E. Whitman and Riddle on orthogenetic evolution in pigeons. Amer.
Nat. 54: 188-192. Mar.-Apr., 1920. — A critical but appreciative review of this monumental
work. Whitman believed his experiments to prove that Mendelism was relatively limited
in its application, but Castle shows that the results may be interpreted in conformity with
present Mendelian theory. — L. J. Cole.

173. CoRRENS, C. Pathologie und Vererbung bei Pfianzen und einige Schliisse daraus
fiir die vergleichende Pathologie. [Pathology and inheritance in plants and a conclusion
derived therefrom for comparative pathology.] Mediz. Klinik. 16:354-359. April, 1920.

174. CoRRENS, C. Eine gegliickte Verschiebung des Geschlechtsverhaltnisses. Botan-
ische Versuche zur Frage nach der Entstehung des Geschlechts. [A successful modification
of the sex-ratio. Botanical researches on the question of the origin of sex.] Natur u. Technik
2:65-71. 2 fig. 1920.

175. Coulter, M. C. [Rev. of: Castle, W. E. Piebald rats and the theory of genes.
Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S.] 5: 126-130. 1 fig. April, 1919.] [See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry
235.] Bot. Gaz. 70:326. Oct., 1920.

176. Crozier, W. J. The intensity of assertive pairing in Chromodoris. Amer. Nat.
54: 182-184. 2 fi^. 1920. — This article is an additional note concerning a report published
by Crozier in Journal of Ex-perimental Zoology in 1918 [See Bot. Absts. 1, Entry 1472] in which
he shows that in the pairing of Chromodoris there is a "considerable degree of assortive con-
jugation with respect to size." In that report regression lines showing mean lengths of
mates pairing with individuals of a given length class were based on "artificial" measure-
ments; that is, the soft bodies were somewhat flattened and accordingly lengthened by the
process by which they were measured. In this report the relationship between the "artifi-
cial" and normal measurements of 74 individuals is established, and the regression plots
are revised in terms of the normal lengths. "The apparent intensity of homogamy in Chro-
modoris is but little affected, if anything perhaps slightly improved, by the reduction of the
original figures to the natural scale." — Sylvia L. Parker.

177. Davenport, C. B. Heredity of twin births. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 17:75-77.
1920. — The incidence of twin births in the general population is about 1 per cent, but in cer-
tain families it rises to as high as 15 per cent, indicating that the tendency to twin produc-
tion is an hereditary trait. Only biovular twinning is considered in the present communi-
cation, and only such matings are selected for analysis as have produced at least two pairs of
twins. In such cases the immediate relatives — parents, brothers, and sisters, — are found to
produce twins from four to eight times as frequently as does the population at large. This
is about equally true for relatives on the father's side and on the mother's side, which shows
that the male exerts an influence on biovular twin production commensurate with that of the
female. In explanation of the nature of this influence of the male, it is pointed out that

26 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

while there is evidence that double ovulation is relatively common, the probability that
viable twins will be produced is dependent upon the chance that both ova will be fertilized
and that both will be free from lethal factors. These prerequisites are dependent as much
upon the sperm as upon the egg and it is known that fecundity and the presence or absence
of lethal factors are hereditary traits. — C. H. Danforth.

178. Davis, Bradley M. [Rev. of Gager, C. Stuart. Heredity and evolut'on in plants.
U X 20 cm., xi + 265 p., IIS fig. P. Blakiston's Son & Co.: Philadelphia, 1920.] Science
52: 410. Oct, 29, 1920. [See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1672.]

179. Dembowski, Jan. Das Kontinuitatsprinzip und seine Bedeutung in der Biologie.
[The principle of continuity and its significance in biology.] Vortr. u. Aufsatze ii. Entwick-
lungsmech. Org. 21. 132 p. 1919.

180. Dexter, John S. Albino vertebrates. Science 52: 130-131. Aug. 6, 1920.— The
author makes note of a pure albino grackle (Quiscalus quisctda aeneus), two albino speci-
mens of Richardson's spermophile (Citellus richardsoni) , and a very light brown albinistic
crow. — Sewall Wright.

181. [Diener, Richard.] The law of hybridizing discovered by Richard Diener. 20 X 26
cm., 15 p., 8 fig. Richard Diener, Kentfield, California. [1920.] — Author claims to have
made the following discoveries: (1) AVhen parents are alike in size, the size of about 12 per
cent of the offspring in the Fi will be exactly double that of either parent, while the remain-
ing 88 per cent will range in size between the size of the individual parents and their sum.
(2) When parents differ markedly in size, the offspring will be smaller than either parent
if the smaller parent is the mother, and very little larger than the larger parent if the latter
is the mother. (3) The pollen-bearing parent is always the dominating factor in changes of
form and color. (4) In attempting to derive new colors always use a white flower as .the
pollen parent "to break up the colors." (5) Among fowls, if two individuals are mated
and the female offspring are mated back to the male parent, about one-third of the offspring
of this second cross will be double the size of the animals originally mated. Basis of these
generalizations are not specifically set forth. — G. H. Shull.

182. Dreyer, Th. F. A suggested mechanism for the inheritance of acquired characters.
South African Jour. Sci. 15:272-277. 1917. — Author attempts to show that observed facts
supporting Weismann's theory are meager — that acceptance of theory by younger genera-
tion is partly a matter of sentiment. The character and properties of chromatin, lymph,
and linin are reviewed. The linin being divided equally at cell division is considered as
hereditary material on a par with the chromatin. A metabolic-products theory of heredity
assumes the egg yolk to be specific for species, and assumes that it is a linin compound
formed from radicals of the various tissues of the body. Reactions occur in different portions,
so that it is not homogeneous; segmentation can thus split off different combinations of
radicals which are built up into different tissues. Environmental factors may cause some of
these radicals in the tissues to change so that the new yolk formed from the tissue radicals
will contain new radicals from the altered tissues. Thus acquired characters could be repro-
duced in the next generation in the absence of the causative stimulus. — /. L. Collins.

183. DuERDEN, J. E. Parallel mutations in the ostrich. Science 52: 165-168. Aug. 20,
1920. — Ostriches are degenerate in some respects, but highly specialized in others. The
North African Ostrich {Struthio camelus) and the South African {S. australis) differ in well-
marked characters, at least one of which (feathering of head) is believed to be a simple Mende-
lian character. In other respects they are similar, and the author believes parallel evolution-
ary changes are in progress in them. The similarity in this respect is attributed to parallel
mutations in germ -plasms of common origin. The suggestion is made that while the majority
of factors are static, some may be increasing in potency while others are dwindling. — L. J.
Cole.

No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 27

184. Dunn, L. C. Independent genes in mice. Genetics 5:344-361. May, 1920. —
Author tests for linkage of certain color factors in mice and finds that the following relation-
ships exist: Pink-eye and piebald spotting are independent; pink-eye and non-agouti are
independent; black-eyed white spotting and piebald spotting are independent; black-eyed
white spotting and agouti are independent; black-eyed white spotting and pink-eye are
independent; piebald spotting and non-agouti, give indications of slight linkage, 46.23 ±1.2
per cent, "of doubtful significance."— Thus four independent groups of genes are established
for mice with a possibility of a fifth. Two other groups are considered as possibilities from
the data of other investigators. — C. C. Little.

185. Dunn, L. C. Linkage in mice and rats. Genetics 5: 325-343. May, 1920. — Reviews
established cases of linkage in mice and rats; albinism, pink-eye and red-eye in rats; albinism
and pink-eye in mice. — On basis of extensive experiments, cross-overs of 14.5 per cent between
genes for albinism and pink-eye in mice. Crossing over occurs in both sexes, in males 13.65 =b
3.81 per cent and in females 15.91 ± 0.466 per cent. This difference between sexes is 3.81
times its probable error. In rats linkage between albinism and red-eye results in 1.8 =h 0.54
per cent cross-overs; albinism — pink-eye cross-over = 21.1 ± 2.92 per cent. Red-eye —
pink-eye crossovers = 18.3 ± 0.38 per cent. Linear order of genes is indicated. Males in
latter cross show 15.56 ± 0.538 per cent cross-overs, females, 20.46 ± 0.525 per cent. This
difference is 6.51 times its probable error. These sex distinctions are probably due to sexual
differences not yet discovered, in either structure or functioning of chromatin. — C. C. Little.

186. Ebstein, E. Zur Frage des Vorkommens von Kretinen und Albinos in Lerbach im
Harz. [On the occurrence of cretins and albinos in Lerbach in the Harz.] Die Naturwissen-
schaften 6:562-565. 1918. — In Die Harzreise, Heine notes presence in Lerbach of cretins
{dumme Kropfleute) and albinos {weisze Mohren). The consequent ill-repute of Lerbach has
clung to it until present times. From medical literature and correspondence author finds that
cretins existed in Lerbach at the time of Heine's excursion in the Harz (1824), but that
none have been known since 1830. Later lay references to cretinism are shown to be essen-
tially repetitions of Heine's statement without examination of facts. Author finds that at
least two albinos lived in Lerbach in 1824, and that nine cases in three families exist at pres-
ent time. Attention is called to erroneous confusion of cretinism and albinism as manifes-
tations of same condition, and distinctions are drawn between cretinism and simple dwarf
and goitrous cases. Diminution in cretinism is ascribed to failure of extreme cases to repro-
duce, and industrial development of Lerbach district leading to improvement in social and
hygienic conditions, and introduction of fresh blood lines. Probable sources of Heine's
information are discussed, and a geological description of Lerbach district is included. —
R. E. Clausen.

187. Eddy, W. H., H. Lake and A. B. Lyman. Report of committee examining Minne-
sota State Fruit-breeding Farm. Minnesota Hortic. 48: 36, 37. 1920. — Gives a brief resum6
of the most important work carried on at the farm. — H. K. Hayes.

188. Elderton, Ethel M. Life-history albums. Biometrika 12 : 373-374. Nov., 1919.
— This is a brief discussion of the relative merits of Galton's and Taylor's family history
albums, both from the point of view of the people throughout the country who may be induced
to fill out the records, and of the statistical workers who will use the completed records in
solving problems in heredity and eugenics. The Personal and Family History Register,
compiled by Dr. Taylor places, author thinks, more emphasis than is justifiable on environ-
ment as a factor in improving the race, and gives too much space to information about direct
ancestors, leaving none for collaterals, while cousins are as closely related to one another
as grandparents to grandchildren, and data about them would be much more accurate and
easily obtained. Author feels that both Dr. Taylor's Register and Galton's Life History
Album are too bulky and that the concise "Records of Family Faculties" issued by Galton
in 1884 would very well meet the needs of the statistical worker and should be reissued.—
Sylvia L. Parker.

28 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

189. FiscHEL, Alfred. Ursachen tierischer Farbkleidung. [Causes of animal coat
color.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. Org. 46:202-209. 1920.

190. Fischer, H. Pflanzenmetamorphose und Abstammungslehre. [Plant metamorphosis
and evolution.] Die Naturwissenschaften 8: 268-271. 1920. — General discussion of evolution
of plant organs and structures, with examples of problems and interpretations of plant meta-
morphosis. Series may be constructed which show orthogenetic trend, but this is not result
of inheritance of acquired characters. Causes of orthogenesis are unknown, but can be only
partially environmental. Evolution is not always in direction of utility, but may lead to
extinction of some Hues of descent. Changes resulting from alteration of living conditions
are only certainly known as consequence of domestication, and they have no utility in preser-
vation of species. — R. E. Clausen.

191. Fisher, R. A. The correlation between relatives on the supposition of Mendelian
inheritance. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh 52: 399-433. J^fig. 1919. — Derivation of formulae
for correlation between direct and collateral relatives for characters determined by Mende-
lian factors, making allowance for different degrees of dominance, for assortative mating,
for multiple allelomorphism, and for coupling. By means of fraternal correlation influ-
ence of dominance is distinguished from environmental causes of variability. Best available
figures for human measurements show little or no indication of non-genetic causes. Marital
correlation is probably genetic, not somatic. Hypothesis of cumulative Mendelian factors
fits facts very accurately. — John Rice Miner.

192. Freeman, Geo. F. A progress report on cotton breeding at the Sultanic Agricultural
Society. Sultanic Agric. Soc. Bull. 3. 16 p. 1920. — After discussing factors to be considered
in breeding work with cotton, a,uthor outlines plan followed by him in Egypt, dealing with
selection of mother plants, handling of pedigree-plant plots and increase plots, study of
vegetative characters, flowering curves, yield and lint characters. — T. H. Kearney.

193. Gallaud, M. Une lignee de Giroflees a anomalies multiples et hereditaires. [A
line of wall flowers with multiple hereditary anomalies.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 171: 47-49.
July, 1920.

194. Gassul, R. Nachtrag zu meiner Mitteilung iiber "Eine durch Generationen pra-
valierende symmetrische Fingerkontraktur." [Supplement to my contribution on a symmet-
rical contraction of the fingers prevailing through generations.] Deutsch. Med. Wochenschr.
44: 1450. 1918.— The original paper (Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 377) had neglected to indicate the
relationships of members of the family in which a form of congenital finger contractions was
reported. It is now possible to present a chart of the family tree from which it appears that
the peculiarity may behave as a (dominant) Mendelian trait. — C. H. Danforth.

195. GooDALE, H. D. Practical results from studies on egg production. Massachusetts
Sta. Bull. 191:97-104. 1 fig. 1919. — Paper is divided into three sections: I. Inbreeding.
II. Is the influence of the male or of the female the more important? III. The exclusion of
parasites. — I. A small number of data are presented which show that both inbreeding and
outbreeding may either succeed or fail. The criterion of judgment on inbreeding must be the
results in each individual case. — II. Author states that "the view that high fecundity does
not descend from mother to daughter but does descend from mother to son, or from father
to both sons and daughters is now generally accepted." Reports that "an experiment was
made in which the male from a low line (breed not stated) was mated with several high pro-
ducers belonging to a high line and at the same time to several low producers." "The off-
spring of the high producers averaged 49.2 winter eggs against an average of the mothers and
their sisters of 52.5 eggs. Nearly all were high producers. On the other hand, the offspring
of the poor layers averaged only 11.6 winter eggs. In this experiment high production clearly
descended from mothers to daughters In still another experiment a male belong-
ing to a low line was mated to a female belonging to another low line. Most of the offspring

No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 29

were high producers These experiments show that we are dealing with a situation

that is complicated in many ways." III. Author points out necessity of control of all para-
sites in studying the inheritance of fecundity and describes "the quarantine method" of
rearing chicks. — W. A. Lippincott.

196. GooDALE, H. D. Is the inheritance of egg production an insoluble problem? Jour.
Amer. Assoc. Instr. and Invest. Poultry Hush. 5:73, 74. 1919. — Author points out that
while improved egg production through selection is a demonstrated fact, the laws of the
inheritance of egg production have not been established. The latter present a complex prob-
lem because egg production is a complex character made up of several subsidiary characters,
the inheritance of each of which must be determined in advance. Five groups of difficulties
in the way of solving the problem of the inheritance of egg production are suggested in the
expressed hope that means of meeting them may be devised. These center around (1) the
purity of stock, it being unlikely that stock pure for any of the hereditary factors concerned
in egg production is in existence; (2) the need for larger numbers than may usually be secured
from a single pair; (3) the character is expressed in one sex only, making it necessary to judge
the genetic composition of males by their daughters; (4) the character is very sensitive to
environmental diflferences which are difficult to avoid; and (5) the presence of insidious but
unrecognized disease in the experimental flock, and the problems of disease resistance. —
W. A. Lippincott.

197. GowEN, John W. Studies in milk secretion, V. On the variations and correlations
of milk secretion with age. Genetics 5: 111-188. 9 fig. Mar., 1920.— A thorough biometric
analysis of milk production in a single herd of Jersey cattle, involving 1741 eight-month
lactation records. The mean and standard deviation are given for each age, together with
the other constants necessarj' for fitting each distribution with the approximate skew curve.
It is pointed out that there is a sufficiently close approach to the normal curve to justify
use of the latter in many cases. Milk yield is found to rise to a maximum at 7.2 years, slowly
falling thereafter, the whole curve being fitted best by a logarithmic function. The varia-
bility at different ages rises and falls in a somewhat similar curve which is fitted with a cubic
parabola. The correlation between the yields at any two ages is found to average +0.54,
there being little difference between the value for successive lactations and lactations more
widely separated in time. The correlations between the yield in one lactation and the total in
various combinations of lactations were also found, that between the first and four following,
for example, being +0.65, and that between the first four and the fifth being +0.69. Regres-
sion formulae are given for calculating the most probable yield in a given year or group of
years on the basis of a single lactation. The use of these formulae in culling a herd is
discussed. — Sewall Wright.

198. GowEN, John W. Studies in milk secretion. VI. On the variations and correla-
tions of butter-fat percentage with age in Jersey cattle. Genetics 5 : 249-324. 8 fi^. May,
1920. — The material for the study is taken from 1713 eight-months records of pure-bred
Jersey cows, made in one herd under uniform conditions and management. Correlation
coefficients and observed and theoretical means indicate the highest percentage butter-fat
with the first lactation period, and a slight decline in percentage butter-fat with each addi-
tional lactation period. The standard deviation and the coefficient of variation for the
butter-fat percentage for different ages — or succeeding lactation periods — remained approxi-
mately the same. The percentage fat for any one lactation period of a cow is an accurate
indication of the butter-fat percentage to be expected in future lactation periods. — The dif-
ference for the correlation coefficients for one lactation's butter-fat percentage with that of
another lactation, and for one lactation's butter-fat percentage with the butter-fat percent-
age over four lactation periods, gives a means of measuring the effect of environmental
changes on the butter-fat percentage. It was found that the internal mechanism of the
cow, which is probably hereditary, exercises six times the effect, in controlling butter-fat
percentages, that the environmental changes have. The factors that control the butter-fat
percentages have the same relative strength throughout the life of the cow to the exclusion
of any group of factors acting for short periods. — R. R. Graves.

30 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

199. Grier, N. M. Variation and distribution of leaves in Sassafras. Biometrika 12:
372-373. Nov., 1919. — Three kinds of leaves are found on Sassafras trees — three-lobed,
two-lobed, and single-lobed. Single-lobed leaves constitute about two-thirds of the foliage
and are found at the ends of the branches. Two- and three-lobed leaves are found in shaded
positions on the tree and can be produced on terminal branches by shading. — Karl Sax.

200. Grosser, Otto. Die Lehre vom spezifischen Eiweiss und die Morphologic, mit
besonderer Anwendung auf Vererbungsfragen und den Bau der Plazenta. [The doctrine of
specific proteins and morphology, with special application to questions of heredity and the
structure of the placenta.] Anat. Anzeiger 53 : 49-57. May, 1920. — Not alone chemical struc-
ture but also living structure is significant in determining morphology. Expression "organ-
forming substances" might well be replaced by "organ-forming germinal regions" (His,
1874). Inheritance may be assumed to depend on specificity of proteins. Single molecule is
not to be regarded as anlage of organ, but only in interrelation with other molecules. Pla-
centa excludes specific proteins of mother until they have been digested, whereby their speci-
ficity is lost. Mother is thus prevented from exercising larger influence in heredity. — A.
Franklin Shull.

201. Hagedoorn, a. L., en A. C. Hagedoorn-van Vorstheuvel la Brand. Het
overgeerfde moment bij bacterieele ziekten. [The inherited factor in bacterial infection.]
Nederlandsch Tijdschr. voor Geneeskunde 63: 179-182. 1919. — Experimenting with mice
for the study of inheritance of body-weight, authors crossed a small Japanese mouse with a
strain of great white mice. These experiments had resulted in a great collection of Fi and
F2 animals (some thousands), as also of back-crosses between Fi's and white or Japanese
mice. In the spring of 1919 an epidemic disease broke out and made great ravages among
the mice colonies. In the blood of 5 animals a specific Staphylococcus could be observed.
All pure Japanese animals (60) died; white mice, inhabiting the same cages, survived. A
great difference in susceptibility for this Staphylococcus-disease could be observed. In the
other cages, this susceptibility was shown to be a Mendelian character and a recessive. The
Fi-animals survived; from the Fz-animals 91 survived and 34 died (expected 93.75:31.25);
back-crosses of Fi's with Japanese mice gave 32 dead animals and 25 immunes; out of back-
crosses between Fi's and white mice only one of 51 animals died. These numerical relations
make sure that the immunity against the Staphylococcus-inieciion is a dominant Mendelian
factor according to the monohybrid scheme, susceptibility being the recessive. The first
case of a simple inheritance of disease-resistance. — M. J. Sirks.

202. Haldane, J. B. S. Note on a case of linkage in Paratettix. Jour. Genetics 10:
47-51. July, 1920. — Naboxjrs (Jour. Genetics 3: and 7:) showed that the various color pat-
terns in the grouse-locust, Paratettix texanus, are due to a series of Mendelian factors which
are multiple allelomorphs or else very intensely linked, plus a factor 0 which is allelomorphic
to its absence. A re-examination of his data has demonstrated that in males the factor 0
actually shows a crossover value of about 24 per cent with any of the other factors, and
in females a crossover value of about 46 per cent. The factor 0 thus exhibits a fairly marked
linkage with all the others in males, and a very slight linkage in females. Slight differences
in the crossover values appear between 0 and certain of the other pairs. If the so-called
multiple allelomorphs are really closely linked factors, then their presence in the heterozy-
gous condition may increase the linkage, since heterozygous factors have been shown to
cause such increases in Drosophila. The type of linkage in Paratettix seems to be intermediate
between the type found in Drosophila and Bombyx where no crossing over occurs in the diga-
metic sex, and the type in plants and mammals where linkage is equal in the two sexes. — H.
H. Plough.

203. Haralson, C. Minnesota State Fruitbreeding Farm in 1919. Minnesota Hortic.
48: 34, 35. 1920. — Reports briefly on progress in testing new varieties. — H. K. Hayes.

No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 31

204. Harris, J. Arthur. Practical universality of field heterogeneity as a factor influenc-
ing plot yields. Jour. Agric. Res. 19:279-314. 10 fig. July 1, 1920.— Analysis is made of
actual yields of plot tests reported by investigators for various root, hay, grain, and fruit
crops. All fields were found to be heterogeneous, though they had been carefully selected
for yield tests because of apparent uniformity. Soil heterogeneity is shown to have a real
physical and chemical basis. — Author concludes that it is practically impossible to secure
fields suitable for a direct comparison of yields. This fact emphasizes need of greater care in
agronomic technique and of more extensive use of statistical method in analysis of the data
from plot trials. — See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 480. — C. M. Woodworth.

205. Hartley, C. P. Better seed corn. U. S. Dept. Agric. Farmers' Bull. 1175. 14 P-,
9 fi^. 1920. — It is stated that low yields due to poor seed can be prevented by selecting seed
corn (maize) in the field in the fall, and instructions are given for gathering, storing, grading,
and testing the selected ears. Four experiments are summarized briefly as follows: (1) Varie-
ties that produce most in some states are among the poorest in others. (2) Seed ears from
the highest yielding rows of ear-to-row breeding plats have repeatedly produced better than
ears taken from poorer rows. (3) Well-preserved seed was found to produce higher yields
than seed injured by exposure, although both kinds germinated equally well. The difference
between the two kinds is accentuated when they are grown in fertile soil. (4) Diseased ears
or apparently healthy ears from diseased stalks give lower yields than disease-free ears from
normal stalks. — /. H. Kempton.

206. Heal, John. Hippeastrum (Amaryllis). Gard. Chron. 68:60. July 31, 1920.—
Recounts the unsatisfactory results of crossing Hippeastrum pardinum with other Hip-
peastrums. Credits H. Leopoldii with more influence than any other Hippeastrum in pro-
duction of best forms. — J. Marion Shull.

207. Heilbrunx, L. V. Studies in artificial parthenogenesis. III. Cortical change and
the initiation of maturation in the egg of Cumingia. Biol. Bull. 38: 317-339. May, 1920. —
When the egg of Cumingia is shed into sea-water, the first maturation spindle has formed,
but no polar bodies are thrown off unless the egg is fertilized or treated with the proper
reagents. The immature unfertilized egg is surrounded by a stiff vitelline membrane which
tightly encloses the fluid cytoplasm and effectively prevents the throwing off of polar bodies;
it is only when the egg is released from this restraint that maturation can proceed. Such a
release from restraint can be accomplished in three ways: by membrane elevation, by mem-
brane swelling, and by rupture of the membrane. Substances which themselves have low
surface tension produce a lowered surface tension of the membrane, and this results in its
elevation from the egg surface. Acids, alkalis, and certain salt solutions cause the vitelline
membrane to swell. The membrane may be removed from the egg by shaking, or it may be
caused to rupture by immersion in dilute sea-water. Maturation in Cumingia is not depend-
ent upon an increase in oxidation. Cortical change in Cumingia produces no increase in
permeabilit}'^ either to dissolved substances or to water. — Bertram G. Smith.

208. Heinricher, E. £in Versuch Samen, allenfalls Pfltanzen, aus der Kreuzung einer
Laubholzmistel mit der Tannenmistel zu gewinnen. [An attempt to secure seeds, perhaps
plants, from the cross between the mistletoe of deciduous trees with that of the Coniferae.]
Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell. 37:392-398. Dec, 1919.

209. Henning, Hans. Mnemelehre oder Tierpsychologie? [The mneme theory or ani-
mal psychology?] Biol. Zentralbl. 39: 187-192. April, 1919.— Controversial article in which
rather incidentally author denies identity of "individual memory" and heredity.— A.
Franklin Shull.

210. Hooper, J. J. Inheritance of Jersey colors. Jour. Dairy Sci. 2:290-292. 1919.—
This paper deals with the inheritance of self vs. broken color (white spotting), tongue color
and switch color, in Jersey cattle. The data are largely taken from the American Jersey
herd books. Broken color mated to broken color was found to give 194 broken color to 15 self

32 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

color; broken-colored bull to self-colored cow gave 179 broken color to 257 self color; and self
colored bulls and cows gave 425 self color to 75 broken color. Citations of the progeny of
certain bulls are given. — Mating white-tongue parents gave 71 per cent white-tongued.
Mating parents of white switch gave 91 per cent white switch. — The suggestion is made,
based on the fact that roan had disappeared from the Station herd, that the old roan Jersey
is due to a dominant factor. — John W. Gowen.

211. HosKiNG, A. Hybrid Calceolarias, Card. Chron. 68:47, 61. 2 fig. July 24, 31,
1920. — A list of hybrid Calceolarias with brief descriptions and statement of parentage. —
J. Marion Shull.

212. Jaramillo, p. J., and F. J. Chittenden. On double stocks. Jour. Roy. Hortic.
Soc. 44: 74^82. 2 pi. 1919. — Correlation shown between double flowering and vigor of
plant at time of pricking out, and confirming the observations of Miss Saunders to that
effect. — J. Marion Shull.

213. Kathariner, L. Die Entwicklungsgeschichte der digenetischen Trematoden und
die Kontinuitat des Keimplasmas. [The ontogeny of the digenetic trematodes and the con-
tinuity of the germ-plasm.] Zool. Anzeig. 51 : 220-223. Aug., 1920.

214. Kiessling, L. tJber eine Mutation in einer reinen Linie von Hordeum distichiim L,
[On a mutation in a pure line of Hordeum distichum L.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb.
19: 145-159. June, 1918. — In the ninth generation of a pure line of Hordeum distichum L. a
mutation occurred which is strikingly different from the parent form in many morphological
and physiological characters. In appearance the mutant is somewhat larger than the unmu-
tated plants and is lighter green in color, due to a reduction in chlorophyll. When the mutant
was crossed with the parent form, all differences were inherited as if due to a single point-
mutation. The author entertains the hypothesis that the mutation is concerned primarily
with a reduction in chlorophyll, and that the morphological variations are merely expressions
of the plant's readjustment to the decreased chlorophyll content. — W. H. Eyster.

215. Kronacher, C. Die deutsche Schweinezucht und Haltung nach dem Kriege.
[German swine breeding and maintenance after the war.] Flugschr. Deutsch. Ges. Ziich-
tungskunde 41: 1-47. 1918. — The author emphasizes the importance to Germany of com-
plete independence from foreign countries in regard to food supply and the consequent
importance of raising the swine population to its prewar level. The problem is primarily
one of feeding rather than of breeding, and the first consideration is the basing of German
swine husbandry wholly on home-grown feeds. As regards breeding, most stress should
be placed on constitutional vigor, the extreme development of early maturity, and ease of
fattening having proved deleterious in this respect. — Sewall Wright.

216. Kronacher, C. AUgemeine Tierzucht. Ein Lehr- und Handbuch fxir Studierende
und Ziichter. Vierte Abteilung (Abschnitt VI des Gesamtwerkes) : Die Ziichtung. [General
animal breeding. A text and handbook for students and breeders. 4th part (Section VI of the
complete work): Breeding. 8 vo. 357 p. Paul Parey: Berlin, 1919.— The first chapter, 210
pages, deals comprehensively with selection, including discussion of systems of mating, —
cross-breeding, pure-breeding, inbreeding, etc., — considerations in the judgment of pedigree,
performance, and conformation, discussion of fancy points, technical methods of judging,
special considerations in judging breeding stock, etc. — The second chapter, 137 pages, deals
with the physiology of reproduction in the domestic animals. — Sewall Wright.

217. Leake, H. Martin. Report on the maintenance and improvement of the quality of
Egyptian cotton and the increase of its yield. Ministry Agriculture Egypt. Cairo. 38 p.
1920.— Author was invited by Egyptian Ministry of Agriculture to make "recommendations
with a view to the maintenance and improvement of the qualit}' of Egyptian cotton and the
increase of its yield." His report deals with such matters as relation of commercial supply

No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 33

and demand for particular types of cotton, to work of breeder and grower; impurity of com-
mercial varieties in Egypt due to crossing and seed mixture; and relation of yield and quality
to physical environment. He outlines a program of economic, botanical, and agricultural
investigations looking to improvement of crop with especial emphasis upon breeding and
increase of pure lines to replace present mixed commercial stocks. He discusses complica-
tions caused by uncontrolled introduction of new varieties. — T. H. Kearney.

218. L^CAiLLON, A. Sur la reproduction et le developpement des bivoltins accidentels et
de la premiere generation qui en derive, chez le Bombyx du M(irier. [On the production and
development of accidental bivoltins and the first generation derived from them in the silkworm
(Bombyx mori). Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 168: 366-368. 1919.

219. LiPPiNCOTT, W. A. Pedigreeing poultry. Kansas Agric. Exp. Sta. Giro. 67. 16 p.,
10 fig. 1918.— Methods of pedigreeing poultry, including methods of marking breeders and
offspring, trapnests, methods of pedigree hatching, chick and mating indexes, marking of
eggs, flock breeding records, pedigree blanks and egg records are given. — H. D. Goodale.

220. Little, C. C. Alternative explanations for exceptional color classes in doves and
canaries. Amer. Nat. 54: 162-175. Mar.-Apr., 1920. — The author reviews the explanation
based on partial sex-linkage and non-disjunction previously offered to account for the appear-
ance of exceptional color classes in doves and canaries, and concludes that neither is adequate.
He then advances the theory that these occasional cases may be the results of mutative
changes of the recessive factors to their dominant allelomorphs. His view has no more
proof in existing data than the others, but has the advantage of avoiding the immediate
expectation of color classes which have not been reported. [His suggestion, however, that
female doves and canaries may be homozygous for dominant sex-linked factors is contrary
to all present experience.] — L. J. Cole.

221. Lloyd-Joxes, O., and F. A. Hays. The influence of excessive sexual activity of
male rabbits. I. On the properties of the seminal discharge. Jour. Exp. Zool. 25:463-497.
1918. — The plan of the experiment as stated by the authors was "to have the male accom-
plish, in as rapid succession as possible, a certain number of preliminary 'services' and then
to mate him once to the breeding female from which the litter was desired. The 'end serv-
ices' from which litters were secured for the progeny studies were the fifth, tenth, fifteenth
and twentieth, and about an equal number of first-service litters M'ere obtained as controls.
When semen studies were made, however, it was aimed to recover specimens from the first
and from every fifth service thereafter; thus, in a series of twenty services, five specimens of
semen would ideally be recovered for study. This ideal set of specimens from a twenty-
service series was seldom obtained, however." — It was' shown that excessive sexual service
causes decrease in amount of ejaculated semen, decrease in number of sperm cells per cubic
millimeter, decrease in the proportion of sperm that show progressive motion, decrease in their
duration of motion, decrease in percentage of fertile matings, and decrease in number of
young per litter. — H. L. Ibsen.

222. LiTNDBORG, H. Arv och miljo. Befolkningspolitiska synpunkter. [Inheritance and
environment. Race-political views.] Det nya Sverige [Stockholm], 14: 3-12. 1920. — Author
holds that great crossing of races degenerates constitution and increases degradation. Cross-
ing of races takes place in a much greater degree among the lower and poorer part of the
population than among the middle classes. Author has proved by his own investigations
that the lowest classes — those which are in social respect the most degenerated of the popu-
lation— consist to a greater extent of individuals with other race-qualities, such as darker
hair and eyes, than the great bulk of the population. The middle class has a more homo-
geneous composition than the poorer ones. The biological sciences are nowadays promoting
a new social evolution, by which the most important matters are life values and not wealth
or other material advantages. Great and richly equipped eugenical scientific institutions
must be established in all civilized countries. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

BOTANICAX ABSTRACTS, VOL. VII, NO. 1

34 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

223. Mac-Auliffe, A. Marie et Leon. Influence du milieu parisien sur la race.
[Influence of Parisian environment on the race.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 171 : 527-529.
Sept., 1920.

224. MiLEwsKi, A. W. tJber Torniers experimentelle Untersuchungen, iiber das Ent-
stehen pathologischer Verbildungen bei Tieren, sowie weiteres iiber experimentelles Erzielen
von monstrosen Goldfischarten, [On Tornier's investigations on the origin of pathological
malformations in animals as well as further consideration of the experimental attaining of
monstrous goldfish species.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. Org. 44: 472-498. 1918.

225. MiLLiKBN, C. S. Some facts about citrus bud selection. California Citrograph
5:222. May, 1920. — A popular article emphasizing "bud selection" as essential for the
most profitable production of citrus fruits. — Howard B. Frost.

226. Nachtsheim, Hans. Crossing-over-Theorie oder Reduplikations-hypothese? [The
crossing-over theory or the reduplication hypothesis?] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb.
22: 127-141. 4 fig. Jan., 1920. — A critical review of Trow's modification of the Bateson-
PuNNETT hypothesis of reduplication as an explanation of coupling and repulsion (linkage)
(Trow, A. H., Jour. Genetics 5: 1916). Although the more recent papers were not available
to the author, it is concluded that the crossing-over hypothesis, as worked out in the studies
on Drosophila, offers a better explanation of the phenomena. — H. H. Plough.

227. Namyslowski, B. Etat actuel des recherches sur les phenomenes de la sexualite
des Mucorinees. [The state of researches on sextiality in the Mucorineae.] Rev. G4n. Bot.
32:193-215. 9 fig. 1920.

228. Ness, H. [misprinted as N. Hess]. Experiences in plant hybridization. Proc. Amer.
Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16:52-60. (1919) 1920.— Author calls attention to fact that much which
has been written concerning plant hybridization has been largely repetition of phenomena
in stock examples. — Importance of plant hybridization was early appreciated by floricul-
turists, and from them we have many forms of begonia, canna, gladioli, etc. Their work
resulted from an attempt to supply a demand and few records have been kept; thus the
scientific value of the work has been greatly lessened.— The uncertainty of positive results
makes hybridization work by the individual a somewhat uncertain financial proposition,
and thus is best done by a publicly supported institution.— Author has worked with two
genera, Rubus and Quercus, that with Rubus being an Adams Fund project. Has made
many crosses among which were May's dewberry (R. villosus) also called Austin, by the Early
Harvest blackberry (R. argutus). In the first generation the May's was almost completely
dominant, and a good population was obtained. From the reciprocal crosses he failed to
obtain any progeny, neither was he successful when Early Harvest was the mother and
the pollen was secured from other sources. In these experiments several attempts were
made with crosses of difi"erent varieties and species of Rubus but without success until he
used seedlings of the raspberry, R. rubisetus, as the maternal parent; and the influence of this
parent was manifest in subsequent generations. He notes: "The most remarkable part of
these phenomena appears to me to be that fertility appeared only in the most robust group of
those of the Fz generation in which the raspberry was dominant; and that having once
occurred, it became invariably hereditary just as though sterility was merely a passing
crisis."— His work with Quercus shows that "the various individuals of a species vary widely
in their affinity for foreign pollen To be successful in hybridization it is neces-
sary to search out by trial individuals having the proper afiinity for the pollen to be applied.
For this purpose seedlings would naturally be preferred to plants produced vegetatively."—
C. E. Myers.

229. Onslow, H. The inheritance of wing colour in Lepidoptera. III. Melanism in
Boarmia consortaria (var. consobrinaria, BKH.). Jour. Genetics 9:339-346. 1 pi. Mar.,
1920.— Melanism of consobrinaria, crossed with the grayish speckled type, is dominant. In

No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 35

four species of Geometrids, Tephrosia consonaria and T. extersaria, Boarmia abieiaria and
B. consorlaria, a melanic variety has appeared in south England remote from the industrial
regions of the North. That melanism is common in industrial and urban districts is explained
by the correlation of a greater hardiness with melanism. Natural selection, acting more dras-
tically in the manufacturing areas "where the woods and vegetation upon which the larvae
feed have been largely destroyed and elsewhere contaminated with a chemical deposit,"
weeds out individuals of the feebler type form, but permits melanic mutants to develop.
Melanics of B. consorlaria as well as of T. consonaria (var. nigra) seem to the author to be
"earlier, stronger and larger than the type forms. Moreover, there is often a slight excess
of melanics in most crosses."— The author calls attention to a curious inverse relationship
between sex and the melanism of consobrinaria which he regards as fortuitous, though it occurs
in a single inbred strain and the numbers, in at least one family, are of considerable size.
This relationship appears in reciprocal crosses between the heterozygous dominant (melanic)
X recessive (type): Heterozygous (melanic) 9 X recessive (type) cf gives approximately:

9 9 7 heterozygous: 9 recessive
(?&9 " :7

Recessive (type) 9 X heterozygous (melanic) cT gives: —

9 9 9 heterozygous : 7 recessive
cTd" 7 " : 9

Nearly half of the recorded matings between heterozygote and recessive (6 out of 14)
fall into this too symmetrical scheme [that suggests an unorthodox sex-linkage or a sex-linked
lethal factor destroying 25 per cent of every brood]. The numbers are small except in the fol-
lowing case: recessive (type) 9 X heterozygous melanic cT, giving 64 melanic 9 9 , 49 melanic
d^cf ; 49 type 9 9,60 type cf cf .— /. H. Gerould.

230. Fetch, T. Variation in coconuts. Trop. Agric. Ceylon 54: 1. 1 pi. 1920.

231. Fhipps, William H. The law of hybridizing. Florists' Exch. 50:814. Oct. 16,
1920.— A criticism of Weston, T. A., Rev. of [Diener, R.], The law of hybridizing, etc.
[See Bot. Absts. 7, Entries 181, 248.]— G. H. Shull. .

232. Powell, George T. Thirty years' experience in the application of bud selection
in the fruit industry. California Citrograph 5:344, 364r-366. 4 fig- Sept., 1920.— A paper
read at a meeting of California nurserymen. Over 30 years ago, the writer publicly advocated
propagation from superior orchard trees. Discussion largely relates to the apple. Writer
has several thousand apple trees, "practically all" propagated from carefully selected bearing
trees; the apparent results are excellent, though comparative tests are not reported. The
opinion is expressed that selection for resistance to cold and to disease is important. — Howard
B. Frost.

233. Pridham, J. T. Natural crossing in wheat. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 457-
461. 2 fig. 1920.— Quotations from various authors are given, as to relative abundance of
natural crosses. The author cites a few instances of natural crosses coming under his own
observation and mentions one commercial variety, Marshall No. 3, an Australian wheat which
originated as a natural cross. — L. R. Waldron.

234. Pridham, J. T. The selection of promising wheat plants. Agric. Gaz. New South
Wales 31:548. 1920.— Suggestions to farmers for selecting plants from fields suitable for
future increase. — L. R. Waldron.

235. Rei CHERT, E. T. A biochemic basis for the study of problems of taxonomy, heredity,
evolution, etc., with special reference to the starches and tissues of parent-stocks and hybrid
stocks and the starches and hemoglobins of varieties, species and genera. Carnegie Inst. Wash-
ington Publ. 270. Part l,xi + 376 p. , 34 pL, 820 fig. Part 2, vii + 377-834- 1919.— This memoir.

36 GENETICS BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

in two large volumes, is designated as complementary alid supplementary to the author's (and
Brown's) well-known earlier crystallographic studies of the hemoglobins, and to his work
on the stereochemistry of protoplasmic processes and products as displayed through the
differentiation and specificity of starches (Nos. 116 and 173, respectively, of the Carnegie
Institution of Washington) . Like its predecessors the present study is regarded as exploratory
in character. The main thesis of the three sets of studies is that "in different organisms
corresponding complex organic substances that constitute the supreme structural compo-
nents of protoplasm and the major synthetic products of protoplasmic activity are not in
any case absolutely identical in chemical constitution, and that each such substance may
exist in countless modifications, each modification being characteristic of the form of proto-
plasm, the organ, the individual, the sex, the species, and the genus." — Since the molecule of
such a protein as serum-albumin may have as many as 1000 million stereo-isomers, the incon-
ceivable number of possible constitutional differences in the corresponding proteins of differ-
ent individuals is obvious. The author believes that the collective evidence available today
indicates that every individual is a chemical entity that differs in characteristic particulars
from every other, and that differences in chemical constitution and composition can account
for all the differences which serve to characterize genera, species, and individuals. Being
an inert, non-living synthetic product of metabolic activity which beavs no resemblance
to the protoplasm that gives rise to it, starch may be used as an indicator in determining
whether the products of synthesis are correspondingly modified with the stereochemical pecu-
liarities of the protoplasm by which they are produced. Rei chert finds that such is the case.
Moreover, since such differences are diagnostic, they constitute "a strictly scientific basis for
the classification of plants." The present research treats mainly of the properties of parent-
stocks and hybrid-stocks, and correspondingly, of heredity. The author thinks that the
importance of hybridization in the genesis of species has been greatly underrated. He ex-
presses the object of his research as follows: "In both of the preceding researches satisfactory
evidence was recorded to justify the conclusion that complex organic substances exist in
different stereo-isomeric forms in different organisms, and that the differences are specific
in relation to genera, species, and varieties, and in general in striking accord with the accepted
data of the systematist. Naturally it seemed to be a matter of the greatest fundamental
importance to determine to what recognizable degrees these physico-chemical properties are
transmitted from seed and pollen parents in altered or unaltered form in the hybrid; if it is
possible to predict the heritability of this or that property: whether or not new physico-
chen^iical properties appear in the hybrid; and if the phenomena of physico-chemical inherit-
ance are not only cons stent with, but also in explanation of, the data of the systematist and
with the experience of the plant breeder." In connection with a discussion of the criteria of
hybrids and mutants he translates a lecture of Fockb (1881) rarely found in libraries, which
summarizes under five propositions a great amount of data pertaining to hybrids and their
offspring. Reichert regards Mendelism as of value merely in explaining certain phenomena
of inheritance and but one of several types of mechanisms of heredity. He uses the term
"unit-character" and "unit-character phase" repeatedly but apparently not in the accepted
Mendelian sense, for he says: "The term character is used throughout this research in a con-
ventional sense to signify any property that serves to characterize any part or property of
starch or plant. Inasmuch as each such property is a unit of comparison, each may appro-
priately and advantageously be referred to as a unit-character." What he finds regarding
starch characters in hybrids when compared with those of parents may be summarized in his
own words: "If starch characters are heritable they should, in order to meet theoretic require-
ments, exhibit peculiarities of inheritance corresponding to those observed in gross and
microscopic anatomic plant characters. This deduction will be found to have ample justi-
fication in the results of this research. Herein it will be found that the starches of the
hybrids frequently exhibit in histologic, polariscopic, and physico-chemic properties some
degree of intermediateness between the parents, usually nearer one or the other. In any
given hybrid certain of the propert'es may be exactly or practically exactly intermediate
and other properties may be identical with the corresponding properties of one or the other
parent. In many instances one or more of the characters of the hybrid, such as the relative

No. 1, February, 1921] GENETICS 37

number and the types of compound grains, the degree of fissuration, the regularity or irregu-
larity of the forms of the grains, the chara.cters of the hilum, the distinctness and size of the
lamellae, the polariscopic properties, the temperature or gelatinization, the aniline reactions
and the qualitative and quantitative reactions with the various chemical reagents, were
developed or manifested in degrees beyond the parental extremes. Moreover, peculiarities
of various kinds were observed at times in the hybrid that were not apparent in either parent."
— In general he concludes that "the results of the hemoglobin and starch researches are
mutually confirmatory in support of the existence of stereo-isomeric forms of complex
organic substances that are specifically modified in relation to varieties, species, subgenera,
and genera, and that these specificities indicate corresponding peculiarities of the protoplasm
in which the substances are formed." — In Chapter VI of Volume 1, the author discusses the
applications of the results of his researches under the following headings: specificity of
stereo-isomerides in relation to genera, species, etc. ; protoplasm a complex stereo-isomeric
system; the germ-plasm a stereochemic system; protoplasmic stereochemic system applied
to the explanation of the mechanism of variation, sports, fluctuations, etc. ; protoplasmic
stereochemic system applied to the genesis of species.— Part 2 (a separate volume), "Special,
general and comparative laboratory data of the properties of the starches and of the tissues
of parent-stocks and hybrid stocks," consists of the laboratory records prepared by two of
the author's assistants. Dr. Elizabeth E. Clark, and Miss Martha Bunting. — M. F.
Guyer.

2.36. RosE.VBERG, O. Weitere Untersuchungen iiber die Chromosomenverhaltnisse in
Ctepis. [Further studies on the chromosome relations in Crepis.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskr.
.'4: 319-325. 5 fig. 1920. — In Crepis Rente riana there are quite normal grains with only
two (normally three) chromosomes to be found. This depends on abnormalities in the reduc-
tion division. Of Crepis Reuteriana (2x = 6) a gigas mutation with 12 somatic chromosomes
is found, each of the three chromosome types being represented by four chromosomes. A
great deal of polyploidy is now known in the genus. Crepis biennis and others have 42
somatic chromosomes. These species may be interpreted as 14-ploid, possessing only the same
3 typos of chromosomes as we find in Crepis virens, but repeated 14 times.— X. V. Ossian
Dahlgren.

237. RuNNSTROM, J. Bsfruktningens och fosterutvecklingens problems. [The problems
of fertilization and embryology.] Vetenskap o. Bildniiig 30. 2S2 p., 109 fig. A Bonnier:
Stockholm, 1920. — Contains a treatise on the origin and evolution of the cell-idea. Aims to
give a comprehension of the physiology of cell-division and fertilization, illustrating chief
problems of the mechanics of evolution by some examples. Last chapter treats of endo-
crine secretion of sex-glands, etc. Some results are new, being taken from the author's own
still unfinished studies on the mechanics of evolution as exemplified in sea-urchin eggs.
Working with sea-w^ater free from K or Ca, may produce a symmetrical system perpendicular
to the normal one. Author also demonstrates some experiments to eliminate the echinid
rudiment which is to be found at the left side of the larva. In spite of the extirpation of
this rudiment, certain symmetrical changes take place in the alimentary canal. A new
mouth and a new oesophagus may be developed. The latter is often produced in a manner
different from that of the normal metamorphosis. Changes of the rectum diiTering from
normal development are also found. In some cases three quite atypical organs have been
discovered: (1) A ciliated organ, that produces an excretion, in connection with the anus.
(2) An outgrowth from the body, produced by cylindrical epithelium with capacity of secre-
tion and liable to be regenerated. (3) A pocket-like formation with ciliated cells. The
author considers that genes exist in sea-urchin eggs, the effects of which are normally sup-
pressed by the great development of the echinid rudiment. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

238. Ruzicka, Vladislav. Restitution und Vererbung. Experimenteller, kritischer
und synthetischer Beitrag zur Frage des Determinationsproblems. [Restitution and heredity.
Experimental critical and synthetic contribution to the problem of determination.] Vortr. u.
Aufsatze u. EntAvicklungsmech. Org. 23 : 69 p. 1919.

38 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

239. ScHRADER, Franz. Sex determination in the white-fly (Trialeurodes vaporariorum).
Jour. Morph. 34: 267-305. 4 V^- Sept. 20, 1920. — Other workers had discovered that virgin
females of this white-fly produce only males in America, but only females in England.
Author shows that ,number of chromosomes in American race is 22 except in pseudo-vitelline
or mycetoma cells, where number is 30 or more. In female, maturation includes two divi-
sions, and mature egg contains eleven chromosomes. If egg is unfertilized, it produces male
with eleven chromosomes. In spermatogenesis reduction division is completely suppressed
and spermatozoa have haploid number of chromosomes. Whether egg is fertilized or not is
in some way controlled in female. — Author suggests parthenogenetic production of females
(as in England) may be due to reunion of polar nucleus with egg nucleus, or to doubling of
number of chromosomes at some stage. If fertilized eggs of English race produce both
sexes, explanation may be that entrance of spermatozoon causes reduction of chromosomes
in egg (a process omitted or neutralized in parthenogenetic egg), but some of spermatozoa
do not function any further, leaving egg to develop with haploid number and produce male. —
English race is supposed to have originated from American, perhaps by mutation. Occur-
rence of some males in England may be result of importation from America. — A. Franklin
Shull.

240. Shamel, a. D., L. B. Scott, C. S. Pomeroy, and C. L. Dyer. Citrus-fruit improve-
ment: a study of bud variation in the Eureka lemon. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 813. 88 p.
18 tables, 22 fig. June, 1920. — The methods employed in this investigation have been, in
general, like those used in the three previously reported studies of orange and grapefruit
varieties (see Bot. Absts. 2, Entries 707, 708, 709). Selected plots in Eureka lemon orchards
including 252 trees altogether, have furnished detailed records of yield, grade, etc., while
cooperative arrangements have given individual records for about 14,000 trees. Extensive
statistical data, covering about 6 years (1911-1917) are presented. — Eight strains of Eureka
lemon are described, all of which "have been traced to individual fruit or limb variations in
trees growing under normal conditions," and have been experimentally propagated by
budding. These strains differ in many characters, such as habit of growth, size and shape
of leaves, productiveness, shape of fruit, thickness of rind, and season of production. The
Eureka strain, which is that most typical of the variety as usually grown, is the only type desir-
able for commercial lemon production. Trees of certain other types, such as the Shade-
tree strain, are numerous in some orchards, evidently because of the former practice of
using as budwood the vigorous non-bearing shoots, which are especially numerous with these
strains. — The authors advise that all buds for propagation be taken from shoots bearing
normal fruits, and that these bud sticks be cut only from superior performance-record trees;
also, that orchard trees of inferior strains be top-worked or replaced. — Howard B. Frost.

241. Shamel, A. D., L. B. Scott, C. S. Pomeroy, and C. L. Dyer. Citrus-fruit improve-
ment: a study of bud variation in the Lisbon lemon. U. S. Dept. Agric. Bull. 815. 70 p., IS
tables, 14 fi^. June, 1920. — The work with the Lisbon lemon closely paralleled that with the
Eureka lemon (see Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 240) in methods, general results, and conclusions.
Detailed records were secured for 128 trees in selected plots, and cooperative records for
about 13,000 trees. Five definite strains are described in detail; others have been observed
but not thoroughly studied. Of these five strains, the Lisbon strain, representing "the
established ideal for the Lisbon variety," is the most productive. The Open strain, though
less hardy and productive, has an advantage in its tendency to produce fruit throughout the
year, resembling the Eureka strain of the Eureka variety in this respect. In some orchards
the Open strain predominates, and in others the Lisbon strain. The other strains are mark-
edly inferior. — Howard B. Frost.

242. Stark, Mary B. A benign tumor that is hereditary in Drosophila. Proc. Nation.
Acad. Sci. [U. S.] 5: 573-580. 5 fig. Dec, 1919.— A new benign tumor appeared in a stock
of Drosophila. By inbreeding, a strain true to the tumor character was established. One
gene for the tumor is situated in the third chromosome close to dichaete. Extraction of the

No. 1, February, 1921J

GENETICS

tumor character in only five per cent of the flies shows other genes also involved. These are
under investigation. 780 larvae show from one to three tumors situated in 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12,
13 or 14th segments. Metastases may or may not be present. Tumor may also be in head or
may replace wing or other appendages. Tumor cells are rounded or polygonal and contain
pigment. Pigment increases with age. Cells giving rise to tumor are originally hypodermal.
Tumor in adult fly is permeated with black pigment. When tumor develops in abdomen,
no shortening of life in fly results. Tumor was inoculated in 40 larvae; only 2 survived; both
grew tumor and were sterile females. — C. C. Little.

243. Tackholm, G. On the cytology of the genus Rosa. A preliminary note. Svensk.
Bot. Tidskr. 14: 300-311. 3 Jig. 1920.— Very brief summary of author's chief results. About
300 bushes, representing approximately 230 different forms, are investigated. The funda-
mental haploid chromosome number in Rosa is 7. There are two very different groups of
species: (1) the very polymorphous conmo-section (in the widest sense), and (2) all other
sections. The latter group have only gemini (7, 14, or 21) in the diakinesis; the former pos-
sess both paired chromosomes and single ones. The following table gives the observed
numbers:

TYPE

BIVAlENTS

SINGLES

SOMATIC

Z-PLOIDT

—

Diploid

—

Tetraploid

—

Hexaploid

Triploid

Tetra[)loid

Pentaploid

Hexaploid

Pentaploid

Hexaploid

Variable

32-36

Anorthoploid

The roses of types l-3^have only sexual reproduction. Some of this species have varieties
with different chromosome numbers (haploid number 7 and 14; 14 and 21). Triploid roses
(type 4) may be hybrids between types 1 and 2. Type 8 may be interpreted as the result
of a cross between types 2 and 3. The reduction division in the anthers is quite in accord-
ance with the Drosem-hybrid scheme of Rosenberg. The immense number of forms belong-
ing to the section Caninae (in the widest sense) are distributed in the types 5-7. The
reduction divisions of the Caninae in the anthers and the ovules are carried out in a quite
different manner. In the pollen mother cells, the gemini first come to the equatorial plate.
Later the univalent chromosomes which are scattered irregularly on the spindle are also arranged
in the same plate surrounding the gemini. The partners of the bivalents first pass to the
poles. The singles lag a little, divide, and then the halves pass to the poles. The bivalent
and univalent chromosomes consequently have different anaphase stages. Not all the
halves of the singles may be included in the daughter nuclei. By the second division the de-
scendants of the bivalents are regularly distributed and included, without or with a few of
the other chromosomes in the four ordinary microspores. There even arise a great num-
ber of small microspores from each mother cell, containing only descendants from the uni-
valent chromosomes. Some of the microspores — probably those containing descendants of
the bivalents— develop into pollen grains, are able to germinate, and must be supposed to be
capable of fertilization (hybrids between roses in the section Caninae are known). In the
embryo-sac mother cells we have ordinarily the two equatorial plates — the bivalents next
to the chalaza, the singles next to the micropyle. In the anaphase the partners of the gemini
are separated; but in about four-fifths of the studied cases, all the singles pass undivided to
the micropylar pole. In the second division all the chromosomes are divided. Consequently,
the tetrad has two large nuclei and two smaller ones, with only 7 chromosomes. The former

40 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

are also included in the greater cells. Eggs which have taken their origin from the larger
megaspores are capable of fertilization, as proved by the chromosome sets in hybrids between
plants of the section Caninae and normally sexual roses. In spite of the sexual potency of
the Caninae their propagation is almost exclusively apomictical. This fact explains the con-
stancy of the mentioned chromosome sets. Type 10 must be supposed to be originated by
fertilization. — "All species and forms investigated, belonging to the section Caninae — i.e.,
the majority of the examined roses, originated in Europe, North Africa and West Asia — are
very ancient hybrids representing the Fi generation, which, ever since its origin thousands of
years ago, has been maintained owing to apomictical reproduction." The anorthoploids rep-
resent Fa or any later generation of crosses. The apomictical reproduction was probably
induced by these ancient crosses. To explain all the chromosome sets in the Caninae, the
existence of octoploid and decaploid sexual forms is assumed. The enormous polymorphy in
the Caninae is to be ascribed to hybridism. Also vegetative mutations produced in apomic-
tical stocks have no doubt contributed to the polymorphy. — K. V. Ossian Dahlgren.

244. Thomson, Godfrey H. On the degree of perfection of hierarchical order among
correlation coefficients. Biometrika 12: 355-366. 2 fig. Nov., 1919. — Derivation of Hart-
Spearman criterion for degree of hierarchical order (degree in which correlations of anj' two
mental tests with others are in same sequence of magnitude) neglects important term. With
correlated dice throws, where true correlations are known a priori, criterion exaggerates
perfection of hierarchy. — John Rice Miner.

245. Vandel, M. a. Sur la reproduction des Planaires at sur la signification de la
fecondation chez ces animaux. [On the reproduction of some Planarians and on the signifi-
cance of fecundation in these animals.] Compt. E,end. Acad. Sci. 171: 125-128. July, 1920.

246. Weatherw.\x, Paul. A misconception as to the structure of the ear of maize.
Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 359-362. 6 fig. Aug., 1920.— An attempt to refute the evidence
published bj' Collins which indicated that the ear of maize may have developed through the
twisting of yoked pairs of spikelets. The author contends from an examination of the
cobs of several mature ears that dropping of rows of seeds is due to the discontinuance of
a row of paired spikelets and not to the loss of the pedicelled spikelets from yoked pairs, as
suggested by Collins. In conclusion it is stated that there is no in(Mcation that short rows
represent long rows partially aborted, but that the abortion of spikelets or of rows in the ear
seems to be much more constant as a characteristic of theories than of real ears. Figures
four and six apparently have been transposed. — J. H. Kemplon.

247. W[eston, T. a.] [Rev. of: [Diener, Richard]. The law of hybridizing discovered
by Richard Diener. SO .r 27 cm., 15 p., 8 fig. Richard Diener: Kentfield, California, [1920.] ]
Florists' Exch. 50: 554. Sept. 11, 1920.— See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entries 181, 231, 248.

248. W[eston, T. A]. The law of hybridizing. Florists' Exch. 50: 981. Nov. 6, 1920.—
Reply to William H. Phipps's criticism of the author's review of [Diener, R.] The law of
hybridizing discovered by Richard Diener. See Bot. Absts. 7, Entries 181, 231, 247. — G. H.
Shull.

249. WoLL, F. W., AND Paul L. Dougherty. Advanced registry testing of dairy cows.
California Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 218. 15 p. 1920. — Presents arguments for the advanced-
registry testing of pure-bred cows, cites records made in California, and gives instructions
on how to initiate such a test in California. — John W. Gowen.

No. 1, February, 1921] HORTICULTURE 41

HORTICULTURE

J. H. GouRLEY, Editor
FRUITS AND GENERAL HORTICULTURE

250. Allen, W. J., and W. C. Gay Brereton. Orchard notes, July. Agric. Gaz. New
South Wales 31 : 523-525. 1920. — A discussion of pruning of the apple and pear and its relation
to the production of fruit buds. — L. R. Waldron.

251. Allen, W. J., and W. C. Gay Brereton. Thompson's Improved and Navalencia
oranges. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 519. 1920.

252. Anonymous. American books on agriculture. [Rev. of : Gould, H. P. Peach grow-
ing. (Rural Science Series.) xxi + 426 p., 32 pi. Macmillan Co.: New York, 1918.] Nature
104:49&-497. 1920.

253. Anonymous. American-grown fruit stocks. Nation. Nurseryman 28^:215. 1 fig.
1920. — A brief history and description of the growing of fruit stocks in America is given.
Practically all the apple seedlings in the United States are raised in the Kaw Valley, Kansas.
Efforts to grow them on a large scale in other places have not met with marked success. —
J. H. Gourley.

254. Anonymous. A pear tree trained in an unusual way. Nation. Nurseryman 28': 180.
1 fi^. 1920. — A description is given of a pear tree trained in the form of a table. It is grow-
ing on the grounds of Bobbink and Atkins Nurseries, Rutherford, New Jersey. — J. H.
Gourley.

255. Anonymous. La multiplicacion de las plantas. [The propagation of plants.] [Rev. of
Calvino, Mario. Tratado sobre la multiplicacion de la? plantas. 264 p. 244 photographs.
Graphical Arts Press: Habana, 1920.] Rev. Agric. Com. y Trab. [Cuba] 3: 149-151. 1 fi^.
1920.— The table of contents of the book is included in the review.— F. M. Blodgett.

256. Anonymous. Problems of the fruit grower. [Rev. of: Bedford, Duke of, and
Spencer Pickering. Science and fruit growing: being an account of the results obtained at
the Woburn experimental farm since its foundations in 1894. xxii + 351 p. Macmillan and
Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 104: 558-559. 1920.

257. Anonymous. Tests with unfruitful plxmi trees. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 9.
1920. — Pruning, ring-barking, and root-pruning gave no results. Interpollination was
effective. — N. J. Giddings.

258. Anonymous. The avocado in Trinidad. Agric. News [Barbados] 19:46. 1920.—
A review of a paper on the subject by W. G. Freeman in the Bulletin of the Department oj
Agriculture, Trinidad, in which the history, process of selection, etc., are discussed. A
paper by R. O. Williams on budding the avocado is also reviewed. — J. S. Dash.

259. Brainerd, Ezra, and A. K. Peitersen. Blackberries of New England.— Their
classification. Vermont Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 217. 84 p., 36 pi. 1920.

260. Campbell, J. A. Natural cool-air fruit storage. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20:
166-167. 1920.— The methods in use in the United States are briefly outlined. It is feared
that the same methods could not be used in New Zealand. — A^. J. Giddings.

^ 261. Campbell, J. A. The fruit industry in North America. New Zealand Jour. Agric.
20: 24^27. 1920.— One of a series of articles. This deals with cooperation and standardiza-
tion as practiced in the fruit regions of the United States and Canada. — N. J. Giddings.

42 HORTICULTURE Bot. Absts., Vol. VII,

262. Campbell, J. A. The fruit industry of North America. New Zealand Jour. Agric.
20: 110-113. 1 fig. 1920. — The eastern and western sections of the United States are com-
pared as to methods of apple culture and orchard practice. The possible relation of seedling
stock to tree growth is also discussed. — A'^. J. Giddings.

263. GuNLiFFE, R. S. The propagation of some tropical fruits. Agric. News [Barbados]
19:52-53, 150-151. 1920.— The first part of the article deals principally with the avocado
pear. Varieties of this fruit are discussed, and detailed information is given as to methods
of budding and grafting, including seed-grafting. In the latter part of the article, the mango
is dealt with in the same manner. — J. S. Dash.

264. Darrow, William H. Government inspection of fruit shipments. Rept. Vermont
State Hortic. Soc. 17: 21-34. 1919.— This is an account of the w^ork of the Federal Govern-
ment, through the Bureau of Markets, to assist the fruit growers all over the country in
marketing their crops. — George P. Burns.

265. Button, W. C. Dusting and spraying experiments of 1918 and 1919. Michigan
Agric. Exp. Sta. Special Bull. 102. 50 p., 20 fig. 1920.

266. EsAM, G. Fruit cool storage. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 10-18. 1920.— Sev-
eral varieties of apple and of pear were tested to determine best time for picking, best method
of picking and handling, effects of delay between picking and storing, and possible advantage
of wrapping. Fruits which had reached the stage denoted by a change of ground color kept
best in storage. Fruits which were well advanced and showed good color deteriorated too
quickly when removed. The importance of care in handling w^as shown in various tests.
Delay in placing the fruit in storage greatly reduced its keeping quality. Wrapping was
found to give better fruit, but this is to be tested further. — N. J. Giddings.

267. Galloway, Beverly T. Some promising new pear stocks. Amer. Nurseryman
322:34-35. 1920.

268. Gasser, G. W. Report of the work at Rampart Station. Rept. Agric. Exp. Sta.
1917: 34-57. PI. 3, 4. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 26.

269. Georgeson, C. C. Reports from seed and plant distribution. Rept. Alaska Agric.
Exp. Sta. Rept. 1917:86-90. 1919.— Gives extracts from letters received from residents of
Alaska giving their experience with the seeds and plants distributed by the Alaska
stations. — J. P. Anderson.

270. Georgeson, C. C. Summary of the work at the several stations. Rept. Alaska Agric.
Exp. Sta. 1917:5-33. 2 -pi. 1919.— After a review of weather conditions the author sum-
marizes the work carried on at the Sitka, Rampart, Fairbanks, Kodiak, and Matamuska
stations, and gives notes on cooperative work. The Sitka station is devoted to horticulture.
Notes are given on potatoes, including the growing of plants from seed balls. Notes are
also given on other vegetables, such as cabbage, cauliflower, broccoli, Brussels sprouts,
kale, kohl rabi, turnips, radishes, beets, carrots, onions, peas, broad beans, snap beans,
asparagus, rhubarb, lettuce, celery, garden cress, parsley, and herbs. Beets, onions, snap
beans, asparagus, and most herbs are not adapted to the climate, but the others mentioned
above do well. In the orchard some apples blossomed, but owing to an unfavorable season
no fruit matured. Gooseberries and currants did not fruit as well as usual. Raspberiies
{Rubus strigosiis) produced fruit despite an unfavorable season. Strawberry-breeding work
was carried on, and 1333 seedlings set out the previous season received numbers. A large
amount of nursery stock was distributed to settlers. Reports are made on the behavior of
30 species of shrubs and of several shade trees. Thirty-five species of hardy perennial plants
are reported favorably and 27 unfavorably. Of annual flowering plants 24 species are
reported favorably and 13 unfavorably. All annual sand perennials listed are well-known
sorts. Roses are also being tested in the trial grounds. Work at the other stations is given
in more detail bv the assistants in charge of each. — J. P. Anderson.

No. 1, February, 1921] HORTICULTURE 43

271. Goodwin, W. T., and W. C. Hyde. Cooperative fruit variety testing. New Zealand
Jour. Agric. 20: 178-180. 1920.— The variety orchards are 7 years old and include about
75 varieties of apple, 24 varieties of pear, and several varieties of apricot, plum, and cherry.
Tree growth and fruitfulness are the chief factors considered. — A'^. J. Giddings.

272. Gould, H. P. Fruit trees stocks used in propagation. Amer. Nurseryman 32=:
42-44. 1920.

273. Gould, W. M. Production of nursery stock. Rept. Vermont State Hortic. Soc.
17: 12-20. 1919. — The problems confronting the grower of nursery stock, including both
fruit-producing trees and plants for ornamental use, are discussed, chiefly from the stand-
point of production. — George P. Burns.

274. Halligan, C. P. Increasing the production of the bearing apple orchard. Michigan
Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ. 43. 18 p., 6 fig. 1920.

275. IIolde.v, Bertha A. Ways of using surplus fruits. Rept. Vermont State Hortic.
Soc. 17:43-46. 1919.

270. Howard, W. L. Brown rot of apricots and its prevention. Better Fruit 15': 7.
1920.

277. Lewis, C. I., F. R. Brown, and A. F. Barss. Observations on the evaporation of
prunes. Better Fruit 15^:5, 29-31. 1920. — A reprint from Oregon Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull.
145 (1917).

278. Magness, J. R. Investigations in the ripening and storage of Bartlett pears. Jour.
Agric. Res. 19:473-500. 8 fig. 1920. — Fruits grown in Pacific-coast regions and picked at
intervals from early summer until after the commercial picking season, were analyzed
within a few days after picking and after being in storage Ij to 35 months at temperatures of
70', 40^, and 30° F. The total sugar in freshlj' picked fruit showed a uniform increase as the
season advanced, the less rapid increase in reducing sugars during the latter part being
counterbalanced by a greater accumulation of sucrose. Pears ripening at 70° contained the
highest percentage of sugar, those ripening at 40° the lowest, and those held at 30° for 6 to
14 weeks an intermediate amount. The acid content decreased with an advance of the season
in pears fom California, but increased in fruit from Oregon and Washington. Little change
in acidity was found during storage of fruit that had been well matured at picking time;
but an increase in acidity generally occurred during storage at 70° of fruit picked before
maturity, while a decrease was often found after ripening at 40° and especially after being
held at 30° F. There was a progressive reduction in the alcohol-insoluble, acid-hydrolyzable
reducing materials as the season advanced, not only in the fruit as picked, but also in the
same fruit after ripening in storage. The percentage of solids, lowest at about the opening
of the season, tends to increase with the accumulation of sugar in late-picked lots. Although
late-picked fruit tends to become yellow more quickly than early-picked lots, it remains
free from scald and in firm, prime eating condition for a much longer period after becoming
ripe. — The application of the results as applied to commercial handling are briefly discussed.
— A. J. Heinicke.

279. Morris, R. T. Grafting with the aid of paraffin. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21:
157-159. pi. 250 1920. — A brief outline is presented, and the claim is niade that the graft-
ing season can be extended over a period of 5 months. — H. A. Glea^on.

280. MuRRiLL, W. A. Trees girdled by meadow mice. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21 :
94-97. 1920. — The habits of meadow mice and the destruction to plants caused by them are
discussed. — H. A. Gleason.

44 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

281. Ramsey, H. J., and S. J. Dennis. Operating air-cooled apple storage houses. Better
Fruit 153 : 10, 32-34. 1920.— A verbatim excerpt from U. S. Dept. Agr. Farmers' Bull. 852
(1917).

282. RicALTON, Jas. The cocoa-nut palm. Amer. Forest. 26:529-531. 3 fig. 1920—
A popular description of Cocos nucifera and its products. — Chas. H. Otis.

283. Roberts, George, and A. E. Ewan. I. Report on soil experiment fields. II.
Maintenance of fertility. Kentucky Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 228: 89-131. 1920.— See Bot.
Absts. 7, Entry 463.

284. Russell, E. J. Farming in the New Era. [Rev. of (1) Harris, T. S. The sugar
beet in America, xviii + 3^2 p., 32 pi. 1919. (2) Fletcher, S. W. Strawberry growing.
xxii + 325 -p., 24 pi. Macmillan and Co.: London, 1917.] Nature 104: 593-594. 1920.

285. Sears, F. C. Personal experiences in fruit growing. Rept. Vermont State Hortic.
Soc. 17: 8-12. 1919. — The author discusses nine important factors in the producing, grading,
and marketing of apples. — George P. Burns.

286. Stark, Lloyd C. French fruit stocks. Nation. Nurseryman 28': 193. 1920. — A
French syndicate has been organized which apparently controls a large part of the nursery
stock grown in France. As a result the prices have increased to a prohibitive figure, despite
the fact that there is a big crop this year of everything except plum, and this is more plentiful
than last year. The respective prices per thousand for last year and this year are quoted for
plums as $39 and $250, while this same stock formerly sold for $7. In France pear stock
can be purchased for $19 per thousnd, whereas the price quoted for export is $70; in France
quince stock, $17, for export $50. This situation is condemned, and it is stated that no stock
will be purchased at these prices. — J. H. Gourley.

287. SuEMATSTj, Naoji, and Kikuji Kuwatsuka. Studies on the varietal resistance of
the peach to artificial inoculations with Gloeosporium laeticolor Berk. Ann. Phytopath. Soc.
Japan V: 1-12. 1920.

288. Taylor, C. R. The auction method of distributing perishable food products. Rept.
Vermont State Hort. Soc. 17:35-43. 1919. — The author describes the auction system, and
shows that in cases of large production with a standardized commodity concentrated at
one place it is the most efficient method of disposing of the product. — George P. Burns.

289. Thornber, H. Cover crops, tillage, and commercial fertilizers. Better Fruit 15^: 5,
20-22. Aug., 1920. — Experiments conducted for eight years in the Bitter Root Valley, Mon-
tana, with clover and peas as cover crops resulted in a substantial increase of the nitrogen
content of the soil. Clover was sown in May and plowed under in the fall of the following
year. Peas were also sown in May, but were plowed in the same fall. The first soil analysis
was made after the experiment had been in progress for eight years. The nitrogen content of
the first two feet of soil of clean cultivated plots was 1514 pounds per acre, while the plot
sown to a cover crop of clover contained 3019 pounds per acre. Another plot sown to clover
but cut each year, the hay being removed, showed a total nitrogen content of 2167 pounds.
The plot on which peas were used as a cover crop had 2375 pounds of nitrogen per acre. The
yield of fruit (apples) was highest on the clover plot on which the clover had been plowed
under, and lowest on the clean cultivated plot. The writer believes that growing a leguminous
cover crop is by far the best and most reasonable way of supplying the soil with humus and
nitrogen. — A. E. Murneek.

290. Watson, John. Aphis-resistant apple stocks. Nation. Nurseryman 28^: 213-214.
1920. — The nurserymen of America must come to appreciate to a greater extent the impor-
tance of securing nursery stock which will be resistant to aphis injury. The influence of the
stock upon the scion as well as the influence of the scion on the stock is recognized. For

No. 1, February, 1921] HORTICULTURE 45

instance, apple grafts of Bechtel's Crab and of Transcendant will compel a far better root
system in two years than scions of Baldwin or Yellow Transparent on seedlings of exactly
the same grade.— Of all aphis-resistant stocks the Northern Spy is the best. It is largely
used in England, South Africa, Australia, and New Zealand. The suggestion is made that
the time will probably come when California will use nothing else. In Australia, where
woolly aphis is a prolific pest, the nurserymen have developed more than 25 varieties of
resistant stocks, but Northern Spy furnishes fully 95 per cent of the apple stock used. —
Methods for propagation of the stock are given, which are much like those used for Paradise
and Doucin stocks. — /. H. Gourley.

291. Whitten, J. C. Transplanting deciduous fruit trees. Better Fruit 15^: 19-20.
Sept., 1920. — Reprinted from Monthly Bulletin of the Dept. of Agr., State of California,
vol. 9, No. 3, March, 1920.

FLORICULTURE AND ORNAMENTAL HORTICULTURE

292. Anonymous. Awbury Arboretum. Brooklyn Bot. Card. Rec. 9:23-24. Jan.,
1920.— See Bot. Abstracts 7, Entry 77.

293. Anonymous. Koelreuteria paniculata. Nation. Nurseryman 28*: 198. 1920. — A
description of the tree is given, with conditions for growth, and a recommendation is made
to extend its planting for lawns. — /. H. Gourley.

294. Anonymous. Oxydendrum arboreum. Nation. Nurseryman 28*: 196. 1920.— A
description of the sour-wood tree. — /. H. Gourley.

295. Anonymous. Propectus of courses offered by the Brooklyn Botanic Garden, 1920.
Brooklyn Bot. Card. Record 9: 1-18. Jan., 1920.

296. Anonymous. Sweet pea flowering in the West Indies. Agric. News [Barbados]
19: 105. 1920.— All efforts of horticulturists in the West Indies to cultivate the American
and European sweet peas { Lathy r us odoratus) have resulted in failure to produce flowers in
spite of the vigorous vegetative growth made by the plant. Dr. S. C. Harland at last
succeeded in obtaining a single flowering spike after 3 months' growth, from a pink variety
of the Spencer type procured from the United States Department of Agriculture. The
flowers were very small and without scent. — J. S. Dash.

297. Anonymous. The climbing Polygonum. Nation. Nurseryman 28^:200. 1920.—
Notes are given regarding P. Baldschuanicum and P. Auberti.—J. H. Gourley.

298. Brewster, A. A. Flowers of Haemodorum, blood root. Australian Nat. 4: 152.
1920.

299. Brixton, N. L. About Paulownia trees. Jour. New York Bot. Card. 21: 72-73.
1920. — Young Paulownia trees commonly grow 8-12 feet in a season and produce leaves as
much as 30 inches in diameter. After 3 years they grow more slowly and become eventually
60 feet high or more. — H. A. Gleason.

300. Clarkson, Edward Hale. The story of a fern garden. II. Amer. Fern. Jour.
10:82-87. 1920.

301. Cowell, Arthur Westcott. Awbury Arboretum Address. Bull. Geog. Soc.
Philadelphia 17: 98-102. July 1919.— See Bot. Abstracts 7, Entr.

302. Gleason, H. A. Organization of The American Iris Society. Jour. New York Bot.
Gard. 21: 39-40. 1920.— The society was organized on Jan. 29, 1920, to promote the cultiva-
tion and further development of Iris in America. — H. A. Gleason.

46 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

303. Howe, M. A. The 1920 dahlia border. Jour. New York Bot. Gard. 21: 138. 1920.

304. Memmler, Hans. Paphiopedilum Rothschildianum und die Kultur der iibrigen
mehrbliitigen Frauenschuharten. [Paphiopedilum Rothschildianum and the culture of the
other several-flowered ladyslippers.[ Orchis 14: 17-21. 1920. — Short descriptions are given
of P. Rothschildianum, its numerous hybrids, and closely related species. Cultural directions
are included. — E. B. Payson.

305. MiETHE, E. Cjrpripedium insigne Wall, und einige seiner Varietaten. [Cypripedium
insigne Wall, and some of its varieties. [ Orchis 14: 4-7. 1920.

306. Nash, G. V. Hardy woody paints in The New York Botanical Garden. Jour. New
York. Bot. Gard. 18:65-68, 86-90, 111-115, 137-140, 167-170, 189-192, 203-207, 217-224, 246-
250, 259-263. IDEM. 19: 11-15, 58-62, 86-91, 108-111, 139-142, 167-171, 192-196, 222-225,
293-296, 315-318. 1918; 20: 11-14, 41-45, 67-70, 87-90, 107-111, 128-132, 144-148, 164-167,
221-225, 232-235. 1919; 21:56-60, 74-77, 119-124. 1920.— A complete enumeration of the
hardy woody pants cultivated in the botanical garden, with their location on the grounds
and their natural distribution. — H. A. Gleason.

307. Sands, W. N. Some tropical variegated-leaved plants. Agric. News [Barbados]
19: 154-155, 171. 1920. — The following are mentioned as the plants chiefly grown for the
color effects of their foliage: varieties of Dracaena, Acalypha, Codiaeum (Croton), Caladium,
Graptophyllum, Coleus, Dicffenhachia, Agave, Aloe, Begonia, Maranta, and Tradescantia,
together with Pandanus Veitchii, Panax Victoriae, Ficus elastica var., Furcroea cubensis,
Aralia Guilfoylei, Sanchezia nobilis, Cissus discolor, Hibiscus rosa-sinensis, var. Cooperi,
Phyllanthus nivosus. Several of these are discussed in detail, information being given as to
the appearance of the leaves, the causes of variations, and the inheritance of the phenomena.
Several plants which are not well known in the West Indies but which are under cultivation
at the John Innes Horticultural Institution, Surrey, England, are also dealt with. — J. S.
Dash.

308. ScHLECHTER, R. Die Verbreitung und das Auftreten der Orchideen in Europa nebst
Winken uber ihre Kulture. [The distribution and occurrence of orchids in Europe together
with hints as to their culture.[ Orchis 13: 19-25, 35-40. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 541.

309. Snodgrass, M. D. Report of the work at Fairbanks Station. Rep. Alaska Agric.
Exp. Sta. 1917:57-72. PL 5-7. 1919.

310. Waugh, F. a. How to improve home grounds. Rept. Vermont State Hortic. Soc.
17:62. 1919.

311. WoLTER, P. Die Anzucht der Odontoglossum aus Samen. [The raising of Odonto-
glossum from seed.] Orchis. 13: 12-13. 1919. — Odontoglossum seeds were sown in glasses on
sterilized Sphagnum and Polypodium to which a mixed culture of root fungi had been added.
More than a thousand seedlings were obtained which in the third year are beginning to
bloom. — E. B. Payson.

VEGETABLE CULTURE

312. Anonymous. Onion growing in Grenada. Agric. News [Barbados] 18: 374-375.
1919. — Experiments show that onions can be profitably grown. Two crops per annum may
be obtained. The yield per acre, as calculated from the experiments, was 3.38 tons of market-
able onions. — /. S. Dash.

313. Anonymous. The storage of onion seed in the Tropics. Agric. News [Barbados]
18:375. 1919. — Experiments carried out in Grenada have shown that onion seed can be
successfully kept for at least nine months when placed in air-tight containers in the presence
of calcium chloride. — /. S. Dash.

No. 1, February, 1921] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 47

HORTICULTURE-PRODUCTS

314. Fabre, J. -Henri. Precedes modernes de vinification en Algeria et dans les pays
chands. [Modern methods of wine mailing for Algeria and the warm regions.] 2 ed. 184 V-
J. -Henri Fabre : Maison-Carre, 1920.

315. Jones, J. Cacao production in Dominica. Agric. News [Barbados] 19:91. 1920. —
Attention is drawn to the fact that owing to the losses of trees during the hurricanes of 1915
and 1916 (in the latter over 10,000 trees were lost on the estates and even more from the
peasants plots) and to the large amount of cacao smuggled to the neighboring foreign islands
where the product was in great demand, the figures of export given by the Customs Depart-
ment are hardly an index of the production. These figures are: 1917, 3169 cwt. ; 1918, 4239
cwt.; and 1919, 3214 cwt. for the months of January to November. The writer remarks that
while the trees which survived the hurricane have returned to pre-hurricane production,
little or no effort has been made to replace the trees destroyed. — J. S. Dash.

MORPHOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY OF VASCULAR

PLANTS

E. W. SiNNOTT, Editor

316. Andrews, E. F. Habits and habitats of the North American Resurrection Fern.
Torreya 20: 91-96. 1920.

317. Anonymous. Applied plant morphology. [Rev. of : Barber, C. A. Studies in Indian
sugar canes. Mem. Dept. Agric. India Bot. Ser. 10: 39-153. June, 1919]. Nature 104: 578.
1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 7.

318. Burns, George P. Eccentric growth and the formation of redwood in the main stem
of conifers. Vermont Agric. E.\p. Sta. Bull. 219: 1-10. PL 4, 10 fig. 1920.— This bulletin
is a discussion of the relative importance of compression and gravity as factors in the pro-
duction of redwood in conifers, based on experimental work in the greenhouse and in the open
on spruce and white pine. The author concludes that compression does not stimulate the
cambium to rapid division to produce redwood. The pressure of mechanical forces did cause,
in the white pine, a differentiation into summer wood and spring wood, but no redwood for-
mation. The conclusion is, therefore, that the production of redwood is a morphogenic
response of the tree to the stimulus of gravity. — B. F. Lutman.

319. Chemin, E. Observations anatomiques et biologiques sur le genre "Lathraea."
[Anatomical and biological observations on the genus "Lathraea."] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot.
X, 2: 125-272. 1 pi., 88 fig. 1920. — A contribution to knowledge of parasitic plants. After
reciting the generic and specific characters in Lathraea, recognizing the five species listed in
Index Kewensis, the author presents observations on the two French species L. clandestina
and L. squamaria, dealing with root, with development, penetration and feeding of haus-
torium, with leaves present as scales bearing glands (which, according to the author's hypo-
thesis, function as excretory organs), and with germination. The author supposes that origi-
nally an accidental and partial parasitism caused adaptation to dark places, and that this
led to complete disappearance of chlorophyll and to obligate parasitism. — /. P. Kelly.

320. Church, Margaret B. Root contraction. Plant World 22: 337-340. 1 fig. 1919.

321. Gluck, H. Blatt-und blutenmorphologische Studien. [Studies in the morphology
of leaf and flower.] 284 p., 7 pi., 284 fig- Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1919. — A broad morpho-
logical survey' of stipular structures in general, of intervaginal papillae and of the leaf sheath,
with a resulting interpretation of the morphological nature of bracts and floral envelopes.
The venation of these latter organs plays an important part in any study of their nature,
and considerable emphasis is therefore placed upon it and upon the ontogenetic development
of the structures investigated. — E. W. Sinnott.

48 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

322. GoEBEL, K. Die entfaltungsbewegungen der Pflanzen und deren teleologische
Deutung. [The growth movements of plants and their teleological meaning.] 17 X 26 cm.,
vii + 4S3 p., 239 fig. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1920. — This volume is in the nature of a supple-
ment to the author's "Organographie" and is concerned -with plant movements in general,,
both those which are strictly movements of growth and development and those which are
part of the functional activity of organs. Among the subjects discussed are: the movements
of jointed organs; the nutation of shoots; the unfolding of leaves and their orientation;
developmental torsions and asymmetry; resupination in flowers; successional development;
irritability in floral organs; the behaviour of sensitive plants and the "sleep" movements of
plants. The author seeks an interpretation of all these movements from the point of view
of their usefullness to the plant, and concludes that the common conception of these phe-
nomena as adaptations is erroneous. He denies that teleology in any sense, either that of
purposeful acquirement or that of Darwinian adaptation through natural selection, has been
concerned with their origin, but believes that they have arisen fortuitously and when useful
have been seized and preserved by the organisms. — E .W. Sinnott.

323. Hamilton, A. A. Abnormal branching in a palm. Australian Nat. 4: 156-157.
1920.

324. HoLDEN, H. S. Observations on the anatomy of teratological seedlings. III. On
the anatomy of some atypical seedlings of Impatiens Roylei, Walp. Ann. Botany 34: 321-344.
106 fig. 1920. — The anatomy of the normal seedlings of Impatiens Roylei and the modifica-
tions which it has undergone in a number of abnormal seedlings are fully described. The
atypical seedlings are of two main kinds, the first being undoubtedly syncotylous, and the
second showing no macroscopic evidence of syncotyly. The members of the first group
can be arranged in a graded series in which the syncotyly becomes more and more intimate.
Its effects are (1) the suppression of the two lateral bundles of the normal cotyledon and
of the root pole on the symphysis side, (2) the reduction and ultimate disappearance of the
first epicotyledonary leaf, and (3) in extreme cases the modification of the leaves at the third
node. The seedlings of the second group which show no macroscopic evidence of syncotyly
may be either truly syncotylous or heterocotylous, and the evidence in favor of both interpre-
tations is mentioned. — W. P. Thompson.

325. Jaccard, p. Inversion de I'excentricite des branches produite experimentalement.
[The experimental inversion of the eccentricity of branches.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32: 273-281.
$ pi, 1 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 431.

326. Lecomte, Henri. Sur les principaux caracteres de structure des Bois. [The prin-
cipal characters in wood structure.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris 26: 166-171. 1920. — A study
of the dicotyledonous woods of Indo-China has been made in order to assist in the identifica-
tion of specimens from that region. The structures of secretory tissues, vessels, woody paren-
chyma and medullary rays are reviewed, and their peculiarities in various genera indicated.
— E. B. Payson.

327. Lenoir, M. Evolution du tissu vasculaire chez quelques plantules de dicotyledones.
{Development of vascular tissue in certain dicotyledonous seedlings.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot.
X. 2: 1-123. 91 fig. 1920. — Author deals with very young fibro-vascular bundles at their
passage from root, where arrangement of xylem and phloem is alternate, to stem and coty-
ledon, where collateral disposition is found. He presents and criticises two theories on
subject: (1) that which claims the splitting radially into two of the primary xylem masses
of root ("redoublement"), and the turning through 180° ("torsion") of each half in passing
up to become inner part of collateral bundle of stem or cotyledon; and (2) the theory of
successive stages, which states that conducting apparatus of plant shows an ontogenetic
series of stages — centric, excentric, alternate, intermediate, and collateral — and that there
is not a real identity of root bundle and cotyledonary bundle. Author sets forth obser-
vations on species of Veronica, Lamium, and other genera, and concludes that no true radial

No. 1, February, 1921] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 49

splitting occurs; that in all there is more or less of an inversion of the fibro-vascular bundle
upon itself; that no absolute identity of cotyledonary and radicular bundles exists, but that
always there are additions of recent tissues in higher parts. Passage from alternate to col-
lateral arrangement follows two methods. A gradual differentiation of vessels occurs along
certain lines, curved in cross-section, connecting the xylem and phloenf poles. Considered
longitudinally a progressive displacement of vessels combined with appearance of new ele-
ments in appropriate directions takes place. — /. P. Kelly.

328. MiLBRAED, J. Paraphyadanthe Mildbr. nov. gen. Flacourt. Ein interessanter Fall
von "Rhizanthie" aus Kamerun. [Paraphyadanthe Mildbr., a new genus of Flacourtiaceae.
An interesting case of "rhizanthy" from Kamerun,] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7:399-405.
Fig. A-0. 1920.

329. Nicolas, G. Biologie florale de quelques ombelliferes Nord-Africanes. [Floral
biology of some North African umbellifers.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32: 230-234. 1920.— Andro-
monoecism, or the presence of staminate and hermaphrodite flowers on the same plant, is very
rare in the plant kingdom as a whole, but is comparatively common in the Umbelliferae.
LoEW found this condition in more than forty out of sixty-six European species. Some
species are staminate, hermaphrodite, and andromonoecious in dififerent geographic regions.
To the list of sixteen species stated by Loew to be exclusively hermaphroditic in Europe,
four North African species are added: Ptychotis ammoides Koch., Daucus aureus Desf.,
Torilis neglecta Roemer & Schultes, and T. nodosa Gaertn. The andromonoecious condi-
tion holds in Scandix Pecten-Veneris L., Hippomarathrum pterochlaenum Bossier, Ferula
communis L., F. sulcata Desf., and Daucus setifolius Desf. In these forms the hermaphroditic
flowers always occupy the summits of the primary and secondary axes, while the more numer-
ous staminate flowers are either mixed with them or are grouped alone on the secondary and
tertiary axes. — L. W. Sharp.

330. Prankerd, T. L. On some new types of statocyte occurring in vascular plants.
[Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919: 335. 1920.

331. Rydberg, p. a. [Rev. of: Henry, Augustine, and Margaret G. Flood. The
Douglas Fir. Proc. Roy. Irish Acad. Sec. B. 35:67-92. PI. 12-14. 1920.] Torreya 20:
102-104. 1920.

332. Salisbury, E. J. Monocotyledonous features of the Ranunculaceae with special
reference to the floral structure. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:336.
1920.

333. Small, James. The origin and development of the Compositae. xii + SS4 p. Wil-
liam Wesley and Son: London, 1919.— A reprint of the author's series of papers under the
same title which have appeared during the last two years in the New Phytologist. (See Bot.
Absts. 2: 72, 73, 74, 75; 3: 1142; 5: 720, 721.)

334. Soueges, Ren^:. Embryogenie des Oenotheracees. Developpement de I'embryon
chez 1' Oenothera biennis L. [The embryogeny of the Oenotheraceae. The development of
the embryo of Oenothera biennis.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:946-949. 11 fig.
1920.— The 4-celled stage resembles that of most angiosperms. The upper 2 cells give rise
to the cotyledons and the hypocotyl. The middle cell develops very early into the hypo-
physis, and the lower to the few-celled suspensor. — C. H. Farr.

335. Thompson, John McLean. The morphology of the stele of Platyzoma microphyllum.
[Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1919:332-333. 1920.

336. Vuillemin, P. L'amphigonelle et la phylogenie des amentales. [The "amphigonelle"
and the phylogeny of the Amentales.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X, 1: 139-200. 1919.— Author is
adverse to use of word flower for precise scientific writing; amphigonelle is his term for type of

50 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES [Bot. Absts., Vol. VII,

reproductive apparatus widespread in lower groups of Dicotyledons, especially in Amentales.
He distinguishes three stages of evolution of reproductive apparatus or "gonelle:" (1) Am-
phigonelle, which represents lowest degree of differentiation among Dicotyledons, and is
characterized by diffuseness, for axis is polycentric — i.e., with many centers of growth;
(2) Acrogonelle with*a concentration of parts making a monocentric axis; and (3) Anthogonelle,
which is set off from preceding by development of corolla. The last corresponds best with pop-
ular conception of flower. Bound up with above ideas is author's theory of stem evolution —
that there are two principal stages, the stage of the stipe with its Jrondomes and stage of
the caulome with its phyllomes. The amphigonelle is considered stipular in character, as shown
in polycentric axis; its receptacle is broken up into gonoclines, each of which builds a part
of the gonelle called gonelette. The amphigonelle is one of the characteristics of Amentales;
and the catkin, capitulum, or glomerulus are amphigonelles rather than flowers or inflores-
cences. Amentales afford opportunity to study modifications of amphigonelle and its transi-
tion to acrogonelle. Author devotes most of work to morphological analysis of class Amen-
tales, applying above and other details of his conceptions. — In a second (smaller) portion he
presents his ideas of the phylogeny of class, in which he includes the following orders: Jug-
landales, Salicales, Casuarinales, Cupuliferae, Myricales, Piperales, and Chloranthales. —
James P. Kelly.

337. Winkler, Hans. Verbreitung und Ursache der Parthenogenesis im Pflanzen— und
Tierreiclie. [The occurrence and causes of parthenogenesis throughout the animal and plant
kingdoms.] vi + 231 p. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1920.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES

Alexander W. Evans, Editor

338. Anonymous. Sphagna. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23 : 205-210.
1918. — The species of Sphagnum listed number 33 and represent the specimens offered for
exchange by the Club during 1917. Several of the species include named varieties and forms.
Critical notes by J. A. W[heldon] are interspersed throughout. — A. W. Evans.

339. Anonymous. True mosses. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23:210-214.
1918. — Under the "true mosses" only the Acrocarpi are included. The species listed num-
ber 65, and critical notes are furnished by R. N. M[eldrum], W. E. N[icholson], and J. A.
W[heldon]. — A. W. Evans. .

340. Anonymous. Pleurocarpi. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23 : 214-217.
1918. — The pleurocarpous mosses listed number 33, and the critical notes included are by H.
N. D[ixon], W. I[ngham], and J. A. W[heldon]. — A. W. Evans.

341. Anonymous. Hepatics. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23:217-219.
1918. ^The species listed include 5 Ricciae, 33 Jungermanniales, and 1 Anthoceros. Lepidozia
intermedia Schiffn. is recognized as a valid species, although Schiffner had proposed it pro-
visionally. The critical notes are by H. H. K[night] and S. M. M[acvicar]. — A. W. Evans.

342. Anonymous. Synopsis of the European Sphagna [Corrections and additions]. Moss
Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 23:219-221. 1918.— The data here given are supple-
mentary to J. A. Wheldon's work, published under the above title. The "additions" relate
to varieties and forms of 19 species of Sphagnum, all supposedly new to the British Isles.
Two of these are varieties of S. franconiae Warnst., a species not included in earlier lists of
British Sphagna. — A. W. Evans.

343. Anonymous. Sphagna. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 229-234.
1919. — The species of Sphagnum listed number 26 and include numerous varieties and forms.
As in the previous Annual Report many of the specimens cited are accompanied by critical
remarks, signed "J. A. W[heldon]." — A. W. Evans.

No. 1, Febuuary, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES 51

344. Ano.xymous. True mosses. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 234-241.
1919 —The acrocarpous mosses listed number 9G and include 6 species from continental
Europe and 1 each from New Zealand and Canada, the remaining species being all repre-
sented by British specimens. Critical notes by H. N. D[ixon], H. H. K[night], W. E.
N[iCH0LS0i\], P. G. M. R[hodes], and W. I[ngham] accompany the citations, one of the
most important of these notes relating to Dicranum Bonjeani var. alaium Barnes.— A. W.
Evans .

345. Anonyjious. Pleurocarpi. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 241-243.
1919.— Except for 1 species from Switzerland the 35 pleurocarpous mosses listed are all from the
British Isles. Hypnum fluitans var. atlanticum Ren. and //. uncinatum var. plumulosum
Schp. are discussed at some length by J. A. W[heldon], and shorter notes by the same writer
and by W. I[ngham] are included. — A. W. Evans.

346. Anonymous. Hepatics. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 24: 244-247.
1919.— The 6(5 species listed include 5 from Tasmania, 3 from continental Europe and 1 from
Africa, the remainder being represented by British specimens. Notes by P. G. M. R[iiodes],
H. H. K[night], and S. M. M[acvicar] accompany the citations, the note by the last having
reference to the recently described Herberta Hntchinsiae (Gottsche) Evans.— A. W. Evans.

347. Anonymous. Sphagna. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 25: 257 259.
1920.— The Sphagna distributed during 1919 numbered 25 species, several of which were
represented by numerous varieties and forms. One specimen came from Canada, the others
from the British Isles. A few short critical notes by J. A. W[heldon] are included in the
report. — A. W. Evans.

348. Anonymous. True mosses. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 25:259-264.
1920.— Both the Acrocarpi and the Pleurocarpi are here included under the "true mosses,"
97 species in all being listed. Of the specimens cited 14 came from Scandinavia, 7 from other
parts of continental Europe, 4 from Canada and the remainder from the British Isles. The
notes accompanying the citations of specimens are by H. N. D[ixon], D. A. J[ones], H. H.
K[night], W. E. N[icholson], W. I[ngham], and J. A. W[heldon].— .4. W. Evans.

349. Anonymous. Hepatics. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept. [York] 25: 264-266.
1920.— Of the 46 species listed 10 came from continental Europe, the others from Great
Britain. All except 3 are Jungermanniales. H. H. K[xight] and D. A. J[ones] have con-
tributed a few critical remarks. — A. W. Evans.

350. Brotherus, V. F. Contributions a la fiore bryologique de I'Ecuador. [Contribu-
tions to the moss flora of Ecuador.] Rev. Bryologique 47: 1-16. 1920.— The present report
is based on a collection of mosses made in 1909 and 1910 by the late Abbe Allioni in the
provinces of Oriente and Azuay, Ecuador. The majority of the specimens came from
Oriente, a region heretofore unknown bryologically. In the first part of the report (which
is to be continued) 95 species belonging to 19 families are listed with definite data regarding
stations. The families most largely represented are the Neckeraceae with 25 species, the
Dicranaceae and the Pottiaceae with 12 each. The following species, 20 in all, are described
as new: Barbula ecuadoriensis , B. hijalinobasis , B. linguaecupes, Breulelia Allionii, B.
brachyphylla, B. reclinata, Bryum Allionii, Campylopus tener, Fissidens Allionii, F. altolim-
batus, Grimmia Allionii, Hyophila grossidens, Molendoa subobtusifolia, Pilopogon macro-
carpus, Pilotrichella Allionii, Pleurochaete ecuadoriensis, Porothamnium gracile, Syrrhopo-
don macrophyllus, S. subrigidus, and S. subscaber. The following represent new combinations :
Campylopus liliputanus (C. Miill.) Broth. {Pilopogon liliputanus C. Mtill.) and Porotricho-
dendron superbum (Tayl.) Broth. {Leskea superba Ta.j\.).—A. W. Evans.

351. LuisiER, A. Les mousses de Madere. [Mosses of Madeira.] Broteria, Ser. Bot.
18:79_97_ 1920.— This is the eighth article of a series previously noticed, which discusses
completely the mosses of Madeira. The present installment covers the two families Sema-

52 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

tophyllaceae and Brachytheciaceae. Besides the usual data upon collections and local dis-
tribution, the author gives detailed notes upon the species or varieties listed below, all of
which are of restricted occurrence or little known. These species are: H omalothecium seri-
ceum (L.) B. & S. var. Mandoni (Mitt.) R. & C, Brachythecium CardotiWint., Oxyrrhynchium
orotavense R. & C, Rhynchostegiella Bourgeana (Mitt.) Broth., Rh. surrecta (Mitt.) Broth.,
and Rhynchostegium Winteri Card. [See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 156.] — E. B. Chamberlain.

352. Pearson, Wm. Hy. Apolozia Pendletonii Pearson, n. sp. Bryologist 23:50-52.
PI. 2. 1920. — This new hepatic is related to Jungermannia cordifolia Hook. It was collected
at Sisson, California. — E. B. Chamberlain.

353. Wheldon, J. A. Recent new Sphagnum records. Moss Exchange Club Ann. Rept.
[York] 24: 247-252. 1919. — The specimens cited represent new county records for Great
Britain. Thirty-four species of Sphagnum are listed, including numerous varieties and forms,
some of which are here reported for the first time from the British Isles. — A. W. Evans.

354. Williams, R. S. Grimmia (Guembelia) brevirostris, sp. nov. Bryologist 23:
52-53. PI. 3. 1920. — A detailed description of a new species of moss from Plumas County,
California. — E. B. Chamberlain.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, LICHENS, BACTERIA

AND MYXOMYCETES

H. M. FiTZPATRiCK, Editor
FUNGI

355. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Blanc, Georges and Gabriel Brun. [A further case of
black-grain mycetoma (Madura Foot) in Tunisia.] Bull. Soc. Path. Exotique. Dec. 10,
1919.] Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 43-44. 1920. — Reports the seventh case found in
Tunisia of Madura Foot. This is a mycetoma. The cause was found to be a fungus closely
related to Madurella tozeuri Nicolle and Pinoy but differing in several characters and named
accordingly M. tabarkae. — E. A. Bessey.

356. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Smith, Theobald. Mycosis of the bovine foetal membranes
due to a mould of the genus Mucor. Jour. Exp. Med. 31: 115. 1920.] Jour. Comp. Path,
and Therap. 33 : 60-64. 1920. — A description of infection of foetal membranes of cattle due to
a species of Mucor closely related to M. rhizopodiformis. On inoculation into rabbits, it caused
their death. — E. A. Bessey.

357. Anonymous. The species concept among fungi. [Rev. of: Brierly, W. B. — Trans.
British Mycol. Soc. 4. Sept., 1919.] Nature 104: 708. 1920.— The author protests against
specific descriptions based on growths as found in nature, especially for species on cultivated
plants. The only exact method is by quantitative data derived from cultural treatment
under standardized physico-chemical conditions. — 0. A. Stevens.

358. Brierly, William B. The fungal species. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Sci.
1919:340-341. 1920.

359. Castellani, Aldo. The etiology of thrush. Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23:
17-22. 1 pi. 1920.— The author claims that instead of the one fungus, Oidium albicans
Robin, many fungi in the genera Monilia, Oidium, Hemispora, Willia, Endomyces, and
Saccharomyces may cause this disease. The generic differences are given. The clinical varie-
ties of thrush are described, with the causal organism for each. — E. A. Bessey.

No. 1, Februaky, 1921] MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. 53

360. Castellani, Aldo. Milroy lectures on the higher fungi in relation to human pathol-
ogy. (Lecture I.) Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 101-110. Fig. 1-9. 1920.— A brief sur-
vey is given of the discovery of fungi pathogenic to man. The general classification of fungi
is given and in particular that of the families containing such pathogenes. Notes are given
on physiology and on the use of sets of fungi for biochemical analysis. — E. A. Bessey.

361. Castellani, Aldo. Milroy lectures on the higher fungi in relation to human pathol-
ogy. (Lecture n.) Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 117-125. 10 fig. 1920.— The author
discusses thrush, broncho-mycoses, tonsillo-mycoses, certain mycoses of the nervous system
and organs of special sense, and certain mycoses of the urogenital system. A key is given
to the physiological determination of the pathogenic Monilia species, showing their reaction
to various carbohydrates, gelatin, litmus milk, etc. — E. A. Bessey.

362. Castellani, Aldo. Milroy lectures on the higher fungi in relation to human pathol-
ogy. (Lecture III.) Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23 : 133-138. 2 pi, 6 fig. 1920.— The sub-
jects treated are trichomycoses and dermatomycoses. The former affect only the hairs and
may be caused by species of Aspergillus, Penicillium and Nocardia. The true dermatomy-
coses are very numerous and caused by a great variety of fungi, which are described in some
detail. — E. A. Bessey.

363. Chalmers, Albert J., and Norman Macdonald. Bronchomoniliasis in the
Anglo-Egyptian Sudan and Egypt. Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23: 1-7. 1 pi. 1920.— The
article discusses several types of bronchomycosis and the causal fungi. The latter were
grown in culture and identified by the aid of cultural as well as morphological characteristics.
The species concerned were Monilia krusei, M. pinoyi, and M. pseudoguillermondi. A discus-
sion is given of the nomenclatorial history of the name Monilia. — E. A. Bessey.

364. Chiovenda, E. Nuova localita italiana per il Myriostoma coliliforme (Dichs.) Corda.
[New station for Myriostoma coliliforme in Italy.] Nuova Gior. Bot. Ital., Nucva Ser. 27:
7-11. 1920. — Myriostoma coliliforme was collected in Ossola (Piemootz) for the first time.
The fungus was found growing in close association with the roots of Polygonum persicaria,
forming with the latter an endotrophic relationship. Only once before, in 1902, has this
fungus been observed in Italy. — Ernst Artschwager.

365. Garrett, A. O. Some unique rusts. Utah Acad. Sci. 1:132-136. 1918. — Paper
presented to the Academy, April, 1915. — Review of recent work on life-history studies. —
D. Reddick.

366. Hemmi, Takewo. Kurze Mitteilung iiber drei Falle von Anthraknose auf Pfianzen.
[Short report on three cases of anthracnose of plants.] Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan 1^: 13-21.
1 pi, 5 fig. 1920.

367. KuNKEL, L. O. Further data on the orange rusts of Rubus. Jour. Agric. Res. 19:
501-512. PI D (colored) and 92-94. 1920.— Collections were made of the long-cycled rust,
Gymnoconia inter stitialis, and the short-cycled rust occurring on Rubus spp. about Wash-
ington, D. C. A study of these specimens has shown that the rust on the black raspberry is
always long cycled while the rust on the blackberry and dewberry is always short cycled.
Spores of the two rusts were germinated on water and Beyerinck agar at temperatures from
5° to 30°C. Spores taken from blackberry leaves always produced promycelia, while those
from black raspberry leaves produced long germ tubes. Additional morphological differ-
ences in the two rusts were observed. The spores of the short-cycled rust are small, angular,
and in mass cadmium orange, while the spores of Gymnoconia are larger, more regular, and in
mass xanthine yellow. The author considers that a genetic relationship exists between the
two rusts, since spores of the long-cycled species at times produce promycelia bearing sporidia.
The occurrence of a suppressed short cycle in Grjmnoconid leads him to believe that long-
cycled rusts are the more primitive. — \V. H. Burkholder.

54 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF FUNGI, ETC. [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

368. Namyslowski, B. Etat actuel des recherches sur les phenomlnes de la sexuality
des Mucorinees. [The status of researches on sexuality in the Mucorineae.] Rev. G6n. Bet.
32: 193-215. 9 fig. 1920. — A summarj' of the results of experimental researches on reproduc-
tion and hybridization in this group of fungi. A bibliography of 34 titles is appended. —
L. W. Sharp.

369. Rick, J. Contributio ad monographiam Agaricacearum brasiliensium. [Contribu-
tion toward a monograph of Brazilian agarics.] Broteria (Ser. Bot.) 18:48-63. 1920. — This
list contains 106 species and a few varieties, without citation of authorities except for new
species, apparently all from the province of Rio Grande do Sul. In case of species already
described, only a line or two of notes appear. In case of new species the descriptions are
more complete. Of these the author says: "In this contribution many species are described
whose identity with European species is quite probable, but not certain. I have therefore
given a full description and a new name. At the same time I have indicated the old species
with which the new is perchance identical." New species are proposed in Lepiota, Hypho-
loma, Armillaria, Tricholoma, Collybia, Pluteolus, Eccilia, Clitopilus, Claudopus, Inocybe,
Nauconia, Galera, Tubaria, Pilosace, Psilocybe, and Hygrophorus. [See Bot. Absts. 6,
Entry 20i.]—E. B. Chamberlain.

370. Thaxter, Roland. New Dimorphomyceteae. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci.
55: 211-282. 1920. — The author discusses in general the unisexual forms of the Laboul-
beniales and in particular the distinction between the genera Dimeromyces and Dimorpho-
myces. Polyandromyces is described as a new genus with one species and a variety as the
known representatives. Eleven new species of Dimeromyces and fifty-one new species of
Dimorphomyces are described. — E. B. Payson.

LICHENS

371. MoREAU, F. (M. ET MME.) Recherches sur les lichens de la famille des Pelti-
geracees. [Researches on lichens of the family Peltigeraceae.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X, 1:
29-138. 13 pi., 23 fig. 1919. — Authors are especially interested in reproduction of fungus of
the lichen and in morphological influence of one symbiont on other. Their presentation is in
three parts: (1) the fungus, (2) the alga, and (3) the alga-fungus complex. Authors empha-
size mycelium as constituting colorless part of lichen. Underground or substratal mycelium
is typical and generally neglected by students; authors call attention to occasional fusions
among underground hyphae and to evidence for method of formation of septa. Typical
mycelium appears also in the gonidial layer. Each cell is here described as having a single
nucleus and metachromatic granules. In considering medullary region and pseudoparenchy-
matous region (plectenchyma), character of walls is emphasized. Authors refer to two
kinds of reproductive bodies set free by Peltigeraceae; viz., spermatids and ascospores. They
note that status of spermatids is uncertain. They found spermatids only in genus Nephro-
mium, but did not make out fate of spermatids after being set free. Their studies showed
that ascospore formation proceeds in absence of spermatids, and they deny to latter gametic
functions. Ascospores an uncertain means of maintaining species, since a proper alga must
be met when spore germinates. Soredia are certain to lead to new lichens. A consideration
is next presented of beliefs of Stahl and Bachmann, of FuNFSTtTCK, and of Dangeard con-
cerning occurrence of sexual phenomena at formation of apothecia in fungi, and hypothesis
of Dangeard is favored. — Authors point^ out that the kind of alga (gonidia) whether of
Cyanophyceae or Chlorophyceae, determines sub-generic groups in each of three genera of
Peltigeraceae. Chlorophyceous Peltigeraceae may enclose Cyanophyceae in cephalodia.
The authors point out necessity of pure culture methods in study of lichen algae. — Mutual
relationships of alga and fungus studied in following exceptional formations which begin
with algae in unusual positions: (a) tubercles resembling very large soredia on lower sur-
face of thallus (displaced gonidia cause neighboring hyphae to assume special character);
(b) soredial aberrations; (c) foliar ramifications of thallus, and (d) cephalodia formation
due to action on hyphae of foreign alga. — Desirable further lines of study are mapped out
at close. — James P. Kelly.

No. 1, February, 1921] PALEOBOTANY 55

372. Riddle, L. W. Two publications on tropical American lichens. [Rev. of: (1) de
Lesdain, Bouly. Lichens de Mexique (Etats de Puebla et du Michoacan) recueillis par le
Frere Arsene Brouard. Brochure. PI. 1-31. 1914. (2) Wainio, Edvard. Additamenta
ad Lichenographiam Antillarum illustrandam. Ann. Acad. Sci. Fennicae Ser. A. 6: pt. 7.
1915.] Bryologist 23: 60-61. 1920. — The reviewer calls attention to these two publications,
which contains many descriptions of new species, since neither seems likely to have a wide
distribution. That upon Mexican lichens is a wholly independent publication; the other
publication, reviewer states, is received in America only at the Smithsonian Institution. —
E. B. Chamberlain.

BACTERIA

373. Bokura, Umenojo. A new bacterial disease of Gypsy-moth caterpillars. Ann.
Phytopath. Soc. Japan P: 34-55. 1920.

374. Cauda, A. Gruppi vegetal! fissatori di azoto libero. [Plant groups that fix free
nitrogen.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital. 26: 169-178. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 846.

375. Gentxer, G. Eine Bakteriose der Gerste. [A bacteriosis of barley.) Centralbl.
Bakt. 502 : 428-441. 1920. [From Absts. Bact. 4: 292. 1920.]

376. Paillot, a. Sur le polymorphisme des Bacteries. [The polymorphism of bacteria.]
Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 905-906. 2 fig. 1920. — Two bacilli which cause disease
in caterpillars are described. When in the caterpillar they present various forms. It is sug-
gested that polymorphism may in some cases be due to the effect of the tissues or liquids of the
living host.— C. N. and W. K. Farr.

377. Peterson, W. H., and E. B. Fred. The fermentation of glucose, galactose, and
mannose by Lactobacillus pentoaceticus. n. sp. Jour. Biol. Chem. 42: 273-287. 1920. — See
Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1338.

PALEOBOTANY AND EVOLUTIONARY HISTORY

E. W. Berry, Editor

378. Adami, J. G. Medical contributions to the study of evolution. 8vo, 272 p. Mac-
millan and Co. : London, 1920. Price, $7.25.

379. Anonymous. Gymnospermic history. [Rev. of: Seward, A. C. Fossil Plants:
A text-book for students of botany and geology. Vol. 4, Ginkgoales, Coniferales, Gnetales.
xvi + 543 p. University Press: Cambridge, 1919.] Nature 105:97-93. 1920. It is disap-
pointing but perhaps not surprising that the work closes with this group. (See Bot. Absts.
3, Entry 2517.)— 0. A. Stevens.

380. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Wieland, G. R. Classification of Cycadophyta. Araer.
Jour. Sci. 47: 391-406. 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1620.)] Nature 104: 509-510. 1920.

381. [B., F. O.] The origin of plant life on land. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Thalassio-
phyta and the subaerial transmigration. Bot. Mem. No. 3. 95 p. Oxford Univ. Press: Lon-
don, 1919.] Nature 104: 624. 1920. — A real contribution full of originality and of interesting
though bluff criticisms. The cautious philosopher would probably prefer greater elasticity
of the thesis. Omits reference to the important discoveries of Lower Devonian fossils in the
Rhynie-Chert and to question of transference of the tetral division in the course of descent
to a fresh position in the life cycle. — 0. A. Stevens.

56 PALEOBOTANY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

382. Berry, Edward W. Fossil plants from the late Cretaceous of Tennessee. Proc.
Nat. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 333-334. 1920.— The Gulf Coastal Plain presents a comparatively
complete paleobotanical record from the Cretaceous to the present. The two large gaps
have been the late Upper Cretaceous and the Miocene. In 1919, in western Tennessee, Dr.
Bruce Wade discovered abundant material in clay lenses of the Ripley formation — the latest
Cretaceous of the region. Remains of 124 species (86 new) have been identified. The species
are referred to 62 genera (30 extiijct), 38 families, and 25 orders; 5 ferns, 6 gymnosperms, 7
monocotyledons, and 105 dicotyledons are included. "A complete account .... will
be published by the U. S. Geological Survey." — Howard B. Frost.

383. Berry, Edward W. Fossil plants. [Rev. of: Seward, A. C. Fossil plants. Vol.
IV. Cambridge Univ. Press: Cambridge, 1919.] Plant World 22: 341-342. 1919. "On the
whole it seems to the reviewer that Professor Seward has performed a difficult task about
as well as could be expected, and despite their obvious shortcomings, which have been freely
criticised, these four volumes are a mine of information for the student interested in the
floras of the past." — {Author's summary.)

384. Berry, Edward W. New specific name. Torreya 20: 101. 1920. — Inga oligocaen-
ica Berry (Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. 103: 32. 1918.) from the Oligocene of the Canal Zone is
antedated by Inga oligocaenica Engelhardt (1898), from the Oligocene of Bohemia. The
name Inga culebrana is accordingly proposed.- — J. C. Nelson.

385. Berry, E. W. The ancestors of the sequoias. Sci. Amer. Monthly 2:207-208.
1920. — A reprint of an article which appeared in a recent number of Natural History. [See
also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 793.]—^. W. Berry.

386. Berry, E. W. The teaching of paleobotany. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 31:389-392.
1920. — Outlines the content of a universitj^ course in paleobotany. — E. W. Berry.

387. Berry, E. W. The age of the Dakota flora. Amer. Jour. Sci. 50: 387-390. 1920.—
Discusses the age of the flora found in the Dakota sandstone of the western United States and
shows that it cannot be Lower Cretaceous in age. The thesis is maintained that the Dakota
sandstone is intimately associated with the Upper Cretaceous marine transgression of the
Benton and is probably Turonian in age. — E. W. Berry.

388. Carpentier, A. Contribution a I'etude des fructifications du Culm de Mouzeil
(Loire-Inferieure). [Contribution to the study of the fructifications from the Culm of Mou-
zeil.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32:337-350. 2 pi., 5 figs. 1920. — The basin of the Basse-Loire con-
sists of two SE-NW synclines, known respectively by the names of Ancenis and Teill6-Mou-
zeil. Fossil plants of this region were described by Brongniart, but the fructifications of
the Pteridospermae were made known chiefly by. Grand 'Eury and Bureau. The author has
studied further the imprints of fructifications found here. — On the whole the Culm flora is
less rich in genera and species than the Westphalian flora of the coal basin of Valenciennes.
Among the most common impressions are those of Sphenopteris Dubuissoni, S. elegans,
and S. dissectiim (Brongt.). The Neuropterideae are rare: the genus Neuropteris is repre-
sented only by a few fragments of A'', antecedens and N. Schlehani. The Lepidodendreae,
including Lepidodendron lycopodioides, Lepidophloios laricinus, and Ulodendron, are fairly
common. — Descriptions are given of the following seeds, with or without cupules: Lageno-
spermum tenuifolium Nathorst g., {E. Bureau sp.), associated with Neuropteris antecedens
Stur and a Sphenopteris ; L. crassum n. sp., associated with Sphenopteris Dubuissoni Brongt.;
L. inflatum n. sp., possibly representing the escaped seeds of the cupule known as L. cras-
sum; L. aff. nitidulum (Heer) Nathorst, associated with Sphenopteris dissectum and one other
species; L. sp.; Carpolithus L. (cf. Rhabdocarpus turbinatus) E. Bureau sp.; C. sp. Three
types of microsporangia are described: Telangium sp., associated with Sphenopteris Dubuis-
soni; Pterispermotheca n. gen.; Cf. Diplotheca (D. stellata Kidston). Two uncertain impres-
sions, one of them known as Guilielmites, are also mentioned. — L. W. Sharp.

No. 1, February, 1921] PALEOBOTANY 57

3S9. Chaney, Ralph W. The flora of the Eagle Creek formation. Cont. Walker Mus.
2^: 115-182. PI. 5-2.2. 1920. — The paucity of described fossil floras from the Pacific coast
region renders this an important contribution. The Eagle Creek flora, as described in this
contribution, comprises 72 species, of which 38 are described as new and referred to the
genera Equisetum (?), Picea (?), Pinus, Cyperacites, SabalUes, Smilax, Phyllites, Populus,
Myrica, Hicoria, Juglans, Alnus, Betula, Conjhis, Castanea (?), Fagus (?), Quercus, Ulmus,
Liriodendron, Magnolia, Laurophyllum, Liquidarnbar, Crataegus, Prunus, Cercis, Legumino-
sites, Acer, Tilia, Nyssa, Fraxinus (?), and Carpolithus. These all appear to be well founded
except the Liriodendron. The local sections where the fossils were found along the present
Columbia River gorge, the composition, physical environment, ecology and correlation of the
flora are fully and satisfactorily discussed.— The Eagle Creek formation is entirely volcanic
in origin and stream laid. It is considered, on the basis of the intermediate character of the
flora between known upper Eocene and Miocene floras, to be of Oligocene age. The flora,
which is largely dicotyledonous, shows a striking resemblance to the mixed hardwood flora
of the eastern United States— this resemblance extending to even the relative representation
of the families, the only departures being a shortage of Salicaceae and Rosaceae and an excess
of Fagaceae and Hamamelidaceae. Oaks are the most abundant forms, both individually
and specifically. Maples and elms are also prominent elements. The flora is considered to
represent two principal distinct ecological types; namely, xerophytes that are thought to
have grown on the water poor ridges and uplands, and the contemporaneous mesophytes of
the well-watered valley bottom and sides.— £^. W. Berry.

.390. De La Vaulx, R., and P. Marty, avec introduction de Ph. Glangeaud. Nou-
velles recherches sur la f.ore fossile des environs de Varennes (Puy-de-Dome). [New
researches on the fossil flora of the vicinity of Varennes.] Rev. G6n. Bot. 32: 282-300, 327-
336, 351-368. 3 pi., 2 fig. 1920.— A study of the fossil flora of three fossiliferous beds in one
of the volcanic regions of France, based on a critical examination of the material described, by
BotTLAY (Flore Pliocene du Mont-Dore, Paris 1872) and on new collections. The paper is
prefaced by a brief account of the stratigraphy of the region by Ph. Glangeaud, who agrees
with Boulay in assigning the beds in question to the upper Miocene or lower Pliocene. The
list of fossil trees, shrubs, and herbs now reported from this locality comprises 47 forms rep-
resenting 23 families; 37 of them have been specifically determined. The following 14 are
newly discovered by the authors: Ginkgo biloha Kaempf., Sparganium sp. CeUis Japeti
Ung., Lauris nobilis L., Carya minor Sap. et Mar., Paeonia motiton Sims., Myriophyllitis sp.,
Cercis slUquastrum L., Raphiolepis indica Lindl., Bumelia Rieufi Marty, Fraxinus oregona
Nutt., Ilex decidua Walt., Ilex balearica Desf., and Rosa Glangeaudi Marty. A list of about
50 species of diatoms is also included.— After a discussion of the palaeontological and geologi-
cal evidence the authors conclude that the fossil flora of Varennes was buried during the
Mio-Pliocene in the sediments of a lake into which volcanic ashes were thrown. This flora
was continental, montane, and temperate, less than one-tenth of the species being sub-tropical.
The mean temperature in this region during the Mio-Pliocene was probably from 12° to
14°C. Since that time some of the elements of the flora have migrated 5 geographical degrees
southward. — Bibliography of 67 titles. — L. W. Sharp.

391. Galipps, V. Recherches sur la resistance des microzymas a Paction du temps et
sur leur survivance dans I'ambre. [The longevity of microzymas and its survival in amber.]
Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:850-858. 1920.— A microscopic examination of amber
after dissolving in ether reveals the presence of microzymas and of ovoid and rod-shaped
bacilli.— C. A^ and W. K. Farr.

392. Lull, R. S. Organic evolution. 8vo, 729 p. The Macmillan Co. : New York, 1920.
Price, $3.25.

393. MacFarland, J. M. The causes and course of organic evolution. 8vo, 875 p. The
Macmillan Co. : New York, 1920. Price, H.OO.

58 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

394. Metcalf, Matnard M. Upon an important method of studying problems of relation-
ship and of geographical distribution. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 432-433. 1920.—
A family of "frogs," the Leptodactylidae, occurs in tropical and south-temperate America,
and elsewhere only in Australia and Tasmania. This fact has been explained as a result of
former land connection or as a result of convergent or parallel evolution. In both conti-
nents, however, the Leptodactylidea have parasites of the genus Zelleriella, "and the Austral-
ian Zelleriellas so closely resemble the American forms that it is difficult to separate them
specifically." Since it is extremely improbable that both host and parasite have evolved
so similarly on distant continents, the hypothesis of former land connection is held to be
definitely confirmed. This procedure of considering together the distribution of host and
parasite is strongly recommended, as promising definite solution of various problems of
phylogeny, migration, etc., with both animals and plants. — Howard B. Frost.

395. T., E. N. Botany at the British Association. Nature 104: 520-521. 1920.

PHYSIOLOGY

B. M. DuGGAR, Editor
Carroll W. Dodge, Assistant Editor

GENERAL

396. LiNHART, G. A. A new and simplified method for the statistical interpretation of
biometrical data. Univ. California Publ. Agric. Sci. 4: 159-181. 12 fig. 1920.— Describes
graphic methods for determining the values of k and h in the fundamental equation,

y = ke-'^'^' (1)

When X = 0, y will equal k. Therefore k may be defined as the probability of error zero
and as the largest number of measurements of a given set having the same numerical value.
Substitution of yo for k gives

1. = e-'^'^' (2)

By use of logarithms this may be transformed into the linear equation,

log (2.303 log- J = 2 logx + 2 log A (3)

log (log -) =2 1ogx + 2 log ;i- 0,3623 (4)

Let X = 2 log /i - 0.3623, then

log (log ^\ =2\ogx +K (5)

This will be recognized as the equation to a straight line having a slope of 2 and intercept
K, when log ( log — ) is plotted as ordinate and log x as abscissa. The vajue of K being thus

easily determined the value of h, the index of precision, may be calculated from

K + 2logh- 0.3623
and is

^ K + 0.3623 f..

h = (10) 2 ^6)

No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 59

The value of hx corresponding to the integral value 0.5 {vide probability integral table)
is 0.4769. Then

_ iv +0.3623

X = 0.4769 (10) 2 (7)

which gives the probable error of a single observation. The probable error of the mean is
equal to the probable error of one observation divided by the square root of the total number
of observations,

X 0.4769 , . _ ^±M^

X(i —

= — r^- (10) 2 (8)

Vn Vn

In the case of skew frequency distributions the above equations do not strictly apply
because of a preponderance of either positive or negative errors. For such cases the equation,

^ = e-^<'-?J. (9)

is proposed. Here m represents the numerical value of any measurement and mo the value of
the geometric mean. This may be transformed into the equation,

log - = 2.303 h^ (log — Y (10)

log ^" = xflog ^Y ... (11)

y \ mo/

Numerous examples of the use of the equations are given, in which the values obtained
are compared with those computed by other methods. — H. S. Reed.

DIFFUSION, PERMEABILITY

397. Priestley, J. H. Root pressure. [Abstract.] Rept. British Assoc. Adv. Sci.
1919:337. 1920.

WATER RELATIONS

398. Harris, F. S. The effect of soil moisture on the morphology of certain plants.
[Abstract.] Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 65. 1918.

399. Livingston, Burton E., and Riichiro Koketsu. The water-supplying power of
the soil as related to the wilting of plants. Soil Sci. 9:469-485. 1920.— Plants of Coleus
blumei and Triticum sativum grown in 12 mixtures of varying amounts of glass sand, clay
loam, and humus, were allowed to wilt until permanent wilting was evident. Dry, unglazed
porcelain cones ("soil points") were then thrust into the soil and the amount of water which
they absorbed in a given length of time ("water-supplying" power of soil) was determined by
removing and weighing. This amount for a 2 hour period was from 0.04-0.11 g. The
average value was the same for both plants and practically the same for all 12 soils. — W. J.
Robbins.

400. Zeller, S. M. Humidity in relation to moisture imbibition by wood and to spore
germination on wood. Ann. Missouri Bot. Gard. 7: 51-74. 1 pi, 5 jig. 1920.— The rnoisture
contents of wood at various atmospheric humidities are presented, the temperature being held
at 25°C. Graphs are given to illustrate the relation between water content and humidity,
for sap and heart-wood of both longleaf and shortleaf pine. By testing at various humidities
the moisture content of any one species of wood, it was possible to approximate the fiber-
saturation point. The moisture-humidity curves of highly resinous samples illustrate the

60 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

water-proofing effect of resin — especially above 50 per cent humidity. The germination curve
for spores of Lenzites saepiaria illustrates the fact that spore germination is greatly accel-
erated when the atmospheric humidity is high enough to maintain fiber saturation of the
wood. — A humidor for maintaining constant humidity and temperature is described. It is
provided with a dew-point apparatus for the determination of humidity, and a weighing
device by means of which the samples can be weighed without opening the humidity chamber.
—S. M. Zeller.

MINERAL NUTRIENTS

401. BoTTOMLEY, W. B. The growth of Lemna plants in mineral solutions and in their
natural medium. Ann. Botany 34:345-352. 1920. — Lemna major and Lemna yninor cannot
grow normally in Knop's or Detmer's solution, but the addition of certain organic substances
to these solutions permits rapid and healthy growth. These organic substances essential
to the metabolism of the plants are to be found in the w^ater of the ponds in which the plants
normally grow, and maintain the plants in health, although lack of sufficient quantities of
nitrates and phosphates under these conditions acts as a limiting factor, retarding their rate
of multiplication. — G. M. Armstrong.

402. DuGGAR, B. jNL Hydrogen ion concentration and the composifcion of nutrient solutions
in relation to the grov/th of seed plants. Ann. Missouri Bot. Card. 7: 1-50. 7 fig. 1920. -
For several years the author has been examining the effect of the reaction of the medium
on growth in certain physiologically balanced nutrient solutions and has secured many data
concerning the extent of change of the Ph value of the solution in which the plants have
grown, as well as concerning growth relations with the variations in active acidity. Thus in
this report of experimental work particular reference is not made to the proportions of the
different salts involved in the nutrient solutions except as they may influence the active
acidity. For this report four solutions were used, as follows: Solution A was a slight modi-
fication of Shive's solution, having the following partial volume-molecular proportions —
KH2PO4, 0.0180; Ca(N03)2, 0.0052; MgS04, 0.0150; and "soluble ferric phosphate," 0.0044
gm. per liter. Solution B was an extreme modification of the Crone solution, having the
following proportions of salts— KNO.,, 0.00495; CaS04, 0.000726; MgSO,, 0.000526; and "sol-
uble iron phosphate," 0.125 gm. per liter; this is a four-salt solution having a higher pro-
portion of iron than the usual nutrient solution. Solution C was the Livingston and Tot-
tingham solution, modified by the addition of "soluble ferric phosphate" as in Solution A—
KNO,, 0.0216; CaCHzPOJj, 0.0026; and MgSO,, 0.0150. It is assumed that the osmotic
value of solutions A and C is approximately that of Shive's solution — 1.75 atmospheres —
while that of Solution B is much less. — The culture methods employed were essentially those
described before. Seedlings of corn, field peas, and vv^heat were used. For the determination
of active acidity the standard solutions and indicators suggested by Clark and Lubs were
emploj'ed. The total green weight with the remains of the seed, or cotyledons, cut away
was used as an index to growth. In this way the health and growth of the plant is most
favorably expressed. — The experiments were conducted under a considerable range of environ-
mental conditions. "Under the most favorable conditions, the three solutions mentioned
above, without other modifications, may all yield excellent growth. Plants grown in Solu-
tion B are invariably a deeper green, presenting a finer appearance and the average of the
growth quantities is higher for wheat and corn than in either of the other two solutions. In
the unmodified Solutions A and C, the green weight of peas averages higher than in the
unmodified Solution B." Solutions A and C contain a monobasic phosphate and should
have a Ph value of about 4.5. Experience shows that Solution B varies in active acidity
from Ph 5.4 to Ph 7.1; although it is frequently 6.6 to 7.1. "Culture solutions prepared with
monobasic phosphates may, however, exhibit a hydrogen-ion concentration which is too
high for .... best growth under certain conditions, and especially is this true in the
case of wheat." Solutions made with monobasic potassium or calcium phosphate, unless
previously purified, may yield a Ph which is distinctly toxic. Correction to Ph 4.8 to 5.2 by
means of NaOH or by use, in part, of a dibasic salt generally yields better growth. Under

No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 61

conditions resulting in a high transpiration rate more alkaline solutions give better results.
"Wheat, corn, and peas are sensitive in the order named to high hydrogen ion concentra-
tion."— "Usually the addition to Solution B of small amounts of dibasic potassium phosphate,
of solid calcium carbonate, and of aluminum hydroxide has given increased yields, often
considerably above that of the unmodified solution." — The results indicate in general that
there is no "best" solution for the growth of any of the plants used for this work. When the
"Ph of the solution is considerably less than neutrality there is generally a tendency for this
to be shifted toward the neutral point," depending upon the composition of the solution and
upon the plant. — S. M. Zeller.

403. Greaves, J. E. The antagonistic action of calcium and iron salts toward other salts
as measured by ammonification and nitrification. Soil Sci. 10: 77-102. 20 fig. 1920.— See
Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 451.

404. JoHxsTo.x, Earl S. Nutrient requirement of the potato plant. Plant World 22:
329-336. 4 fig- 1919. — Difficulty was experienced in securing uniform potato plants for the
experiments. Cuttings from potato vines, and sprouts removed from tubers at an early
stage of development were not satisfactory. Somewhat older sprouts which had well devel-
oped roots at time of separation were used. The nutrient solutions employed were made
up to one atmosphere osmotic pressure with monobasic potassium phosphate, calcium nitrate,
and magnesium sulphate. Roots showed a tendency to rot in the culture solution. The
best growth was obtained in a three-salt solution in which the larger amount of the osmotic
pressure was due to calcium nitrate. — Chan. A. Shull.

405. MoLLiARD, M. Influence d'une dose reduite de potassium sur les caracteres physio-
logiques du Sterigmatocystis nigra. [The influence of an insufficient supply of potassium on
the physiological characteristics of Sterigmatocystis nigra.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris
170:949-951. 1920. — This is a comparison of cultures of Sterigmatocystis nigra containing
potassium in an amount which insures optimum development and those which have the
amount reduced. Full nutrient solutions contained 0.95 g. of KH2PO4 to 1000 cc. of water,
the potassium-low solution contained 0.0119 g. It is found that in potassium-starved cul-
ture the increase in dry weight is much slower; the sugar consumed in 20 days is equal to that
consumed in full nutrient solution in two and two-thirds days. The sugar consumed instead
of giving rise to CO2 gives rise to oxalic apid. There is an absence of conidia and black
pigment and the rapid formation of a yellow pigment. A liquid is also produced which is
soluble in the solutions and stains blue with iodine. — C. H. Farr.

406. Parker, F. W., and E. Truog. The relation between the calcium and the nitrogen
content of plants and the function of calcium. Soil Sci. 10: 49-56. 1 fi^. 1920. — A tabulation
of data on the ash content and nitrogen content of crop plants shows a close correlation
between the calcium content and nitrogen content. Potassium, phosphorus, and magnesium
show no such relation. The important agricultural plants can be divided into those having a
low calcium-nitrogen ratio and low lime requirement, and those having a high calcium-
nitrogen ratio and a higher lime requirement. The calcium neutralizes the plant acids
formed in protein metabolism. — W . J . Rohhins.

METABOLISM (GENERAL)

407. Allen, E. R. On carbohydrate consumption by Azotobacter chroococcum. Ann.
Missouri Bot. Gard. 7: 75-79. 1 fig. 1920. — With a knowledge of some of the defects of pres-
ent experimental methods for the study of the physiology of Azotohacter, three improve-
ments are suggested for cultures. They are (1) renewal of the energy source in order to in-
crease growth and to produce more marked changes in the amounts of metabolic products;
"(2) simultaneous determination of nitrogen and of residual carbohydrates at short inter-
vals" so as to obtain "a more complete picture of the growth processes of Azotohacter f and
(3) "operations to facilitate experimental manipulation and possibly obtain even better

62 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

results from mechanical agitation." One experiment lacking in the second improvement is
reported. "The results show that the rate of carbohydrate consumption in Azotobacter
cultures does not proceed in a manner similar to the rate of increase in cell numbers pre-
dicted by Duclaux Indeed, the curves resemble the antipode of the Duclaux

curve." The fact that the organism utilizes renewals of carbohydrates seems to contradict
the idea that there is an accumulation of metabolic products which are toxic to growth.
The production of such substances in very short intervals in cultures as slow-growing and
as dilute as those used in this experiment seems unlikely. — S. M. Zeller.

408. Anonymous. The red coloring matter of plant galls. [Rev. of: M. Niekenstein.
Trans. Chem. Soc. 115: 1328-1332. 1919.] Nature 104:707. 1920.— Investigation of galls on
British oak trees caused by Dryophanta divisa resulted in isolation of a red pigment to which
the name of "dryophantin" was given. This was concluded to be a diglucoside of purpuro-
gallin (the first to be found in nature) and of pathological origin. The author is of the opinion
that the other so-called anthocyans obtained from plant galls are not properly anthocyans,
but are related to "dryophantin," and he proposes to classify these under the name "gallo-
rubrones." The reviewer considers the evidence insufficient clearly to establish the absence
of anthocyan pigments. — 0. A. Stevens.

409. Anontmotjs. Scientific study of the sugar group. [Rev. of : Armstrong, E. Frank-
land. The simple carbohydrates and the glucosides. 3d ed. x + 239 p. Longmans, Green
and Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 104:526-527. 1920.— The chief import of the review is
brought out in the quotation which follows, to the effect that the book ' 'is something more than

a new and revised issue; it is to all intents and purposes a new book Students

of the sugar group will have access to a thoroughly satisfactory book." — 0. A. Stevens.

410. BiBERFELD, JoHANNES. Ergcbnissc der experimentelien Toxikologie. Teil II.
Organische Substanzen. A. Alkaloide. [Experimental toxicology. Part II. Organic sub-
stances. A. Alkaloids.] Ergeb. der Physiol. 17: 1-362. 1919.

411. CosTANTiN, J. Physiologie de I'anthocyane et chimie de la chlorophylle. [Physi-
ology of anthocyan and chemistry of chlorophyll.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X. 1 : xxxviii-lii.
1919. — The author discusses the present status of the knowledge of anthocyan and chloro-
phyll. He refers to Combes' work in 1913 in which a treatment of a yellow flavone pigment
derived from Vitis with nascent hydrogen gave a substance said to have been anthocyan.
The author states that the reverse process of oxidation of anthocyan gave yellow flavone.
The work of Willstatter confirmed Combes' conclusions. Such work linked up with the
problems concerning glucosides and Combes' experiments with absorption of these in plants
is referred to. The author calls attention to the belief of some that anthocyan results from
an oxidation. This hypothesis is supported by the discovery that oxydase distribution paral-
lels anthocyan distribution. Palladin made anthocyan one of his respiration pigments.
Wheldalb's attempt to explain anthocyan production in Antirrhinum on a genetic basis is
"curieuse" to the author, but he deems it preferable to Bateson's assumption of deter-
minants. Nicolas in 1919 suggested a study of green and purple plants of the same species
in an attempt to re-solve contradictions in oxidation and reducing theories of anthocyan for-
mation. Nicolas found greater acidity in the red-leaved varieties and the formation of these
organic acids locked up some oxygen, reducing therefore the respiratory quotient. The
using up of oxygen therefore is not directly a result of anthocyan production. Chlorophyll
is thought now to have the formula: (C20H39OOC) [C3,H29N4Mg] (COOH) (COOCH3).
Treatment with alcohol will produce a substitution of C2H5 for phytol group C2oH39 and give
Willstatter's crystallizable chlorophyll. — James P. Kelly.

412. Dangeard, p. a. La structure de la cellule vegetale et son metabolisme. [The
structure of the plant cell and its metabolism.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 709-714.
1920.

No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 63

413. Free, E. E. Sugar metabolism in cacti. [Rev. of : Spoehr, H. A. The carbohydrate
economy of cacti, Carnegie Inst. Washington, Publ. 287. 1919.] Plant World 22:308-309.
1919.

414. Gatin, C. L., and M. Molliard. Utilisation comparee de divers constituants de
la membrane par le Xylaria Hypoxylon L. [The comparative utilization of various constituents
of the cell wall by Xylaria Hypoxylon L.] Rev. G6n. Bot. 32: 216-225. 1920.— A study of the
digestive action of a wood-destroying fungus (Xylaria Hypoxylon) on isolated constituents
of the cell wall in aseptic cultures. The constituents under investigation were added to a
mineral nutrient solution made up as follows: tap water, 100 cc; potassium nitrate, 0.2 g.;
ammonium phosphate, 0.05 g. ; magnesium sulphate, 0.05 g. Glucose and starch were also
used for comparison. Of all the substances tried, pectin was the most readily utilized by
Xylaria; 1.633 g. were used in building up 0.693 g. dry weight of mycelium. Then followed
in order xylose and glucose, mannogalactan of the carob, arabinose (about half as well used
as pectin), starch, and xylane. Good growth was also obtained on corrozo and the mucilage
of flax, whereas cherry gum was only slightly used, and gelose not at all. A further experi-
ment showed lignin to be very readily utilized. — L. W. Sharp.

415. Hammarsten, Harold. Quantitative Versuche iiber Cannizzaro's Reaktion bei der
Kondensation der Acetaldehyde mit wassrigen Alkalien. [Quantitative experiments on Can-
nizzaro's reaction in the condensation of acetaldehyde by aqueous alkaline solution.] Ann.
Chem. [Liebig] 420: 262-275. 1920.— Acetaldehyde was subjected to N /2 KOH, N /3 Ba(0H)2,
or buffer salt mixtures for periods ranging from 1 to 240 hours and at temperatures of 0°, 18°,
and 50°C. At Ph 6.8 and 50° the aldehyde underwent Cannizzaro's reaction (simultaneous
oxidation and reduction) to the extent of 2 per cent in 3 hours, with no formation of wax.
The reaction extended to 3.8 per cent in 3 hours, with no wax formation, at Ph 9.6. At Ph
10.7 the Cannizzaro reaction extended to 5.8 per cent of the aldehyde in 18.5 hours, with a
yield of 10 to 20 per cent of wax. The Cannizzaro reaction is quite insignificant, relative
to the velocity of the aldol condensation; for the latter proceeds so rapidly that only very
little acid or alcohol can be formed. The limited extent of the Cannizzaro reaction at 50°
is ascribed to condensation of acetaldehyde to acetaldol, the latter decomposing to crotonic
aldehyde. — W. E. Tottingham.

416. Legroux, ReniS, and Joseph Mesnard. Vitamines pour la culture des bacteries.
[Vitamines in the culture of bacteria.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 901-904. 1920.—
It is found that certain globules are necessary for the growth and development of the bacilli
of Pfeiffer (influenza). — C. H. and W. K. Farr.

417. MuLLER, Erich. Die Dehydroxydation der Aldehyde. Mechanismus ihrer Oxyda-
tion. [The dehydroxydation of aldehydes. Mechanism of their oxidation.] Ann. Chem.
[Liebig] 420:241-263. 1920. — Dehydroxydation is electrochemical or chemical oxidation of
formaldehyde, acetaldehyde, and benzaldehyde in alkaline solution, with the production of
gaseous hydrogen and an acid. Formaldehyde yields hydrogen by the action of certain metals
which also accelerate the Cannizzaro reaction (simultaneous oxidation and reduction).
The results of experiments with CuO, CU2O and AgaO as catalysts are given. The mechan-
ism of dehydroxydation in the case of ^cetaldehj'de is supposed to proceed in two alternate
ways, with the oxyaldehyde as a primary product, as follows: (1) Acetaldehy de-water +
electrical charge = oxyacetaldehyde + hydrogen ion. And (2) Oxyacetaldehyde + electri-
cal charge = acetic acid + hydrogen ion. (The H-ion apparently functions in the reduc-
tion of aldehyde to alcohol.) Or (3) Oxycetaldehyde -f electrical charge + acetic acid -|-
molecular hydrogen. — If reaction (3) is more rapid than (2) dehydroxydation occurs, and .
hydrogen appears. — W: E. Tottingham.

418. Strand, E. [Rev. of: Lipschutz, A. Pflanze und Tier. [Plant and animal.]
J^p.ySfig. Theodor Thomas: Leipzig.] Arch. Naturgesch., Abt. A, 83, Heft 4:209. 1919.—
The author discusses the origin of the living substance of the plant and the formation of the
living substance of the human body out of food. — C. E. Allen.

64 PHYSIOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

419. TocHiNAi, YosHiHiKO. Studies on the food relations of Fusarium lini. Ann.
Phytopath. Soc. Japan 1^:22-33. 1920. — The following substances were tested as sources
of carbon: nine carbohydrates — viz., glucose, levulose, galactose, sucrose, maltose, lactose
soluble starch, inulin, and arabin — in 2 per cent solutions; six organic acids — viz., malic,
succinic, maleic, fumaric, racemic, and citric — in 1 and 0.1 percent solutions; and glycerine,
mannite, vanillin, thymol, and a-napthol in 2 per cent solutions. The chemicals were added
in the above indicated quantities to a standard nutritive solution prepared as follows,
NH.NOs, 1 g. ; KH2PO4, 0.50 g. ; Mg SO4, 0.25 g. ; and redistilled water 1000 g. As sources of
nitrogen, ammonium sulfate, sodium nitrate, potassium nitrate, peptone, and urea in 2 per
cent solutions, and acetamide, succinamide, dicyandiamide, and asparagine in 1 per cent
solutions were tested. Each chemical was added to a standard nutritive solution of the fol-
lowing composition : KH2PO4, 0.50 g. ; MgS04, (crystal) 0.25 g. ; cane sugar, 20 g. ; and redistilled
water 1000 cc. Results were checked at the end of two weeks growth. The carbohy-
drates tested gave the following dry weights in grams of mycelia: inulin 0.299; glucose
0.274; arabin 0.147; maltose 0.151; soluble starch 0.125; levulose 0.084; galactose 0.072;
sucrose 0.044; and lactose 0.039. Organic acids as sources of carbon were unfavorable to the
fungus, which could develop only in low percentages, such as 0.1 per cent. As indicated
by the growth made, the organic acids may be arranged as follows in descending order:
succinic, malic, citric, fumaric, maleic, and racemic. In the nutritive solution containing
racemic acid the d-tartaric was more readily assimilated than the 1-tartaric acid, as
determined by the change in optical activity. Mannite was a favorable source of carbon,
0.24 g. (dry weight) of mycelium being produced, while glycerine gave but 0.024 g. The
phenol derivatives prevented growth. Organic nitrogen compounds are far better sources
of nitrogen than inorganic compounds, the dry weights of mycelium in grams being as fol-
lows: peptone 0.448; urea 0.251; sodium nitrate 0.198; ammonium phosphate 0.194; ammo-
nium sulphate 0.038; and potassium nitrate 0.012. The amides are generally good sources
of nitrogen for this fungus, the following dry weights in grams of mycelia being obtained:
asparagine 0.288; acetamide 0.173; dicyandiamide 0.516; and succinamide 0.143. — L. M.
Massey.

METABOLISM (ENZYMES, FERMENTATION)

420. Andersox, J. A., E. B. Fred, and W. H. Peterson. The relation between the num-
ber of bacteria and acid production in the fermentation of xylose. Jour. Infect. Diseases 27:
281-292. 1920. — The rate of growth of Lactobacillus pentoaceticus was compared with its rate
of acid production in the fermentation of xylose. Both the plate and the direct counting
method of Breed were used for the counting of the bacteria. The volatile (acetic) and the
nonvolatile (lactic) acids were determined. It was found that the acid production is most
rapid during the period of maximum growth of the organisms, and a decline in the rate of
growth is accompanied by a decrease in acid production. The bacterial numbers reach a
maximum within 48 hours after inoculation, while the maximum acidity is found only after
several days. In the presence of calcium carbonate, the bacteria multiply more rapidly
and reach a higher number, accompanied by a more nearly complete fermentation. — Selman
A. Waksman.

421. Sherman, H. C, I. D. Garard, and V. K. La Mer. A further study of the process
of purifying pancreatic amylase. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1900-1907. 19_~0.

ORGANISM AS A WHOLE

422. Anonymous. The tenacity of prickly pear seedlings. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31:571. 1920.— Prickly pear, Opimtia sps. seedlings without water remained alive for 12
months in an office. — L. R. Waldron.

423. Chemin, E. Observations anatomiques et biologiques sur le genre "Lathraea."
[Anatomical and biological observations on the genus "Lathraea."] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. X.
2: 125-272. / pL, 88 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 319.

No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 65

424. LoTKA, Alfred J. Analytical note on certain rhythmical relations in organic systems.
Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 410-415. 1920. — A discussion of mathematical laws of
some types of periodic phenomena. Certain applications of the laws of chemical dynamics
indicate the occurrence of damped (transitory) oscillations, and only such were expected "in
the absence of geometrical, structural causes." The author finds, however, that in certain
cases his method indicates undamped oscillations. Consider a system in evolution, where
species of matter (organic or inorganic) having the masses Xi, X2 . . . Xn are character-
ized by certain parameters Q and physically conditioned by other parameters P. "For a
very broad class of cases, . . . the course of events in such a system will be represented
by a system of differential equations of the form

-^ = FiniXr, X, • • •

The author here considers especially a simple case, that of the quantitative relations between
a plant species and an animal species feeding upon it. Undamped oscillations in the abun-
dance of the species are shown to result. — Howard B. Frost.

425. MoREAU, F. (M. and Mme.) Recherches sur les lichens de la famiUe des Pelti-
geracees. [Researches on lichens of the family Peltigeraceae.] Ann. Sci. Nat. Bof. X. 1: 29-
138. IS pi, 23 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 371.

426. PiETSCH, Albert. Wie erklart sich daslange Hangenbleiben der Blatter an einigen
phanerogamen Holzgewachsen im Herbste 1919? [What is the explanation for the late reten-
tion of the foliage of several phanerogamous woody plants in the fall of 1919?] Naturwiss.
Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 150-155. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 140.

GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, REPRODUCTION

427. Bernbeck. Das Wachstum im Winde. [Growth and wind.] Forstwiss. Centralbl.
42: 27-40, 59-69, 93-100. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 113.

428. Burns, George P. Eccentric growth and the formation of redwood in the main stem
of conifers. Vermont Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 219. 10 pp., 4 pi, 10 fig. 1920.— See Bot.
Absts. 7, Entry 318.

429. Harvey, E. N. An experiment on regulation in plants. Amer. Nat. 54:362-367.
1 fi^. 1920. — An analysis of factors retarding lateral outgrowths of plants. The author recalls
the already known facts that growing stem tip or apical bud has inhibitory influences on
lower latent buds and that active root inhibits growth of others above it. He reports an
experiment to support the idea that regulatory influence of one part over another in plants is
not due to transport of materials. The author thinks that it is dependent on living proto-
plasts in the organism whose selective permeability leads to an electrical polarity that deter-
mines the biological polarity of the organism. — J. P. Kelly.

430. Reed, H, S. The dynamics of a fluctuating growth rate. Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci.
[U. S. A.] 6: 397-410. 5 fig. 1920.— This is a study of the growth rate of a selected lot of
shoots on young apricot trees, with reference not only to the type of growth, but also to the
intraseasonal periodicity of growth. The growth rate exhibited its greatest velocity in the
early part of the growing season and declined as the season advanced, exhibiting three intra-
seasonal cycles of growth. The growth during each cycle is expressed by the formula of
autocatylysis,

log — ^— = K (t - ti)

BOTANICAL ABBTBACTB, VOL. VII, NO. 1

66 PHYSIOLOGY [Bot. Absts., Vol. VII,

The growth rate for the entire season conforms to that of a chemical reaction consisting of
two unimolecular reactions, one of which alternately accelerates and retards the other,

X = 210 [1 - e- 095(1-1)] +19.1 L-.osst cos ^ t1

If growth be assumed to be proportional to the amount of active catalyst present, a method is
available for studying the dynamics of the growth process. — H. S. Reed.

MOVEMENTS OF GROWTH AND TURGOR CHANGES

431. Jaccard, p. Inversion de I'excentricite des branches produite experimentalement.
[The experimental inversion of the eccentricity of branches.] Rev. Gen. Bot. 32:273-281.
2 jpl., 1 fig. 1920. — Many authors have considered the eccentric growth of the lateral branches
of trees to be the result of the polarizing action of a geotropic excitation having its seat in the
terminal portion, and have therefore called the wood of the larger side "geotropic wood."
If growing branches are tied in the form of a circle with the upper face on the inside, thus
reversing the usual tension-compression relation of the upper and lower faces, a reversal of
the eccentricity occurs. The eccentricity is therefore due to the mechanical action of weight
(tension and compression) on the growing tissues, and not to a geotropic excitation. This
conclusion is supported by the behavior of plants kept for some months on a large clinostat.
Here also the eccentricity is reversed; because of a slight centrifugal force (1/20 gravity)
developed by the clinostat, the upper face of the branch is more strongly compressed during
one half of the rotation than is the lower face during the other half. The same stimulus,
such as longitudinal compression, accelerates wood formation in some species and retards it in
others. Conifers and dicotyledons differ in this respect. The increase in the thickness of
the wood on one side compensates for a decrease on the other; eccentricity involves no abso-
lute increase in the mass of woody tissue in a given length of the branch. — L. W. Sharp.

GERMINATION, RENEWAL OF ACTIVITY

432. Anonymous. Notes and comments. Australian Nat. 4: 160. 1920. — A seed ger-
minating in one year instead of the usual two. — T. C. Frye.

433. Lesage, p. Contributions a I'etude de la germination des spores de mousses.
[Germination of moss spores.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 166: 744-747. 1918. — The
author shows that the spores of certain mosses are capable of germination after being dried
for periods of from 3 to 7 years. In the case of Funaria hygrometrica, which proved an espe-
cially good species for experimental purposes, he found that the optimum temperature for
germination was between 21 and 22°C.; that darkness retarded the germination; and that
spores sown in distilled water germinated better if the vessels of distillation were glass rather
than copper. — A. W. Evans.

TEMPERATURE RELATIONS

434. CoviLLE, Frederick V. The influence of cold in stimulating the growth of plants.
Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6: 434-435. 1920. — The attainment of winter dormancy by
trees and shrubs is not dependent upon exposure to cold. Experiments with controlled
temperatures further indicate that a period of chilling is necessary for normal resumption of
growth in the spring; in plants kept warm throughout the winter, the spring growth is delayed
and abnormal. Exposure to cold results in transformation of stored starch to sugar, with
the consequent development of high osmotic pressures. — Howard B. Frost.

435. Matisse, G. Action de la chaleur et du froid sur I'activite des etres vivants. [Action
of heat and cold upon the activity of living organisms.] u + 556 p., 175 fig. Emile Larose;
Paris, 1919. — According to the author he has attempted in this work to correlate the viewpoint

No. 1, February, 1921] PHYSIOLOGY 67

of the physical sciences with that of physiology. He assumes that the organism is not the sum
of the functions of its organs, and that it is important to study the reactions of the organism
complete. His experiments are intended to be in this direction. While drawing something
from botanical material in the historical discussion, the experiments are based largely on
animal forms. — B. M. Duggar.

RADIANT ENERGY RELATIONS

436. Aston, B. C. Radio-active fertilizers and plant growth. New Zealand Jour. Agric.
20: 172-173. 1920. See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 457.

437. Blackman, V. H, Radioactivity and normal physiological function. Ann. Botany
34: 299-302. 1920. — The writer presents a brief resume of H. Zwaardemaker's researches
dealing with the radio-activity of certain substances in relation to physiological function.
Though the results here obtained are primarily of fundamental importance to animal physi-
ology, their probable application to plant physiology is indicated. — R. W. Webb.

TOXIC AGENTS

438. Bertrand, Gabriel. Action de la chloropicrine sur les plantes superieures. [The
effect of chloropicrine on the higher plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:858-860.
1920. — Concentrations of chloropicrine of 200 g. or less per cubic meter were tried on trees
and shrubs. This concentration was reduced progressively in an attempt to find the minimal
effect. Twelve to twenty grams gave the same effect as is found in autumnal coloration and
abscission. Two to three grams gave an effect similar to frost or anesthetfcs. * Astill smaller
amount caused the leaves to fall off without change of color or alteration in turgescence. It
was found that young leaves were less sensitive than herbaceous. It is suggested that chloro-
picrine might be found valuable in ridding plants of their leaf parasites. — C. H. and W. K.
Farr.

439. Bertrand, Gabriel. Des conditions qui peuvent modifier I'activite de la chloro-
picrine vis-a-vis des plantes superieures. [The conditions which frequently modify the effect
of chloropicrine upon the higher plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 952-954. 1920.
— In this study leafy shoots of eight species of trees were used. Concentrations were tried
between from 1 to 200 g. per cubic meter for periods of from 10 to 60 minutes. The effect
is about the same, providing the product of time and concentration is the same. Humidity
does not seem to alter the effect, nor is temperature a very important factor. — C. H. Farr.

440. Medes, Grace and J. F. McClendon. The effect of anesthetics on living cells.
Proc. Nation. Acad. Sci. [U. S. A.] 6:243-246. 1920.— Certain anesthetics were applied
to animal cells (Cassiopea) in sea water and to plant cells (Elodea) in a solution of NaHCOa
in distilled water. The effects differed with the organism and the anesthetic employed, and
with the particular cell activity or property considered. In the case of Elodea, four anes-
thetics— alcohol, ether, chloroform, and chloretone— all increased respiration and permea-
bility, but decreased photosynthesis; while they sometimes increased and sometimes decreased
protoplasmic rotation. — Howard B. Frost.

PHYSIOLOGY OF DISEASE

441. Jodidi, S. L. a mosaic disease of cabbage as revealed by its nitrogen constituents.
Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42 : 1883-1893. 1920. — This disease is characterized by denitrifica-
tion taking place in the affected tissues. The nitrates are, in part, reduced to ammonia,
whichk'is lost; and, in part, to nitrites. The latter reacts on the ammonia group of various
organic compounds and brings about the elimination of elementary nitrogen. — /. M. Brannon.

68 SOIL SCIENCE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

442. JoDiDi, S. L., S. C. MouLTON, and K. S. Markley. The mosaic disease of spinach
as characterized by its nitrogen constituents. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1061-1070. 1920. —
The author jfinds that the lower nitrogen content of the diseased tissues may safely be con-
sidered as one of the striking characteristics of the mosaic disease of spinach. The leaves
of the normal plants have higher nitric-nitrogen content than the blighted spinach. The
difference in nitrate content of healthy and blighted root is slight. The higher ammonia
content and presence of nitrites may be said, also, to be characteristic of spinach blight.
The diseased plants were found capable of building up proteins. The leaves of the diseased
plants have a smaller proportion of acid amide, basic, and non-basic nitrogen, but a larger
proportion of peptide and protein nitrogen than the corresponding normal tissues. It is
because of these findings — together with the difference in total nitrate, nitrite, and ammoniacal
nitrogen content already reported — that we logically and forcibly come to the conclusion
that the pathological condition is brought about by the process of denitrification which
takes place in the spinach tissues. — J. M. Brannon.

MISCELLANEOUS

443. Galippe, V. Recherches sur la resistance des microzymas I. I'action du temps et
sur leur survivance dans I'ambre. [The longevity of microzymas and its survival in amber.]
Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 856-858. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 391.

444. Hamblin, C. O. To infect lucerne seed with nodule organisms. Agric. Gaz. New
South Wales 31: 466. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 30.

445. T., E. N, Botany at the British Association. Nature 104: 520-521. 1920.

446. Thompson, Leonard R. Advantages of solid paraffin for sealing anaerobic fluid
cultures. Jour. Infect. Diseases 27 : 240-244. 1920. — A method is described for sealing tubes
with solid paraffin. A greater percentage of positive growths with stock anaerobic cultures
has been obtained than with parallel tubes sealed with liquid paraffin. — Selman A. Waksman.

SOIL SCIENCE

J. J. Skinner, Editor
F. M. ScHERTZ, Assistant Editor

ACID SOILS

447. Hartwell, Burt L., and F. R. Pember. The effect of dicalcium silicate on an acid
soil. Soil Sci. 10:57-60. 1920. — Pot experiments on an acid soil show that the beneficial
effect of "dicalcium silicate" on the growth of lettuce is due to its neutralizing effect. "Dical-
cium silicate" and "hydrated silica" do not appear to be of benefit because of their silicon
content. — W. J. Rabbins.

448. Martin, W. H. The relation of sulfur to soil acidity and to the control of potato scab.
Soil Sci. 9:393-409. 1920.

■ 449. MiRASOL, Jose Jison. Aluminum as a factor in soil acidity. Soil Sci. 10: 153-217.
12 pi. 1920. — Experiments were performed to determine the effect of aluminum salts alone
or in combination with calcium carbonate or with acid phosphate on the growth of sweet
clover in sand; the effect of limestone and acid phosphate on the acidity and productivity
of soil ; the effect of the removal of some aluminum from the soil on the growth of sweet clover
and whether iron and manganese are factors in the acidity of the soils investigated. Alumi-
num salts were highly toxic to sweet clover when applied in amounts chemically equivalent
to the acidity of the soil and fatal in amounts five times the acidity of the soil. Calcium
carbonate or acid phosphate decreased or eliminated the toxicity of aluminum salts. Alu-
minum hydroxide was not toxic. Both limestone and acid phosphate reduced the acidity of

No. 1, February, 1921] SOIL SCIENCE 69

t"he soil and increased the crop yield. The reduction in acidity is due to the formation of insol-
uble aluminum salts. Leaching soil with potassium nitrate until the leachings are neutral
removes as much as 59 per cent of the aluminum, reduces the acidity 99 per cent, and improves
the growth of sweet clover. Iron and manganese are apparently not important factors in the
soils studied. — W. J. Robbins.

450. Shedd, O. M. a proposed method for the estimation of total calcium in soils and the
significance of this element to soil fertility. Soil Sci. 10: 1-14. 1920. — A rapid and accurate
method for the determination of total calcium in soils is described. The total calcium
content of some Kentucky soils is so low that their deficiency in this substance is important,
as well as is the deficiency in phosphorus and nitrogen. Cultivation causes a loss in calcium.
The best soil types contain the most calcium; the poorest, the least. A ton of limestone or
rock phosphate per acre may add more calcium than is already present. — W. J. Robbins.

INFLUENCE OF BIOLOGICAL AGENTS

451. Greaves, J. E. The antagonistic action of calcium and iron salts toward other salts
as measured by ammonification and nitrification. Soil Sci. 10: 77-102. W fig. 1920. — A
determination was made of the ammonification and nitrification of dried blood in soil in
tumblers to which salts in fractions of gram molecules were added. True antagonism as
measured by ammonification was found between calcium sulphate, and sodium carbonate,
sodium nitrate, sodium sulfate, calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, and magnesium sul-
phate. The same is true of nitrification with the exception of sodium sulphate and calcium
chloride and calcium sulfate. With some exceptions, the sulphate, chloride, carbonate, and
nitrate of iron were found to antagonize the salts of sodium, calcium, and magnesium. Iron
carbonate reduced the toxicity of magnesium sulphate to ammonification 75 per cent, artd
iron nitrate increased the nitrification in the presence of magnesium chloride 420 per cent.
The quantity of iron required for maximum effect varies with the iron compound and the
specific alkali. — W. J. Robbins.

452. Greaves, J. E. The influence of arsenic upon the biological transformation of
nitrogen in soils. (Abstract.) Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 128-129. 1918.— Complete paper published
in Biochem. Bull. 3: 2-16. 1913.

453. Peterson, E. G., and E. Mohr. Nitrogen fixation by bacteria in Utah soils.
(Abstract.) Utah Acad. Sci. 1 : 97-98. 1918.

454. Neller, J. R. The oxidizing power of soil from limed and unlimed plots and its rela-
tion to other factors. Soil Sci. 10: 29-39. Fig. 1, pi. 1. 1920.— The carbon dioxide evolution,
and nitrate and ammonia production, from added organic matter were determined for soil
samples from plots which have been cultivated for more than ten years under limed and
unlimed conditions. Nitrate accumulation and bacterial numbers were higher on the limed
than unlimed soil, but the ammonia accumulation was about the same. The average crop
yield for the past ten years varies closely with the present oxidizing power. — W. J. Robbins.

455. Robbins, William J., and A. B. Massey. The effect of certain environmental
conditions on the rate of destruction of vanillin by a soil bacterium. Soil Sci. 10: 237-246.
1 fi^. 1920. — Studies in solution cultures containing nutrient salts show that the destruction
of vanillin by a soil bacterium is favored by aeration and inhibited by slight concentrations
of hydrochloric acid. In mixtures of sodium nitrate, potassium sulfate, and calcium acid
phosphate, the destruction of vanillin is most rapid in the cultures high in phosphate and
least rapid in cultures high in sulfate. The number of species capable of destroying vanillin
is limited. — W. J. Robbins.

456. Singh, Thakur Mahadeo. The effect of gypsum on bacterial activities in soils.
Soil Sci. 9:437-468. 1920.— Determinations were made of the effect of calcium sulphate,
calcium carbonate, or combinations of the two on the ammonification of dried blood, nitri-

70 SOIL SCIENCE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

fication of ammonium sulfate, fixation of nitrogen, fixation of nitrogen by B. radicicola, and
yield of plants. Ammonification was decreased by gypsum and by mixtures of lime and gyp-
sum. Nitrification was decreased by calcium sulphate but increased by calcium carbonate
and gypsum together. Nitrogen fixation was stimulated by 100 pounds per acre of gypsum,
but larger amounts had less stimulative effect. The yield and potassium content of red clover
was increased by 1000 pounds of gypsum per acre, but other leguminous crops or wheat were
not affected. Gypsum increased the soil acidity and, in some cases, the amount of soluble
potassium. — W. J. Robbins.

FERTILITY STUDIES

457. Aston, B. C. Radio-active fertilizers and plant growth. New Zealand Jour. Agric.
20: 172-173. 1920. — A brief review of work in England and America. — A^. /. Giddings.

458. Harris, F. S. Effect of soil alkali on plant growth. (Abstract.) Utah Acad. Sci.
1 : 131-132. 1918.

459. Leiningen-Westerburg (Graf zu.) Rauchschaden und einschlagige boden-
kundliche Fragen. [Smoke injury and related matters of soil science.] Forstwiss. Centralbl.
42: 18-93. 1920. — There is a close relation between soil composition and quality, and the
damage which may result to vegetation from various fumes and dusts. Smoke damage to
plants is usually indirect, as the effect of the fumes is on the soil and humus. Lime is espe-
cially necessary in soils exposed to acid fumes, and should be added in the cheapest waj
possible where soils are poor in lime; otherwise the acids will remove all the lime present.
This applies both to open and to forest lands. It has been computed that in the vicinity
of Stolberg (Rhine province) approximately 800 grams of sulphuric and hydrochloric acids
are deposited annually per square meter of soil. Lime also combines with poisonous zinc,
copper, iron, and mercury salts and renders them harmless to plants, but has little or no
effect on arsenic compounds. Some of these compounds in small quantities stimulate plant
growth, but in large quantities hinder or destroy it. Dust from lime, cement, or magnesite
ovens, etc., may act as a fertilizer, or if in too great volume and not occasionally harrowed
into the soil may form a crust which will injure vegetation. Soot does not in itself injure
plants, but does so indirectly by sticking on the foliage and adsorbing poisonous gases from
the air. In case of many substances, such as calcium, magnesium, chlorine, fluorine and sul-
phur compounds, which are already present in soil not exposed to smoke, it is difficult to deter-
mine the amount of injury due to fumes, since chemical analysis of the plants will not show
the origin of the poisons they may contain. — W. N. Sparhawk.

460. McCooL, M. M., and C. E. Millar. The formation of soluble substances in soils
taken from widely separated regions. Soil Sci. 10: 219-235. 1 fig. 1920.— Samples of air-
dry soils were leached with distilled water until the freezing-point depression of the soil
was zero. The soil was then incubated at 25 °C., and the freezing-point lowerings were deter-
mined after 5, 10, 30, and 60 days. Sub-soils and new soils formed soluble salts very slowly.
New soils are less active than somewhat older soils, and aged soils are almost inert. Soils
from acid regions were not more soluble than those which had weathered more. The formation
of soluble material increased with grinding and with treatment with sodium nitrate. — W. J.
Robbins.

461. NiKLAS, H. Ubersicht uber Bayerns Bodenverhaltnisse. [Summary of Bavarian
soil conditions.] Forstwiss. Centralbl. 42: 123-135. 1920.— The author discusses the con-
struction of a general soil map for Bavaria, based on the prevailing crops grown. Complete
soil surveys are lacking. Soils may be classified according to climatic conditions, geological
origin, or to texture. For practical purposes the latter classification is the best, both for
agriculture and for forestry. The 434 districts of Bavaria are classified in 7 soil groups as
follows: (1) very heavy; (2) heavy; (3) medium; (4) heavy and light; (5) light and medium;
(6) light, and (7) meadow soils due to climatic conditions regardless of texture. — (1) This
group comprises 13 per cent of the total area of Bavaria, and grows principally wheat and

No. 1, February, 1921] ' SOIL SCIENCE 71

grass; (2) 12 per cent, and grows wheat and barley; (3) 14 per cent, growing barley, (4) and (5)
17 per cent; (6) 31 per cent, and (7) 13 per cent. The lighter soils grow principally rye and
oats. The value of such a map is discussed. — W. N. Sparhawk.

462. Parker, F. W., and E. Truog. The relation between the calcium and the nitrogen
content of plants and the function of calcium. Soil Sci. 10: 49-56. Fig. 1. 1920. — See Bot.
Absts. 7, Entry 406.

463. Roberts, George, and A. E. Ewan. I. Report on soil experiment fields. II.
Maintenance of fertility. Kentucky Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 228:89-131. 1920.— Results are
reported from eight experiments fields on as many different soil areas of the state, ranging
over periods of four to nine years. The requirements for phosphorus, potassium, nitrogen,
and limestone were determined, and a comparison was made of acid phosphate and rock
phosphate on limed and unlimed soil. The rotation employed in most cases is corn, soy
beans, wheat, and clover. None of the treatments give any material increase in crops on
the Lexington field, representing the highly phosphatic soils of the Central Blue Grass region.
On all the soils represented by the other fields, limestone and phosphates give very large
increases. The returns from potassium salts in connection with phosphates or in connection
with phosphates and limestone give little or no increase in yields. Nitrate of soda gives prac-
tically no increase for corn, but gives small or medium increases for wheat and tobacco. In
the comparison of acid phosphate and rock phosphate at the average annual rate of 200
pounds per acre of 16 per cent acid phosphate and 400 pounds per acre of 32 per cent rock
phosphate, the rock phosphate has generally given the larger increases on unlimed ground,
while the acid phosphate has generally given the larger increases on limed ground. — George
Roberts.

464. Robinson, C. S. The determination of carbon dioxide in water-soluble carbonates.
Soil Sci. 10: 41-47. Fig. 1. 19'20. — A description is given of precautions used and modifi-
cations in the apparatus made in determining the carbon dioxide content of limestones, marls,
and soils by Van Slyke's titrometric and gasometric methods. — W. J. Bobbins.

465. Schollenberger, C. H. Organic phosphorus content of Ohio soils. Soil Sci. 10:
127-141. Fig. 1. 1920. — The relation of the organic phosphorus content of twelve soils in
relation to other soil constituents is reported. Virgin soil samples are richer in total phos-
phorus than cultivated soils of the same type, and the organic phosphorus contents stand in
the same order as the contents of total phosphorus. From average data one-third of the
phosphorus in the surface and one-fifth in the subsurface is organic. Organic phosphorus is
probably not of a high order of availability. — W. J. Bobbins.

466. Thornber, H. Cover crops, tillage and commercial fertilizers. Better Fruit 15^: 5,
20-22. Aug., 1920.

467. Thorne, Charles E. Carriers of nitrogen in fertilizers. Soil Sci. 9: 487-494. 1920.
— Field experiments since 1894-5 with cereals and clover or potatoes and clover rotations
fertilized w'ith sodium nitrate," linseed meal, dried blood, ammonium sulfate, and tankage
show in 40 comparisons with but 2 exceptions that sodium nitrate has produced the largest
yield. The same is true of a tobacco-wheat-clover rotation except on limed land, where the
yields from the ammonium sulphate slightly exceed those from sodium nitrate — W. J.
Bobbins.

MOISTURE RELATIONS

468. Cunningham, Brysson. Rainfall and drainage. [Rev. of: Craster, J. E. E. Esti-
mating river flow from rainfall records (Engineering. Jan. 2, 1920). Nature 105: 42. 1920.] —
Craster finds the proportion of run-off to rainfall varies in both England and America from
33 to 67 per cent. That not less than 1 mm. (0.04 inch) of rainfall is required to wet vegeta-
tion and surface of ploughed land; this being lost by evaporation after every rain. Percola-
tion may be estimated roughly at not less than 10 per cent. Mentions also data on
transpiration. — 0. A. Stevens.

72 SOIL SCIENCE ' [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

469. Gardner, Willard. A capillary transmission constant and methods of determining
it experimentally. Soil Sci. 10: 103-126. Fig. 1-8 B. 1920. — A capillary-transmission-con-
stant similar to the specific conductivity of metals and the specific thermal conductivity of
heat conductors is defined, and methods for its measurement are described. Using this con-
stant, a calculation is made which shows that in a certain soil 12 inches of water may be
available from a 12 foot water-table in 30 days. — W. J. Robbins.

470. Karraker, p. E. The effect of the initial moisture in a soil on moisture movement.
Soil Sci. 10: 143-152. 1920. — Soils were placed in vertical tubes with their lower ends in
water, and the penetration of water was determined. The rate of water movement was
about as great in air or oven dry soils as in soils containing up to about 6 per cent initial
moisture. In saturated sand the movement was 1.56 times that in air-dry sand. — W. J.
Robbins.

471. Livingston, Burton E., and Riichiro Koketsu. The water-supplying power of
the soil as related to the wilting of plants. Soil Sci. 9: 469-485. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7,
Entry 399.

472. WoLKOFF, M. I. Effect of various soluble salts and lime on evaporation. Capillary
rise and distribution of water in some agricultural soils. Soil Sci. 9: 409-436. 4 fig- 1920. —
Soluble salts added to soil materially decreased the evaporation of soil moisture. The
eflSciency of a salt in decreasing evaporation was shown to depend upon the osmotic concen-
tration of salts in the surface inch of soil. The soils from which the least water evaporated
showed the greatest osmotic concentration in the first inch. There was practically no
diffusion of the salts downward against the rise of capillary water. In two agricultural soils
used, sodium chloride decreased the capillary rise of water. Calcium oxide in drab clay and
potassium phosphate in brown silt loam accelerated water rise. In these soils the addition
of the salts increased the water content in the first 8 inches, as compared with untreat'.d
soil. The crust formed on the surface of the soil by some of the salts did not retard evapora-
tion. With untreated soils, the texture of the soil influences the extent of evaporation. Soils
having a greater amount of fine material show greater loss of water by evaporation. — Dorothy
Wilson.

PEAT

473. Alwat, F. J. Chemical requirements of peat soils in the light of European experience.
Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13:327-341. 1920.— European peat soils are placed in two classes,
those with (1) low lime requirement, and (2) high lime requirement. — G. B. Rigg.

474. Levin, E. The use of peat as a fertilizer in Michigan. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13:
319-327. 1920.— Fertilizer prepared by composting peat and manure gave good results on
uplands. — G. B. Rigg.

475. Ptjchner, H. Hysteresis of aqueous solutions of peat soil. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc.
13: 351. 1920. — An aqueous extraction of peat soil contained gels of silicic acid, ferric
hydroxide, and alumina. On ignition the extract yielded alumina, ferric oxide, manganese
oxides, lime, magnesia, sulphate, phosphate, and silicate. — G. B. Rigg.

476. RosT, C. O. Pyrites and its toxic oxidation products in peat soils. Jour. Amer.
Peat Soc. 13: 303-306. 1920.— Iron sulphide is widely distributed in peat soils. It appears
mostly as pyrite, which is insoluble in water. In air it is oxidized to ferrous sulphate and
sulphuric acid, both of which are soluble and toxic to plants. — G. B. Rigg.

MISCELLANEOUS

477. L'inhart, G. A. A new and simplified method for the statistical interpretation of
biometrical data. Univ. California Publ. Agric. Sci. 4: 159-181. 12 fig. 1920.— See Bot.
Absts. 7, Entry 396.

No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 73

478. NiKLAS, H. Die Bedeutung der Geologie fiir die land- und Forstwirtschaftliche
Bodenkunde. [The significance of the science of geology with relation to agricultural and
forest soil science.] Naturvviss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18:22-35. 1920. — After consider-
ing all cultural conditions of the soil in 434 agricultural precincts, Niklas divid* s the soils in
seven classes, based on heavy, intermediate, and light soils, and variety of products pro-
duced. The prepared chart showed a marked coincidence with the geological charts, although
these were not considered in preparing the soil chart. In so far as forestry is concerned, a
soil study is still more imperative, because of the longer period of time in which mistakes
must be realized. It will be necessary to make a study of the chemical and physical proper-
ties of the various soils of each geological formation, and to relate this study to one of the
principal tree species. The employment of agriculturists and foresters in the various geologi-
cal bureaus, whose duties would be to prepare the geological charts for practical use, is recom-
mended.— J. Roeser.

479. Niklas, H. Eine landwirtschaftliche Bodeniibersichtskarte von Bayern. [An agri-
cultural soil survey chart for Bavaria.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw. 18: 62-65. 1920.
— As a temporary guide for constructing a soil chart for Bavaria, for forestry and agriculture,
the author has made use of the official cultivation statistics, which have been kept for the past
20 years He contends that the knowledge of the soil gained through long years by agricul-
turists and foresters shows itself in the choice of cultural species growing on the ground.
The author essentially repeats his observations of an earlier article. (See Bot. Absts.
7, Entry 478), appearing in the previous issue of this paper. — J. Roeser.

480. Schuster, Matth.^us. Wie soil der Land- und Forstwirt Geologische Karten lesen?
[How shall the agriculturist and forester read geological charts?] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u.
Landw. 18: 10-22. / fig. 1920. — The principal reason why agriculturists and foresters have
not reconciled themselves to geological charts is that they cannot familiarize themselves
with the manner of representation used. The modern charts often contain a mass of colors
and symbols, which are apt to confuse the user. The Bavarian charts have been prepared to
meet both the scientific and practical demand, and are easily legible without detailed expla-
nations. The author gives a detailed description of the method of preparation and the
methods of interpreting these charts; and by means of a short field trip over the terrain rep-
resented on a model chart, shows the relation existing between rock and soil and the cultural
use of the soil, and also explains the methods employed by the geologist to show the relations.
— J. Roeser.

TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS

J. M. Greenman, Editor
E. B. Patson, Assistant Editor

GENERAL

481. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Blatter, Ethelbert. Flora Arabica. Part 1. Rec. Bot.
Surv. India 3, No. 1.] Nature J04: 609. 1920.— Includes list of thirty-eight families (Ben-
tham and Hooker arrangement) including vernacular names and uses, also discussion of
botanical regions. — 0. A. Stevens.

482. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Gamble, J. S. Flora of the Presidency of Madras. Part 3.
P. 391-577. Legiiminosae—Caesalpiniodeae to Caprifoliaceae. Aldard and Son, and West
Newman, Ltd.: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 36. 1920.

483. Benoist, R. Plantes recoltees par M. E. Wagner en Republique Argentine. [Plants
collected by M. E. Wagner in the Argentine.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 655-661.
1919. — Detailed notes concerning some 20 species collected in the province of Santiago include
information as to habitat, economic importance, common name, etc. — E. B. Payson.

74 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

484. Blatter, E., and F. Hallberg. The flora of the Indian desert, (Jodhpur and
Jaesalmer). Jour. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. 26: 218-246; 525-551; 811-818. 89 -pi. 1918-19.—
A systematic enumeration with extensive notes and citation of specimens. The following
new forms are described : Farsetia macrantha, Cleome brachycarpa Vahl var. glauca, Gynandrop-
sis pentaphylla DC. var. nana, Melhania magnifolia, Zizyphus truncata, Psoralea odorata,
TephrOsia incana Grah. var. horizontalis, T. muUiflora, T. petrosa, Rhynchosia rhombifolia,
R. arenaria, Angoeissus rotundifolia, Trianthema pentandra Linn. var. rubra, var. flava,
Pulicaria rajputanae, Glossocardia setosa, Convolvulus densiflorus, C. gracilis, Aerua pseudo-
tomentosa. The seventy-eight photographic illustrations of desert scenes and vegetation
accompanying this paper are excellent. — E. D. Merrill.

485. BoLzoN, P. Ricerche botaniche nel bacino della Dora Baltea. [Botanical researches
in the basin of the Dora Baltea.] Nuovo Giorn. Bot. Ital. 25: 309-376. 1918.— The author
presents a detailed enumeration of an extensive collection of plants recently made in the
valley of the Dora Baltea in northern Italy. — /. M. Greenman.

486. Brown, William H., and Elmer D. Merrill. Philippine palms and palm products.
Forestry Bur. Philippine Islands Bull. 18. 129 p., U pi. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 533.

487. Farwell, Oliver A. Notes on the Michigan Flora, II. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann.
Rept. 21 : 345-371. 1919. — Reference is made to several species whose range is known to cross
Michigan and which should, therefore, be sought in the state. Among these may be men-
tioned: Phegopteris Rober liana (Hoffm.) A. Br., Asplenium viride Huds., Calamagrostis
hyperborea Lange, Woodsia glabella R. Br. and Calamagrostis Pickeringii var. laciistris
(Kearney) Hitch. The author claims that the application of the principles of priority in
nomenclature produces the following changes : Elodea canadensis Mx. for philotria canadensis
(Mx.) Britton, Digitaria Heist, for Syntherisma Walt., Ginania Bub. for Holcus Authors,
Reboulea Kunth. for Eatonia Authors, Trichoon Roth, for Phragmites Trin., Trichophyllum
Ehrh. for Eleocharis R. Br., Iria castanea (Mx.) n. comb, for Fimbristylis castanea (Michx.)
Vahl., Eriophorum for Scirpus in part, and Phaeocephalum Ehrh. for Rijnchospora Vahl.
Changes in family names, in whole or part, are recommended as follows: Scheuchzeriaceae
becomes Juncaginaceae, Alismaceae becomes Alismoidaceae, Potamogetonaceae becomes
Fluvialaceae, Valisneriaceae becomes Hydrocharidaceae, Gramineae becomes Graminaceae,
Polygonaceae becomes Persicariaceae, Chenopodiaceae becomes Blitaceae, Leguminosae be-
comes Leguminaceae, Rhamnaceae becomes Ziziphaceae, Tiliaceae becomes Tiliataceae, Ona-
graceae becomes Cornicidataceae, Umbelliferae becomes Umbellataceae, Fagaceae becomes
Castanaceae, Scrophulariaceae becomes Ringentaceae, and Compositae becomes Compositaceae.
— H. T. Darlington.

488. Hemsley, W. Botting, and others. Flora of Aldabra: with notes on the flora of
neighboring islands. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 108-153. 1919. — A description of the Alda-
bra atoll in the Indian Ocean is followed by paragraphs concerning the climate, history of
botanical investigation, and relation of its flora to that of some other small islands of the
Western Indian Ocean. There is given a systematic enumeration of the vascular plants of
Aldabra with the citation of exsiccatae. — E. B. Payson.

489. Jeanpert, Ed. Enumeration des plantes de Macedoine. [Enumeration of plants of
Macedonia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 662-668. 1919.— This series of papers listing
the plants of Macedonia is here concluded. — E. B. Payson.

490. Lecomte, Henri. Sur les principatix caracteres de structure des bois. [Concerning
the principal characters of wood structure.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 26: 166-171. 1920.
—See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 326.

491. McAtee, W. L. Specific, subspecific, and varietal categories of insects and the
naming of them. Entomol. News 31: 46-55, 61-65, 1920. — The author does not regard inter-
gradation a sufficient reason for "lumping" closely related species which exhibit it. Men-

No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 75

tions plant families Rubiaceae and Caprifoliaceae among examples of groups separated by no
absolutely trenchant character. Considers recognition of geographical subspecies a useful
feature even though they may intergrade completely where their ranges meet. Discusses
also color phases and formation of names. Names should be chosen which are least liable to
prove inappropriate, avoiding too free use of those derived from personal or geographical
names. — 0. A. Stevens.

492. MiYOSHi, Manabu. tJber der Erhaltung einer neuen wildwachsenden hangenden
Varietat des Kastanienbaumes als Naturdenkmal. [Concerning a new wild chestnut with
weeping branches and its preservation as a natural monument.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33: 185-
188. / photo. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 452.

493. Rock, Joseph F. One government forest. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 16: 39-40.
3 pi. February, 1919. — A description of Reserve lands at Kulani, Hawaii. The forest is
mainly a tree-fern forest made up of the two common types Cibotium Chamissoi and Cihotium
Menziesii. Apart from these, representatives of the genus Metrosideros are the most com-
mon. Dispersed through the region is also a beautiful native fan palm with large orbicular
fruits described by the writer as a new species under the name of Pritchardia Beccariana. —
Stanley Coulter.

494. ScHONLAND, S. Phanerogamic flora of the divisions of Uitenhage and Port Elizabeth.
JMem. Bot. Surv. South Africa [Pretoria] 1: 1-118. 1919. — The present work consists of an
annotated list of the flowering plants of the territorial divisions mentioned in the title.
Valuable information is recorded on the topography, climate, rainfall, plant formations, etc.
The total number of species listed is 2416, of which 2312 are indigenous and 104 are non-native
species. — J. M. Greenman.

495. TuRRiLL, W. B. Contributions to the flora of Macedonia: H. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew
1919: 105-108. 1919. — A list of species of flowering plants collected by J. M. Russell in
Central Greek Macedonia in 1918. — E. B. Payson.

496. TuRRiLL, W. B. Botanical results of Swedish South American and Antarctic expedi-
tions. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919:268-279. 1919.

PTERIDOPHYTES

497. Brause, G. Bearbeitung der von C. Ledermann von der Sepik- (Kaiserin-Augusta-)
Fluss-Expedition 1912 bis 1913 und von anderen Sammlern aus dem Papuagebiete friiher mitge-
brachten Pteridophyten, nebst Uebersicht iiber alle bis jetzt aus dem Papuagebiet bekannt
gewordenen Arten derselben. [Revision of the Pteridophytes collected by Ledermann on the
Sepik River Expedition, those brought out by earlier collectors in Papuasia, and a summary of
all known species of this group from the Papuasian region.] Under the general heading: C.
Lauterbach, Beitrage zur Flora von Papuasien VII, no. 62. Bot. Jahrb. 56: 30-250. 1920.—
This is a very extended treatment of the Pteridophytes of Papuasia, with references and
notes on distribution, structure, classification, and nomenclature. The following new varie-
ties, species and combinations are proposed: Trichomanes papuanum, T. concinnum Mett.
var. emarginata, T. subtilissimum, T. Ledermanni, T. maluense, T. Englerianum, T. meifo-
lium Bory var. linearis and var. contracta, Hyjnenophyllum Ledermanni and var. nutans,
H. Herterianum, H. Rosenstockii, H. sabinifolium Bak. var. irregularis and var. imbricata,
Dicksonia Ledermanni, D. Hieronymi, Cyathea Rosenstockii, C. procera, C. cincinnata,

C. subspathidata, C. sepikensis, C. Ledermanni and var. dilatata, C. Hunsteiniana and
var. acuminata, Hemitelia Ledermanni, Alsophila recuryata, A. marginata, A. Rosenstockii,
A. Hunsteiniana, A. rubiginosa, A. Dielsii, A. gregaria, A. dryopteroidea, A. tenuis, A.
brunnea, A. olivacea, A. Ledermanni, A. scandens, Dryopteris Hunsteiniana, D. diaphana,

D. calcarata (Bl.) O. Ktze. var. ciliata {Aspidium ciliatum Wall.), D. subnigra, D. coriacea
and var. elata, D. ensipinna and var. acuminata, D. glaucescens, D. alta, D. pallescens, D.

76 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

fulgens, D. Icdermanni, D. notabilis, D. Metteniana Hieron. var. novoguineensis , D. subdigi-
tata, D. urophylla (Wall.) C. Chr. var. cuspidata {Menisciuni cuspidatum Bl.), D. stellato-
pilosa, D. mutabilis, D. micans, D. dimorpha, D. sepikensis, D. hispida, D. transversaria {Ne-
phrodium transversarium Brack.), D. mollis (Jacq.) Hieron. var. amboinensis {Aspidium am-
boinense Willd.), D. superba, D. muricata and var. marginata and var. obscura, D. austera,
D. oblonga, D. farinosa, D. Ridleyana {Goniopferis rigida Ridley), D. hastato-pinnata, Aspid-
ium Ledermanni, Leptochilus novoguineensis, Humata Ledermanni, Davallia Ledermavni,
Lindsaya marginata and var. falcata, L. Rosensiockii, L. Boryana {Davallia Boryana Pr.),
L. Ledermanni, L. sepikensis, L. obscura, Athyrium Ledermanni Hieron., Diplazium pseudo-
shepherdioides Hieron., D. Nymani Hieron., D. Naumanni Hieron., D. Schlechteri Hieron.,
D. Schultzei Hieron., D. Schraderi Hieron., D. scotinum Ros. var. contracta Hieron., Asple-
nium nidus L. var. ficifolia {Aspl. ficifolium Goldm.), A. comosum Christ var. subcrispa
Hieron. and var. furcata Hieron., A. Lauterbachii Christ var. elongata Hieron., A. acro-
carpum Hieron. (Diplazium acfocarpum Ros.), A. caudatum Forst. var. Ledermanniana
Hieron., A. Ledermanni, Hieron. and var. lobulata Hieron., Blechnum saxatile, B. Leder-
manni, B. deorsolqbatum, B. Hieronymi, D. decorum and var. dilatata, B. pendulum, B.
papuanum, B. Fraseri (A. Cun.) Luers. var. novoguineensis, Coniogramme macrophylla
(Bl.) Hieron. var. undulata Hieron., Hypolepis punctata (Thbg.) Mett. var. obscura, Vit-
taria rubens Hieron., V. Ledermanni Hieron., V. Nymani Hieron., V. semipellucida Hieron.,
V. latissima Hieron., V. exigua Hieron., Antrophyum Ledermanni Hieron., Drymoglossum
Schlechteri Hieron. & Brause, Polypodium trichopodum F. v. Muell. var. serrato-lobatum,
P. ornatissimum Ros. var. dichotomum, P. glanduloso-pilosum, P. sepikense, P. politum,
P. eximium, P. flagelliforme, P. ctenoideum, P. celebicum, Bl. var. aurita, P. dichotomum,
P. truncata-sagittatum, P. redimiens, P. balteiforme, P. ochrophyllum, P. ferreum, P. cyathi-
sorum, P. egregium, P. ingens, P. alloiosorum, P. polysorum, P. ulotheca, Cyclophorus Leder-
manni, Dryostachyum novoguineense Brause var. lanceolata, Gleichenia dolosa (Copel.) C. Chr.
var. virescens Hieron., G. linearis (Burm.) Clarke var. subferruginea Hieron., G. novoguineen-
sis, Schizaea papuana, Angiopteris evanidostriata Hieron., A. Lauterbachii Hieron., A.
Dahlii Hieron., A. undulaio-striata Hieron., A. crinita Christ var. sepikensis Hieron., A.
Hellwigii Hieron., Selaginella Ledermanni Hieron., S. Kerstingii Hieron. var. brevimucronata
Hieron., S. Thurnwaldiana Hieron., S. Schatteburgiana Hieron., S. Biirgersiana Hieron.,
S. Behrmanniana Hieron., (S. Roesickeana Hieron., S. Stolleana Hieron., S. gracilis Moore
var. subbiflora Hieron., S. Bamleri Hieron., S. Schraderiana Hieron., and S. sepikensis
Hieron. Papuasia is one of the richest regions in the world in ferns. The geographical fern
region of Papuasia extends to the neighboring islands in all directions, and the limits are
given. A table is given of the number of species in each genus common to Papuasia and each
of the surrounding groups of islands as well as countries more distant. Trichomanes is espec-
ially well developed. Dryopteris is also highly developed with 112 species. Polypodium is
the largest genus with 168 species. Aspidium and Polystichum are poorly represented. The
Pterideae are little developed. Azolla, Marsilea, Salvinia, and Pihilaria have as yet not
been found. Botrychium is not known, though Ophioglossum is moderately represented.
Selaginella is represented by 58 species. — K. M. Wiegand.

498. Brause, G. tJber die von C. R. W. K. van Alderwerelt van Rosenburgh neu auf
gestellte Gattung Thysanobotrya. [On van Alderwerelt van Rosenburgh's new genus Thysano-
botrya.] Hedwigia 61: 401. 1920.— Gepp described a new fern from Dutch New Guinea as
Polybotrya arfakensis. Van Rosenburgh separated this under a new generic name as
Thysanobotrya arfakensis Gepp) v.A.v.R. The present author finds that the original
description and figures correspond to Alsophila biformis Ros. He considers Alsophila the
proper genus for this plant and sees no reason for the creation of a separate genus Thysano-
botrya.— K. M, Wiegand.

499. Hierontmus, G. tJber Cheilanthopsis Hieron., eine neue Farngattung. [Cheilan-
thopsis, a new genus of ferns.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7: 406-409. 1920. — The genus dif-
fers from Cheilanthes in its dorsiventral spores; from Hypolepis, to which it is closely related
in its ascending rhizome and fascicled leaves. Although based on Cheilanthes straminea
Brause, no transfer of that species to the new genus is made. — H. A. Gleason.

No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 77

500. Holm, Theo. Internal glandular hairs in Dryopteris. Rhodora 22: 89-90. 2 fig.
1920.— See liot. Absts. 6, Entry 1183.

501. House, Homer D. The Genus Aetopteron, Ehrhart. Amer. Fern Jour, 10:88-89.
1920. — The author revives the name of Aetopteron of Ehrhart to replace Polystichum and
makes the following new combinations: Aetopteron aculeatum {Polystichum aculeatum L.),
A. acrostichoides (Nephrodium acrostichoides Michx.), A. Braunii (Aspidium Braunii
Spenner), A. Lemmoni {Polystichum Lemmoni Unden\^), A. lonchites {Polypodium lonchites
L.), A. munilum {Aspidium munitum Kaulf.), A. scopulinum {Ascidium aculeatum var. scopu-
linum D. C. Eaton). — F. C. Anderson.

502. Weatherby, C. A. Varieties of Pityrogramma triangularis. Rhodora 22: 113-120.
1920. — The author recognizes three geographic varieties in addition to the typical P. tri-
angularis. The separation is based on the presence or absence of glands on the lamina and
stipe, and on the character of these glands when present. A key to the varieties and the
bibliography of each is given. — James P. Poole.

SPERMATOPHYTES

503. Anonymous. Decades Kewenses. Decades XCII & XCIII. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew
1919:221-231. 1919. — The following species are described as new: Aconitum funiculare
Stapf, Indigofera Barberi Gamble, Erythrina mysorensis Gamble, Smithia Venkobarowii
Gamble, Desmodiiim wynaadense Bedd., Vigna Bourneae Gamble, Rosa Saundersiae Rolfe,
Bruguiera Hainesii C. G. Rogers, Sonerila pulneyensis Gamble, Memecylon flavescens
Gamble, M. Lawsonii Gamble, M. Lushingtonii Gamble, M. madgolense Gamble, M. sispa-
rense Gamble, Pimpinella pulneyensis Gamble, Schefflera Bourdillonii Gamble, 5. bengalen-
sis Gamble, Linociera Parkinsonii Hutchinson, Sarcococca vagans Stapf, Chrysopogon seti-
folius Stapf.— E. Mead Wilcox.

504. Anonymous. Decades Kewenses. Decas XCIV. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 403-
407. 1919.— The following species are described as new: Calathodes oxycarpa Sprague,
Osbeckia travancorica Bedd., Oldenlandia Bourdillonii Gamble, 0. eualata Gamble, 0. Rama-
rowii Gamble, 0. villosostipulata Gamble, 0. wynaadensis Gamble, Ophiorrhiza Barberi
Gamble, 0. codyensis, 0. pykarensis Gamble. — E. Mead Wilcox.

505. Anonymous. Diagnoses Africanae: LXXII. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 263-267.
1919_ — The following species are described as new: Kalanchoe densiflora Rolfe, Anisophyllaea
tomentosa Rolfe, Scyphosyce pandurata Hutchinson, Kniphofia Snowdeni C. H. Wright, Erio-
caulon recurvifolium C. H. Wright, Brachiaria nana Stapf, Panicum uvulatum Stapf, P.
epacridifolum Stapf, P. bambusiusculum Stapf, Rutenbergia Usagarae H. N. Dixon. — E.
Mead Wilcox.

506. Blatter, E., and F. Hallberg. A revision of the Indian species of Rotala and
Ammannia. Part II. Jour. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. 26:210-217. 1918.— Completed from
the preceding volume, the second part covering six species of Ammannia; no new names
appear. — E. D. Merrill.

507. Briquet, J. Decades plantarum novarum vel minus cognitarum. [Decades of new
or little-known plants.] Annuaire Conservatoire et Jard. Bot. Geneve 20: 342-427. 1919.—
This is the twenty-sixth of a series and includes the families from Celastraceae to Valeri-
anaceae. The new names are: Maytenus pilcomayensis (Paraguay, Rojas 401), M. Hassleri
(Paraguay, Hassler, 1342), M. Mathewsii (Peru, Mathews), M. Pavonii (Peru, Pavon 53),
M. evonymoides var. Minarum (Brazil, Glaziou 12538, 13665) and var. pycnodonta (Paraguay,
Hassler, 7358), M. retusa {Celastrus retusus Poir.), M. durifolia (Peru, Pavon 564), M. Jame-
sonii (Ecuador, Jameson 222), M. vexata {M. myrsinoides Urb. not Reissek), M. Trianae
{M. buxifolius Tr. & PI. not Griesb.), M. Schottii {M. repanda Reiss. not Turcz.), M. Lorentzii

78 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

(Argentina, Lorentz 1198), M. paraguariensis (Paraguay) var. genuina (Hassler 2564) and var.
grandifolia (Rojas 508), M. Fendleri (Venezuela, Fendler 215), M. ebenifolia var. Poeppigii
Brazil, Poeppig 3008) and var. Ulei (Brazil, Ule 6084), M. macrocarpa {M. multiflorn Loesen.,
not Reissek), M. longipes (Colombia, Smith 454), M. laurina (Brazil, Spruce 2284), M.
Sprucei (Brazil, Spruce 3970), M. tarapotensis (Peru, Spruce 4329), M. controversa (Brazil,
Glaziou 13666), M. Blanchetii (Brazil, Blanchet 3780), Columellia Matheivsii (Peru, Mathews),
Clethera Broadwayana (Trinidad, Broadway 2594), C. Schlechtendalii (Mexico, Schiede &
Deppe), C. Galeottiana (Mexico, Galeotti 1820), C. confusa (Mexico, Pringle 2425). C. guad-
alajarensis (Mexico, Pringle 2502), C. Smithii (Columbia, Smith 2422), C. angustinensis
(Venezuela, Funk 163), Callisthene durifolia (Brazil, Claussen), C. Clausseniana (Brazil,
Claussen), C. robusta Briq. & Glaz. (Brazil, Glaziou 20679), C. Glazioui (Brazil, Glaziou
20681), C. mucronata (Brazil, Glaziou 20680), C. Hassleri (Paraguay, Hassler 10638), Qualea
obtusata (Brazil, Spruce 3341), Vochisia alternifolia Briq. & Galz. (Brazil, Sello), Vochisia
Haenkeana var. genuina (Peru, Haenke), var. Sprucei (Spruce 4078) and var. microphylla
(Mathews 1650), V. grandis var. Douvillei (Brazil, Douville), V. stenophylla (Brazil, Glaziou
13807), Hypericum connatum var. obscurum (Brazil, Czermak. & Reineck 590), var. para-
guariense (Bolivia, Fiebrig. 2361) and var. Fiebrigii (Bolivia, Fiebrig 2361 p. p.), H. cordiforme
var. genuinum (Brazil, Guillemin315), var. Hilairei (var. /3 St. Hil.) and var. Glazioui (Brazil,
Glaziou 14534), H. Stolzii (Nyassa, Stolz 2223), Hydrangea Schlimii (Columbia, Schlim
1139), H. platyphylla (Colombia, Linden 894), H. Trianae (Columbia, Triana), H. Goudotii
(Colombia, Goudot), H. durifolia (Colombia, Funck & Schlim 1393), H. Oerstedii {H. peru-
viana Hemsl. not Moric.) H. Preslii (Sarcostyles peruviana Presl not H. peruviana Moric),
H. ecuadorensis (Ecudaor, Spruce 5058), H. umbellata (Cornidia umbellata Ruiz. & Pav.),
H. Sprucei (Colombia, Spruce 4328), H. mathewsii (Peru, Mathews), H. tarapotensis (Peru,
Spruce 4349), Escallonia illinita var. pubicalicina (Argentina, Bade), var. angustifrons
(Chile, Bertero 984), var. eu-illinita (E. illinita Presl), E. pycnantha (Chile, Bridges), E.
modesta (Chile, Bridges), Hex Merrillii (Philippines, Merrill 881), Eucryphia lucida {Carpo-
dontos lucida Labill.), Sollya fusiformis {Billardiera fusiformis Labill.), Turpinia hetero-
phylla (Staphylea heterophylla Ruiz. & Pav.), Sorindeia Goudotii (Madagascar, Goudot),
Valeriana Bornmuelleri (Brazil, Bornmiiller 198). A correction to page 80 is, Loeflingia
Vaucheri Briq. is L. micrantha var. Vaucheri Briq. — A. S. Hitchcock.

508. Camus, Aim:6e. Especes et varietes nouvelles de Graminees de I'Asie Orientale.
[New species and varieties of Gramineae from eastern Asia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris]
25:669-672. 1919. — The following varieties, subspecies, and species are described as new:
Pollinia phaeotrix Hack. var. genuina, Pollinia phaeotrix Hack. var. aurea, P. phaeotrix
Hack. var. tonkinensis, Miscanthus nudipes Hack, subsp. yunnanensis, M. japonicus Anders,
var. formosanus, Cymbopogon Martini Stapf var. annamensis, Themeda arguens Hack. var.
cochinchinensis, T. ciliata Hack. var. breviaristata, Isachne Eberhardtii, Panicum sarmento-
sum Roxb. var. mekongense, Leptochloa filiformis R. & S. var. subuniflora G. & A. Camus,
Dendrocalamus sericeus Munro var. latifolius G. & A. Camus, and Arundinaria ciliata. —
E. B. Payson.

509. Camus, Aim^e. Note sur le Vetiveria zizanioides Stapf (Graminees). [Note on
Vetiveria zizanioides Stapf (Gramineae).] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 673-674. 1919.—
A key is given to the four recognized varieties of Vetiveria zizanioides with notes on distribu-
tion and citation of specimens. V. zizanioides Stapf var. tonkinensis is described as new to
science. — E. B. Payson.

510. C[orbishley], a. G. Nectaropetalum zuluense. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919:449-
450. 10 fig. 1919. — The plant previously known as Erythroxylon zuluense Schonl. is found to
be a true species of Nectaropetalum, and so becomes N. zuluense (Schonl.) Corbishley. —
E. Mead Wilcox.

511. Coulter, J. M. Cactaceae. [Rev. of: Britton, N. L., and J. N. Rose. The
Cactaceae. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 248. 236 p., 36 pi., 302 fig. 1919.— (See Bot.
Absts. 3, Entry 1824:)] Bot. Gaz. 68: 391. 1919.

No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 79

512. Davidson, Anstruther. [Without title.] Bull. Southern California Acad. Sci.
19: 10-12. 1920. — Linanthus saxiphilus, Draba saxosa and Hutchinsia calif ornica are de-
scribed as new. There are also notes on certain species of Lwpinus and Linanthus. — Roxana
Stinchfield Ferris.

513. Eberhardt, Ph. Sur une variete indochinoise du Quisqualis indica (Combretacees).
[On an Indo-Chinese variety of Quisqualis indica (Combretaceae).] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat.
[Paris] 25: 675-676. 1919.— A variety, Quisqualis indica L. var. annamensis, is described as
new to science.— -E. B. Payson.

514. Ehinger, M. Odontoglossum Rossii Lindl. Orchis 13 : 33-35. 1919.— Notes on this
species and some of its varieties are given with an illustration of the species.— iS. B. PaTjson.

515. Engler, A. Sterculiaceae africanae. VL [Sterculiaceae of Africa. VI.] Bof
Jahrb. 55: 350-380. 1919.— A contribution under the general heading "Beitrage zur Flora
von Afrika. XLVII. herausgegeben von A. Engler.," continued from Bet. Jahrb. 45: 339.
Three genera, Melhania, Hermannia, and Cola are treated, the main portion of the paper
being an extended elaboration of the genus Hermannia. Since K. Schumann's monograph
of the African Sterculiaceae in 1900 the explorations in the Transvaal and other portions
of South Africa have contributed a vast amount of material. Especially rich in this
genus have been the collections of Dinter in Dutch-Southwest-Africa, Range and Schafer
in Namaqualand, and Schlechter in the Transvaal and Namaqualand. In 1907 Engler
described eleven species. In the present paper, begun in 1918, about forty species are
described as new, three of which are proposed by Diels and four by Schlechter. Engler
has retained most of Schumann's subgenera as sections but Schumann's subdivision of
Euhermannia he could not retain; rather Harvey's groups in this subdivision were found to
be more natural though they are here increased to seven. The section Acicarpus has been
much elaborated beyond the treatment of Harvey. The systematic subdivisions of Her-
mannia have natural geographic ranges. Engler's sections are as follows: (1) Mahrenia,
north and east Africa, (2) Euhermannia, center of development southwestern Cape Colony,
(3) Scaphiostemon, Damaraland, (4) Acicarpus, Abyssinia to the Transvaal and Namaqua-
land, and (5) Mahernia, mainly South Africa. The general distribution of the genus shows
it to be very old and long established in its present range. That it dates back to a time
when the continents probably had a different configuration than at present is indicated by
the occurrence of one endemic species in South Australia and three in Texas and Mexico.
Fifty-five species of Hermannia are treated in the paper. The following species, varieties,
and combinations are new: Section Mahrenia; H. Uhligii Engl. Massai Steppes. Section
Euhermannia; H. glabripetala, Engl, Little Namaqualand; H. cinerascens Engl., Little Nama-
qualand; H. Juttae Dinter & Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. melissifolia Engl., S. W. Africa;
H. prismatocarpoides Engl., East Cape Colony; H. patellicalyx Engl., Great Namaqualand;
H. arida Diels, Southwest Cape Colony; H. memhranifiora Schltr., Southwest Cape Colony;
H. myrioclada Diels, Southwest Cape Colony; H. suhsquamulata Engl., Southwest Cape
Colony; H. Bachmannii Engl., Southwest Cape Colony; H. minutiflora Engl, Little Nama-
qualand to Damaraland; H. macra Schltr., Little Namaqualand; H. longiramosa Engl.,
North Hereroland. Section Scaphiostemon; H. tenuipes Engl., southwest Africa. Section
Aciocarpus; H. longicornuta Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. spinulosa Engl., Great Nama-
qualand; H. deserticola Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. intricata Engl., Great Namaqualand;
H. aspericaulis Dint. & Engl., Little Namaqualand; H. modestus (Ehrenb.) Planch, var.
elatiorK. Schum. subvar. virgatissima Engl., Damaraland; subvar. brevicornis Engl., Trans-
vaal; subvar. macropetala Engl., Transvaal, Damaraland and Hereroland; subvar. mediipetala
Engl., Damaraland; var. tstimebensis Engl., Hereroland; H. Stuhlmannii Engl, East Africa;
H. pseudo-Mildbraedii Dint. & Engl., Damaraland; H. sideritifolia Engl., Transvaal; H.
Seitziana Engl., Great Namaqualand; H. glandulosissima Engl., Damaraland; H. teitensis
Engl., Kilimanjaro; H. tomentosus (Turcz.) Schinz Msc. var. brevifolia Engl., Damaraland;
H. Seineri Engl., north Hereroland, and var. latifolia Engl. Section Mahernia; H. sparsipilosa
Engl., Transvaal; H. pulchella L. var. picta n. comb., Great Namaqualand; H. bicolor Dint.

80 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

& Engl., Damaraland; H. Wilsmii Engl., Natal; H. hantamensis Engl., Little Namaqualand;
H. coccocarpoides Engl., Transvaal; H. collina Schltr., Little Namaqualand; H. Meyeri
Engl., Little Namaqualand; H. leucantha Schltr., Little Namaqualand; H. Vetteri Engl.,
North Hereroland; H. linnaeopsis Dint. & Engel., Damaraland; H. chloroleuca Diels, north-
west Cape Colony; H. Medleyi Engl., Natal; H. Dieterlenii Engl., Highland of southeast
Africa; H. Thodei Engl., Highland of southeast Africa. Besides the new species and varie-
ties of Hermannia, there are a few others as follows: Melhania Dinteri Engl., North Herero-
land; M. ferrugineoides Engl., North Hereroland; Cola subglaucescens Engl., South Kamerun;
C. edeensis Engl. & Krause, South Kamerun; and C. Tessmannii Engl. & Krause., forest
province of Guinea. — K. M. Wiegand.

516. Engler, a. Guttiferae africanae. III. [Guttiferae of Africa. III.] Bot. Jahrb.
55: 381-396. 1919. — A contribution under the general heading "Beitrage zur Flora von
Afrika. XLVII, herausgegeben von A. Engler," continued from Bot. Jahrb. 45: 339. The
tropical African genus Psorospermum Spach is greatly in need of revision. In Oliver's
"Flora of Tropical Africa" only four species were described. Besides these, Schweinfurth
described one, and Engler three, and C. H. Wright one. In the present paper thirteen
new species and two new varieties are proposed as follows: P. Baumannii, Togo, and var.
Afzelianum, Sierra Leone; P. Baumii, Kunene-Kubango-Land; P. aurantiacum, Kamerun;
P. Staudtii, Kamerun; P. parviflorum, Kamerun; P. Kerstingii, Togo; P. laxiflorum, Togo;
P. densipunctatum, Kamerun; P, Mechowii, Angola; P. adamauense, Soudan Park-steppe
Province; P. Ledermannii, Soudan Park-steppe Province, and var. Doeringii, Togo; P.
glaucum, Soudan Park-steppe Province; P. suffruticosum, Soudan Park-steppe Province.
Other new species described are as follows: Haronga scandens, Kamerun; Garcinia Living-
stonii T. And. var. pallidinervia, Kondeland; G. Stolzii, north Nyassaland; G. ifl)angensis,
Soudan Park-steppe Prov.; G. Chevalieri, French Guinea; G. viridiflava, Kamerun; G. benien-
sis, Lower Prov. of Cent. Africa; G. mbulwe, North Nyssaland; G. arbuscula, Kamerun;
G. quadrangula, Kamerun; G. tibatensis, Soudan Park-steppe Prov.; G. tenuipes, Kamerun;
G. tschapensis, Soudan Park-steppe Prov. ; G. Danckelmanniana, Soudan Park-Steppe Prov. ;
G. ndongensis, Kamerun; G. nitidula, Kamerun; G. Buchneri, Angola; Pentadesma Ker-
stingii, Soudan Park-steppe Province, and Guinea forest Province. — K. M. Wiegand.

517. Engler, A. Violaceae africanae. IV. Zur Kenntnis der afrikanischen Hybanthus-
Arten. [Violaceae of Africa. IV. Toward a knowledge of the African species of Hybanthus.]
Bot. Jahrb. 55: 397-400. 1919. — A contribution under the general heading "Beitrage zur
Plora von Afrika, XLVII." A key to the African species is given, and nine species are
listed. The new species, combinations, and varieties are: H. enneaspermus (L) F. v.
Muell. var. serratus, Transvaal; H. densifolius, southwest Africa; H. Hildcbrondtii, North
Somaliland; H. hirtus {Jonidium hirtum KlotzSch); H. hirtus var. Klotzschii, Mozambique,
Zanzibar; H. hirtus var. glabrescens, Somaliland, Zanzibar, Mozambique, Katanga; H.
Fritzscheanus, Huilla; H. caffer {Jonidium caff rum Sond.); H. caffer var. angustifolius ; H.
nyassensis {Jonidium nyassense Engl.); H. capensis {Jonidium capense Roem. & Schult.);
H. thymifolius {Jonidium thymifolium Presl). — K. M. Wiegand.

518. FtJCHS, Alfred. Orchis Traunsteineri Saut. Erster Tell. Ber. Naturw. Vereins
Schwaben u. Neuburg 42: 3-174. 47 fig. 1919. — The author gives a full account of Orchis
Traunsteineri, a member of the Dactylorchis group occurring in Central Europe. He divides
this species, as ordinarily understood, into two species, the true 0. Traunsteineri of Sauter
and 0. pseudo-Traunsteineri, which he describes as new. Under the second species he dis-
tinquishes and describes in detail the following new subspecies: bavaricus, suevicus, gabre-
tanus, gennachiensis , Hoeppneri, eifliacus and Koningweenianus . To these subspecies he
ascribes a hybrid origin, regarding them as more or less complex crosses between O. Traun-
steineri and certain other members of the Dactylorchis group, such as O. incarnatus L. and
O. latifolius L. The subspecies suevicus, for example, he expresses by the formula, {Orchis
incarnatus + latifolius) + Orchis Traunsteineri; some of his other formulas are even more
complicated. In the course of his discussions h'e describes the following new races: 0. incar-

No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 81

natus race trminsteinerifolius and O. maculalus race falcatm. The illustrations depict details
of floral structure and especially variations in the form and lobing of the lip. In connec-
tion with the various plants described the author calls attention to the distinctive features
of their habitats and lists the species, both bryophytes and spermatophytes, which are asso-
ciated with them. — A. W. Evans.

519. GuiLLAUMiN, A. Contribution a la Flore de la Nouvelle-Caledonia. [Contribution
to the Flora of New Caledonia.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25:645-652. 1919.— Species
are listed with the citation of specimens made by various collectors. Tapeinosperma Pen-
nelii is described as a species new to science. — E. B. Payson.

520. Haines, H. H. Indian species of Carissa. Indian Forester 45: 375-388. PI. 17-20,
7 fig. 1919. — Five species of Carissa are known in India, and a botanical description is
given of each, with a key for their identification. — E. N. Munns.

521. Hall, Cuthbert. On a new species or form of Eucalyptus. Proc. Linnean Soc.
New South Wales 43:747-749. PI. 75. 1918.— Eucalyptus Marsdeni, forma vel sp. nov. is
described in regard to its seedling, juvenile, and mature leaves; inflorescence; fruit; bark
(unusual for a Eucalypt, to be classed with the stringy-barks, yet laminated with a sort of
ochreous deposit on the outer surface of each layer, branch bark smooth and greyish, a half
bark); timber, which is light brown, straight grained, has few gum-veins and works well,
resembling E. viminalis in physical characters. The only known tree has been cut. The oil
from leaves and terminal branches is thick and viscous, and its characteristics are discussed
in detail. — Eloise Gerry.

522. Hansen, W. Die Bestimmungen der echten Graser nach ausseren Merkmalen.
[The determination of the true grasses according to their external characters.] Illustrierte
Landw. Zeitg. 39: 266. 1919.— For the identification of the grasses the writer presents a plan
based primarily on the form of the inflorescence. — John W. Roberts.

523. Hassler, E. Bromeliacearum paraguariensium conspectus. [A conspectus of the
Bromeliaceae of Paraguay.] Annuaire Conservatoire et Jard. Bot. Geneve 20: 268-341. 2 fi^.
1919.— There is a short introduction, a technical description of the genera and species, and an
index. Full notes with synonymy and bilbiography are given. The genera are Bromelia,
Acanthostachys, Ananas, Aechmea, Billbergia, Deuterocohnia, Dyckia, Vriesea, Tillandsia.
The new names are: Aechmea polystachia var. myriophylla {A. myriophylla Morr.), A. (subg.
Platyaechmea) plalyphylla (Santo Thomas, Sierra de Amambay, Hassler 11283 leg. Rojas),
A. ampullacea var. typica (Yaguarazapd, Fiebrig 5431) and var. longifolia (Yhii, Hassler 9691),
Billbergia magnifica var. acutisepala (Esperanza, Hassler 10726), Deuterocohnia paraguarien-
sis (Cerro Margarita, Hassler 11098), Dyckia ferox f. australia (D. ferox Mez), f. vulgaris
(Cerro-hu, Hassler 1447 et al), subsp. hamosa {D. hamosaMez), D. commixta (Tobaty, Chod. &
Vischer 97), D. microcalyx var. inermis (Villa Rica, Hassler 8787), var. micrantha (Alto
Parand, Fiebrig 5941), D. distachya (Fiebrig 5648), f. induta (Fiebrig 5824), D. tobatiensis
(Tobaty, Hassler 2099), D. Hassleri f. gracilis (Hassler 1120), var. arenosa (Cerro Cord,
Hassler 10500), var. subinermis (Hassler 10500a), subsp. basispina (Esperanza, Hassler 10884),
var. montana (Cerro Cord, Hassler 9789), D. vestita (Centurion, Fiebrig 5311), D. Nissionum
var. breviflora (San Ignacio, Hassler 142), D. insignis (Centurion, Fiebrig 4615), var. ma-
crantha (Centurion, Fiebrig 5310a), var. obtusiflora (Centurion, Fiebrig 5310), Vriesea glu-
tinosa var. viridis (Santo Tomas, Hassler 3768), Tillandsia stricta var. paraguariensis (Hass-
ler 3286 p.p.), T. streptocarpa var. filifolia (Balansa 615), T. decomposita var. minor (Hassler
3683), T. confxisa (Lake Ypacaray, Hassler 3101), var. saxatilis (Hassler 3416), T. arhiza var.
rupestris {T. rupestris Mez), T. bandensis var. intermedia (Santa Elisa, Hassler 2778), T.
tricholepis var. argentea (Hassler 8517).— A. S. Hitchcock.

524. HowARTH, W. O. Festuca rubra near Cardiff: a taxonomic morphological, and ana-
tomical study of three sub-varieties of Festuca rubra L., subsp. eu-rubra Hack., var. genuina
Hack., growing near Cardiff, S. Wales. New Phytol. 18: 263-286. U fig- 1919.— A detailed

82 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

study of the subvarieties grandiflora (Hack.), tenuifolia (new), and a third probably corre-
sponding to Hackel's glaucescens. The new subvariety is xerophytic and generally associ-
ated with halophytic conditions; fairly densely caespitose; rhizomes short and more or less
curved and ascending from the base; leaves slender and dark glaucous green, with a "bloom;"
panicle more compact than in grandiflora: internodes rough; spikelets fewer, but the individual
glumes large and as numerous as in grandiflora, with shorter awns. — I. F. Lewis.

525. JoRGENSEN, E. Ajuga pyramidalis X reptans. Bergens Mus. Aarb. (Naturh.
Raekke) 1917-1918. 4 p. 1918. — At Nygaard Park in Bergen, specimens of Ajuga reptans,
rare in Norway, were found with the common A. pyramidalis. Their hybrid was also found.
The species and hybrid are described. — A. Gundersen.

526. JoRGENSEN, E. Die Euphrasia-Arten Norwegens. [Euphrasia species of Norway.]
Bergens Mus. Aarb. (Naturh. Raekke) 1916-1917: 5-337. 11 maps, 14 tables, 54 fi^., bibliog-
raphy. 1919. — Detailed discussion of characters and distribution of Norwegian species.
These differ in degree, not in definite characters, representing an almost inextricable jumble
answering the Mendelian splitting up of hybrids. Numerous new forms are described;
one new species, E. hyperborea. In the usual sense of species there are only two, E. .salis-
burgensis, and all other forms taken together. Summary given in English. — A. Gundersen.

527. KoiDztJMi, Geniti. Contributiones ad Floram Asiae Orientalis. [Contributions to
the flora of eastern Asia.] Bot. Mag. Tokyo 33: 217-223. 1919.— The author describes as

new, Lactuca grandicolla, Senecio muninensis, Pyrus Yoshinoi, Salix paludicola, S. Hidewoi,
S. tsukoshiana, Cirsium Yoshizawae, Campanula microdonta, with notes on other Japanese
plants, and gives as a new combination, Zanthoxylon inerme (Rehd. & Wils.) Koidz. — Roxana
Stinchfield Ferris.

528. Lazaro e Ibiza, B. Revision critica de las especies peninsulares del genera Viola.
(A critical revision of the peninsular species of the genus Viola.] Revista R. Acad. Cien.
Exactas, Fisicas y Nat. [Madrid] 17: 249-280, 391-421. 5 pi. 1919.— The species are divided
into 3 groups and 8 sections. The following new species and varieties are described: Viola
longifolia, V. palustris var. genuina, V. odorata var. genuina, V . hirta var. genuina, V. biflora
var. uniflora, V . canina var. genimia, V. sylvestris var. genuina, V. rupestris var. genuina,
V. cornuta var. genuina, V. lactea var. genuina, V. parvula var. genuina, and V. lutea var.
genuina.— L. L. Harter.

529. MiETHE, E. Cattleya superba Schomb. Orchis 13 : 10-12. 1919. — This species is
here redescribed and illustrated. — E. B. Payson.

530. Pellegrin, FRANgois. Note sur le Banda rouge et sur un Ombega du Gabon. [Con-
cerning the red Banda and an Ombega of Gabon.] Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. [Paris] 25: 653-654.
1919. — Sindora Klaineana Pierre is described as new to science. It is known locally as the
red Banda. Ombega is the vernacular term applied to Entandrophragma rufa Chevalier. —
E. B. Payson.

531. PoNzo, Antonio. Sul genere Acacia. [The genus Acacia.] Nuovo Gior. Bot. Ital.
25: 271-307. 1918. — A historical review of the position and limitation of the genus, a critical
consideration of the essential and secondary taxonomic characters, and a regrouping and
description of the species. The following subdivisions are recognized: (1) Phyllodinae with
29 species, (2) Botryocephalae with 4 species, (3) Pulchellae with one species, and (4) Gumi-
ferae with 10 species. — Ernst Artschwager.

532. Prain, D., AND I. H. Burkill. "Dioscorea sativa." Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919:
339-375. 1919.— After an exhaustive enquiry into the aggregate that Linnaeus included
under the name Dioscorea sativa, it is shown that that name is one which can not be used. —
E. Mead Wilcox.

No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 83

533. R., J. K. [Rev. of: Standard Cyclopedia of Horticulture. Vol. VI. S-Z with Supple-
ment p. S04S-S639, fig. 3516-4056. Edited by L. H. Bailey. 1917.] Jour. Botany 57: 198-200.
1919.

534. ScHELLENBERG, G. Connaraceae africanae. III. [Connaraceae of Africa. III.]
Bot. Jahrb. 55:436-456. 1919. — The paper is made up of the descriptions of new species,
and the designation of new combinations found necessary in the preparation of a mono-
graph of the famil}' soon to appear in "Das Pfianzenrcich." The new species are: Cnesiis
liberica, Liberia; C. Dinklagei, Liberia; C. cinnabar ina, Kamerun; C. longiflora, Lagos;
C. leucantha Gilg, Kamerun; C. calantha, Kamerun; C. gabunensis, Gabun; C. Zenkeri,
Kamerun; C macrophylla Gilg, Kamerun; Manotes Tessmannii, Gagun; M. Zenkeri Gilg,
Nigeria, Kamerun, etc.; M. rosea, Gabun and Kamerun; M. rubiginosa, Angola; M.
Soyauxii, Loango; Paxia calophylla Gilg. Kamerun; P. Zenkeri, Kamerun; P. cinnabarina,
Kamerun; P. lancea, Kamerun; Byrsocarpus Ledermannii, Kamerun; B. tomentosus, Dutch
East Africa, Rodesia, etc.; B. papillosus, Kamerun; Santaloides urophyllum, Kamerun; Jolly-
dora glandulosa, Kamerun. New combinations are as follows: Cnestis Mannii {Connarus
Mannii Baker); C. pseudoracemosa {Connarus pseudoracemosus Gilg); Roureopsis Thonneri
{Rourea Thonneri De Wild.); Spiropetalum Reynoldsii {Connarus Reynoldsii Stapf); Santa-
loides gudjuanum {Rourea gudjuana Gilg); S. splendidnm {Rourea splendida Gilg); S. baman-
yense {Rourea bamanganense De Wild.). Notes are given on Paxia my riantha (Baill.) Pierre,
Byrsocarpus orientalis Baill., B. Poggeanus (Gilg) Schellenb., and B. maximus Bak. — K. M.
Wiegand.

535. ScHELLENBERG. G. Ucber die Connaraceen-Gattung Jaundea Gilg. [On the genus
Jaundea Gilg of the family Connaraceae.] Bot. Jahrb. 55: 457-463. 1919.— Gilg described
in 1895 a genus Jaundea based on a plant which he named J. Zenkeri collected by Zenker
near the station Jaunde in Kamerun. The new genus was included in Natur. Pflanzenfam.
where in one place it was spelled Yaundea, an unjustifiable spelling of the word. Gilg
admitted later that he was deceived by the young inflorescence and the position of the
anthers in the Zenker material, and that his name should be a syrtbnym of Rourea pseudo-
baccata. Later Schellenberg in his inaugural dissertation made Jaundea a section of
Byrsocarpus; but he now recognizes it as a genus containing the original plant of Gilg, but
having different characters and limits. As thus understood it contains a portion of the
species originally ascribed by Schellenberg to Jaundea as a section of Byrsocarpus. The
unimportance of certain biological characters from a taxonomic point of view is discussed,
as for instance the appearance of the flowers with or after the leaves. The nervation of the
leaf and the type of inflorescence are important in separating Jaundea and Byrsocarpus. A
diagnosis of the genus is given and the characters which separate it from Byrsocarpus are
tabulated. The species and forms included are as follows: Jaundea Baumannii {Rourea
Baumannii Gilg); J. congolana; J. Leskrauwaetii {Rourea Leskrauwaetii De Wild.); J. monti-
cola {Rourea motiticola Gilg); J. Oddoni {Rourea Oddoni De Wild.); /. pseudobaccata {Rourea
pseudobaccata Gilg); /. pubescens {Connarus pubescens Baker); J. pubescens iorma, glabrala. —
K. M. Wiegand.

536. Schlechter, R. Die Gattung Cochlioda Ldl. [The Genus Cochlioda Ldl.] Orchis
13: 3-10. 1919.— (Concluded.) An extensive generic description is followed by a key to the
five recognized species of Cochlioda. Specific descriptions, synonomy, and the citation of
specimens are included. Symphyglossum is described as a genus new to science, and to it are
assigned the following species: S. sanguineum {Mesospinidium sanguineum Rchb. f.) and
S. strictum {Cochlioda stricta Cosn.). — E. B. Payson.

537. Schlechter, R. Noch eimnal iiber Epidendrum pentotis Rchb. f. und Epidendrum
Beyrodtianum Schltr. [Again concerning Epidendrum pentotis Rchb. f. and Epidendrum
Beyrodtianum Schltr.] Orchis 13: 27-29. 1919.— The difference between these two similar
species is reiterated, and drawings are presented to show the floral structure of E. pentotis
Rchb. i.—E. B. Payson.

84 TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII^

538. ScHLECHTER, R. Onciditim X BurgeflSanum Schltr., eine interessante neue Kreu-
zung. [Onciditim X Burgeffianum Schltr., an interesting new hybrid.] Orchis 13:29-30.
1919. — This hybrid has for its parents Oncidium Marshallianum Ldl. and 0. varicosum Ldl. —
E. B. Payson.

539. ScHLECHTER, R. Vandanthe Tatzeri Schltr. n. hybr. Orchis 13:52-53. 1919.— A
hybrid between Vanda tricolor Ldl. and Euanthe Sanderiana (Rchb. f.) Schltr. is described
and illustrated. — E. B. Payson.

540. ScHLECHTER, R. Ein seltenes Grammatophyllum. [A rare Gramma tophyllum.]
Orchis 13 : 54-55. 1919. — Grammatophyllum papuanum J. J. Smith is described and illustrated.
— E. B. Payson.

541. ScHLECHTER, R. Die Gattung Brassavola R. Br. [The Genus Brassavola R. Br.]
Orchis 13 : 40-46, 58-62, 71-79. 1919. — The genus Brassavola is described, and an outline of
its taxonomic history given with notes as to its geographical distribution. The sections
Eubrassavola, Prionoglossum, Conchoglossum and Cuneilabium are proposed and under each
section are listed their species with descriptions and synonomy. The following new species
are described and new combinations made: B. multiflora, B. nodosa Lindl. var. rhopalor-
rhachis {B. rhopalorrhachis Rchb. f.), B. scaposa. — E. B. Payson.

542. Sedgwick, L. J. The Cyperaceae of the Bombay Presidency, Part II. Jour. Bom-
bay Nat. Hist. Soc. 26: 192-209. 1918. — A general systematic consideration with keys and
descriptions of the genera and species, covering the genera Courtoisia, Fimhristylis, Steno-
phyllus, Eleocharis, Scirpus, Eriophorum, Fuirena, Lipocarpha, Remirea, Rhyncospora,
Hypolytrum, Scleria, Carex. The first part was published in the preceding volume. No new
names appear. — E. D. Merrill.

543. Sedgwick, L. J. Reduction of Euphorbia Rothiana Sprengel, of the Indian floras.
Jour. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. 26: 599-600. 1919. — The above Indian species, as hitherto
interpreted, is referred in part to Euphorbia laeta Roth and in part to E. oreophila Miq. —
E. D. Merrill.

544. Sedgwick, L. J. On the species of Zizyphus in the Bombay Presidency. Indian
Forester 45: 67-74. 1919. — Critical notes on seven species of Zizyphus occurring in India are
given, with characteristics for field identification and distribution. Two forms of Z. Oenoplia
Mill, are distinguished as forma robusta and forma mollis. Z. Xylopyrus Willd. var. glaber-
rima is tentatively proposed as a new variety. The suggestion is made that Z. Xylopyrus
Willd. var. micocarpa may be a hybrid between Z. Jujuba and Z. Xylopyrus. — E. N. Munns,

545. Shreve, Forrest. Monograph of the Cactaceae. [Rev. of: Britton, N. L., and
J. N. Rose. The Cactaceae; descriptions and illustrations of plants of the cactus family.
Vol. I. Carnegie Inst. [Washington] Publ. 248. 1919.] Plant World 22: 270-271. 1919.

546. Sprague, T. A. Dolichandrone and Markhamia. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919:302-
314. 1919. — These bignoniaceous genera are contrasted, and under each genus are listed the
species attributed to it. Detailed synonomy together with distributional and ecological
notes is included for the various species. The following new combinations and new variety
occur: Dolichandrone atrovirens (Bignonia atrovirens Heyne), D. alba (Spathodea alba Sim.),
Markhamia stipulata Seem. var. Kerrii, M. obtusifolia (Dolichandrone obtusifolia Baker). —
E. Mead Wilcox.

547. Staff, O. Gunnera manicata and brasiliensis. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919: 376-378.
1919. — Gunnera brasiliensis Schindler is considered synonymous with G. manicata Lindl. —
E. Mead Wilcox.

No. 1, February, 1921] TAXONOMY OF VASCULAR PLANTS 85

548. Staff, Otto. Gramineae. Flora of Tropical Africa 9<: 577-768. 1920.— This part
continues the Paniceae as far as Setaria. The new genera, species and varieties in this part
are as follows: Paspaliditun (new genus) geminatum {Panicum geminatum Forsk.), P. deser to-
rum (Pantcum desertorum A. Rich.), Urochloa bifalcigera (Panicum bifalcigerum Stapf), U.
trichopus (Panicum trichopus Hochst.), U. pullulans (Panicum geminatum Schweinf. not
Forsk.), U. pullulans var. (?) mosambicensis (Panicum mosambicense Hack.), U. brachyura
(Panicum brachyurum Hack.), U. bolbodes (Helopus bolbodes Steud.), U. echinolaenoides ,
U. Helopus (Panicum Helopus Trin.), U. javanica (Panicum javanicum Poir.), U. rudis,
U. setigera (Panicum setigerum Retz.), U. insculpta (Panicum insculptum Steud.), U. rep-
tans [P. reptans L.). Echinochloa obtusiflora, E. Holubii (Panicum Holubii St&Tpf.), E. hap-
loclada (Panicum haplocladum Stapf), E. jubata, Acroceras (new genus) oryzoides (Panicum
oryzoides Sw.), A. macrum, A. amplectens, A. basicladum, Commelinidium (new genus) may-
umbense (Panicum mayumbense Franch.), C. gabunense (Panicum gabunense Hack.), C. ner-
vosum, Panicum flacciflorum, P. transvenulosum, P. spongiosum, P. ianthum, P. juncifo-
lium, P. carinifolium, P. fulgens, P. nervatum (Isachne nervata Franch.), P. pubiglume, P.
plagianthum, P. sublaetum (P. laetum Stapf, not Kunth), P. viciniflorum, P. filicaule, P.
Hanningtonii, P. phragmitoides, P. poaeoides, P. graniflorum, P. vagiflorum, P. poecilan-
thum, P. aphanoneurum, P. Rowlandii, P. genuflexum, P. paucinode, P. manicatum, P. sociale,
P. novemnerve, P. arcurameum, P. subflabellatum, P. longijubatum, P. pectinellum, P. cal-
vum, P. subobliquum, P. caudiglume [not Hack. 1901], P. microthyrsum, Entolasia (new genus)
imbricata, E. olivacea, Hemigjminia (new genus) Arnottiana (Panicum Arnottianum Nees),
Cyrtococcum (new genus) setigerum (Panicum setigerum Beauv.), Sacciolepis ciliocincta,
(Panicum ciliocinctum Pilg.), S. cingularis, S. nana, S. Chevalieri, S. brevifolia, S. huillensis
(Pancium huillense Rendle), S. spiciformis (Panicum spiciforme Hochst.), S. interrupta
(Panicum interruptum Willd.), S. cymbiandra, S. scirpioides, S. glaucescens, S. typhura
(Panicum typhurum Stapf), S. incurva, S. transbarbata, S. auriculata. S. angusta (Panicum
angustum Trin.), S. leptorrhachis, S. seslerioides (Panicum seslerioides Rendle), S. catumben-
sis (Panicum catumbense Rendle), S. albida. — A. S. Hitchcock.

549. Stuckert, T. Contributions a la connaissance de la flora Argentine. [Contribu-
tions to the knowledge of the flora of Argentina.] Annuaire Conservatorre et Jard. Bot.
Geneve 20 : 428-464. 1919.— This consists of two parts. The first part is. III. Enumeration
des Valerianacees de V Argentine by Stuckert and Briquet. The new names by Briquet
are, Valeriana sarscphylla (Stuckert 7622a), V. effusav&r. genuina (Stuckert 1037 and others),
var. Fiebrigii (Bolivia, Fiebrig 2196), V. approximata (Tucuman, Stuckert 22022), V. Gil-
liesii (Betckea Gilliesii Hook. & Arn.), V. glomerulosa (Tucuman, Stuckert 7637), V. Stuck-
ertii (Stuckert 2749 and others). The second part is, IV. Catalogue des Oxalidacees de I' Ar-
gentine by Stuckert. Oxalis andicola var. Wallichiana (0. andicola var. calyce glabriusculo
Hook.) is a new variety. There is an annotated list with bibliography of 82 species of Oxalis
and 3 species of Hypseocharis. — A. S. Hitchcock.

550. Tatzer, a. Vanda X Mariannae, eine Kreuzung zwischen Vanda tricolor Lindl.
und Vanda Denisoniana Rchb. f. [Vanda X Mariannae, a hybrid between Vanda tricolor
Lindl. and Vanda Denisoniana Rchb. f.] Orchis 13:50-51. 1919.— This hybrid is here de-
scribed and illustrated. — E. B. Payson.

551. TuRRiLL, W. B. A revision of the genus Mendoncia. Bull. Misc. Inf. Kew 1919:
407-424. 1919.— This Central and South American genus is contrasted with related genera
of the Acanthaceae by means of a dichotomous key. Twenty-five species are recognized,
and under each is given an extended Latin diagnosis with citation of exsiccatae. A key
to the species is also provided. The following species and varieties are described as new
and the following new combinations made: Mendoncia Spraguei, M. Tonduzii, M. coccinea
Veil. var. sparatteria (M. Velloziana Nees var. sparatteria Nees), M. coccinea var. elliptica,
M. gracilis, M. orbicularis, M. retusa. — E. B. Payson.

86 UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS [BoT. Absts., Vol. Vll,

MISCELLANEOUS, UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS

Burton E. Livingston, Editor

552. Anonymous. Microscoptical optics. [From a paper by A. E. Conradt at a dis-
cussion on the microscope at the Royal Society on Jan. 14.] Nature 104: 548-550. 1920.

553. Anonymous. Peat fiber and the textile industry. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13 : 350.
1920.

554. Anonymous. [Rev. of : Alcock, W. Broughton. Canvas destroying fungi. Journ.
Roy. Army Med. Corps 32«. Dec, 1919.] Jour. Trop. Med. and Hygiene 23:41. 1920.—
Researches in Malta and Italy show that the rotting of canvas is due to various fungi, but
chiefly to species of Macrosporium and Stemphylium. — E. A. Bessey.

555. Barnard, J. E. Construction and use of miscroscopes. Nature 104:546-548.
1920. — Opening paper of a discussion on the microscope at the Royal Society on Jan. 14.
Most microscopes are unstable. An object on the stage will not maintain its centration
if the instrument is put into the horizontal. Imperfections in mechanical stages are gen-
eral. Resolution, not magnification, is the primary function of an objective. No indica-
tion that numerical aperture will be further increased, but advances in illumination, espe-
cially by use of ultra-violet or perhaps still shorter radiations, may be hoped for. (See also
Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 3033.)— 0. A. Stevens.

556. Brown, A. M. Faults found in butter. Their definitions, causes and some sug-
gested remedies for same. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:490-494, 591-595. 1920. —
Author discusses relation of certain bad characters found in butter to bacteria and fungi
causing them. — L. R. Waldron.

557. Deelen, H. Peat fiber spinning. Jour. Amer. Peat Soc. 13 : 452. 1920. — German
patent 316,511 covers the preparation from peat of fibers suitable for use with wool, cotton,
or jute. — G. B. Rigg.

558. DuGGAR, B. M. Some factors in research. Plant World 22:277-289. 1919.— A
paper contributed to a symposium on the general topic "Our present duty as botanists," in
Baltimore, 1918. Various factors are discussed, such as the establishment of research posi-
tions in connection with industrial enterprises, extension of opportunities to use special
apparatus during vacation periods, conferences of groups of investigators interested in related
problems, fostering post-doctorate and sabbatical-leave research, co-operation in publication
and other activities, etc. It closes with a plea for better preparation, particularly in chemis-
try, for botanical research. — Charles A. Shull.

559. Fischer, Herman. Der Nahrstoffgehalt unserer Gewasser und seine Ausniitzung
fiir die Urproduktion. [The nutrient content of our waters and its use as an original productive
factor.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 66-83. 1920. — Agriculture has received
too little study in the past when compared with its relative economic importance. The
author discusses previous studies in this field, and dwells particularly on the relation of
nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potassium as found in fresh and salt waters to aquatic life,
vegetative and piscatorial. Nitrogen and P2O5 are similar in salt and fresh water. In
rivers, lakes, and other small natural bodies, the quantity of nutrients, especially of P3O5
is greatly influenced by the character of the soil surface, quantity of precipitation, etc.
The humus coloring of water is a direct indication of the P2O6 content; and in general, all
waters of limestone formations contain little, those over sandstone plentiful P2O5. Although
further experimentation is necessary, it is believed that increased P2O0 content in natural
waters can be used in securing greater fish production; also, as the floor decreases in nitrog-
enous compounds, an increase in nitrogen is necessary to keep up production. The rela-

No. 1, February, 1921] UNCLASSIFIED PUBLICATIONS 87

tion of potassium in natural waters varies inversely as that of P2O5. Lime plays an impor-
tant role indirectly in increasing the content of the other three nutrients, by replacing them in
chemical reactions and releasing them for use as solutes. The article contains 2 tables giving
analyses of waters, both basic and acidic, of inland lakes and tributaries. — J. Roeser.

560. MacInnes, L. T., and H. H. Randell. Dairy produce factory premises and manu-
facturing processes. The application of scientific methods to their examination. Agric. Gaz.
New South Wales 31: 5G3-566. 9 fig. 1920.— In this fourth and last installment under this
title the authors make an agar plate examination of dairy produce, its containers, and the
environment in a modern and finely constructed dairy plant. Results are in striking contrast
to those found in other plants in which less attention had been paid to sanitary conditions.
In a plant such as this, pasteurization results are not discounted by insanitation. — L. R.
Waldron.

561. MacInnes, L. T., and H. H. Randell. Dairy produce factory premises and manu-
facturing processes. The application of scientific methods to their examination. Agric. Gaz.
New South Wales 31: 485-489. 7 fig. 1920.— This article gives in some detail the results of
bacterial and fungal counts, qualitative and quantitative, of samples taken at different
stages of manufacture of dairy products, of their containers, and of the general environment
found in one factory. The conclusion to be drawn is that lack of scientific sanitary manage-
ment and control is responsible for much financial loss and probable injury to health. —
L. R. Waldron.

562. Rader, F. E. Report of the work at Matanuska station. Rept. Alaska Agric. Exp.
Sta. 1917:81-84. 1 pi. 1919.— Reports on preliminary work, including the clearing of the
land. — /. P. Anderson.

563. Saunders, Charles Francis. Useful wild plants of the United States and Canada.
£75 p., 16 pi., 7Jt fig. Robert M. McBride & Co. : New York, 1920.— A popular treatise deal-
ing with native plants, especially those useful for food, but also considering those that are
used for beverages, for soap substitutes, and for medicine, besides mentioning certain poison-
ous plants. The book is written in an attractive style, and the information it contains is
selected with care. — C. F. Piper.

564. Stoll, Frank. [Rev. of: Pellett, Frank C. American honey plants. 297 p.,
155 fig. American Bee Journal, Hamilton, 111. 1920.] Torreya 20:104. 1920.— The book
describes as valuable because of nectar or pollen production some 900 species, arranged alpha-
betically by common names, with Latin names accompanying the vernacular. The book is
timely on account of the present sugar shortage. — J. C. Nelson.

565. Wallis, T. E. Analytical microscopy. Pharm. Jour. 104:247-249, 349-351, 395-
397, 541-542, 578-579; Idem. 105: 159-160, 283-284. 1920.

INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS

The purpose of Botanical Abstracts is to supply complete citations and analytical
abstracts of all papers dealing with botanical subjects, wherever published, just as soon as
possible after they appear. Every effort is made to present complete and correct citations
with abstracts of original work, of all papers and reviews, appearing after January 1, 1919.
As an adequate index of progress. Botanical Abstracts is of use to the intelligent grower,
field agent and inspector, extension worker, teacher and investigator. The international
scope of the work should appeal especially to those workers who have restricted library facili-
ties. It is hoped that the classification by subjects will prove to be a great aid even to those
having access to large libraries, while the topical index should serve a most useful purpose to
every one interested in plants.

The service of Botanical Abstracts is planned for botanists and all workers with plants,
throughout the world. The services of all the botanical workers who are connected with Botan-
ical Abstracts in any way, are given without any compensation except the satisfaction of par-
ticipation in such a great cooperation toward the advancement of science. It is hoped that all
students of plants will feel that Botanical Abstracts is their journal. Although the physical
exigencies of the enterprise have made it practically necessary that the actual work of prepar-
ing the issues be largely done within a relatively short distance from the place of publication,
yet this does not imply that the cooperation is not needed of residents of other countries than
the United States and Canada. JMany collaborators and abstractors reside in other countries,
but the aim has not been to distribute the actual work throughout the world; rather has it
seemed best to distribute the work so as to give prompt and efficient service, without
reference to the particular countries in which the workers reside. It is physically necessary
that the burden of the work and the finding of funds for clerical assistance, etc., should rest
largely on North American workers, but the field covered is international and the results are
available to all.

The Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts, Incorporated, has charge of publication.
The board is a democratic organization made up of members elected from many societies,
as is shown on the first cover page. Each society elects, in its own way, two representa-
tives, each for a period of four years. One new member is elected each biennium (beginning
January 1, 1921) to replace the representative who retires. In the list on the first cover page,
the member first named in each group is to serve till January 1, 1923; the second member in
each group is to serve till January 1, 1921. Members are not eligible for immediate reelection.
The Executive Committee of the Board of Control of Botanical Abstracts consists of
five members, elected annually by the Board. It has charge of ad interim affairs not involving
matters of general policy. Its membership is shown by the asterisks in the list on the first
cover page. The chairman of the Committee for 1920 is Donald Reddick, Cornell University,
Ithaca, New York.

The Board of Editors of Botanical Abstracts consists of an Editor-in-Chief and Editors
for Sections, as shown on the second cover page. The Editors are elected annually by the
Foard of Control. Assistant Editors are appointed by the Editors. Editors for Sections,
with the aid of Assistant Editors for Sections, are responsible for editing the material of their
respective sections as this is supplied by the Bibliography Committee (from the Collaborators
and other Abstractors), and also for citations and abstracts of non-periodical literature.
They also supply abbreviated titles for the author index of each volume and subject-index
entries (for the occasional subject indexes) pertaining to their respective sections. The Editor-
in-Chief, with the help of the Associate Editor-in-Chief and with the approval of the Board of
Editors, is responsible for the general make-up of the issues, for the final compilations of the
author and subject indexes, and for such other details as are left to him by the Editors for
Sections.

The Bibliography Committee of Botanical Abstracts, the membership of which is shown
on the second cover page, is appointed annually by the Executive Committee of the Board of
Control. The Bibliography Committee is charged with the responsibility of arranging for the
prompt citing and abstracting of serial botanical literature. In performing this function, the
Committee assigns to individual Collaborators the complete responsibility for furnishing the

INFORMATION CONCERNING BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, Continued

abstracts of all botanical papers in a specified serial publication, or in a limited number of
serials. The Committee is further charged with the duty of maintaining an accurate record,
through a S3'^stem of reports furnished currently by the Collaborators, of the state of abstract-
ing for each serial publication. This record enables the Committee to detect and correct
delinquencies in the work of abstracting and to keep the work up to date. The number of
assigned serials will eventually exceed 2000, for each of which a record of the state of ab-
stracting will be maintained in the office of the Bibliography Committee. Readers are earnestly
requested to aid the Bibliography Committee by bringing to its attention any serial publi-
cations that are not being properly represented in Botanical Abstracts. The chairman of
the Committee for 1920 is J. R. Schramm, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York.

Collaborators of Botanical Abstracts. A large number of botanical workers in all
parts of the world have volunteered to assume complete responsibilitj' for securing citations
and abstracts from one or more serial publications as assigned to them by the Bibliography
Committee. This corps of voluntar}^ workers (called Collaborators) really constitute the basis
of the service rendered by Botanical Abstracts. Through their work it is made certain
that all serial publications ar§ promptly entered. A list of the names of Collaborators is
published in each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It is desirable that a considerable
reserve list of collaborators be maintained, in order to allow for necessary changes, and addi-
tional collaborators are therefore earnestly solicited.

Abstractors for Botanical Abstracts. Collaborators frequently prepare abstracts them-
selves, and are thus Abstractors, but they also arrange for others to prepare them. Every
abstract is signed by the Abstractor who prepared it, but entries by citation alone are not
signed. The Collaborators are responsible for these citations. A list of Abstractors is pub-
lished for each volume of Botanical Abstracts. It includes many names of voluntary
contributors to the enterprise, besides those of the Collaborators.

The Printing and Circulation of Botanical Abstracts is in the hands of the Publishers,
according to the terms of a definite contract between them and the Board of Control. All
other matters are directly in the hands of the Board of Control. Correspondence concerning
subscriptions should be addressed to the Publishers or their agents; other matters should be
referred to the Chairman of the Board of Control, to the Chairman of the Bibliography Com-
mittee, or to the Editor-in-Chief.

Readers of Botanical. Abstracts are earnestly requested to make careful note of any
errors that occur in the journal, with their corrections, and to send these notes to the Editor-
in-Chief. If all will cooperate in this it will be possible to supply a page of corrigenda with
each volume. These notes should be on sheets about 22 X 28 cm. (S^ X H inches).

Botanical Abstracts is published monthly. Each volume contains about 300 pages.
No claims are nllowedfor copies lost in the mails unless such claims are received within 30
days (90 days for places oUtside of the United States and Canada) of the date of issue.

Price per volume, net, postpaid: .13.00, United States and dependencies; .?3.12, Canada;
$3.25, other countries. Subscriptions are in order for Volumes VII and VIII. Back vol-
umes. Volumes III to VI, inclusive, can be supplied. Volumes I and II are out of print.

Subscriptions are received at the following addresses, for the respective countries:

United States of North America and dependencies ; Mexico; Cuba: Williams & Wilkins
Company, Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues, Baltimore.

Argentina and Uruguay: Beutelspacher y Cia., Sarmiento 815, Buenos Aires.

Australia: Stirling & Co., 317 Collins St., Melbourne.

Belgium: Henri Lamertin, 58 Rue Coudenberg, Bruxelles.

The British Empire, except Australia and Canada: The Cambridge University Press,
C. F. Clay, Manager, Fetter Lane, London, E. C. British subscribers are requested to make
checks and money orders payable to Mr. C. F. Clay, Manager, at the London address.

Canada: Wm. Dawson & Sons, Ltd., 87 Queen Street, East Toronto.

Denmark: H. Hagerup's Boghandel, Gothersgade 30, Kjobenhavn.

France: Emile Bougault, 48 Rue des Ecoles, Paris.

Germany: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse 11, Berlin N. W., 6.

Holland: Scheltema & Holkema, Rokin 74-74, Amsterdam.

Italy: Ulrico Hoepli, Milano.

Japan and Korea: Maruzen Company, Ltd. (Maruzen-Kabushiki-Kaisha), 11-16
Nihonbashi Tori-Sanchome, Tokyo; Fukuoka, Osaka, Kyoto, and Sendai, Japan.

Spain: Ruiz Hermanos, Plaza de Santa Ana 13, Madrid.

Switzerland: Georg & Cie., Freistrasse 10, Bfile.

Vol. VII

MARCH, 1921

No. 2

ENTRIES 566-1527

BOTANICAL Abstracts

\ monthly serial furnishing abstracts and citations of publications in the international

field of botany in its broadest sRnse

PUBLISHED MONTHLY UNDER THE DIRECTION OF

THE BOARD OF CONTROL OF BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, INC.

A democratically constituted organization, with members representing many societies

interested in plants.

THE SOCIETIES NOW REPRESENTED

AND

THE MEMBERS OF THE BOARD OF CONTROL

(The Executive Committee for 19SJ are indicated by asterisks)

American Association for the Advancement
of Science, Section G.
-R. A. Harpkr, Columbia University,
New York City.

B. E. Livingston.

Botanical Society of America, General
Section.
H. A. Glkason, New York Botanical

Garden, New York City.
*B. M. Davis.

Botanical Society of America, Physiology
Section.
Otis F. Cuhtis, Cornell University,

Ithaca, New York.
*B. M. DuGOAR, Chairman of the Board.

Botanical Society of America, Systematic
Section.
Marshall .\. Howk, New York Botani-
cal Garden, New York City.
J. A. Barnhart.

Botanical Society of America, Mycological
Section.

C. H. Kauffman, University of Michi-
gan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

BntrcR Fink, Miami University, Oxford,
Ohio.

American Society of Naturalists.
H. H. Bartlett, University of Michigan,

Ann Arbor, Michigan.
*J. A. Harris.

Ecological Society of America.
H. L. ScHANTZ, U. S. Bureau of Plant

Industry, Washington, D. C.
* Forrest Shreve.

Paleontological Society of America.
Arthur Hallick, 61 Wall Street, New

Brighten, New York.
E. W. Berry.

American Society of Agronomy.

('. H. Hutchison, Cornell University,
Ithaca, New York.

C. A. MOOERS.

Society for Horticultural Science.
V. R. Gard.n'kk, University of Missouri,

Columbu.s, Missouri.
E. J. Kraus.

American Phytopathological Society.

L. R. JovES. University of Wisconsin,
Madison, Wisconsin.
* Donald Reddick.

Society of American Foresters.

Rmmiakl Zox, U. S. Forest Service, Wash-
ington, D. C.

J. S. Illick, Pennsylvania Department
of Forestry, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania.

American Conference of Pharmaceutical
Faculties.

Heuer W. Youn(;kk.v, Philadelphia Col-
lege of Pharmacy and Science, Phila-
delphia, Pennsylvania.

Henry Kraemer.

Canadian Society of Technical Agricultur-
ists.

W. P. Thompson, University of Sas-
katchewan, Saskatoon, Saskatchewan.

B. T. DicKsov, Macdonald College,
Macdonald College, Quebec.

Royal Society of Canada.
No elections.

At large.
W. A. Orton.

WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY

BALTIMORE, TJ. S. A.

Entered ae Becond-claES matter, November 9, 1918, at the post office at Baltimore, Maryland, under the Act of

March 3, 1879

$3.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba
"a
countries

Price, net postpaid, per volume

("$3.00, United
< S3. 12, Canad£
{ $3.25, Other c

CONTENTS

Agronomy , 566- 684

Bibliography, Biography and History 685- 710

Botanical Education 711- 718

Cytology .^ 719- 739

Forest Botany and Forestry .' 740- 838

Genetics 839- 943

Horticulture 944-1047

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants 1048-1077

Morphology and Taxonomy of Bryophytes 1078-1096

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History 1097-1124

Pathology 1125-1275

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy 1276-1289

Physiology 1290-1385

Soil Science 1386-1420

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants 1421-1498

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications 1499-1527

BOARD OF EDITORS FOR 1920

AND ASSISTANT EDITORS
Editor-in-Chief, Burton E. Livingston

. The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore

Associate, Lon A. Hawkins

U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.

EDITORS FOR SECTIONS

Agronomy. C. V. Piper, U. S. Bureau of Plant Indus-
try, Washington, D. C. — Assistant Editor, Mart R.
Burr, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington,
D.C

Bibliography, Biography and History. NeilE. Stevens,
U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.

Botanical Education. C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn
Botanic Garden, Brooklyn, New York. — Assistant
Editor, Alfred Gundersen, Brooklyn Botanic
Garden, Brooklyn, New York.

Cytology. Gilbert M. Smith, University of Wisconsin,
Madison, Wisconsin.— Assistant Editor, Geo. S.
Bryan, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin,

Ecology and Plant Geography. H. C. Cowles, The
University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois.— Assistant
Editor, Geo. D. Fuller, The University of Chicago,
Chicago, Illinois.

Forest Botanv and Forestry. Raphael Zon. U. S. Forest
Service, Washington, D. C— Assistant Editor, J. V.
HOFMANN, U. S. Forest Service, Wind River Ex-
periment Station, Stabler, Washington.

Genetics. George H. Shull, Princeton University,
Princeton, New Jersey. — Assistant Editor, J. P. Kelly,
Pennsylvania State College, State College, Penn-
sylvania.

Horticulture. J. H. Gourlet, West Virgmia Univer-
sity, Morgantown, West Virginia. — Assistant Editor,
H. E. Knowlton, West Virginia University, Morgan-
town, West Virginia.

Miscellaneous, Unclassified Publications. Burton E.
Livingston, The Johns Hopkins University. Balti-
more, Maryland. — Assistant Editor, Sam F. Tre-
lease, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore,
Maryland.

Morphology, Anatomy and Histology of Vascular Plants.

E. W. Sinnott, Connecticut Agricultural College,

Storrs, Connecticut.
Morphology and Taxonomy of Algae. E.N. Tbanseau.

Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio.
Morphology ana Taxonomy of Bryophytes. Alexandbb

W. Evans. Yale University. New Haven. Connecticut.

Morphology and Taxonomy of Fungi, Lichens, Bacteria
and Myxomycetes. H. M. Fitzpatrick. Cornell
University, Ithaca, New York. — Assistant Editor,
Carlos E. Chardon, Cornell University, Ithaca,
New York.

Paleobotany and Evolutionary History. Edward W.
Berry, The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore,
Maryland.

Pathology. G. H. Coons, Michigan Agricultural Col-
lege, East Lansing, Michigan. — Assistant Editor, C. W.
Bennett, Michigan Agricultural College, East LanB-
ing, Michigan.

Pharmaceutical Botany and Pharmacognosy. H ebeb W .
Youngken, Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and
Science.Philadelphia.Pennsylvania.— Assistant Editor,

E. N. Gathebcoal, 701 South Wood St., Chicago^'
Illinois. _ _ ^

Physiology. B. M. Duggar, Missouri Botanical Garden, .■
St. Louis, Missouri. — Assistant Editor, Carroll W.
Dodge, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island.

Soil Science. J. J. Skinner, U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Washington, D. C. — Assistant EditorJ

F. M. Schertz, U. S. Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash'^
ington, D. C.

Taxonomy of Vascular Plants. J. M. Greenman, Mis-^
souri Botanical Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.—^
Assistant Editor, E. B. Patson, Missouri BotanicalJ
Garden, St. Louis, Missouri.

BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMITTEE FOR 1920

J. R. ScHBAMM, Chairman, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York

H. O. BucKMAN L. Knudson

W. H. Chandler E. G. Montgombbt

A. J. Eames D. Reddick

R. A. Emerson L. W. Sharp

H. M. Fitzpatrick K. M.Wjeqand

R. HOSMFB

JUST PUBLISHED

DICTIONARY

BOTANICAL EQUIVALENTS

FRENCH-ENGLISH
GERMAN-ENGLISH

ERNST ARTSCHWAGER, Ph.D.

Instructor in Plant Physiology
at Cornell University

AND

EDWINA M. SMILEY, M.A.

Instructor in Plant Pathology

A practical hand-book, intended for the graduate student'and investigator.

Of special use to readers of foreign botanical literature, who feel the need of an
accurate translation of technical terms not commonly found in our dictionaries.

Only terms of French and German derivation are included. Terms cf Latin 'or
Greek origin have been introduced only when their meaning was not clear. Whenever
possible, the special meaning of each term has been explained if no equivalent in the
other language exists.

The list of plant names includes important economic plants, farm weeds, and the
Latin equivalents for the larger plant groups.

Interleaved with blank pages to make it [possible for owners of the volume to
record any terms and names not given,

ORDER FROM

WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY

Publishers of Scientific Journals and Books
BALTIMORE, U. S. A.

ORDER FORM

Williams & Wilkins Company
Baltimore, Maryland, U. S. A.

FleaFC send copy(ies) of Dictionary of Hotanical Equivalents. Remittance for

$2.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $2.15, Carada; $2.25, other countries, is enclosed to cover, (or)

Remittance will be made on receipt of your statement, (or) Remittance will be made about

1921.

Name

(Please state whether Dr., Prof., Librarian, Director, etc.)

Address.

LaMotte Standards

GUARANTEED

Section 1. — Standardized Indicator dyes. Covering a wide range of H-ion con-
centration. Supplied in dry form and in sterile stock solutions. Each indicator
is standardized in strict accordance with the specifications of Clark & Lubs. f Jr.
Bact., Vol. II, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 1917.)

Common Name

Color Change

Ph Value

Thymol Blue (acid range)

red-yellow

1.2-2.8

ilethyl Orange

red-vellow

2.9-4.0

Bromphenol Blue

yellow-blue

3.0-4.6

Resorcin Blue

pink-blue

4.0-7.2

Methyl Red

red-yellow

4.4-€.0

Bromcresol Purple

yellow-purple

fi.2-6.8

Litmus (special)

red-blue

5.5-8.9

Bromthvmol Blue

vellow-blue

6.0-7.6

Phenol-Red

yellow-red

6.8-8.4

Cresol Red

yellow-red

7.2-8.8

Thvmol Blue (alkaline range)

vellow-blue

8.0-9.6

Cresol-phthalein

colorless-red

8.2-9.8

Pheiiol-phthalein

colorless-red

8.4-9.2

Section 2-B. — Specially prepared and standardized Buffer salts and solutions.
Buffer mixtures may be obtained in series covering any particular range of H-ion
concentration from Ph 1.0 to 10.0.

Standardized Buffer Solutions (M/5)

Potassium Phosphate Potassium Phthalate Sodium Hydroxide (COj free)

Potassium Chloride Hydrochloric .\oid Di-Sodium Phosphate, 2HjO

A large number of general synthetic and purified compounds are manufactured by
us and information concerning them may be obtained by addressing

LA MOTTE CHEMICAL PRODUCTS CO.

"Standardis Department"

13 W. Saratoga St. Baltimore, Md.

GENETICS

A Periodical Record of Investigations Bearing on
Heredity and Investigation

ISSUED BIMONTHLY

EDITORIAL BOARD

Gkoroe H. Shvll, Managing Editor
Princeton University

WiLLi.^M E. C.\STLK Edwin G. CoNKLiN Ch.vrles B. D.wenport Bradley M. Davis

Harvard University Princeton University Carnegie Institution of Washington University of Michigan

Edward M. E.\ST Rollins A. Emerson Herbert S. Jennings

Harvard University Cornell University Johns Hopkins University

Thomas H. Mobgan Ratmond Pearl

Columbia University Johns Hopkins University

Prices, net postpaid: Current Volume, Volume VI, $6.00, United States,
Mexico, Cuba; S6.25, Canada; S6.50, other countries

The Back Volumes are available. Price, net postpaid, Volumes I-V,

inclusive: S35.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba; $36.25,

Canada; S37.50, other countries

Order from

Williams and Wilkiiis Company

ri'BLISHEKS OF SCIENTIFIC JOl'KNAI^ AND BOOKS

Baltimore, Maryland, U. S. A,

SOIL SCIENCE

ESTABLIBHCD BT

RUTGERS COLLEGE
JACOB G. LIPMAN, Editor-in-Chief CARL R. WOODWARD, AssiarANT Editob

IN CONSULTATION WITH

OB. ». i. ALWAT DB. H. f. CONN DB. C. B. LIPMAN PBOF. Q. BOBBI

DB. C. BAHTHEL DB. H. VON FEILITZEN DR. P. l6hNI8 DR. E. J. RCBBELL

DR. M. W. BEIJERINCK DR E B FRED ^^- "'^ '- '•^O'* "B. O, 8CHBEINEB

PROF. A. W. BLAIR -„' ' o„eto-SMITH "'*• =• ''• M1T8CHERLICH DR. A. A. F. DE 8I0MOND

DR. P. E. BROWN uni^' J oiuiiQ PROF. C. A. MOOBBa PROF. CHAS. E. THORNB

DIRECTOR H. B. CHBIBTEN8EN ^^- ^- ^- HARTWELL pB. THEO. BEMT DB. N. TULAIKOFF

Soil Science is devoted to the broader outlook of the entire field of soil fertility.

Articles dealing with the more important facts, observations, deductions and problems of
soil biology, soil chemistry, and soil physics are published.

Papers devoted to plant physiology, agronomy, bacteriology, or geology, are accepted for
publication if they contribute directly to the knowledge of soil fertility.

The study of the mineral and organic constituents of soils, soil gases, soil water as a sol-
vent of soil material, soil colloids, the transformation of commercial plant foods in soils,
questions that deal with the fundamental facts of soil fertility and productivity, are given
due consideration.

The phenomena concerning soil micro-organisms, such as bacteria, molds, protozoa, and
algae, receive careful attention.

SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FOR SOIL SCIENCE
Issued Monthly. Two Volumes (500 pages to a volume) a Year.
Current Volumes, Volumes XI and XII: JIO.OO. United States, Mexico, Cuba; $10..50, Canada; $11.00, other
countries Back Volumes, I to XI, inclusive: $.'50.00, United .States, Mexico, Cuba; $.52. .50, Canada; $.55.00, other
countries. Prices are net, postpaid.
WILLIAMS & WILKINS COMPANY,
Mount Royal and Guilford Avenues,
Baltimore, Md., U. 8. A.

Please enter a subscription for Soil Science. Kindly begin subscription with the current volume, and forward
numbers as issued. Remittance for $10 O0.($10.50, Canada; $11.00. other countries) is enclosed to cover two volumes.

Name . . .
Address.

"21 Abstracts of Bacteriology ''°'"'"' "

Compriting complete revieto* and abstracts of American and foreign work in Bacteriology,
Mycology and Protozoology in their relation to the arte and sciences

Under the editorial direction of the
SociBTY OF American Bacterioloqists

Editor
A. PARKER KITCHENS

Published Monthly. One volume a year at present. About 500 pages to a volume

Price, net postpaid: $5.00, United States, Mexico, Cuba;
$5.25, Canada; $5.50, other countries

Subscriptions are received for the volume only. Single copies are not sold

Back Volumes, Vols. I-IV, incl. Price, not postpaid: $24.00, United
States, Mexico, Cuba; $25.00, Canada; $26.00, other countries

Subscription Order for the Abstracts of Bacteriology

WiLLIAtia & WiLKINB CoMPANT

Mount Rotal and GunJOBO Avenues, — — '"••

Baltiuork, Md., U. S. a.

Vg I enclose { jg ^ liinieS^^^^^ \ ''"" •"O80"Pt'°" *<» ^^^ present volume of Abbtbacts or Bactbbioloqt.

(Please state whether Dr., Prof., etc.)

Name.

Address .

90 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

576. Anonymous. A seleccao da semente no arroz. [Selection of seed rice.] Bol. Agric.
Nova Goa [Portuguese East India] 1 : 19-22. 1919. — General directions for selecting seed rice;
also notes on seed treatment with hot water, copper solutions, or a mixture of ashes and
water. — John A. Stevenson.

577. B., W. W. Tropical control of Australian rainfall. [Rev. of: Quatle, E. T., in bul-
letin No. 15 of the Commonwealth Bureau of Meteorology.] Nature 105: 152-153. 1920.

578. Anonymous. History of the Danish crop guarantee. Seed World 7^^ : 19-20. 1920.

579. Anonymous. Danish methods of seed production. Seed World 7^: 20-21. 1920.

580. Anonymous. El algodon. [Cotton.] Bol. Camara Agric. Nacion. Leon [Mexico]
7: 451-457. 1920. — A popular discussion of cotton culture in Mexico. — John A. Stevenson.

581. Anonymous. Selection of canes for planting. Australian Sugar Jour. 12:382-
1920. — A system of growing sugar cane for seed purposes has been started at the Kairi
Experiment Station, on the Atherton Tableland. This has been done in an endeavor to
preserve the high quality and heavy tonnage of the Badila sugar cane, the Rose Bamboo,
Meera, and other of the older varieties of cane. — C. Rumhold.

582. Atkinson, A., and E. W. Joseph. Sixth annual report of the Montana Grain Inspec-
tion Laboratory. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 135. 22 j)., 7 fig. 1920.— The bulletin
gives the results of the seed testing and seed inspection work for the year ending June 30,
lU^.—H. E. Morris.

583. Atkinson, Alfred, J. B. Nelson, C. N. Arnett, W. E. Joseph, and O. Tretsven.
Growing and feeding sunflowers in Montana. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 131 : 3-39.
4 fig. 1919. — The bulletin presents, in the first, part a brief discussion and history of the cul-
tivated sunflower (Helianthus annuus) and gives the results of tests on yields and methods
of growing and feeding sunflowers, as applied to Montana. The second part of the bulletin,
pages 13-29, discusses the use of sunflowers as a silage crop. — H. E. Morris.

584. Atkinson, E. H. Weeds and their identification. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20:
299-301. PI. I. 1920. — Lantana camara L. is described. It has been present in New Zea-
land for twenty-five years, but still seems to be confined to one rather small section. The
fruit is reported to have made children sick, but it is not believed to be injurious to live
stock. — A'. J. Giddings.

585. Baird, W. p. Corn experiments at the Judith Basin substation. Montana Agric.
Exp. Sta. Bull. 132:3-24. 9 fig. 1919.— The bulletin reports experiments in growing corn
in rotation and by different tillage methods. No varieties have been found that can be
depended on to mature a grain crop, but a good quality of fodder corn is produced. Yields
of corn were larger than those of alfalfa, brome grass, or red clover. Yields of oats, spring
wheat, and barley have in all cases been higher after corn, and have averaged about the
same yields as when these crops were grown on summer-fallowed land. — H. E. Morris.

586. Barber, C. H. The growth of the sugar cane. On tillering. Internat. Sugar
Journal 22:495-498. 1920.— Tillering, the inherent branching capacity of the cane, differs
a good deal according to the variety and especially the group of cane grown. There are a
number of factors which limit the power of a cane variety to produce its full yield. The
external influences are light available, moisture in the soil, character of the soil, and amount
of manure applied. As a general rule in cultivated canes, thickness and tillering-power
are inversely related. The inherent character of the groups, of course, must not be neglected.
— E. Koch.

No. 2, March, 1921] AGRONOMY 91

587. Barber, C. A. Millets for fodder on sugar estates, I. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22 : 613-
616. 1 pi. 1920. — A description and short history of sorghum (Andropogon Sorghum) is given.
Some of the characteristics and methods of cultivation in India are described. — C. Rumbold.

588. Barber, C. A. Agricultural notes on extending the milling season. Internat.
Sugar Jour. 22: 611-612. 1920. — The author describes the methods used for lengthening the
sugar-cane milling season. The use of nitrogenous fertilizers, of ratoons, and of splitting up
old stools into two or three parts and replanting the pieces are discussed. Much has been
done by the suitable selection of early and late varieties. — C. Rumbold.

589. Barber, C. H. The growth of the sugar cane. X. Internat. Sugar Jour. 22: 548-
551. 2 pi., 4 fig- 1920. — This article concludes and summarizes a series of ten preceding
papers on the growth of the sugar cane. Other interpretations are made of the large series
of measurements of the canes. With examples and diagrams, it is shown how conditions
prevailing during the growing season leave their marks on the size and form of the cane
and its appendages. — E. Koch.

590. Barfusz, J. Von der emte, sortierung und aufbewahrung der winterkartofifeln.
[Harvesting, sorting and storing winter potatoes.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 516-517.
1920. — Directions for harvesting, sorting, and storing potatoes under different conditions.
— A. J. Pieters.

591. Barthe, A. E. La higuerilla. [The castor bean.] Agric. Mexicano y Hogar 36:
118-120, 124-129, 148-150. 1920.

592. Bartlett, H. Farmers' experiment plats. Potato experiments, 1919-20. New
England district. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:692-694. 1920.— Variety trials of
potatoes are given and results from mineral fertilizers. Application of superphosphate was
economically eflScient. — L. R. Waldron.

593. Bisbt, G. R., and A. G. Tolaas. The use of Bordeaux mixture for spraying potatoes.
Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 192: 1-31. 4 fig. 19-20.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1219.

594. BoviNG, P. A. Valuation of farm crops. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 120-
121, 136-137. 1920.

595. BoviNG, P. A. Sunflowers for ensilage. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 196.
1920.

596. Brexchley, Wixifred E. Weeds of farm land. 15 X 22 cm., 239 p., 41 fig. Long-
mans, Green and Co. : London, 1920. — A discussion of the weed problem and the habits of
weeds rather than a manual of the individual species. Of the thirteen chapters those on
Vitality of Weed Seeds, Association with Soils, Association with Crops, Uses of Weeds, and
Popular Names are of especial interest, and contain many original data from the Rothamsted
Experimental Station. The volume is well, though not profusely, illustrated with line
drawings. About 175 citations to literature, mostly European, are given in footnotes. —
C. V. Piper.

597. Brown, Edgar. What farmers should expect from seedsmen. Seed World 8'' : 26.
1920. — In this article it is pointed out that the seedsman holds a more directly responsible
relation to agriculture than any other merchant, because the farmer is fundamentally
dependent upon the seed merchant for his crop seed. — M. T. Munn.

598. Burgess, J. L. Fanners interest in good seed. Seed World 7^: 27. 1920.

599. Cardon, P. v., W. O. Whitcomb, and W. F. Day. Seventh annual report of the
Montana Grain Inspection Laboratory. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 136. 32 p., 3 fi^.
1920. — The bulletin discusses methods of collecting, shipping, and grading grain samples.

92 ' AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

Inspection fees and Montana grades for wheat, oats, and barley are given, as well as a com-
plete copy of the Montana State Grain Inspection Law. A preliminary statement of inves-
tigational work, detailed reports of seeds tested, and a financial statement of the laboratory
are included. — H. E. Morris.

600. Cockayne, L. An economic investigation of the montane tussock-grassland of New
Zealand. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 337-345. 7 jig. 1920.— A comparison is made of
the flora on a heavily-grazed and an adjoining lightly-grazed pasture at an elevation of
about 2000 feet. Coriaria sarmentosa var. and Celmisia spectabilis are found particularly
abundant in the lightly-grazed tract. Coriaria sarmentosa has been reported as poisonous
to sheep, but in this instance they were apparently uninjured by it. The Celmisia is reported
as unpalatable. — N. J. Giddings.

601. Cockayne, L. An economic investigation of the montane tussock-grassland of New
Zealand. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 209-217. 8 fig. 1920.— This gives the results of an
experiment to determine the relative palatibility for sheep of the native plants occurring
in one of the reserves. The plants are listed and relative palatibility noted. — A^. /. Giddings.

602. Cook, O. F. Commercial parasitism in the cotton industry. Nature 105:548-549.
1920. — System of marketing does not offer sufficient inducement for production of better
grades of cotton. Investigations in the United States show that best and most uniform
fiber can be maintained only in communities which grow a single variety. More attention
is needed to determine quality in the field. — 0. A. Stevens.

603. Crile, Austin D. Extirpacion del zacate Johnson. [Eradication of Johnson grass.]
Agric. Mexicano y Hogar 36: 153-156. 1920.

604. DoBLAS, Jos£ Herrera. Henificacion de forrajes. [Haymaking.] Bol. Asoc.
Agric. Espana 11:348-354. 1919.— The author considers methods of storing hay, for the
most part by baling, together with costs and probable returns. — John A. Stevenson.

605. Dominguez, Zeferino. La semilla. [Seed.] Bol. Camara Agric. Nacion. Leon
[Mexico] 7: 449-451. 1 fig. 1920.— The author considers the proper care of seed-corn under
Mexican conditions. — John A. Stevenson.

606. Downing, R. G. Flax growing in Victoria. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 636.
1920.

607. Dymond, J. R. Color characteristics of red clover seed. Seed World 7^ : 23. 1920.—
In Canada in 1916 in samples of red clover seed, the purple-colored seeds were slightly more
prevalent and in practically every case weighed more per thousand seeds than the yellow-
colored seeds. Germination tests showed that the yellow seeds gave a higher percentage of
germination and contained more hard seeds than the purple. The green or immature seeds
gave the lowest percentage of germination, but contained a surprisingly high proportion of
hard or impermeable seeds. The brown seeds are shown to be low in vitality and to contain
the smallest percentage of hard seeds. — M. T. Munn.

608. Elorduy, Samuel Torres. Cultivo de la remolacha azucarera. [Sugar beet cul-
tivation.] Bol. Camara Agric. Nacion. Leon [Mexico] 7:493-495. 1920.

609. FiNDLAY. Hugh. The handbook for practical farmers. 558 p., 258 fi^. D. Appleton
& Company: New York and London, 1920.— This book, edited by Prof. Hugh Findlay of
Columbia University, consists in the main, of contributions from men who are actively en-
gaged in the promotion of the subjects they discuss. Of the 558 pages, some 45 are devoted
to soil management and drainage, 94 to a discussion of the chief field crops, 82 to the orchard,
small fruits, and vegetables, 182 to animal husbandry, 42 to farm weeds and pests (not dis-
eases), 96 to farm engineering, economics, and miscellaneous subjects; and the book concludes

No. 2, March, 19211 AGRONOMY 93

with 20 pages giving weights, measures, and various useful rules. Under each topic the
fundamental facts are given, but space prohibits considerable elaboration of the many sub-
jects touched upon. The book contains much useful general information. The contributing
authors and their subjects are: A. G. McCall (Maryland Exp. Sta.), Soil Management,
Manures and Fertilizers; R. G. Weggans (Coll. Agric, Cornell Univ.), Corn, Wheat, Oats,
Barley, Rye, and Rotations; F. W. Oldexburgh (Marj'land State Coll. Agric), Hay, Legumes,
Forage, and Soiling Crops; J. R. Faix (Univ. Georgia), The Culture of Cotton; W. W. Gar-
ner (U. S. Dept. Agric), Culture of Tobacco; A. G. Smith (Virginia Polytech. Inst.), Cul-
ture of the Sweet Potato; C. W. Ward (Michigan Agric. Coll.), Fertilizers for the White
Potato; William C. SA>fCTUARY (New York State School Agric), Poultry; Johx McXutt,
(Massachusetts Agric. Coll.), Dairj' Cattle; M. W. Harper (Cornell Univ.), Horse; James
R. Dice (New York State School Agric), Hogs; R. W. Duck (Syracuse Univ.), Sheep; H. F.
Baldwin (Washington, D. C), Milk Production; R. P. Prichard (New York State Coll.
Forestry-), Care of the Farm Wood Lot; C. Craig, and A. LaMotte (DuPont Powder Works),
The Use of Explosives on the Farm; Edgar W. Coolet (International Harvester Co.), The
Care of Tools on the Farm; J. H. Hewett (New York State School of Agric), Some of the
Common Diseases of Animals and Remedies; E. F. Phillips (U. S. Dept. Agric), Bee-Keep-
ing on the Farm; W. T. L. Taliaferro (Maryland Agric Coll.), Construction and Arrange-
ment of Farm Buildings; A. P. Yerkes (Maryland Agric. Coll.), Farm Engines and Their
Care; E. O. Fippin (Cornell Univ.), Drainage on the Farm; James B. Morman (Federal Farm
Loan Banks), Benefits of the Federal Farm Loan System; H. T. Scovil (Univ. Illinois), Farm
Records; and H. F. Miller (Gould's Manufacturing Co.), Running Water for House and
Outbuildings. — C. V. Piper.

610. Gonzalez, J. Instrucciones para el cultivo y tratamiento del tabaco. [Cultivation
and treatment of tobacco.] luformacion Agric. [Madrid] 10: 290-293. 1920.

611. Graber, L. F. Wisconsin's Grimm alfalfa experience. Seed World 8^ : 25-26. 1920.

612. Guthrie, F. B. ,and G. W. Norris. Notes on wheats entered for the Royal Agricul-
tural Society's show. Easter, 1920. Agric Gaz. New South Wales 31:627-635. 1920.—
Weights per bushel, results of milling tests, and other notes are given on about 25 varieties
of wheat entered; also details of the awards. — L. R. Waldron.

613. Hall, Thos. D. Glucose and starch from maize. South African Jour. Indust. 3:
597-605. 1920.

614. Henri CKSEN, H. C. The selection of seed corn in Porto Rico. Porto Rico Agric.
Exp. Sta. Circ. 18: 1-22. 6 fig. 1920. — The importance of selecting seed corn is emphasized.
Structure of a com kernel and the variations in size, shape, and color of kernels of the prin-
cipal varieties are discussed. Points to be considered in selecting desirable ears are given,
together with two proposed score cards for use in Porto Rico. The ear-to-row method of
maintaining selections is outlined. In conclusion a satisfactory method of preserving seed
corn in Porto Rico is given. — John A. Stevenson.

615. Hensel, M. W. Sweet sorghum variety demonstrations, 1919. North Carolina
Agric. Ext. Ser. Circ. 102:3-14. 1920. — Result of tests with 9 varieties of saccharine sor-
ghums in 5 localities within North Carolina, to determine variety best suited for making
syrup. — F. A. Wolf.

616. Hoffman, Paul. Flachsbau und Hausweberei, ein Mittel gegen Landflucht and
Leutenot. [Flax culture and home weaving, a means against land desertion and popular want.]
Mittheil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35: 395-398. 1920.

617. Ingrason, P. A. La alfilaria. [Alfilaria.] Rev. Agric [IVlexico] 5: 228-233. 1919.
— Description of the plants, seeding, cultivation, harvesting, and feeding value of Erodium
cicutarium and related species, said to be of very great value as forage crops in arid regions. —
John A. Stevenson.

94 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

618. JuRiTZ, Chas. F. The prickly pear (Opuntia). Possibilities of its utilization.
South African Jour. Indust. 31:687-693. Idem. 32:803-814. 1920.— The possibility is dis-
cussed of utilizing the prickly pear as a useful fodder plant for stock and as an article of
human diet. It is also considered as a source of potash fertilizer, of sugar and vinegar, of
industrial alcohol, of oxalic acid, of oil, of a mucilaginous glaze, of sizing for textile fab-
rics, of fiber for paper making, of a dye or coloring matter, and as a basis for soap manu-
facture. From a practical standpoint not more than 7 or 8 of these seem to be deserving of
serious attention. — E. M. Doidge.

619. Kalt, Bertram. Der Begriff "Originalsaatgut" und seine Anwendung bei der
Ziichtungsanerkennung. [The conception of "original seed" and its application to recognized
sorts.] Fiihlings Landw. Zeitung 68: 460-471. 1919. — A discussion of the inspection and con-
trol of pure seed production with a view to insuring the genuineness, purity, and quality of
the designated seed. An explanation of what the term "original seed" shall stand for, and
the use and meaning of such terms as "improved" and "pedigreed" as applied to particular
strains of seeds, and the organization and means through which such inspection and certifi-
cation may be carried out. — A. T. Wiancko.

620. Keeble, Frederick. Intensive cultivation. Sci. Monthly 11:445-451. 1920. —
Extracts from an address at the Cardiff Meeting of the British A. A. S. — Skilled onion
growers average 5 tons to the acre. A chrysanthemum grower who turned his facilities from
these to onions averaged 17 tons. The average yield of potatoes is a little over 6 tons. The
army gardeners of France produced 14 tons to the acre. Consequently it may be accepted
as a fact that intensive cultivation would double crops. — L. Pace.

621. Kelly, H. J. Agriculture at Nyngan. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 685-687.
1920. — Experiments have shown that wheat as a grain crop at Nyngan, 250 miles northwest
of Sydney, is unsafe, but that wheat for hay, and certain other fodder crops can be grown
after fallow, if light seeding is practiced. — L. R. Waldron.

622. Killer, J. Die Knollenwachstumsintensitat, einer bisher wenig beachteter Faktor
in der Beurteilung der Kartoffelsorten. [The rate of tuber development, a heretofore little
noticed factor in judging the value of varieties of potatoes.] Fuhlings Landw. Zeitung 68:
426-430. 1919. — Varieties of potatoes of similar time of maturity differ materially in the rate
of growth at different periods. Some varieties make their most rapid growth early in the
season, some in midseason, and some late in the season. These observations lead to impor-
tant considerations regarding the utilization of plant-food in the soil, the influence of weather
conditions at different times in the season, effect of disease attacks, and relation to marketing,
and place the whole matter of potato culture in a different light than heretofore. With a
knowledge of the peculiarities of varieties in these respects, it is possible to regulate plant-
food supplies in the soil so as to be available when most needed, and to select varieties that
in their growth intensity at different periods fit in with the different weather conditions
usually prevailing at certain times in the particular locality. — A. T. Wiancho.

623. Kiesselbach, T. A., and Ratcliff, J. A. Freezing injury of seed corn. Nebraska
Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 16. 96 p. 22 fig. 1920.— The authors discuss various theories
advanced to explain the death of tissues by freezing. — Microscopic studies failed to dis-
close any rupturing of tissues or other cytological disturbances in corn embryos killed by
freezing. It is believed that freezing of a corn embryo produces a physical or chemical
change, aside from the withdrawing of water, in the protoplasmic and nuclear material of the
cell, so that death ensues. The change in color of the embryo as a result of freezing would
seem to indicate that a chemical change had taken place. — Control and field experiments
indicate that death from freezing is directly related to the moisture content of the kernel
and also to the duration of the exposure to cold. Seed corn maturing in a natural way
becomes cold resistant progressively as its moisture content diminishes. Seed corn mortality
increases progressively as the duration of the killing temperature is extended. — Extensive

No. 2, March, 1921] AGRONOMY 95

tabular data are given, showing the correlation between degrees and duration of cold, ice
formation inside the kernel, moisture content of the kernel, embryo discoloration, and loss
of vitality. — Cultural practices relative to the selection and preservation of seed corn
are discussed, and experimental data are presented in support of the conclusions. — T. A.
Kiesselbach.

624. Koch, Pieter. Cotton culture. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1:615-
622. 1920.

325. Lee, S. C. Electrical treatment of seed. Agric. Gaz. Canada 7:248-249. 1920.—
Further investigations on electricall}^ treated seed as compared with untreated seed on the
trial grounds of the Manitoba Agricultural College, are briefly reported. A plot of Marquis
wheat sown with electrically heated seed yielded 3| bushels more grain and 533 pounds
more straw than the check. The plot showed a ranker growth and ripened more slowly.
Rust affected both plots equally. — 0. W. Dynes.

626. Lemmerman, D. Untersuchungen iiber verschiedene Diingungsfragen. [Investi-
gations concerning various fertilizing problems.] Arbeiten der Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 297.
198 p. 1919. — The author reports various experiments, most of which were carried on at
the Society's experimental fields in Dahlem, near Berlin. The following investigations are
reported: The effect of fertilizing with nitrogen, phosphoric acid, potash, and lime, with
and without stable manure on yields and on the fertilizer balance in the soil, 23 p.; Green
manure studies, 25 p. ; On the influence of organic substances on the nitrogen in fertilizers
and in soils, 5 p. ; Investigations with nitrogenous fertilizers, 48 p. ; with phosphate, 17 p. ;
with potash, 8 p.; with lime, 9 p. There are also included meteorological tables and many
pages of tabulated data. — A. J. Pieters.

627. Liehr, O. Der Mohn, sein Anbau und seine Verwertung. [The culture and uses of
poppy.] Fiihlings Landw. Zeitung. 68: 191-198. 1919. — A popular discussion of the culture
and uses of poppy for the production of seed and its products. The yield, composition,
quality, and uses of poppy oil and the by-product, poppy cake, are shown and discussed in
detail. — A. T. Wiancko.

628. Loft, Selm ar. Determining dry matter in root crops. Seed World 7" : 21-22. 1920.
— The author gives the testing methods used by Danish seed growers to secure the desired
results. Dry-matter determinations are described in detail, giving the methods of drawing
samples, washing, and sawing the roots, and the treatment of the final samples. — M. T.

Munn.

629. Meek, B. C, and R. N. Makin. Farmers' experiment plots. Potato experiments,
1919-20. Central western district and south coast. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 621-
625. 1920. — Yields are given of different varieties of potatoes with and without fertilizers.
Fertilizers generally gave very favorable results. — L. R. Waldron.

630. Meek, B. C, and H. Bartlett. Farmers' experiment plots. Maize experiments
1919-20. Central-western and north-west districts. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 703-
706. 1920. — Conditions generally were adverse, and the results were not of particular value.
Irrigated plats yielded as high as 68 bushels per acre. — L. R. Waldron.

631. Mitscherlich, E. A. Ein Beitrag zur Standweite verschiedener Kulturpflanzen.
[A contribution regarding the spacing of various crops.] Fiihlings Landw. Zeitung 68: 121-129.
1919. — Results of experiments with various thicknesses of planting potatoes, mustard, bush-
beans, and hemp. The largest yields were secured from stands of plants per hectare as
follows: potatoes, 33,333; mustard, 10,300,000; bushbeans, 800,000; hemp, 267,000. In the
case of mustard, it is stated that broadcast seeding at a somewhat thicker rate might be
expected to give still larger yields. — A. T. Wiancko.

96 AGRONOMY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

632. Morgan, G. W., and A. E. Seamans. Dry farming in the plains area of Montana.
Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Circ 89:1-22. 1920. — The circular discusses the leading crops
for the great plains — wheat, oats, barley, corn, and flax — mentioning uses and the varie-
ties best adapted. Corn is a reliable source of fodder. Native grasses, brome grass, and
alfalfa are recommended for permanent pastures, while alfalfa, brome grass, sweet clover, and
small grains all make good hay; and in some sections sorghums, millets, and Sudan grass
have been successfully grown. — H. E. Morris.

633. MuNDY, H. G. The cultivation of rice. Rhodesia Agric. Jour. 17:321-324. 2 fig.
1920.

634. MuNDY, H. G. The cultivation of rice in southern Rhodesia. Rhodesia Agric.
Jour. 17:243-246. 1920.

635. MuNN, M. T. The New York seed law and seed testing. New York Agric. Exp. Sta.
[Geneva] Bull. 476. 28 p. 1920. Chiefly a discussion of the provisions of a recently-enacted
seed law, which requires that agricultural seeds offered for sale in the state of New York
shall be labeled, so as to show their purity and viability. — F. C. Stewart.

636. Newton, V/. Soil treatment for the Nechako Valley. Agric. Jour. [British Colum-
bia] 5: 202-203. 1920.

637. Newton, W. The quality in potatoes. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 152. 1920.

638. Oswald, H. Untersuchungen iiber die Einwirkung des Grundwasserstands auf die
Bewurzelung von Wiesenpflanzen auf Moorboden. [Investigations concerning the effect of
ground water level upon the root development of meadow plants on moor soils.] Fuhlings
Landw. Zeitung. 68: 321-340, 370-386. 1919.— The studies were conducted on two types of
moor soil, lowland moor and highland moor. The ground water level was maintained at
different heights in different pots, and a mixture of clover and grass seeds was sown. Details
are given of the yields and root development of the clovers and various grasses in the pots.
The root development was determined at the end of the 5th year, when it was found that
in low moor soil practically half the roots were those of sword grass; this grass together with
meadow fescue and orchard grass made up 81 to 98 per cent of the total root content in the
various pots. The great bulk of grass roots was found in the upper 10 cm. of soil. Sword
grass, orchard grass, and meadow fescue were found to have the deepest root systems;
these penetrated to the water table in the deepest soil. For particulars of the proportion of
roots of the different grasses and the depth to which they penetrated with water tables at
varying levels, the reader is referred to the original. The article is accompanied by a long
bibliography. — A. T. Wiancko.

639. Petersen, Fe DERI CO. Los trigos seleccionadas de la hacienda Amalucan. [Selected
wheats at hacienda Amalucan.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5: 112-118. 4 fig. 1919. — The results
of tests of 3 selected wheat varieties, Flor, Maravilla I, and Maravilla II in comparison with
unselected varieties are given. The tests were carried out on 36 farms, the selected varie-
ties giving greatly increased yields as well as proving more resistant to drouth and rust
{Puccinia spp.). Tests were also made on different soil types and with different cultivation
methods. — John A. Stevenson.

640. Pitt, J. M. Broom millet on the Manning. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31: 637-
644. 6 fig. 1920. — Cultural and other notes are given for this crop, Holcus Sorghum L. —
L. R. Waldron.

641. Pole Evans, I. B. South African fiber plants. Ambari or Deccan Hemp: Hibiscus
cannabinus, L. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1 : 570-580. 6 p'. 1920.

No. 2. March, 1921] AGRONOMY 97

642. Popp, M., AXD R. Floss. Das Susspressfutter als Futter fur Milchvieh. [Sweet
silage as feed for milk cows.] Mittheil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35:391-394. 1920.— The
authors describe an experiment with a form of ensilage, the making of which is said to have
been developed in Switzerland. The process is not described in detail, but the reader is
referred to previous papers. In the experiments reported in this paper rowen was used
from a grass meadow. One portion of the rowen was made into hay, and the other put into a
silo under pressure. The feeding experiment was carried on for varying periods, using the
hay and the sweet silage from the same rowen grass. Analyses showed that the fat content
and the crude protein content were the same for both hay and silage. The pure protein and
the digestible protein were, however, greater in the hay; while the amides increased in the
silage. — The cows gave more milk from the silage than from the hay; and even after the
supply of silage was exhausted, the cows that had been fed on it appeared to retain the
increased milk flow. The making of sweet silage is highly recommended by the authors.—
A. J. Pieters.

643. Pridham, J. T. Breeding cereals at the experiment farms. Agric. Gaz. New South
Wales 31 : 697-698. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 926.

644. Renson, Carlos. Cultivo de la papa. [Potato cultivation.] Bol. Camara Agric.
Nacion. Leon [Mexico] 7:467-471. 1920.

645. Renson, Carlos. Cultivo de la papa. [Potato cultivation.] Jalisco Rural [Mexico]
2:147-153. 1920.

646. Revent6s, Jaume. La soja. [The soy bean.] Rev. Inst. Agric. Catalan de San
Isidro. 69:65-68, 81-85. 1920.— The author gives analyses of the beans, considers their
food value, uses of the oil and commercial products derived from them. — John A. Stevenson.

647. RoBisoN, W. L. Com by-products for swine. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp.
Sta. 5^:247. 1920.

648. Rumsey, H. J. Seed growing in Australia. Seed World S^: 27-28. 1920.

649. Russell, E. J. The nations food. [Rev. of: Rew, R. H. Food supplies in peace
and war. vii + 183 p. Longmans, Green and Co.: London, 1920.] Nature 105:320-321.
1920.

650. Russell, E. J. British crop production. Nature 105: 176-178; 206-208. 1920.—
A discussion of means of increasing production. Data of yields, cost of production, ferti-
lizers, etc. — 0. A. Stevens.

651. Russell, E. J. Wheat and wheat growing. [Rev. of: Buller, A. H. R. Essays
on wheat, xv + 339 p. The Macmillan Co.: New York and London, 1919.] Nature 105:
224-225. 1920. — Reviewer finds it a very interesting history of wheat in Canada.— 0. A.

Stevens.

652. Sanchez, A. Algunos dates sobre el cultivo del maguey. [Notes on the cultivation
of maguey.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5: 227-228. 1919.— Agave sp.

653. Sanchez, N. El cultivo de la papa. [Potato cultivation.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5:
267-269. 1919.

654. Scott, J. M. Forage crops in the South. Seed World 8i:40. 1920.

655. Sheehan, B. F. Dodder in Idaho. Seed World 8^: 26-28. 1920.— In this article
the author discusses dodder as a noxious weed pest, threatening the small seed industry of
Idaho. The methods of dissemination of the seed and the plant, its appearance, and methods
of eradication in the field, are given, together with some notes upon the principal kinds of
dodder.— M. T. Munn.

98 AGRONOMY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

656. Sheehan, B. F. Responsibility for low-quality seeds. Seed World 7^ : 23-24. 1920.
— The writer gives as reasons for the marketing of inferior seeds, mentioning as the
most important, the farmers' practice of selling one another adulterated seeds, of saving
screenings for seed, and of purchasing second or third-grade seed for planting. It is
urged that the farmer selling seed for seeding purposes should be required to comply with the
same regulations as the dealer. It is suggested that the logical method of handling seeds in
interstate commerce is through the medium of national grades, which would be flexible, yet
place a premium upon high grade seeds.— M. T. Munn.

657. SiFTON, H. B. Longevity of cereal, clover, and timothy seed. Seed World 7*: 26-28.
1920.

658. Stewart, F. C. Experiments on the spacing of potato plants. New York Agric.
Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 474: 1-32. 1920.— These experiments were conducted at Geneva,
New York, during 5 seasons and were devoted chiefly to a comparison of 6- by 36-inch
planting with 15- by 36-inch planting. Two varieties of Solanum tuberosum belonging to the
Rural group were used. In different seasons, the thick planting produced from 55.4 to 79.2
per cent more tubers than the thin planting, but as the tubers were of smaller average size
the difference in total weight of crop was much less; viz., 14.4 to 36.9 per cent. The average
net yield (total yield minus "seed") of tubers weighing over one ounce was 34.7 bushels per
acre. More than half of this difference (18.7 bushels) consisted of tubers over two ounces
in weight. — F. C. Stewart.

659. Stone, A. L. Seed legislation and the farmer. Seed World 71°: 23. 1920.— The
conclusion is reached that seed laws should not favor the farmer, but should be designed
only to protect him from technical phases of seed trade and commerce. The practice of
exempting farmers under the seed laws is not considered desirable.— M. T. Munn.

660. SuDENDORF, Th., AND G. Gahrtz. Bcitiag zur Ermittelung des Blausauergehaltes
in Rangoonbohnen. [Cyanide content of lima beans.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u.
Genussmittel 39 : 350-353. 1920.— The cyanide content depends on the source of the beans
as well as on the method of preparation. — H. G. Barbour.

661. Swingle, D. B., and Grace B. Nutting.. Legume inoculation. Montana Agric.
Exp. Sta. Circ. 88. 8 p. 1919.— The circular discusses briefly legume inoculation and its
advantages. The different methods in use are described. — H. E. Morris.

662. Thorne, C. E. The manufacture of sorghtim syrup. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric.
Exp. Sta. 5': 199. 2 pi. July, 1920. — The article comprises a brief discussion of the essen-
tial points in handling cane and producing high grade syrup from the juice. — R. C. Thomas.

663. Thorne, Chas. E. The maintenance of soil fertility in Hamilton county, Ohio.
Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5^°: 170. 1920.— This involves a report of the benefits
from fertilizers and limestone in a corn, soybean, wheat, clover rotation. A detailed com-
parison of certain varieties is given. — R. C. Thomas.

664. Thorne, Chas. E. A crop rotation for a hog farm. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric.
Exp. Sta. 5^: 131. 1920. — Corn, being deficient both in protein and lime, is inadequate as a
muscle and protein builder. Defective features in a corn, wheat, clover rotation are pointed
out. The value of the soy bean as a feed crop, and for the production of bone, protein, and
pork is discussed. Consideration is given to the relative manurial value of straw and stover.
— R. C. Thomas.

665. TiCE, C. Certified potato-seed production. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 197.
1920.

666. TiCE, C. Pitt Meadows demonstration plot. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5:
110, 112. ,1920.

No. 2, March, 1921] AGRONOMY 99

667. Ure, Ruby, and Beatrice, Larson. Single vs. double blotters in germination
testing. Seed World. 7^: 17. 1920.

66S. Uyeda, Y. The proximate composition of Korean hemp and ramie. Jour. Indust.
Eng. Chem. 12: 573-576. 1920. — The pro.ximate composition of Korean hemp and ramie are
given as determined by the modifications of the analytical method proposed by Dore. —
Henry Schmitz.

GG9. VoGEL, Prof. Dr. Die Impffrage der Nichtleguminosen. [Inoculation of non-
legumes.] Mittheil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35:529-532. 1920. — The author reviews the
experiments that have been made with such substances as "U" cultures, "Nitrogen kompost,"
"Biostickstoff," "Azogenin," "Agranit," and others, and finds them without value. How-
ever, a preparation known as "Guanol," a bacterized turf, has given good results. The same
quantity of nitrogen in Guanol has produced larger yields than when used as nitrate of soda.
The author states that Guanol acts through its relatively high nitrogen and potash content
and its content of water soluble organic substances which stimulate soil bacteria to increased
activity. — A. J. Pietcrs.

670. Waldron, C. H. Notes on the germination of Kentucky bluegrass. Seed World
76:22. 1920.

671. Warburg, Otto. Ueber die Fasern liefernden Boehmeria-Arten. [Species of
Boehmeria producing fiber.] Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 7^^:1-7. 1920. — The economic species
are Boehmeria nivea (L.) Hook. Am, and B. tenacissima (Roxb.) Gaud.— //. A. Gleason.

672. Wenholz, H. Sunflowers as silage. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31 : 721-723.
1920. — This article summarizes results secured in United States and Canada. — L. R. Waldron.

673. Wenholz, H. Cuzco maize. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:701-702. 1920.—
This varietj' was not found adapted to New South Wales. The amount of fodder produced
was not up to the standard, and it produced ripe seed with difficulty. Silk did not develop
until 6 weeks after tassels appeared. — L. R. Waldron.

674. Whipple, O. B. Thinning as a possible substitute for seed pieces of uniform size
in potato tests. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 16: 179-181. (1919)— 1920.— By thinning potatoes
to a single stem, size and uniformity of size were improved. The author suggests "that varia-
tions in yields resulting from planting large and small seed pieces may be purely a matter
of stand.' The increased yield resulting from planting larger seed pieces may be largely due
to increased number of plants per hill. Field counts showed that plots of Russet Burbank
potatoes planted with 1.3-ounce seed-pieces average 2.27, 1.04-ounce seed-pieces averaged
2.22, and 1.3-ounce seed-pieces averaged 1.47 plants per hill. — H. A. Jones.

675. Whipple, O. B. Correlation between depths of eyes and degeneration among potatoes.
Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 16 : 181-183. (1919)— 1920.— Results of field experiments show that
there is a correlation between shallowness of potato eyes and degeneracy. The writer is
convinced that there is no surer way of bringing about deterioration within these varieties
inclined to degeneration than by continual selection of shallow-eyed types. The Howard
Elliot, a deep-eyed, high-yielding variety was selected three years for shallowness of eyes.
At end of this time 90 per cent of the plants showed degenerate tendencies. — H. A. Jones.

676. Will AM an, J. J., R. M. West, and C. P. Bull. Sorghum and sorghimi sirup manu-
facture. Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 187:1-55. 17 fig. 1919.— The growing of sor-
ghum, preparation for the mill and the manufacture of the sirup are discussed. — A. C. Arny.

677. Williams, C. B. Report of the Division of Agronomy, North Carolina Agricultural
Exp. Sta. North Carolina Agric. Exp. Sta. Ann. Rept. 42: 21-39. 1920.— Brief summary of
investigational work on soil fertility and fertilizer tests, on crop rotation and on crop improve-
ment by breeding and selection. — F. A. Wolf.

100 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

678. Williams, C. G. Wheat: varietal and cultural work. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric.
Exp. Sta. 5^: 195. 1920. — Wheat tests are being conducted at fourteen different points in
Ohio. Among the many varieties tested, the Gladden, Trumbull, Ohio 9920, and Portage,
rank high. — R. C. Thomas.

679. Williams, C. B., and R. Y. Winters. Crimson clover for North Carolina. North
Carolina Agric. Ext. Serv. Ext. Circ. 98. 7 p. 1919. — A popular agronomic account deal-
ing with varieties, preparation of soil, seeding, inoculation, and harvesting for hay or seed. —
F. A. Wolf.

680. Williams, C. B., and R. Y. Winters. Vetch for North Carolina. North Carolina
Agric. Ext. Serv. Ext. Circ. 96. 8 p. 1919. — Popular account indicating varieties adapted
to the state, method for preparation of seed bed, seeding, inoculation, and value for hay or
pasture. — F. A. Wolf.

681. Winters, R. Y., S. W. Hill, and P. H. Kime. Community cotton improvement in
North Carolina. North Carolina Agric. Exp. Ser. Ext. Circ. 108. 30 p. 10 fig. 1920.— An
account of tests with cotton conducted to determine the variety best adapted to each of the
various localities, together with results of seed selection for the improvement of these varie-
ties.—F. A. Wolf.

682. Winters, R. Y., G. M. Garren, and Bixton White. Improved seed wheat for
North Carolina. North Carolina Ext. Agric. Serv. Ext. Circ. 106. 14 p. 1920. — Comparative
tests made near Asheville and Statesville, North Carolina, over a period of three years
have shown that home-grown seed is superior to northern-grown seed. Data on the value
of selection for the improvement of wheat are also included. — F. A. Wolf.

683. Wittmack, L. Der wahre Wert des Schilfrohrs als Wirtschaftspfianze. [The true
value of Phragmites communis as an economic plant.] Mittheil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35:
532-533. 1920. — The young leaves dried and cut into small pieces are readily eaten by cattle.
The claim has been made that the root-stocks contain 30 per cent cane sugar, but the author
shows, by quoting various analyses, that this figure is much too high, even when taken as
the sugar content of the dry substances. — A. J. Pieters.

684. Zavitz, C. A. Systematic Experiments. Agric. Gaz. Canada 7: 244-246. 1920. —
A brief summary is given of the 1919 results throughout Ontario in testing all classes of field
crops. Comparative values of leading varieties are calculated in percentages, together with
summaries of yields of straw and grain. Data on the percentage of leaf roll and mosaic in
potatoes were taken. Higher yields and lower susceptibility to diseases were found in the
northern-grown stock. — 0. W. Dynes.

BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY

Neil E. Stevens, Editor

685. Algan, H. Bibliographie. [Rev. of: Huffel, G. Economic forestiere. [Forest
economy.] Tome premier, deuxieme volume, deuxieme edition. 461 p. 1920.] Bull.
Trimest Soc. Forest. Franche Comte et Belfort 13 : 196-202. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry
741.

686. Andrews, A. LeRoy. Ingebrigt Hagen. Bryologist 23 : 79-80. 1920.— The author
condenses a biographic notice by Dr. Wille in Kgl. Norsk Vidensk. Sels. Skr., 1917, and
adds a number of recollections about Dr. Hagen's views, personality, and methods of work.
— E. B. Chamberlain.

687. Anonymous. Geo. Stephen West, M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S. Jour. Quekett Microsc.
Club 14: 104-105. 1919.— Obituary Notice.— Lena B. Walker.

No. 2, March, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY 101

658. Anonymous. Courses on the history of science. Nature 105:279. 1920. — These
are just beginning to be introduced in British universities. — 0. A. Stevens.

659. Anonymous. (Note of death of A. P. Candolle, with brief statement of his work.]
Nature 105: 365. 1920.— See also Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1437.

690. Anonymous. Prof. C. A. Timiriazeff. Nature 105: 430. 1920. — Announces the
death of Timiriazeff, "the only Russian botanist who was at all a familiar figure in England."
Author of several books on plant life. Noted for demonstration of effects of different rays of
the visible spectrum on photosynthetic activity of the green leaf. — 0. A. Stevens.

691. [B., V. H.] Wilhehn Pfeffer. Nature 105: 302. 1920.— Brief note of life and
work. — 0. A. Stevens.

692. Anonymous. Tribute to the memory of James Wilson. Sci. Monthly 11:478-479.
1920. — Records a tribute to the memory of James Wilson, former U. S. secretary of Agri-
culture.— L. Pace.

693. Anonymous. Scientific and systematic pomology. [Rev. of: The Journal of Pomology,
Vol. 1, No. 1 and 2. Geo. Bunyard & Co.: Maidstone, 1920.] Nature 105: 62^-630. 19'20.

694. Britten, James. Lehmann's Pugllli. Jour. Botany 58: 198-200. 1920.— This is an
account of the Pugillus Plantarum by Johann Georg Christian Lehmann, 1828-1857.
Ten "Pugilli" are noted: the first (1828) contained 29 species; the second (1830) included
some of Douglas's Calif ornian plants; the third to sixth had no date on the title page, but
were stated to have been reprinted from The Indies for 1831, 1832, 1833, and 1834; the fourth
and fifth have prefaces dated 1831 and 1833; the seventh and eighth are dated 1838 and 1844;
the ninth and tenth were issued independently in 1851 and 1857. The third is entirely devoted
to Hepaticae. The first portion of No. 6 contains De Plantis Cycadeis praeserlim Africae
Auslralis. No. 7 contains, besides Hepaticae, a history of the Hamburg Botanical Garden.
The second part of the eighth is occupied by descriptions of Preiss's New Holland plants.
No. 9 is entirely occupied by Potentilla. The tenth contains only hepatics. — K. M. Wiegand.

695. Britten, James. John Gilbert Baker (1834-1920). Jour. Botany 58: 233-238.
1920.— Baker was born in Yorkshire, Jan. 13, 18.34, and educated in the Friends' schools at
Ackworth and York. His botanical work began while at the former school. He is pictured
as a very kindly man, prone to aid the beginner, a man of keen literary sense, much interested
in poetry, and a genial friend of students and workers in the Royal Gardens. His portrait
appeared in Jour. Botany 1893, p. 243; Ibid., 1901, frontispiece; Ibid., 1907, p. 67.— iv. M.
Wiegand.

696. Chase, ViRGiNius H. Francis Eugene M'Donald. Rhodora 22 : 145-146. 1920.— A
short biographical sketch of the late Francis Eugene McDonald, born Feb. 23, 1860, died
Jan. 30, 1920. An amateur botanist and collector. His home was in Peoria, Illinois, in
which region most of his collecting was done. — James P. Poole.

697. DucLAUX, Emile. Pasteur: the history of a mind. English translation by Erwin
F. Smith, and Florence Hedges. 23 x 15 cm., xxxii + 363 p., 22 fig., 16 pi. W. B. Saunders
Co. : Philadelphia, 1920.— "This book is more than a critique of Pasteur. It is a contribution
to the biological history of a swiftly changing time, a very striking period in the develop-
ment of science."— E. F. S. — In an introduction of 32 pages. Smith presents a biographical
sketch of DucLAUX. The translators have supplied notations to the text throughout. In
addition, an annotated list of persons mentioned in the text occupies 40 pages. — Of the plates,
2 are of Duclaux and 14 of Pasteur. — D. Reddick.

698. Gunther, R. T. Tradescant's first garden catalogue, 1634. Jour. Botany 58:248.
1920.— Tie writer has in his possession one of the few copies if not the only copy in existence

102 BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

of the first catalogue of Trades cant's plants. The generally-quoted edition appeared in
1656. Seven hundred and fifty species and varieties are listed in this first edition. A cata-
lo5^ue of fruits occupies the last five pages. — K. M. Wiegand.

699. GuNTHER, R. T. Walter Stonehouse (1597-1655). Jour. Botany 58: 170-173. 1920.
— Mr. Stonehouse, the botanist, is shown to be identical with Rev. Walter Stonehouse,
of Magdalen College, Oxford, — a fact not before generally known. The identity was dis-
covered through an anonymous Catalogus Plantarum Horti mei Darfeldiae Quibus, etc.,
and passages in John Tradescant's Musaeum Tradescantianum. Stonehouse was a
Londoner, born in 1597, and later a scholar of Wadham College, Oxford, taking his B.A. degree
in 1616-17, and becoming a Fellow of Magdalen College in 1617. In 1629 he became a Bach-
elor of Divinity, and resigned from the college, becoming rector of Darfield. An account
is given of his association with Thomas Johnson and others, and of a trip with these gentle-
men to the mountains of North Wales. About 1648 he was forcibly ejected from his parish
by the Parliamentary Commissioners. Stonehouse was personally acquainted with Park-
inson.— K. M. Wiegand.

700. Hutt, W. M. Past history of the American pomological society. Proc. Amer.
Pomol. Soc. 1917: 1-10. 1918. — A general paper. Attention is drawn to the fact that mem-
bers of the society tested the different varieties of fruits in the United States long before
the organization of agricultural colleges and experiment stations. Rules of nomenclature,
which are still used as standard, were passed. — A statement regarding the financial standing
of the Society is included. — E. C. Auchter.

701. Linton, Edward Francis. William Moyle Rogers (1835-1920). Jour. Botany 58:
161-164. Portrait. 1920. — Rogers was born at Helston, Cornwall, July 12, 1835, and was
educated at Helston Grammar School, where he was later an assistant master. After a
short residence in Dublin he went to South Africa as vice-principal of a college there. At
about this time he was ordained to priesthood. In 1862 he returned home, and, after occupy-
ing a series of clerical positions, became vicar of Bridgerule, Devon, in 1882, from which posi-
tion he retired in 1885. A detailed account is given of Rogers's very numerous contributions
on botanical subjects, especially of his papers on Rubus, on which genus he became a special-
ist. These studies resulted in a Handbook of the British Rubi in 1900. During his later
years he often assisted the clergy about Bornemouth, his home, until his death on May 26,
1920.— K. M. Wiegand.

702. Mattirolo, Oreste. Pietro Andrea Saccardo — Treviso 23 Aprile 1845 — Padova 12
Febraio 1920. [Commemoration of Pietro Andrea Saccardo, b. April 23, 1845 at Treviso, d.
February 12, 1920, at Padua.] Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino 55: 468-473. 1919-1920.— His chief
works were: Sylloge fungorum omnium hucusque cognitorum. 22 volumes; Prevedibili funghi
futiiri secondo la legge di analogia, 1896; Botanica in Italia; Cronologia delta Flora italiana;
Flora Tarvisina Renovata; Enumerazione critica delle piante vascolari finora note nella pro-
vincia Treviso. — Harriet M. Libby.

703. Mattirolo, Oreste. Commemorazione di Saverio Belli. [Memorial to Saverio
Belli.] Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino 55: 8-30. 1919-1920.— Saverio Belli was director of the
Botanical Gardens at Turin, professor of botany at the University of Cagliari, member of the
Royal Academy of Agriculture, and of many scientific societies. His chief fields of research
were in taxonomy, anatomy, and physiology and are concerned mainly with the genera,
Trifolium and Hieracium. His researches in systematic botany established the reality of
the species of a genus or a family as the descendants of a common genealogical tree, with
phylogenetic ramifications both in time and space. In anatomy, he showed that neither
endoderm nor pericycle exist in Trifolium and many other plants, and that therefore the
theory of the stele can not have general application. — A complete bibliography of his works is
given covering the studies on Trifolium and Hieracium, taxonomy of phanerogams and
cryptogams, and miscellaneous works. — Harriet M. Libby.

No. 2, March, 1921] BIBLIOGRAPHY, BIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY 103

704. Maxwell, Herbert. Sir Edmund Giles Loder, Bart. Nature 105: 301-302.
1920. — Brief account of his life and work. In botany he was especially interested in hybrid-
izing rhododendrons, producing R. Loderi, a hybrid of R. Griffthianum and R. Fortunei,
generally admitted to be the best hardy hybrid yet produced in the genus. — 0. A. Stevens.

705. Merrill, Elmer D. Dates of publication. Jour. Botany 58: 200. 1920. — This is
a criticism of the practice among certain publishers of omitting the date of publication from
the title pages. The specific case in question is F. Maxson Bailey's Comprehension Cata-
logue of Queensland Plants, the date of which the author believes was March, 1913. — K. M.
Wiegand.

706. Montemartini, Luigi. Pier Andrea Saccardo. Patol. Veg. 10:49-50. 1920.— On
February 11, 1920, P. A. Saccardo died at Padova, at the age of 74 years, after having been
professor of botany ther e for 41 years. — F. M. Blodgett.

707. Montemartini, Ltjigi. Giovanni Briosi. Ilev. Patol. Veg. 10:33-35. 1920.—
Professor Giovanni Briosi was born in Ferrara, April 9, 1846, and died July 20, 1919.
He was first director of the experiment station of agricultural chemistry at Palermo and
Rome; in 1883 he became professor of botany in the Royal University of Pavia and also
directed the Italian cryptogamic laboratory. — A list of his publications is given. — F. M.
Blodgett.

708. Sinttjrel, E. La foret de Fontainebleau de 1789 a 1794. [The forest of Fontaine-
bleau from 1789 to 1794.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 218-226, 255-263, 281-288. 1920.— During
the first years of the French Revolution the forest of Fontainebleau, like other forests through-
out France, suflfered severely from depredations by the neighboring inhabitants. Attempts
by both local and national authorities, including the king, to check these availed little
except for a short period of comparative calm during the first half of 1790. Non-payment of
salaries of forest oflBcers resulted in a slackening of their efforts to protect the forests; and
on August 15, 1792, the Legislative Assembly, in an attempt to revive their interest, passed
an act providing for the payment of back salaries. It was not, however, until the estab-
lishment of the first republic that really effective steps to protect the forest were taken.
In the fall of 1793 the National Convention, recognizing the forest as a public asset of great
value, energetically set about its preservation. Armed forces were introduced to supple-
ment the efforts of the regular forest officers; a proposal to increase the food supply by
allowing goat grazing was rejected; trespassers were apprehended and punished; and all but
comparatively minor depredations were successfully prevented. — S. T. Dana.

709. Smith, Annie Morrill. Mary Farnham Miller. Bryologist 23 : 80. 1920.— An
appreciation of Miss Miller's work on behalf of the Sullivant Moss Society. — E. B.
Chamberlain.

710. S[mith], E. F. [Emile Duclaux, 1840-1904.] In Duclaux, Emil£. Pasteur: the
history of a mind. English translation by Erwin F. Smith and Florence Hedges. W. B.
Saunders Co. : Philadelphia, 1920. Most of the 30 pages of introduction to the book is de-
voted to a biographical sketch of Duclaux with a translation of a part of the eulogy on
Duclaux said to have been written by Koux and published in Annales de I'lnstitute Pas-
teur, May, 1904.— 1>. Reddick.

104 BOTANICAL EDUCATION [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

BOTANICAL EDUCATION

C. Stuart Gagee, Editor
Alfred Gundersen, Assistant Editor

711. Anonymous. A university course in botany. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Botanical
Memoirs. No. 4. Elementary notes on structural botany. 27 p. No. 5. Elementary notes
on the reproduction of angiospenns. 24 p. Oxford University Press: London, 1919.] Nature
105:162. 1920.

712. Anonymous. A college of tropical agriculture. [Rev. of : Anonymous. West Indies;
report of the tropical agricultural college committee. H. M. stationery office, 1920.] Nature
105: 153-154. 1920. Outline of organization of a college of agriculture recommended to be
established at Trinidad. — 0. A. Stevens.

713. Bartlett, a. W. Note on an improved method for demonstrating the absorption of
oxygen in respiration. New Phytol. 19: 151-152. 1920.

714. Brierley, W. B. [Rev. of: Ellis, G. S. M. Applied botany. VIII + 248 p.
Hodder and Stoughton: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 164. 1920. — Reviewer finds many
errors in this exposition of "the secrets of plant life." — 0. A. Stevens.

715. Clute, Willard N. Plant names and their meanings, III. Rosaceae. (See Bot.
Absts. 7, Entry 716.) Amer. Botanist 26: 57-61. 1920. — As far as possible the names of the
Rosaceae are traced to their origin. — S. P. Nichols.

716. Clute, Willard N. Plant names and their meanings, IV. Rosaceae II. See Bot.
Absts. 6, Entry 715. Amer. Botanist 26: 90-94. 1920.

717. T(ansley), a. G. Elementary lecturing with the help of schedules. [Rev. of:
Church, A. H. Elementary notes on structural botany. Oxford Bot. Mem. No. 4. Oxford
Univ. Press. 1919. Elementary notes on the reproduction of Angiospenns. Ibid. No. 5.
1919.] New Phytol. 19: 44-46. 1920. — It is recommended that in teaching elementary classes
an accurate and full synospsis of each lecture be given to each student before the lecture is
delivered. — /. F. Lewis.

718. Weatherwax, Paul. A method of teaching diffusion and osmosis in connection
with biological work. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918:88-92. 1920. — The author discusses
briefly the history of diffusion and osmosis and then by means of well-known experiments
works out definitions. Diffusion, he says, is "the dispersal of the particles of one substance
among the particles of another substance, without aid from external sources," while osmosis
is "the diffusion of two fluids through a membrane that tends to be semipermeable." The
student should be led to connect these processes with the structure of the cell and to realize
that all the life processes of the plant that involve exchange of fluids between cell and envir-
onment depend upon the selective influence of semipermeable membranes. — F. C. Anderson.

No. 2, March, 1921] CYTOLOGY 105

CYTOLOGY

Gilbert M. Smith, Editor
Geo. S. Bryan, Assistant Editor

719. Agar, W. E. Cytology, with special reference to the metazoan nucleus. XII +
224 p. MacMillan and Co. : London, 1920. $4.00.

720. Bayliss, W. M. The properties of colloidal systems. IV. Reversible gelation in
living protoplasms. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B, 91:19&-20J.. 1920. — The author describes
use of intense dark ground illumination to reveal Brownian movement of minute particles
in apparently clear pseudopodia of Amoeba. He describes a temporary gelation of this
protoplasmic sol (cessation of Brownian movement) by suitable electrical stimulation, and
discusses subject in general. Plant cells, because of walls, are not so suitable for intense
dark ground illumination, but Nitella and stamen hairs of Tradescantia are fairlj^ satisfac-
tory.— Paul B. Sears.

721. Don CASTER, L. An introduction to the study of cytology. 280 p., 24 pi., 31 fig.
University Press: Cambridge, 1920. $8.50.

722. C, A. H. [Rev. of: Doncaster, L. An introduction to the study of cytology.
280 p., 24 pi., SI fig. University Press: Cambridge, 1920.] Jour. Bot. 58: 205-206. 1920.

723. G., J. B. British cytology. [Rev. of: Doncaster, L. An introduction to the study
of cytology. XIV + 280 p., 24 pi. University Press: Cambridge, 1920.] Nature 105: 190-
191. 1920. "Not intended as a text book though it contains a wealth of facts; but its
aim is to interest the senior student by pointing out the way in which cytology is related to
the great fundamental problems at the root of all biological research. — 0. A. Stevens.

724. Carter, Nellie. Studies on the chloroplasts of Desmids. IV. Ann. Botany 34:
301-319. 3 pi. 1920. — In this the last of a series of four articles on the chloroplasts of the
Desmidiaceae (See Bot. Absts. 4, Entry 166 and 6, Entry 1191) the structure of the chloroplast
of Staurastum is taken up. In sixteen of twenty-two species discussed there is a fairly massive
central axial chloroplast, typically with one pyrenoid, from which a more or less definite lobe
arises opposite each angle of the cell. This lobe is forked, and very often the forking is so
deep that the lobe appears as two masses or plates arising from the central axis of the chloro-
plast. Exceptional cases are found primarily in the larger species of the genus. Thus in
S. Ophiura Lund, the chloroplast lobes are between and not opposite the arms of the cell,
while in S. Arctiscon (Ehr.) Lund, there is only one projection into each arm of the cell.
Owing to the greater size of the lobes and reduction of the central mass in S. sexangulare
(Bulnh.) Lund, and S. anatinum Cke. & Wills, pyrenoids are not found in the central mass
but in the lobes. In S. grande Bulnh. the chloroplasts are parietal, although in very young
semi-cells there is a central mass. Another quite unusual arrangement is that found in
S. tumidum Breb., where there are from twelve to fifteen or more chloroplasts in the form of
narrow bands running through the semi-cell. — The final portion of the paper is devoted to a
discussion of chloroplast division in the whole family. In the Saccodermae, division of the
chloroplast starts before division of the nucleus. In the Placodermae, nuclear division is
completed and the new semi-cells have begun their development before there is any indi-
cation of chloroplast division. Division in this subfamily is not by constriction but by a
budding of the chloroplast into the new semi-cell until the chloroplast volume is the same in
the new and old semi-cells, when there is a division at the cell isthmus. At the time when
the chloroplast begins to grow into the new semi-cell the pyrenoid gives off a small bud which,
soon after its separation, grows in volume until it reaches the size of the original pyrenoid.
— Gilbert M. Smith.

106 CYTOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

725. Farr, Wanda Kirkbride. Cell-division of the pollen-mother-cell of Cobaea scan-
dens alba. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47:325-337. PI. U. 1920.— A review is given of lit-
erature on cytokinesis in pollen-mother-cells with special reference to cell-plate formation
and cleavage. Author reports that in Cobaea scandens alba furrowing was observed in
formation of the tetrad, but that the cell-plate was not apparent during cytoplasmic division.
— P. A. Mum.

726. Gates, R. R. The structure of the nucleus. [Rev. of: Agar, W. E. Cytology:
with special reference to the metazoan nucleus. XII + ^H p. Macmillan and Co. : London,
1920.] Nature 105:482-483. 1920.

727. Gaudissart, P. Reseau protoplasmique et chondriosomes dans la genese des myo-
fibrilles. [Protoplasmic reticulum and chondriosomes in the genesis of muscle fibers.]
La Cellule 30: 29-43. 2 pi. 1915-1919. — An investigation of the roles played by (1) the
reticular or alveolar protoplasmic substratum and (2) the granular elements (mitochondria)
in the development of muscle fibers in the chick embryo, each element having been held to
be exclusively responsible by different workers. The author concludes "that the muscle fibers
arise neither exclusively from a protoplasmic reticulum, nor exclusively from mitochondria
or other granular elements, but that they result from the cooperation of mitochondria with
a reticular structure, different, at least at first, from the mitochondria themselves. It is the
reticulum .... which, in orienting itself, furnishes the chief outline of the muscle
fibers; but, on their part, the mitochondria, in fixing themselves on this reticulum, furnish
certain substances which are incorporated in it and contribute to the development of the
myofibrils." It is not true that "each myofibril is only a modified filamentous chondriosome"
(Dtjesberg). — L. W. Sharp.

728. GuiLLiERMOND, A. Sur I'origine mitochondriale des plastides a propos d'un travail
de M. Mottier. [Concerning the mitochondrial origin of plastids with regard to Mottier's
work.] Ann. sci. nat. bot. X. 1:225-246. 5 pi., 10 fig. 1919. — Author considers as inexact
Mottier's view based upon a study of meristematic cells in pea, that mitochondrial elements
and "plastid primordia" are distinct and independent entities in cytoplasm. An a priori
objection to Mottier's theory is that in animals mitochondria appear to be concerned
in elaboration of products of secretion of cell, acting similarly to plastids; and, moreover, a
majority of animal pigments originate in mitochondria. Author then points out that size
is no reliable criterion for distinguishing mitochondria and "plastid primordia" as Mottier
argues. Mitochondria vary in size, and he has observed such cytoplasmic bodies in ani-
mals of similar size to those in plants that are "plastid primordia." In general, author con-
siders that diverse forms of mitochondria have a common origin and, in particular, plastids
have a mitochondrial origin. — J. P. Kelly.

729. GuiLLiERMOND, A. Observations vitales sur le chondriome d'une Saprolegnicacee.
[Observations of chondriosomes in a living Saprolegnia.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris
170: 1329-1333. 5 fig. 1920. — Granules, rods, and filaments are made visible in the living
material by staining with neutral red and cresyl blue. The latter differentiates the meta-
chromatic bodies from the chondriosomes. — C. H. Farr.

730. Hartmann, Max. Untersuchungen iiber die Morphologie und Physiologic des
Formwechsels (Entwicklung, Fortpfianzung, Befruchtung und Vererbung) der Phytomonadinen
(Volvocales). Programm der Untersuchungen und I. Mitt.: tjber die Kern- und Zellteilung
von Chlorogonium elongatiun Dangeard. [Investigations on the morphology and physiology of
variation in form (development, reproduction, fertilization, and heredity) of the Phytomona-
dineae (Volvocales). Program of the investigation and first contribution; On the nuclear and
cell division of Chlorogonium elongatimi Dangeard.] Arch. Protistenk. 39: 1-33. 3 pi., 2 fig.
1919. — After a short prospectus of a proposed series of investigations on the morphology
and physiology of the Phytomonadineae, the author proceeds to a description of cell and
nuclear division in Chlorogonium elongatum Dang. The first indication of cell division is

No. 2, March, 1921] CYTOLOGY 107

the disappearance of the pyrenoid, while at the same time the nuclei enter the prophases
of division. After the nuclear division is completed, cytokinesis takes place at right angles
to the long axis of the cell. The two daughter cells grow in length, and then the nucleus
of each divides again, the long axis of the spindles generally lying parallel to the recent line
of cleavage. This nuclear division is followed by cell division in each of the daughter cells.
Hartmann emphasizes the unusual behavior of the pyrenoid during this process, since in
C. elongatum it completely disappears during division and is then formed anew in the daugh-
ter cells. In other Volvocales, on the other hand, there is a division of the pyrenoid. The
restmg nucleus contains 10-20 small granules that fuse to form ten larger granules which
are the chromosomes. This fusion of granules is not in the nature of a reduction division.
The origin of the spindle is intranuclear, and it frequently has but one pole in early stages.
Nuclear history from the metaphase onward is of the usual type. — Gilbert M. Smith.

731. Herlant, M. Le cycle de la vie cellulaire. Recherches physiologiques sur la divi-
sion de la cellule. (Note preliminaire.) [The cycle of cellular life. Physiological researches
on the division of the cell. (Preliminary note.)] Ann. et Bull. Soc. roy. Sc. med. et nat.
Bruxelles 4: 112-117. 1920. — The author has sought to determine whether the permeability
of the cortical layer of the protoplasm is constant during the entire duration of the cellular
cycle. He has observed that the plasma membrane of the egg of the sea urchin is, according
to the stage of the cell life, sometimes permeable and sometimes impermeable to salts. The
lipoid state (semipermeable) and the albuminoid state (permeable) of the plasma membrane
do not co-exist, but succeed each other periodically in the course of the cellular life. The
physico-chemical equilibrium of the protoplasm, and not alone that of the cortical layer,
depends in part on factors destroyed by the insoluble substances in the lipoids (perme-
able phase) and in part on factors destroyed by the solvents of the lipoids (semipermeable
phase). These phenomena are in accordance with the emulsion theory of protoplasm. —
Henri Micheels.

732. Kowalski, J. Cineses atypiqes dans les cellules adiposes de larves de Pyrrhocoris
apterus L. avec quelques remarques sur le centrosome. [Atypical mitoses in the adipose cells
of the larvae of Pyrrhocoris apterus L. with some remarks on the centrosome.] La Cellule
30: 83-119. 2 pi. 1915-1919. — Author describes and figures a considerable variety of abnor-
mal mitotic phenomena observed in the adipose cells of the larva of Pyrrchocoris. The ab-
normalities are of two main types: asymmetrical bipolar figures and multipolar figures.
These result in irregular distributions of the chromatin to the daughter cells, the frequent
loss of chromosomes in the cytoplasm, unequal cell division, and the formation of hypo- and
hyperchromatic cells. Such aberrant behavior is apparently due to two causes — the asymmet-
rical bipolar figures, to the mechanical action of the numerous large fat vacuoles; and the
multipolar ones, to the disturbing action of a toxin secreted by bacteria which infect the
larvae. Cells showing the abnormal phenomena do not return to the embryonic state or
divide normally. — The normal resting adipose cell has large fat vacuoles, comparatively scanty
cytoplasm, and from 1 to 4 nuclei. The nuclear reticulum stains very faintly. From 7 to 9
(sometimes more) chromatic nucleoli are present; the total amount of nucleolar material is
about constant in all the nuclei. The chromosomes number 24.— 16 of them are rod-shaped and
8 are small and spherical. The latter are diflficult to distinguish from the nucleoli, which
appear to contribute to the formation of the chromosomes. — A number of observations on
normal and abnormal mitotic phenomena in these cells lead to the following conclusions
regarding the centrosome and achromatic figure: The formation of the spindle accompanying
the development of the chromosomes is the manifestation of a universal and fundamental
condition present in all plant and animal cells dividing mitotically; namely an intense and
polarized metabolic interchange between chromatin and cytoplasm, showing itself in the
bipolarized arrangement of the fibers of the cytoplasmic reticulum. There are two similar
opposed cones of fibers because the metaphase chromosomes are split into two equal masses
with equal metabolic actions on the cytoplasm; when the chromatic masses are unequal
the cones are unequal, and if for any reason they are more than two in number, the figure

108 CYTOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

has more than two poles. The spindle figure is the visible morphological expression of invis-
ible currents of exchange passing between chromosomes and cytoplasm. The aster is a
similar expression of a metabolic current in the opposite direction, from the cytoplasm
toward the chromatic mass. The two currents meet at the poles of the cell, which are there-
fore regions of relative calm. If exchanges between chromosomes and cytoplasm cause a
deposition of a visible chemical substance, it accumulates at these regions; such deposits
are the centrosomes. If more material is deposited than is used by the cell during division,
the centrosome is a permanent organ; otherwise it is not. The centrosome is thus neither
exclusively cytoplasmic nor exclusively nuclear in origin, but comes from both as a precipi-
tation of substances resulting from the metabolic exchange between the two. Chemical
reactions, manifesting themselves in centrifugal currents of exchange between centrosome and
cytoplasm, cause the appearance of the attraction sphere. When the chromatic mass divides,
a second current of exchange is set up toward the centrosome, and a second centrosome is
deposited near the first; the assumption of centrosome division is not necessary to account
for the two. The formation of centrosomes seems to be conditioned by the size of the spindle
cone, the cone in turn being proportional to the chromatic mass under whose influence it
arises. The size of the centrosome is often observed to be proportional to that of the chro-
matic mass. The disposition and orientation of the chromatic masses determines the ori-
entation of the spindle, and the location and size of the centrosome. — Attention is called to
the relationship between centrosome and nucleolus. In some lower organisms a single
"nucleolocentrosome" performs the functions of both, whereas by a division of labor two
separate organs have become differentiated in most organisms. — L. W. Sharp.

733. Ladreyt, F. La Cellule complexe symbiotique. [The symbiotic cell complex.]
Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris. 169: 665-667. 1919. — From a review of his own work and that
of others, the author concludes that the cell complex consists of various elements — the cyto-
plasm, nucleus, chondriosomes, etc. — which bear a symbiotic relation to one another and
derive benefit from one another. — V. H. Young.

734. Meyer, Arthur. Morphologische und Physiologische Analyse der Zelle der Pflanzen
und Tiere. [Morphological and physiological analysis of the cell of plants and animals.]

XX + 629 p., 205 fig. Gustav Fischer: Jena, 1920. (38 marks.)

735. Rhumbler, L. Otto Biitschlis Wabentheorie. [Otto Biitschli's alveolar theory.]
Naturwissenschaf ten 8 : 549-555. 1920.

736. Spek, Josef. tJber Biitschlis Erklarung der karyokinetischen Figur. [On Biit-
schli's explanation of the karyokinetic figure.] Naturvvissesnchaften 8: 561-562. 1920.

737. Spek, Josef. Ueber physikalisch-chemische Erklaerungen der Veraenderungen der
Kernsubstanz. [Concerning physico-chemical explanations of the changes of the nuclear
substance.] Arch. Entwicklungsmech. 46: 537-546. 1920. This is mainly, though not exclu-
sively, a discussion of Paolo Della Valle's work entitled "La morfologia della cromatina
dal punto di vista fiscico" (Arch. Zool. Ital. 6: 37-321. 1912.) The general nature of the
nuclear substances, the number and size of chromosomes, susceptibility of chromosomes
to stains, division of chromosomes, individuality of chromosomes, and other similar subjects
are briefly considered by the author. — John H. Schaffner.

738. Van Hoof, L. La spermatogenese dans les mammiferes. III. Les spermatocytes
leptotenes et amphitenes dans le Taureau. [Spermatogenesis in the mammals. III. The
lep to tene and amphitene spermatocytes in the bull.] La Cellule 30: 7-25 1 pi. 1915-1919. —
Author reexamines the "quaternary granulations" described by Schoenfeld (1901) in the
nuclei of the spermatocytes of the bull and finds them to be merely the symmetrically arranged
thickenings of the amphitene threads. In the nuclei of the spermatogonia and spermatocytes
the chromatin takes the form of irregular blocks with a few thin strands. In the heterotypic
prophase the leptotene threads develop at the expense of these blocks, vestiges of which may

No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 109

remain visible for some time, and soon take on a more or less definite polar orientation.
Lateral pairing of the threads begins at their free ends and gradually involves all parts. The
granules or thickenings of the associating threads show a correspondence in position, which
gives them the appearance not only of tetrads such as Schoenfeld thought to be of peculiar
significance here, but also of dyads, hexads, and octads. As the threads pass into the pachy-
nema stage these thickenings gradually become less conspicuous. The interpretation of
Schoenfeld is attributed in large part to faulty fixation. — L. W. Sharp.

739. Yamaha, Gihei. Einige Beobachtungen uber die Zellteilung in den Archesporen und
Sporenmutterzellen von Psilotum triquetrum Sw. mit besonderer Rucksicht auf die Zell-
plattenbildung. [Some remarks on the cell division in the archesporial and spore mother cells
of Psilotum triquetrum Sw. with special regard to the formation of the cell plate.] Bot. Mag.
Tokyo 34: 117-129. 20 fig. 1920.— The cells of Psilotum are specially adapted for cytologi-
cal work because of the large nuclei, that are rich in chromatin. The rod-shaped elements
of the cell plate are very persistent. In the heterotypic division of the archespore the so-called
nucleolar substance could be traced near the daughter nuclei. The phragmoplast can be
traced back to the chromosome-connecting filaments. These filaments divide longitudinally,
starting at the equatorial plane. At this stage a large number of "extranucleoli" were ob-
served. The daughter nuclei approach each other more or less; the cell plate becomes more
conspicuous; while its granular contents, the dermatosomes, are very clear. In the meiosis
no "radial fibres" were observed. The dermatosomes seem to be used up in the forma-
tion of the cell plate, which precedes the simultaneous formation of the cell wall. The
homeotypic division shows the same peculiarities. The shrinkage of the wall of the spore
mother cell seems to cause the separation of the tetrads. — L. G. Baas-Becking.

FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY

Raphael Zon, Editor
J. V. HoFMANN, Assistant Editor

740. Adamson, R. W. The Bartram oak. Sci. Amer. 122:301. 1920.— See Bot. Absts.
6, Entry 1564.

741. Algan, H. Bibliographie. [Rev. of: Huffel, G. Economie forestiere. (Forest
economy.) Tome premier, deuxieme volume, deuxieme edition. 4^^ p. 1920.] Bull. Trimest.
Soc. Forest. Franche-Comte et Belfort 13 : 196-202. 1920.— Nearly two-thirds of this impor-
tant work is devoted to a discussion of the history of forest property and forest legislation
from the beginning of the feudal period to the middle of the nineteenth century. Forest
policy is discussed at some length, including the relation of forests to the public welfare, pub-
lic control of private cuttings, public assistance to private owners, forest taxation, etc. The
final part of the volume contains a wealth of statistics as to the extent, distribution, and
ownership of French forests. — S. T. Dana.

742. Andrews, F. M. Some trees of Indiana. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918:261-263.
1920.

743. Anonymous. The forestry commission. Nature 105:215-216. 1920.— Outline of
program for 1919-20 with personnel of consultative committees for England, Scotland, Wales,
and Ireland. About 34,000 acres of afforestable land are being acquired. — 0. A. Stevens.

744. Anonymous. Forestry, tree diseases and timber. [Rev. of: (1) Boerker, R. H. D.
Our national forests. A short popular account of the work of the United States forest service
on the national forests. XIV+ 2S8 p. Macmillan and Co. : London and New York, 1918.
(2) Stebbing, E. p. Commercial forestry in Britain: its decline and revival. VI + 186 p.
John Murray: London, 1919. (3) Webster, A. D. National afforestation, 160 p. T.
Fifiher Unwin: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 577-579. 1920.

110 FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

745. Anonyimous. Forestry, tree diseases and timber. [Rev. of: Da vies, J. H. A map
of the world (on Mercator's projection), having special reference to forest regions and the geo-
graphical distribution of timber trees. Timber map, No. 1. North America, timber map,
No. 2. South America, timber map, No. 3. Europe and Africa, timber map. No. 4. Each on
rollers 40 x 30 in. W. and A. K. Johnston : Edinburgh. Macmillan and Co. : London. No
date.] Nature 105: 579. 1920. — Distribution of a number is incorrect, and names are
erroneous or confusing. European larch does not occur, as shown, in the Pyrenees, Apen-
nines, Serbia, Bulgaria, etc. Larix dahurica should be L. sihirica. L. leptolepis is repre-
sented on Hokkaido where there is no larch, and in Manchuria and Korea where the finest
L. dahurica grows. — 0. A. Stevens.

746. AxoNYMous. Forestry, tree diseases and timber. [Rev. of: Rankin, W. H. Man-
ual of tree diseases. XX + 398 p. Macmillan and Co.: New York and London, 1918.]
Nature 105: 579. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1168.

747. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Reuss. 37-jahrige Fichtenreinzuchtversuche in
Osterreich. (37-year experiment in pure breeding of pine trees in Austria.) Centralbl.
Gesammte Forstw. 1916:383-417. 1916.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenziicht. 6:194. Dec, 1918.—
See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1607.

748. Anonymous. [German rev. of: Urban, J. Uber die Grosse der Stecklinge. (On
the size of cuttings.) Zeitscht. Zuckerindust. Bohmen 42 : 521-526. 1918.] Zeitschr. Pflan-
zenzucht. 6: 195-196. Dec, 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1612.

749. Anonymous. El mezquite. [Mesquite.] Agric Mexicano y Hogar 36: 105-108.
1920. — Translated and adapted from the Scientific American.

750. Anonymous. Le pin sylvestre. [The Scotch pine.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 161-
162. 1920. — Artificial reforestation of Scotch pine can be largely or perhaps wholly avoided
by the clear cutting of long narrow strips, lying at right angles to the direction of the pre-
vailing winds. For example, a stand with a rotation of 60 years might be divided into six
groups, arranged in two tiers and each containing ten cutting areas or strips. The first
year the strip in Group 1 lying farthest from the source of the prevailing winds would be
cut; the next year the similarly situated strip in Group 2; and so on. Six years would
thus elapse between the cutting of adjacent strips in the same group. This should be ample
to allow for natural regeneration, which could be still further assured by leaving along roads
and the edges of the strips a few seed trees to hold over a second rotation. The system is
flexible and can be easily adapted to different rotations and to biennial and triennial cuttings,
etc. — S. T. Dana.

751. Anonymous. Resultats des experiences faites, le 9 juin 1920, dans la foret domaniale
de Lamotte-Beuvron (Loir-et-Cher). [Results of experiments in the state forest of Lamotte-
Beuvron.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 268-271. 1920. — Stumps can be extracted by the use of
explosives at a net cost of about 1.5 francs per stump. The method can be used to advan-
tage for the removal of a limited number of stumps, but is too slow and expensive for the
clearing of large areas. The latter can be cleared more cheaply (net cost about 75 francs per
stump), and satisfactorily by the use of caterpillar tractors, which might also apparently be
used to advantage for the felling of standing timber. Holes for the planting of large trees,
especially fruit trees, can be prepared by the use of explosive cartridges containing small
amounts of mineral fertilizer. — S. T. Dana.

752. Anonymous. The fruiting of the Ginkgo at Kew. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. [London]
1920: 47-48. 1 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1839.

753. Anonymous. Beschadigungen an Eichen durch Diaporta taleola Tul. [Injury to
oak by Diaporta taleola Tul.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 69: 62-63. Frontispiece. 1918.—
See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1932.

No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 111

754. AxjBERT, C.-G. La conversion des taillis en futaie dans I'ouest de la France. [Con-
version of coppice into high forest in western France.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 124-132, 153-
160, 189-194, 227-234. 1920.— The value of the high forest, long advocated by the leading
French foresters as the forest par excellence, was conclusively demonstrated by the recent
war, during which it was primarily the high forests under state ownership that supplied the
enormous quantity and wide variety of forest products required by France and its allies.
For both public and private owners the high forest is superior to coppice in the quantity,
quality, and variety of its products, in its proportionately smaller cost of protection and
greater production, and in its fiexibility of management, which is particularly valuable in
times of economic stress. The objection that it yields too low a rate of interest has lost
much of its force in these days when timber prices are so high and most other investments so
insecure. Some sacrifice of annual revenue is involved during the period of conversion, but
this is purely temporarj', can be minimized by proper handling, and really consists of an
addition to the forest capital comparable to a savings bank investment. Cultural diffi-
culties are more serious, but are due largely to the attempt to bring about the conversion
through the establishment by natural reproduction of seedling stands with a regular distri-
bution of age classes. — The state forests of Bourse and of Ecouves prove that, at least in the
oak and beech stands of western France, the establishment of satisfactory high forests from
thrifty trees of sprout origin is not only comparatively easy from a cultural point of view,
but can be effected at a considerable saving of time and money. The conversion can be
brought about either by allowing the stand of coppice to keep right on growing, with occa-
sional thinnings to prevent its becoming too dense; or by making a "conversion cutting"
which would remove the bulk of the trees, leaving several hundred carefully selected reserves
to the hectare, most of which would be of the same age as the main stand. The latter method
has the advantage of yielding an immediate revenue and of affording the best possible grow-
ing conditions for the trees left. One area treated in this way which had to be prematurely
clear cut 38 years later during the war yielded 4000 francs per hectare, exclusive of pre-
vious thinnings, as against an estimated yield of 1200 francs per hectare had the conversion
not been undertaken. With suitable species, vigorous trees, and good soil, the method is
applicable to private as well as to public forests. When conditions are unfavorable in these
respects clear cutting and planting or underplanting with silver fir is usually necessary.—
Private owners, who will ordinarily make the "conversion cuttings" from five to ten years
earlier than the State, will find it advantageous to leave a larger number of reserves, say
1000 per hectare in a 23-year-old stand. It is usually advisable to remove old reserves
already on the ground, not only because of the revenue to be derived from them but because
their subsequent growth is likely to be unsatisfactory and to interfere with the best develop-
ment of the rest of the stand. In selecting reserves to be retained, the species and general
vigor of the trees are more important than their origin. The object of the method is not to
obtain a stand of natural seedlings in some far off future, but to effect the immediate con-
version of a coppice stand into high forest with a view to securing the maximum yield of
timber. — S. T. Dana.

755. Baker, E. Methods of fire protection, with special reference to fires caused by
sparks from railway engines. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1:414-421. 5 fig.
1920.

756. Baleriola, Caspar. La poda de las morreras. [Mulberry pruning.] Informa-
cien Agric. [Madrid] 10:218-220. 4 fig. 1920.— The method of pruning mulberry trees to
secure the maximum yield of leaves for silk-worm culture is described. — John A. Stevenson.

757. Barbet, a. Chronique Suisse. [Swiss notes.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 136-138.
1920. — The economic crisis in Switzerland caused by the war still continues, with high prices
for both timber and firewood and comparatively little building activity. While forest
devastation has not been general, it is necessary to use every means to make the forests more
productive. By more intensive management, made possible largely by decreasing the area
under the supervision of each forest officer, it should be feasible to increase the annual

112 FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

production of the public forests from 2.7 to 4.4 million cubic meters, thus making the coun-
try independent of wood imports aside from exotic timbers. The recently created "central
forest office," with headquarters at Soleure, should prove effective in supplementing other
activities to awaken public interest in and support of the practice of better forestry. —
S. T. Dana.

758. Barbey, a. Wald und Schlachtfeld. [Forest and battlefield.] Schweiz. Zeitschr.
Forstw. 71: 257-261. J+ pi. 1920. — The forest was completely destroyed over large areas, and
in other sections there are only dead parts of trees left. In France the estimated areas
destroyed include 100,000 ha. state forest, 140,000 ha. community forest, and 275,000 ha. pri-
vate forests; also 10,000 to 15,000 ha. in Elsass— a total of about 530,000 ha. (1,325,000 acres).
This forest is so completely destroyed by shells and fire that no young growth is coming in.
The area is being covered with weeds and shrubs among the tangles of barbed wire and shell
holes. Utilization of the remaining dead timber is not feasible in many places unless char-
coal industries are developed. Insect infestations are occurring and no doubt will spread
rapidly. Reforestation with the species that occurred before will not be possible in some
sections where the soil is badly torn up. Such areas may be restocked with broad-leaved
species to build up the soil. — J. V. Hofmann.

759. B(ean), W. J. One-leaved ash (Fraxinus excelsior heterophylla). Kew Bull. Misc.
Inf. [London] 1919: 390-391. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1631.

760. Bean, W. J. Garden notes on new or rare trees and shrubs. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf.
[London] 1920: 119-124. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1843.

761. Berkhottt, a. H. Het meten der boomen in verband met hun aanwas. [The meas-
urement of trees in connection with their growth.] Meded. Landbouwhoogeschool en Ver-
bond. Instit. Deel 17: 109-225. 1920. — Uses the standard deviation of individual varieties
and of the mean as a measure of reliability. Uses the "correlation factor" in examining rela-
tionship such as that between diameter and volume, with coefficients as high as 0.98. Shows
the correlation graphically in addition. In some other correlations the values are much
lower. "It is indeed unfortunate that in forest mensuration use of probability computations
is seldom or never made, for they are especially applicable in forestry."— Carl Hartley.

762. Bintner, J. Silver leaf disease. Stereum purpureum. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf.
[London] 1919: 241-263. PI. 8, fig. 1-8. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1936.

763. BouLGER, G. S. [Rev. of: Henry, Augustine. Forests, woods and trees in relation
to hygiene, xii + 314 P-, 50 illus. Constable & Company: London, 1919.] Jour. Bot. 58:
157-158. 1920.

764. BouLGER, G. S. [Rev. of: Stone, Herbert. A guide to the identification of our
more useful timbers, being a manual for the use of students of forestry. 72 p., 3 pi. Uni-
versity Press: Cambridge, 1920.] Jour. Bot. 58: 230. 1920.

765. Brown, Forest B. H. The silicious skeleton of tracheids and fibers. Bull. Torrey
Bot. Club 47: 407-424. 5 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1057.

766. Burns, George P. Tolerance of forest trees and its relation to forest succession.
Jour. Forestry 18 : 610-615. 1920. — A general review of the literature shows a general dis-
agreement as to the meaning of the term tolerance. It is used rather indiscriminately in
forestry practice but has been tied up with light more often then otherwise. No clear defi-
nition has been given and much confusion caused, and the question of what is meant
and how it is brought about will have to be solved by forest research. — E. N. Munns.

No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 113

767. Cambage, R. H. Notes on the native flora of New South Wales. Part 10. The
Federal Capital Territory. Proc. Linnean Soc, New South Wales 43:673-711. PI. 71-74.
1918.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1515.

768. Cardot, E. La reconstitution forestiere. [Forest reconstruction.] Rev. Eaux et
Forets 58: 121-123. 1920.— The eflforts of the Administration of Waters and Forests, fol-
lowing the Franco-Prussian war, to convert the stands of coppice in the national forests
into high forest yielded comparatively small results. This was primarily caused by an
exaggerated idea of the loss in annual revenue that would be necessitated by the conver-
sion, bj' the attempt to use a complicated system of management by natural regeneration
with regular thinnings and an even distribution of age classes, and by the many practical
difficulties encountered in putting this system into effect. A series of articles starting in
this issue of the Revue points out a simple, practical system of avoiding these difficulties and
of effecting the conversion with purely temporary and insignificant reductions in current rev-
enue. While the author apparently claims the system to be effective only in western France,
it would seem to be applicable, with slight modifications, to most, if not all, of the coppice
stands in the country. — S. T. Dana.

769. Cheeseman, T. F. Contributions to a fuller knowledge of the flora of New Zealand:
no. 6. Trans, and Proc. New Zealand Inst. 51: 85-92. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1516.

770. Cribbs, James E. Ecology of Tilia americana. I. Comparative studies of the foliar
transpiring power. Bot.Gaz. 68: 262-286. 13 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1498.

771. De Brun, H. Contre les incendies en Vaucluse. [Fire protection in Vaucluse.] Rev.
Eaux et Forets 58: 264-267. 1920.— The application of the forest fire laws of 1893, 1898, and
1902 should be extended to include the department of Vaucluse. Every effort should be
made to prevent fires from starting by prohibiting smoking in the forest and by delaying the
opening of the hunting season; and to control them after they have started by organizing
permanent fire-fighting crews composed of local volunteers. These crews should be specially
trained for their work and should be paid by the communities concerned, which should,
however, be assisted by subsidies from the state and the department. — S. T. Dana.

772. De la Hamelinaye, H. Rapport du diametre a 1™ 30 au diametre de la souche.
[Relation between breast high and stump diameters.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 133-135.
1920. — Measurements of a large number of stumps of oak and beech in the forests of Gers-
Hautes, and Basses-Pyrenees showed that the sum of the largest and smallest stump diame-
ters, measured at the surface of the ground, was approximately equal to the sum of the cir-
cumferences of the same trees measured at breast height (1.30 m.). In other words, the aver-
age diameter at breast height in the case of these two species was equal to 63 per cent of the
mean diameter of the stump at the surface of the ground. — S. T. Dana.

773. Demorlaine, J. La sylviculture et les chars d'assaut. [Silviculture and tanks.]
Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 235-236. 1920. — During the war the forest of Compiegne was used
as a practice field for tanks, the caterpillars of which broke up the ground so as to form an
excellent seed bed. As a result the heavy beech-nut crop of 1918 was followed by the estab-
lishment of a remarkably dense stand of seedlings. This suggests the possibility of using
tanks regularly in beech and oak forests during good seed years in order to stir up the soil
and thus favor natural reproduction, at the same time giving the tanks an opportunity to
practice their maneuvers under difficult conditions. Similarly, caterpillar tractors might be
used to advantage from a silvicultural point of view for the hauling of logs in lumbering
operations. — aS. T. Dana.

774. Detwiler, Samuel B. White pine blister rust control in 1919. Amer. Plant Pest
Committee Bull. 4: 1-10. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1224.

114 FOREST BOTANY AND FOEESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

775. DoRE, W. H. The distribution of certain chemical constants of wood over its proxi-
mate constituents. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12:472-476. 1920. — A study is made of the
distribution of the groups contained in red wood which yield furfurol acetic acid and methoxy
with the object of learning their relation to the constituent cellulose and lignin. — Henry
SchmiUz.

776. DoRE, W. H. The proximate analysis of coniferous woods. Jour. Indust. Eng.
Chem. 12: 476-479. 1920. — An improved procedure is described for the summative analysis
of coniferous woods. Methods are given for the estimation of the following constituents:
those lost on drying, benzene extract, alcohol extract, cellulose, lignin, soluble pentosans,
mannan and galactan. — Henry Schmitz.

777. DoRE, W. H. The proximate analysis of hardwoods: Studies on Quercus agrifolia.
Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 984-987. 1920. — The methods previously used for the analysis
of coniferous woods were investigated as to their applicability to the hardwoods. The puri-
fication treatment employed for the tissues of coniferous woods was supplemented with
digestion in cold water and 5 per cent sodium hydroxide solution. Lignin was determined
by the gaseous hydrochloric acid method recently proposed by Konig and Becher. This
modified method was found satisfactory in every respect. — Henry Schmitz.

778. Dupler, a. W. Staminate strobilus of Taxus canadensis. Bot. Gaz. 68:345-366.

S pi, 22 fig. Nov., 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1898.

779. Ehrhorn, E. M. Notes on plant shipment. Hawaiian Forester and Agric. 17: 4-6.
1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1942.

780. Engler, a. Die Vegetationsverhaltnisse des Kongoa-Gebirges und der Bambuto-
Berge in Kamerun [West Africa]. [The vegetation of the Kongoa Mountains and the Bambuto
Mountain in Kamerun.] Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft) : 24-32. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry
1505.

781. EwART, A. J. Contributions to the flora of Australia, No. 27. Proc. Roy. Soc.
Victoria 31 (N. S.): 367-379. PI. 18. 1919.

782. Fankhauser, F. Der Lawinenverbau Mittels Terrassen. [Preventing avalanches
by terracing.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71 : 217-230. 8 pi. 1920. — Avalanches occurred
quite frequently near Elm on slopes from 70° to 90°. These slopes were covered with unbroken
sod which give little resistance to sliding snow. Terracing has been successful in preventing
slides here and elsewhere. Terraces were first built as early as 1756. They were constructed
of laid walls of rock and were only partially successful. Later walls were built of well-laid
rock with widened bases. These were often loosened and torn away in the course of two or three
seasons. The best construction has been found to consist of alternate layers of rock and sod,
with the sod blocks projecting over the rock so that the grass will grow over the entire wall the
first or second season. If the sod blocks are trimmed even with the rock wall, the wall soon
crumbles and settles irregularly, because the grass does not grow over it and bind the dirt
together. The walls are from 1 to 2 m. wide and about 8 m. high, with a slope of about one-
fourth the thickness of the wall. The base is set deep enough to prevent undermining by
rain and snow water. The terraces are made as broad as possible, in order to give the snow
more level bearing surface and prevent sliding. — J. V. Hofmann.

783. Flury, Philip. Aus dem Gebierte unserer Forsteinrichtung. [From the Division
of Forest Improvement.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71:137-150. 1920. — This article is a
discussion of the views of Biolley and Burger on forest management and improvement as
related to methods of cutting. It is pointed out that the two methods are often confused.
Clear-cutting may be advisable for forest management, but it is not always the most desir-
able for forest improvement. Also, forests may be successfully managed by selection cut-

No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 115

ting, but not necessarily improved. Slope types of fir and spruce are best adapted to selec-
tion cutting and natural reproduction, and on the bottom lands hardwood types are better
suited to clear-cutting and planting. Mixed forests may be converted to pure beech forests
or any desirable species by this method. Annual cuttings must be based on the average
increment of different age classes and not on annual increment. An age class may produce
abnormal increments for short periods, but cuttings based on this would be too heavy for the
entire age class. Hater's formula is discussed in its relation to annual and age class incre-
ment.— J. V. Hofmann.

734. Flury, Philipp. Aus dem Gebierte unserer Forsteinrichtung (Schluss). [Divi-
sion of Forest Improvement (concluded).] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71: 179-199. 1920.—
Cuttings and future yield, based on annual increment, are faulty as shown by permanent
growth plots. These plots show wide fluctuation due to weather conditions. Growth was
retarded in the dry years of 1904, 1906, 1908, and 1911 and greatly accelerated in the wet years
of 1912-1916. Growth classes based on diameter measurement must take the smaller classes
into consideration. According to the "M6thode du Controle" where the smallest diameter
taken was 18 cm., stands under 40 years old would not be considered. Measurements taken in
divisions of 5 cm. are as applicable as those based on 1 cm. and are much simpler. Cuttings
based on 6- to 8-year intervals are too frequent, and no doubt 20-year intervals can be taken to
better advantage. However, 10-year periods are advantageous in many conditions. Tabu-
lations are included to show the relation of various methods of determining increment to the
different methods of cutting. The author concludes that the present forest compartments
are too large for the most eflBcient management. — J. V. Hofmann.

785. Ghose, Manmathanath. A neglected source of sugar in Bikar. Agric. Jour.
India 15: 32-39. 3 pi. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1893.

786. Gleason, Henry Allan. Some applications of the quadrant method. Bull. Torrey
Bot. Club 47: 21-33. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1499.

787. Greig-Smith, R. The germicidal activity of the Eucalyptus oils. Part 2. The action
of the oils in aqueous dilutions. Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales 44: 311-347. 7 fig.
1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1282.

788. GuiNAUDEAu, Ch. Souvenir de Macedoine de Salonique a la frontiere Bulgaro-
Serbe au point de vue forestier et agricole. [Forest and agricultural conditions in Macedonia.]
Bull Trimest. Soc. Forest. Franche-Comt6 et Belfort 13: 189-196. 2 fig. 1920.— Throughout
most of Macedonia from Saloniki to the Bulgarian-Serbian frontier, trees are scarce, erosion
is severe, and agricultural development is poor. Reforestation, restriction of grazing, irri-
gation, and the use of modern methods of crop production are needed to develop the very
decided agricultural possibilities of this region. West of Vardor, however, is an area which
is more densely populated, better forested, and richer from every point of view. Here the
development of transportation facilities and the practice of better forestry and better
agriculture can make it one of the flourishing parts of Greece and the source of all sorts of
valuable products. — S, T. Dana.

789. GuYOT, Ch. [Rev. of: Huffel, G. La foret sainte de Haguenau en Alsace. [The
sacred forest of Haguenau in Alsace.] 164 p. 1920.] Rev. Eaux etForets 58: 167-175. 1920.
— This work gives a detailed history of the important forests of Haguenau, the area of which
(18,000 hectares) has not changed materially since the Roman occupation. The methods of
forest management in use at different times are fully discussed and freely criticized. The
modifications introduced by the Germans following the Franco-Prussian war are regarded as
particularly unfortunate, and as having undone much of the good previously accomplished
by the French, in spite of the fact that the methods developed by the latter since 1843 were
too theoretical and complicated. — S. T. Dana.

116 FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

790. Hall, Thos. D. Food value of willow leaves. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South
Africa 1:456-457. 1920.

791. Hawley, L. F., and Calderwood, H. N., Jr. Tar still operation in hard wood dis-
tillation plants. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12:684-686. 1920.

792. Henkel, J. S. Forestry in Rhodesia. Timber trees in the Umtali Park. Rhodesia
Agric. Jour. 17:335-339. 2 pi. 1920.

793. Henkel, J. S. Forestry in Rhodesia. Two useful softwoods. Rhodesia Agric.
Jour. 17:238-243. 1920.

794. Hess, N. Experiences in plant hybridization. Proc. Amer. See. Hortic. Sci. 16:
52-60. (1919)-1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1818.

795. HiLEY, W. E. The fungal diseases of the common larch. 8 vo., xii + 20Ji. p., 73 pi.
Clarendon Press: Oxford, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1947.

796. HuFFEL, G. Le mouvement forestier a I'etranger: station de recherches forestilres
Suisse. [Developments at the Swiss forest experiment station.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58:
249-254. 1920.— Since 1900 the Swiss forest experiment station has been studying the influ-
ence of a forest cover on stream-flow in two neighboring and comparable water-sheds, one of
which was 97 per cent and the other 29 per cent forested. Actual measurements show that
forest soils in good condition absorb the bulk of the precipitation, which later runs off sub-
terraneously; while in soils not so protected there is an immediate surface run-off accompanied
by erosion and gullying, particularly on steep, turfed slopes. This beneficial influence of the
forest is due to the permeability and porosity of its soil rather than to the great hygroscopicity
of the humus and moss cover, which if too abundant may actually, after becoming saturated,
have the opposite effect and stimulate surface run-off. During periods of rapid snow melting
both the peak of the flood and the total discharge were less from the well-forested than from
the poorly forested water-shed. The run-off from the former after heavy or torrential down-
pours was only a third to a half of that from the latter. After prolonged rains the influence
of the forest depended on whether the soil was comparatively dry or saturated at the begin-
ning of the wet spell. In any event, however, erosion is less on well-forested water-sheds,
and the flood waters from them, having a lower velocity and carrying less detritus, do less
damage. During periods of prolonged drought the stream from the well-forested water-
shed never went dry, while that from the poorly forested one often did so for a month or two
at a time. All of these differences would have been more marked if the well-forested water-
shed had not had appreciably steeper slopes than the other, and if the latter had been
completely deforested. — S. T. Dana.

797. HuFFEL, G. Statistique des forets de 1' Alsace-Lorraine. [Forest statistics for
Alsace-Lorraine.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 185-188. 1920.— The director general of forests
at Strassburg has published a 98-page volume of statistical information regarding the forests
of Alsace-Lorraine. Among other things this shows that the forest area of the two provinces
on April 1, 1916, was 440,594 hectares, of which 31 per cent was owned by the state, 4 per
cent was undivided between the state and a commune, 46 per cent was in the hands of com-
munes and public institutions, and 19 per cent was held by private owners. Since 1871 the
forest area has decreased 5,673 hectares, or slightly more than 1 per cent. During the same
period gross prices of timber have increased 34 per cent and of flrewood 47 per cent, but there
has been a constant tendency to include smaller and smaller material in the former class.
The annual yield of the forests owned by the state and of those undivided between the state
and a commune is estimated at 551,422 cubic meters of large timber, including both inter-
mediate and final products. During the war, however, the actual cut and other matters of
administration were decidedly abnormal. — <S. T. Dana.

No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 117

798. Johnston, I. M. The flora of the pine belt of the San Antonio Mountains of southern
California. Plant World 22:71-90, 105-122. 2 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1521.

799. JoLTET, A. Les bassins d'epuration du Wacken k Strasbourg et I'elevage des Cyprin-
ides. [The purification basins at Strassburg and the breeding of Cyprinides.] Rev. Eaux et
Forets 58: 195-202. 1920.— The problem of sewage disposal has been solved at Strassburg
by the construction of stagnant ponds in which the organic material is assimilated bj'^ proto-
zoans, worms, crustaceans, insect larvae, molluscs, etc., and these in turn are eaten bj' carp
and other fish. The latter are entirely safe for human consumption and have no disagreeable
taste. One hectare of pond is sufficient to dispose of the sewage from 2000 to 3000 people
(nearly ten times as many as can be cared for by filtering the waste water in settling basins),
and at the same time to support an abundant population of fish. This method suggests to
foresters the possibility of introducing organic" matter into the many ponds and streams fo'ind
in the plains where <'.ommunal forests cover more than 20 per cent of the land area, and of
using these for the breeding of carp and other Cyprinides, which would form an important
addition to the food supply of the country. — S. T. Dana.

800. K., S. L. The resin industry: utilization of sand wastes. Australian Forest. Jour.
3: 172-175. 1920. — A brief discussion of the resin industry, and a short description of the
methods of collecting and refining resin.— C. F. Korstian.

801. Lecomte, Henri. Sur la "structure etagee" de certains bois. [On the "storied
structure" of certain woods.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 705-709. 1920.— See Bot.
Absts. 6, Entry 1901.

802. Ledermann, C. Einiges von der Kaiserin-Augusta-Fluss Expedition [New Guinea.]
[Notes on the Empress Augusta River Expedition.] Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft) : 33-44. 1919.—
See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1508.

803. Marti, F. Verbauungen, Aufforstungen und Berasungen in den Einzugsgebieten
der Wildbache. [Damming, afforesting, and sodding the watersheds of the forest lakes.]
Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71 : 230-244. 1920.— The forest and alpine lakes are a heritage of
nature, and the forest life and development often depend on their preservation. Where the
watersheds are barren rock or open slopes, the run-off is so rapid that the precipitation
causes sudden rising of the lakes and overflowing with resultant damage to the lower valleys.
Between the timber line and snow line there is usually an area of barren slopes from 1,000-
1,500 m. beginning at an elevation of 1,600-1,800 m. The forests have extended to high alti-
tudes, but the natural forest conditions must not be interfered with, or the timber line will
be brought to lower levels. The principal species are the larch and cembra pine. In some
localities, large areas of young growth are dying, although the underplanted spruce remains
thrifty. Afforestation may be effective in some regions, depending on temperature and pre-
cipitation. Wide variations of precipitation occur on different slopes due to direction of storm
movements and ridges. Where afforestation is not practicable, the areas should be sown to
grass to prevent erosion. In some regions it is necessary to build terraces. Where rock is
available it affords the best material for construction, but sod and a mixture of dirt and
gravel may also be used. — J. V. Hofmann.

804. McLean, R. C. Studies in the ecology of tropical rain forests, with special refer-
ence to the forests of South Brazil. Jour. Ecoj. 7: 121-172. 10 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6,
Entry 1500.

805. Mill, R. H. Woods and water supply. [Rev. of: Henry, Augustine. Forests,
woods and trees in relation to hygiene. XII + 314 p. Constable and Co.: London, 1919.]
Nature 105: 158-159. 1920.— Greater part of volume is devoted to afforestation of water
catchment areas. Reviewer agrees with author that the effect of afforestation in increasing
the general rainfall is probably negligible in the British Isles. — 0. A. Stevens.

118 FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

806. Morel, C. Activite de I'assimilation chlorophyllienne chez le pin sylvestre, quantite
d'eau necessaire a la vegetation d'une foret de cette essence. [Activity of chlorophyll assimi-
lation and water requirements of Scotch pine.] Rev. Eaux et Forets 58: 163-166. 1920. —
Dry wood contains about 50 per cent carbon, and air about 0.3 per cent carbon dioxide.
For a forest of Scotch pine to produce 5 cubic meters of wood per hectare per year, it is there-
fore necessary for the chlorophyll in the leaves to come into contact with 7,715,000 cubic
meters of air. This means that during the 1,200 hours of insolation in the period of vegeta-
tive activity between May 1 and September 1, the leaves must absorb every second a volume
of air equal to nearly one-fifth of their own volume; or, in other words, that the openings in
the chlorophyll tissues must fill and empty themselves of air at least every two seconds. The
pine leaf is thus far from being an inert organ. Assuming that each cubic meter of air expired
contains on the average 20 grams of water vapor, which is certainly a maximum, the leaves
would transpire each year 154,000 kilograms of water per hectare. Assuming further that
evaporation from the leaves and other parts of the tree is twice the transpiration, the total
annual water requirement of the forest is approximately 500,000 kilograms per hectare. This
is equivalent to a water blanket over the surface of the soil 5 centimeters in depth. In spite
of so small a water requirement, Scotch pine forests sometimes fail to produce a normal amount
of wood because they are in general relegated to soils which do not retain capillary water well,
because the humus which they produce improves only slightly the physical properties of the
soil, because the root hairs occupy a comparatively thin layer of soil, and because the tree
itself has but little reserve capacity. While Scotch pine seldom dies of drought, a soil which
is desiccated during the growing season may thus result in reduced wood production. Condi-
tions may be considerably improved bv underplanting open stands with such species as beech
or hornbeam, which produce a heavy leaf litter. — S. T. Dana.

807. MoRviLLEZ, F. L'appareil liberoligneux foliaire des Betulacees, Corylacees et
Castaneacees. [The vascular anatomy of the leaves of the Betulaceae, Corylaceae, and Casta-
neaceae.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:674-677. 12 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6,
Entry 1903.

808. Oechslin, M. FelssturzimBannwald Altdorf (Uri). [Rock avalanche in the forest
of Baun, Altdorf.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71 : 150-154. 1 pi. 1920.— On January 4,
1920, a slide occurred near Moos Lake at an elevation of about 1050 m. The slide started at
one point and divided into two paths through the forest. Strips 150 to 200 m. wide were
torn out, and all of the timber and rocks were piled at the base. Approximately 10 ha.
(about 25 acres) of forest were completely destroyed, including about 2,000 cubic m. of tim-
ber, three-fourths of which was buried among the debris. The slide occurred on a 35° to 40°
slope. Slides in this region are caused by the porous condition of the soil and rock at the
surface, which permits all surface water to penetrate to the impervious bed-rock. Very few
springs occur, and those that do are intermittent except at the base of the hills. This condition
causes a wet layer to form at the surface of the bed-rock, and during periods of wet snow or
heavy rainfall avalanches result. — /. V. Hofmann.

809. Ogura, Yudsuru. Some observations on the growth in thickness in trees, especially
with regard to that of Cryptomeria japonica. Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34: 81-109. 1920.— See Bot.
Absts. 7, Entry 1068.

810. Olmsted, Fredrick E. National forest policies: a critical review of the several
plans. Jour. Forestry 18:598-609. 1920. — An analysis is presented of the manor features
of the national forest programs proposed by the United States Forest Service, the Ameri-
can Paper and Pulp Association, the National Lumber Manufacturers' Association, and the
Society of American Foresters. Of these, the last is preferred as it provides for direct national
control, and is far better than any state administration because of freedom from politics,
firmness of purpose, and efficiency. — E. N. Munns.

No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 119

811. Patton, R. T. On the growth, treatment and structure of some common hardwoods.
Proc. Roy. See. Victoria 31 (N. S.): 394-411. PL 21, 7 fig. 1919.— The forest management,
the seasoning, and some notes on the structure of mountain ash. Eucalyptus regnans, are dis-
cussed. At present there are no managed forests of known age, so that methods of con-
structing yield tables must be worked out. Schlich's method of selecting an average tree
per plot is criticized. An average of as many typical trees as possible is preferred. Diffi-
culty is experienced in counting rings after ninety years. Some data are also given on black-
wood, Acacia melanoxylon. Growth curves of the two Australian species are compared with
curves for cluster pine from Portugal and for spruce. Rapid growth is apparent from the first,
but the eucalypt appears to have an anomalous growth curve. No evidence for the reputed
slow growth of blackwood was found. Good cabinet timber could be grown in forty years.
Doubt was expressed concerning the statement that mountain ash will grow an average
30-inch butt in 40 years; also concerning current height growth figures for eucalypts. The
tallest seen by the writer were 261 and 249 feet, respectively. There is an ofiicial record
of 326 feet. In the yield curves, relations were established between diameter and height,
in order to get a workable relation between height and age. Taper in mountain ash was found
to be 0.36 inch of the circumference per foot of ascent. Thirty-nine to forty-one trees per
acre were found; 50 per acre were advocated, and spacing is as discussed. Seeding 10,000 to
12,000 to the acre was considered about satisfactory. A full and well-formed crown was the
end in view. — Natural seasoning conditions are so favorable that doubt is expressed as to the
need for kiln drying on a large scale. The fallacy of steaming "to open the pores" is dis-
cussed. A test of the effect of steaming on seasoning is given. Matched pieces lost moisture
at the same rate, but after three months the steamed pieces began to shrink more than the
unsteamed. This was explained as due to a slight breaking down of the wood structure. It
was concluded that there is no justification for this practice or for that of end-stacking. A
free supply of air on all sides of the material is advocated, and the drying of different surfaces
is discussed. The possibility of determining moisture content by measuring electrical resist-
ance is mentioned. — The simple structure of mountain ash with its evenly distributed large
pores (average radial diameter, 0.253 mm.) is pointed out, and tests on the length of these
are described. The fibers averaged about 1 mm. in length. Sapling fibers were slightly
longer than those formed later. The uniseriate rays were very numerous and said to contain
nuclei in the cells at the center of trees over 100 years old. No starch was found. The fibers
at the center were imperfectly lignified. It is thought that good forestry would reduce the
amount of immature wood formed. Tyloses were often associated with the nuclei. In E.
obliqua tyloses were reported "right up against the cambium." Mountain ash hardens greatly
when dried. Its tannin content is objectionable for its use as pulp. — Eloise Gerry.

812. PiLLiCHODY, A. Aus dem Grossen Risouxforst. [The great forest of Rlsoux.]
Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw. 71 : 177-179. 1 pi. 1920. — The Risoux Forest is a large unbroken
tract of virgin forest along the French border, stretching over 15 kilometers. It contains
2277 ha. (about 5,690 acres) and is one of the few unbroken tracts of forest land. No utili-
zation of timber from this tract was made until 1904; a road was then built through it, which
made possible the use of firewood and poles. A stand of 316 m^. per ha. covers the area, con-
sisting of about 80 per cent spruce, 10 per cent fir, and 10 per cent beech. The forest is
from 300 to 350 years old. Where old trees have died or fallen, groups of young trees have
sprung up. Such groups usually are suppressed and do not survive. Beech forms an under-
story and also, by shading, serves in clearing the conifer trunks of small side branches. Diam-
eter classes were taken in 1911 which showed the following percentages in each class: 16-18
cm., 12 per cent; 30-48 cm., 44 per cent; 50 cm. and over, 44 per cent. — J. V. Hofmann.

813. PiLLiCHODY, A. Verschiedenes Verbal ten gegen Windstromung. [Varying reaction
to wind pressure.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forst. 71:154-155. 1 pi. 1920.— Canadian popple
and Italian popple were planted at Wallis where they were exposed to severe winds consistently
from one direction. At 30 years of age Canadian popple showed a stem decidedly inclined
in the direction away from that of the prevailing wind. It produced a good growth and devel-

120 FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

oped a strong, stocky stem with many branches. The Italian popple produced a straight,
upright, slender stem, and few branches, although its growth almost equalled the Canadian.
— J. V. Hofmann.

814. Pritzel, E Die Grettstadter Wiesen [Germany]. [The meadows of Grettstadt.]
Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft) : 83-112. 1 map. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1510.

815. Proschowskt, A. R. Les Coniferes dans les terras calcires sur la Cote-d'Azur.
[Conifers in calcareous soils at Cote-d'Azur.] Rev. Hortic. [Paris] 92:75. 1920. — See Bot.
Absts. 6, Entry 1869.

816. Ramaley, Francis. Subalpine lake-shore vegetation in north-central Colorado.
Amer. Jour. Bot. 7: 57-74. 6 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1511.

817. Ramirez. Gonzalo. Una neuva planta hulifera. [A new rubber plant.] Rev.
Agric. [Mexico] 5: 118-119. 1919. — Gives a description of a plant (Cryptostegia madagascari-
ensis) from Lower California which gives promise as a source of rubber. — John A. Stevenson.

818. Rand, R. F. Wayfaring notes from Great Namaqualand [Southwest Africa]. Jour.
Botany 58: 53-55. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1512.

819. Regan, W. S. The destruction of Ribes by chemical means. Amer. Plant Pest
Committee Bull. 4: 12. 1920.

820. RiDSDALE, P. S. The Memorial Trees of the United States. Garden Mag. 30: 177-
180. 2 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1870.

821. Robinson, R. G. Phases of forestry practice. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 36-48.
1920. — Many failures in afforestation are believed to be due to improper varieties, or unwise
mixtures of varieties. The importance of good seed is shown by experimental tests. Plant-
ing distances should vary according to species and soil. There is danger in planting too close
as well as in planting too far apart. It has been found that careful thinning will pay for the
labor involved. Plantations of Pinus insignis have yielded £100 per acre, and should yield
much greater returns if properly handled. Natural regeneration of pine and gum forests
is desirable and practical in some instances. Softwoods, hardwoods, and medium woods
best suited to New Zealand conditions are listed. — N. J. Giddings.

822. Russell, G. A. A machine for trimming camphor trees. U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept.
Circ. 78: 3-8. 4 fi^- 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1989.

823. ScHLUPi, W. F. Rodent injury to trees, cause, prevention and repair. Jour. Dept.
Agric. Union of South Africa 1 : 445-455. 1920.

824. Sim, T. R. Cultivated trees, I. South African Jour. Indust. 3:783-793. 1920.—
No species indigenous to South Africa can be recommended for commercial culture, since
in every case there are exotic species commercially more profitable. Commercial tree cul-
ture can be most profitably undertaken in the natural forest or grass areas of the eastern slope;
i.e., in the Knysna Conservancy, Kaffraria, Transkei, Griqual and East, Natal, Swaziland,
Transvaal, Bush Veld, and Transvaal Low Veld. In all these areas summer rainfall predomi-
nates, except in the Knysna Conservancy, where rains are more or less regular. — E. M.
Doidge.

• 825. Struby, a. Wald und Weide. [Forest and meadow.] Schweiz. Zeitschr. Forstw.
71:199-202. 1920.— From "Schweiz. Alpwirtschaftlichen Monatsblatter."— The value of
alpine meadows is emphasized and their value compared with that of woodlands. The most
productive portions are found among scattered stands of trees, and this feature should be
considered in utilizing these meadows. Areas too rough or steep to be used for meadow

No. 2, March, 1921] FOREST BOTANY AND FORESTRY 121

should be planted to forest, and strips of trees should be placed on ridges and at places of
advantage in sheltering the meadows and the grazing animals. The development of forest
and meadow should go forward together for the greatest returns from the area. — J. V.
Hofmann.

826. Trevor, C. G. Yield tables for single trees of deodar, kail, chil, spruce and silver fir.
Indian Forester 46: 439-451. 1920. — Results obtained through 20 years of work are given
in the form of tables for the above species. The data are compiled in cubic feet for diameter
and age groups and show that the current annual increment culminates around 120 years with
diameters of 20-24 inches. Spruce and silver fir have the highest values, with 3.60 per cent
at 105 to 115 years; and kail has the lowest, with 1.75 per cent at 75 years. Three site quali-
ties are recognized which are based on total height of the trees. — E. N. Munns.

827. Unwin, a. N. African softwoods for pulp production. Nature 105:599. 1920.—
The following might be of use: Eriodendron anfractuoswn, E. orientate, Bombax huono'po-
zense, Triplochiton Johnsonii and T. nigericum (wood similar to spruce, fibers long, reproduc-
tion easy and growth rapid), Sterculi Barterii (growth very rapid), S. tragacantha, Terminalia
superba, Alstonia congensis, Ricinodendron Hendelotii, Pycanthus kombo, Musanga Smithii.
The baobab, Andansonia digitata, has been suggested as suitable, but is usually scattered and
remote from navigable waterways. — 0. A. Stevens.

828. Watson, Russell. Summer planting of white pine on the Michigan state forests.
Jour. Forestry 18: 623-624. 1920. — Planting of P. strobus seedlings in Michigan was car-
ried on weekly from June to September, and the results appear to show that fall planting can
profitably be begun in August, and that the losses from summer planting were not as great
as might be expected. — E. N. Munns.

829. Watt, A. S. On the causes of failure of natural regeneration in British oakwoods.
Jour. Ecol. 7: 173-203. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1501.

830. Weidman, Robert H. A study of windfall loss of western yellow pine in selection
cuttings fifteen to thirty years old. Jour. Forestry 18: 616-622. 1920. — On government
sales of timber in Oregon, a heavy windfall loss is experienced in P. ponderosa stands the first
few years after cutting. The winds causing such loss are quite common in the region, and
fear of continued losses was felt. Observations on older cuttings of private operators who cut
their holdings in a manner similar to that practiced on timber sales, show that the heavy
losses, both in actual number and in volume, occur only in the first decades following the
opening in the stand, the decrease in numbers being more prominent than in volume because
of the large trees involved in the later windthrows, which, however, are not left under pres-
ent marking practice. The loss is that of the weakest trees and is heaviest in the early stage,
for after exposure the trees strengthen their root system. The study shows that the subse-
quent losses on sales should be slight. — E. N. Munns.

831. Weiss, Howard F. Relation of research to forest management. Jour. Forestry 18:
590-597. 1920. — Attention of research workers in utilization and properties of woods might
better be concentrated on the species of rapid growth than on those of slow growth, even
though the slower-growing woods are at present of slightly higher value. Forest management
of the future will be intimately tied up with the relation existing between yields and the cost of
production, which invariably favors the faster-growing species. Research in products has
already resulted in increased revenues from lands, and similar work should stabilize indus-
tries which are dependent on fluctuating markets. — E. N. Munns.

832. Wilson, E. H. The romance of our trees. VII. The beeches. Garden Mag. 31 :
115-119. 4 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1471.

833. Wilson, E. H. The romance of our trees. IX. Whence came the common fruits.
Garden Mag. 31 : 259-263. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1472.

BOTANICAl. ABSTRACre, VOL. VII, NO. 2

122 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. Vll,

834. Wilson, E. H. The romance of our trees. X. The Lombardy poplar and the Babylon
willow. Garden Mag. 31: 317-320. 5 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1473.

835. Wilson, E. H. The cedars of Lebanon. Garden Mag. 30: 178-183. ^ fig. 1919.—
See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1876.

836. Wilson, E. H. The romance of our trees. II, The Ginko. Garden Mag. 30: 144-148.
7 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1877.

837. WiMBUSH, A. Artificial regeneration of teak by sowing. Indian Forester 46: 488-
492. PI. 21. 1920. — Experience gained in the past work shows that early felling of the cover
crop is necessary to allow time for drying before burning, that seed should be carefully selected
and a nursery established on the ground, and that the grass should be cut before seeding takes
place. — E. N. Munns.

838. ZoN, R. Effect of forests upon streamfiow. [Rev. of: Engler, Arnold. Unter-
suchungen iiber den Einfluss des Waldes auf den Stand der Gewasser. Mitteil. Schweiz.
Zentralanst. Forst. Versuchsw. Zurich, 1919.] Jour. Forestry 18:625-633. 1920.— Twenty-
years' record of the Emmental Experiment Station in Switzerland and ten-years' of the
Wagon Wheel Gap Station in Colorado have been completed, and so far the results are
directly comparable. In Switzerland it has been found that the annual run-off from the for-
ested and non-forested areas is approximately the same, the chief difference in the disappear-
ance of water being due to evaporation from the surface and the transpiration from the cover.
Forest cover has a beneficial effect upon the regime of streams; and landslides, which occur
more or less regularly on open lands, rarely occur in forested basins. Forests, it is shown,
have a beneficial effect on the discharge and the amount of material in the water, and that
floods are less pronounced, though previous climatic conditions have a marked effect upon
the run-off and absorption in the soil. The chief effect of the forest appears to be upon the
permeability of the soil and consequently upon water absorption. The moisture content of
the soil is higher than in the open because of ground water, drouth in the open depleting this
reservoir, which is maintained by the forest cover. — E. N. Munns.

GENETICS

G. H. Shull, Editor
J. P. Kelly, Assistant Editor

839. Akerman, a. Jakttagelser rorande strafusarios pa varvete sommaren 1917. [Observa-
tions on a Fusarium disease of spring wheat.] Sver. Utsadesforen. Tidskr. 28: 82-89. 1918.

840. Allen, E. J., and E. W. Sexton. Eye-colour in Gammarus. Jour. Genetics 9: 347-
366. 1 pL, 1 diagram. Mar., 1920. — In Gammarus chevreuxi the eye is normally reniform and
pigmented black. In the second laboratory generation a red-eyed mutant appeared, Red-
eye is a simple Mendelian recessive to black, the F2 ratio being 3:1. In a second mutation,
called albino eye, the eye not only lacks pigment but is "imperfect;" it is small and variable
in size and shape, and has few ommatidia, which are irregularly distributed, and has unevenly
distributed white pigment (distribution regular in normal eye). Albino eye is a simple
recessive to color. Albino-eyed specimens all carry a factor for color — some for black, some
for red, some for both. The white eye pigment in both colored and albino eyes is quite vari-
able in amount. Absence of this white pigment occurs both in pigmented- and albino-eyed
stock. "No-white" is a simple recessive to pigment. This is a not uncommon mutation
appearing in some families of all the author's stocks and was seen in another species of wild
Gammarus. This mutation begins in at least two different ways: (a) it may appear suddenly
either with one eye or with both eyes affected, or (b) it may develop gradually; e.g., parents
with thin reticulation giving some young with thin reticulation, and some "no-white." "In
the albino-eyed stocks the white extra-retinal pigment shows a tendency to break up, and

No. 2, March, 1921] GENETICS 123

portions of it become detached from the eye." These white spots may occur in any of sev-
eral positions on the head and first body segment. Spots have occurred in all the experi-
mental stocks, but seem to run in particular families; they are most frequent in albino stock
and frequent in red, heterozygous for albino. "The spots appeared almost simultaneously
in our different stocks." The authors present briefly a considerable number of data involving
many individual matings, from many of which 300 or more young were obtained. Authors
conclude that "the inheritance of spots did not follow the simple Mendelian law. The
spotted condition did not behave either as a pure dominant or a pure recessive. Spotted
animals mated together always gave both spotted and unspotted offspring. One point, how-
ever, came out clearly, namely, that albino and coloured strains carrying albino gave a much
larger percentage of spotted young than do pure coloured strains. There is a possibility that
the inheritance of spots follows some complicated Mendelian law The Mende-
lian ratios 3:1, 9:7, 15:1 frequently occur in some of the best cases we have, where figures are
large, but it is hard to find a consistent theorj'." — This study, parts of which have been set
forth in earlier papers, probably represents the first Mendelian analysis of hereditary char-
acters in Crustacea. — A. M. Banta.

841. Alverdes, Friedrich. Uber das Manifestwerden der vererbten Anlage einer
Abnormitat. [On the manifestation of the hereditary factor of an abnormality.] Biol. Zen-
tralbl. 40: 473-480. Oct., 1920.

842. Anonymous. British cytology. [Rev. of: Doncaster, L. An introduction to the
study of cytology. XIV + 280 p., 2^ pL, 31 fig. Cambridge University Press: Cambridge,
England. 1920.] Nature 105: 190-191. 1920.

843. Anonymous. Rapid Cyclamen culture and raising hybrids. Florists' Exch. SO:
1070. Nov. 20, 1920. — Suggestions on Cyclamen culture and possibilities of hybridization
between different species and related genera, such as Dodecatheon. Greenhouse Cyclamen
originated from C. persicum and C. laciniatum, the latter contributing the fringe types. —
Orland E. White.

844. Anonymous. Scottish station for research in plant breeding. Pharm. Jour. 103:
191. 1919. — By private subscription, supplemented by government funds, money is being
accumulated for the founding of the above-named institute. It is hoped that part of the
work of the station will result in the introduction of improved agricultural varieties of plants
such as will help in solving problems of food production and of rural employment. In
developing the station Scotland is keeping abreast of England and Wales where provision is
being made for botanical research under similar conditions. — Wilber Brotherton, Jr.

845. Anonymous. The progress of genetical research. Card. Chron. 68: 175. Oct. 9,
1920. — Editorial comment and partial review of Miss Saunder's presidential address to the
Botanical Section of the British Association. Notes increasing complexity of Mendelian
phenomena. Some plant characters are expression of a single factor, while others depend on
simultaneous presence of several factors. Hairiness in Lychnis vespertina depends on one
factor. Hairy X glabra gives hairj^ in Fi and 3 hairj^: 1 glabra in F2. In stocks, Saunders
has shown hairiness depends on presence of four factors, the absence of any one of these
giving glabrous plants. Ligules on oats due to four or five factors, the presence of any one
of which gives rise to ligule. Heribert-Nilsson shows specific or species characters are not
exempt from Mendelian law. In Salix (willows) those characters regarded by systematists
as of specific value depend on normal-acting Mendelian factors. Specific-character factors
more general in effect on plant structure than varietal-character factors. Former, unlike
latter, may affect many or all parts of plant, thus bringing about striking peculiarities in gen-
eral appearance of plant. These facts may throw light on why some species, outwardly very
distinct, are easily crossed with each other, while others, to the eye much more nearly alike,
give no results when crossed together. Suggests that apparently wide differences between
species in some cases may be due to relatively few factor differences. Comments on Greg-

1^4 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

obt's work on giant forms of Primula and on Sattndees's studies on linkage in stocks. Hor-
ticulturists generally should welcome suggestion of Miss SAtrNOERS, that there should be
more organized cooperation between all those sections of investigators and breeders interested
in laws of heredity and improvement in plants and animals. — Orland E. White.

846. Anonymous. On the selection of Hevea brasiliensis. Kew Bull. 1920: 113-119.
1920. — Brief account drawn from Dutch sources. Improvement in rubber production may
be effected by (1) generative selection, isolation of high-yielding strains by seed selection,
and by (2) vegetative selection, multiplication of high yielders by grafting, budding, and
cuttings. Under (1) establishment of isolated seed nurseries made up of two high yielders
propagated by grafting is advocated. This method should be continued through successive
generations in order to isolate high-yielding strains. Artificial pollination is practicable,
and methods are described. Hevea appears normally to be self-sterile. Under (2) methods
of grafting and budding and of striking cuttings and securing good stock for cuttings are
described. Multiplication by cuttings is favored. In selection of trees high and constant
yield of latex is chief desideratum, but state of health and hereditary qualities are also con-
sidered. Introduction and trial of new types and species of Hevea may result in further
improvement. — R. E. Clausen.

847. Anontmous. Hybrids of Gladiolus primulinus. Gard. Chron. 68: 105. Aug. 28,
1920. — Most hybrids of G. primulinus exhibit marked likeness to the same in form and elegance
but show considerable color variation. — J. Marion Shull.

848. Anonymous. A mule in the vegetable kingdom. Tropic. Life 16: 139. 1920. —
According to the London correspondent of the North Queensland Register, Mr. F. J. Moore,
of Lion Creek in the Rockhampton District of Queensland, reports an apparent natural
hybrid between banana and paw-paw. A clump of bananas growing in close proximity to a
small paw-paw tree produced a bunch of fruit which looked like small plantains, but on
being opened they were found to contain seeds resembling paw-paw seeds. — H. N. Vinall.

849. Anonymous. The genetics of strawberries. [Rev. of: Richardson, C. W. Some
notes on Fragaria. Jour. Genetics 10:39-46. 2 fig. July, 1920.] Gard. Chron. 50:211.
Oct. 30, 1920.

850. Anonymous. The structure of the nucleus. [Rev. of: Agar, W. E. Cytology: with
special reference to the metazoan nucleus. XII + 224 P- Macmillan & Co.: London, 1920.]
Nature 105:482-483. 1920.

851. Arber, a. The "Law of loss" in evolution. Proc. Linnean Soc. London 1919: 70-78.
1919. — Law of loss means the "general rule that a structure or organ once lost in the course of
phylogeny can never be regained; if the organism subsequently has occasion to replace it, it
cannot be reproduced, but must be constructed afresh in some different mode." Examples
cited are loss of roots in Ceratophyllum and Utricularia and substitution of special subterra-
nean shoots; failure of ciliated sperms to reappear in aquatic Angiosperms with submerged
fertilization; replacement of perianth in Naias with cupular outgrowth of receptacles; loss of
opposable thumb or great toe in tree kangaroo, with substitution of enlargement of claws;
and others from plants and animals. Operation of law of loss may be favorable "by closing
well-worn paths and thus indirectly encouraging the opening of fresh routes." — A. Franklin
Shull.

852. Armbruster, Ludwig. Messbare phaenotypische und genotypische Instinktverand-
erungen. Bienen und Wespengehirne, neu verglichen und als Mass benutzt in Fragen der
Stammes- und Staatengeschichte sowie Vererbung und Genogenese. Nebst Anhang iiber
Nomada. [Measurable phenotypic and genotypic changes of instinct. Bee and wasp brains com-
pared anew and used as a measure in questions of race and state history as well as heredity
and genogenesis, with an appendix concerning Nomada.] Archiv Bienenkunde 1: 1-40. 5 pL,

No. 2, March, 1921] GENETICS 125

8 fig. 1919. — Author reviews and continues work of late von* ALTE>f on fungiform bodies,
central nervous structures of Hymenopterous brain. From transverse sections of brain von
Alten made the following measurements: Total diameter of fungiform bodies (a), height of
fungiform bodies (h), total diameter of protocerebral lobes (b), and total diameter of fibrous
part of optic lobes (c); b and c are relatively constant and serve as standards in brain index
devised by author, a/b + a/c + h/b + h/c. Comparison of brain indices of sexes and
casts of various aculeate species shows that size of fungiform bodies is correlated with
degree of development of instincts. In general, solitary species stand below social, and sim-
pler solitary below more complex, Size of insect as whole, or size or shape of head, does not
affect index. Species of one and same genus may have rather widely diverse brain indices.
Bees with ventral scopa do not stand below those with scopa on legs, but the two groups
run parallel. Digger wasps apparently run parallel to solitary bees. Social wasps in every
case run parallel to social bees. Among social bees, the bumble bee has much higher index
than the honey bee. This is to be expected from fact that latter is far below former in
structure, such as length of tongue, and in instincts; for social life is not necessarily an indi-
cation of high position in scale of development. Consider termites, for example. Sex dimor-
phism appears from lowest to highest species, females in general having larger brains.
Among social aculeates male brain is the most weakly developed. Of female brains, that of
worker is better developed only in ergatotelic honey bee, while in gynaecotelic bumble bees
and wasps queen has larger brain. This is correlated with fact that queen honey bee is prac-
tically a parasite for life upon worker colony while in gynaecotelic forms queen must found
colony. In solitary parasite, Nomada, and still more so in social parasite, Psithyrus, male
possesses the more highly developed brain. In Nomada, brain indices of both male and
female are very high for parasites, while in Psithyrus, index for male corresponds to average
brain index of other bumble bees. In parasitic forms, therefore, brain of female tends to
retrogress, while that of male remains to show from whence species has diverged. Resem-
blance of parasite to host is not to be explained by mimicry but by relationship. General
subject of genogenesis, which lies at root of species problem, is considered. Males having re-
duced chromosome number should be especially subject to mutation and yet, in spite of diverse
environments, parasitic males have not changed and females have remained parasites. Dif-
ference in feeding causes phenotypic differences of form and instinct between queens and
workers. Question is raised as to how this phenotypic difference became genotypic, as in
transformation of phenotypically parasitic queen of Apis or Bombus into genotypically
parasitic Psithyrus. — P. W. Whiting.

853. Ballard, W. R. Notes on geranium breeding. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 1918: 62-65.
1918. — Recounts breeding work done to secure disease resistance. Because of hybrid nature
of most varieties considerable segregation occurs in Fi generation: Singles X singles gave 84
singles and 6 doubles; singles X doubles gave 59 singles and 74 doubles; doubles X doubles
gave 40 singles and 30 doubles. Correlation indicated between presence of nectar tubes and
singleness of flower. Little success attended effort to hybridize different species; Lady Wash-
ington type will combine with some of the scented-leaved types, and the zonal group will
hybridize with the ivy-leaved section but not with either the show or scented-leaved groups.
— J. Marion Shtill.

854. Bally, Walter. Die Godronschen Bastards zwischen Aegilops- und Tricumarten.
Vererbung und Zytologie. [The Godronian hybrids between species of Aegilops and Triticum.
Heredity and cytology.] Zeitschr. indukt. Abstamm. Vererb. 20: 177-240. 4 fi-g. Feb.,
1919,

855. Barclay, J. R. Scottish pure-bred live stock. I. Aberdeen-Angus cattle. Scot.
Jour. Agric. 2: 456-464. 4 pi. 1919.— A brief account of the early history of the Aberdeen-
Angus cattle, of the present characteristics of the breed, and of the success attained in all
parts of the world in competition with other beef breeds. — Sewall Wright.

126 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

856. Baton, H. Racial and sexual differences in the appendix vennifonnis. Anat.
Rec. 19:241-249. Sept. 20, 1920. — Statistics based on surgical records distinct!}' indicate
a greater frequency of appendicitis in the white race than in the negro, but the records are
shown to be subject to error in favor of the white frequency. Therefore, a comparative
study of structure of the appendix was undertaken to determine if there are racial and
sexual differences, with special reference to "susceptibility to inflammation." One hundred
appendices, recently removed, many for other causes than appendicitis, were examined as
to both gross and microscopic characters. The following results were obtained: — (1) "The
musculature of the white appendix .... seemed slightly stronger than that of the
negro;" (2) the white appendix on the average "is shorter and wider;" (3) is "richer in crypts;"
and (4) is "rich in lymphocytes and poor in vascularity," while the negro is exactly the
reverse. Considered in relation to "other diseases of the lymphatic system," these findings
"seem to prove that the white race is more subject to lymphocytic stasis than the negro." —
As to sexual differences, it was found that the male appendix is "longer and wider than the
female" and the latter is richer in fat, conforming in these respects with prevailing sex dif-
ferences.— H. J. Banker.

857. Blakeslee, A. F. Sexual differentiation in the bread molds. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol.
Med. 16: 131. 1919. — Primitive sexual forms are hermaphroditic, both the gametes, and
the plants themselves, differing in size. Interaction of two sexual races, regardless of
species, is necessary for production of sexual spores or "imperfect hybridization." — Dif-
ferent races display variations in sexual vigor. Some seem neutral ; hermaphrodites sometimes
produce races showing hermaphroditic, female, male, or neutral tendencies. — Andrew I.
Dawson.

858. Blakeslee, Albert F., John Belling, and M. E. Farnham, Chromosomal dupli-
cation and Mendelian phenomena in Datura mutants. Science 52 : 388-390. Oct. 22, 1920. —
The authors have begun a study of the relationship between the cytological condition and
the phenomena of mutation and Mendelian inheritance. Datura Stramonium, the Jimson
weed, upon which they are working, has normally 24 chromosomes in diploid and 12 in hap-
loid. 12 recurrent mutants have 25 in diploid. The extra chromosome is presumably deter-
mined by the duplication of a particular chromosome which has been identified as the one
carrying the gene for a particular Mendelian character. Duplication may extend to all of
the chromosomes producing tetraploid mutants in which the independent assortment of the
chromosomes in the homologous sets is found to be the rule. — Helen Bergfried.

859. Blaringhem, L. Heredite et nature de la pelorie de Digitalis purpurea L. [Heredity
and nature of the peloria of Digitalis purpurea L.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 171 : 252-254.
July, 1920. Cross-fertilization of a plant with regular axial peloria, probably recessive as to
flower color, with a wild purple-flowered Digitalis purpurea were made by the author. From
the results of this experiment the conclusion is reached that the peloria of this species is an
extreme case of regular hereditary f asciation ; when crossed with wild Digitalis purpurea the
normal cluster form is dominant over the fasciation, with partial, graduated reversion in prog-
eny of the second and third generations. Individual plants or flowers show partial sterility.
—Edith K. Cash.

860. Blaringhem, L. Variations florales chez la Grande Marguerite (Leucanthemum
vulgare, Lamarck). [Floral variations in the large daisy.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris
169: 193-195. 1919.— Author calls attention to tendency of this daisy (Chrysanthemum
Leucanthemum L.) to develop vigorous colonies on recently cleared or exposed land. Time
of colony formation favors variation and author reports on group of more than a thou-
sand plants that grew on site of drained pond. Heights of plants ranged from 80-150 cm.
while same species in suburbs of Paris ranged from 40-70 cm. In colony were 5 fasciated
plants. A single ligulate floret was found metamorphosed into tubular one. Counts on
100 heads for ligule number gave modes at 25 and 33 while in case of 9-year-old culture of

No. 2, March, 1921]

GENETICS 127

same species at another place there was a single mode at 21 ligules. Numerous foliage varia-
tions observed in the drained-pond colony and examination of achenes from ligulate flowers
of 25 individuals showed that two had the well-developed crown or pappus characteristic of
other species of the genus, two had less-developed pappus, while 21 had naked fruits typical
of L. vulgare Lam. — James P. Kelly.

861. Blaringhem, L. Production par traumatisme d'une forme nouvelle de Mais S cary-
opses multiples, Zea Mays var. polysperma. [The traumatic origin of a new form of maize with
multiple fruits, Zea Mays var. polysperma.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:677-679.
1920.— Hereditary line of maize with a varying percentage of double and sometimes triple
grains (caryopses) has been isolated from the author's original teratological cultures in
which the main stalk of the plant had been injured. A description of this new strain, called
Z. Mays var. polysperma, is given. A correlation between the double grains on the ear and
a corresponding union of the spikelets on the staminate inflorescence was observed. — Iso-
lated in 1907, this strain proved to be exceedingly variable in the number of plants which
bore ears with double grains. After five years of selection, the author reports that he has
fixed the strain to some extent. His data show approximately fifty per cent of plants with
double grains in 1919. At the same time the number of double grains on the ear has increased
from 5 per cent to 95 per cent.— The author calls this a typical case of a heritable, acquired
character. — E. W. Lindstrom.

862. Blaringhem, L. Stabilite et fertilite de I'hybride Geum urbanum L. X G. rivale
L. [Stability and fertility of the hybrid, Geum urbanum L. X G. rivale L.] Compt. Rend.
Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1284-1286. May, 1920.

863. Bond, C. J. On certain factors concerned in the production .of eye colour in birds.
Jour. Genetics 9: 69-81. Dec, 1919.— Eye colors of birds are arranged in a series. At the
bottom is "bull" eye, as found in pigeons, which is due to absence of anterior pigment in iris
and background of black pigment in the uvea. Next stage is pearl eye of pigeons and "daw"
eye of fowls, caused by colorless granules in the iris, which destroy its translucency. In
extreme cases this type of eye may be china-white as in the "wall" eye of dogs, horses and
pigs. Yellow or "gravel" eyes are due to a network of branching cells crowded with small
spherical yellow granules on the anterior surface of the iris. Brown and black eyes are due
to brown or black pigment replacing or covering the yellow (giving triplex condition). The
ruby eye is produced by yellow pigment in conjunction with the red capillaries, except in the
Cayenne Lapwing, where actual reddish pigment granules are found. Some data on inherit-
ance of the types are given. In general they form an epistatic series, with the simplex "bull"
eye at the bottom. There are some complications due to secondary sex relations.— Leon /.
Cole.

864. Bond, C. J. On the left-sided incidence of the supernumerary digit in heterodacty-
lous fowls. Jour. Genetics 10:87-91. July, 1920.— Author reports that among 38 hetero-
dactylous (five toes on one foot and four on the other) offspring from various crosses of four-
toed and five-toed breeds of fowls, 34 had the extra digit on the left side and only four on the
right side. Reports slight indication that this situation is more likely to prevail when the
female parent belongs to the five-toed breed. Data of other investigators are discussed
and the conclusion reached that in birds "there is a tendency during the early cleavage of
the ovum which separates the organism into a right and left half, for the factor or factors
which control meristic variation to pass to the left rather than to the right half of the devel-
oping zygote." — W. A. Lippincott.

865. Boring, Edwin G. A priori use of the Gaussian-law. Science 52: 129-130. Aug. 6,
1920.— The author criticizes Mr. Michael's interpretation of Dr. Johnstone's results for
twenty counts of bacteria in polluted shell fish. He objects to Michael's factoring of a
skew distribution into a Gaussian distribution and a skewing factor on the ground that, in
absence of observational proof that the frequencies at hand follow the Gaussian law, this

128 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

law is meaningless. He also objects to application of elaborate statistical methods when the
number of observed cases is as small as in Johnstone's problem and he suggests that the
mode and upper and lower quartiles, as determined directly from the observations, give all
the information desired. — Lowell J. Reed,

866. BouviER, E.-L., and d'Emmerez de Charmodt. Mutation d'une Caridine en Ort-
mannie et observations generales sur les mutations evolutives des Crevettes d'eau douce de la
famille de Atyides. [Mutation of Caridina into Ortmannia and general observations on the
evolutional mutations of fresh-water shrimps of the family Atyidae.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci.
Paris 169:317-321. 1919. — Authors have previously stated that certain shrimps or prawns
(family Atyidae) of the Indo-Pacific region give rise by mutations to representatives of
previously known species of higher genera. Such changes are cited for the following forms : —
Caridina richtersi to Ortmannia edwardsi; Ortmannia alluaudi to Atya serrata, Ortmannia
henshawi Iw Atya bisulcata. The second of these is reported to have been experimentally
proven by Bordaqe, the two genera having been obtained from the same clutch of eggs.
The first is found experimentally by the writers to occur in a brood reared in an aquarium
(8 Caridina and 1 Ortmannia edwardsi). The species which give rise to the forms unlike
themselves are quite variable, but the higher forms (to which the derived forms belong) on
the other hand, are remarkably stable. Authors think the results not due to hybridization
since they do not find individuals with intermediate generic characters and Bordage did
not get pairing between the different genera. Results are attributed to evolutional muta-
tions.— A. M. Banta.

867. Brotherton, W. E., Jr. The heredity of "Rogue" types in garden peas (Pisum
sativum). Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21 : 263-279. PI. 7-13. 1919.— Describes "rogue"
type in garden peas, which occurs in varieties with large, wide pods and relatively broad
leaves such as Gradus, Duke of Albany, Early Giant and Peter Pan. Rogues differ from type
plant of variety in which they arise chiefly in reduced foliage (vetch-like), narrower pods
often sickle-shaped or curvature increased, height in general greater, either due to increase
in internode number or in internode length; often later-flowering, change from sub-cunei-
form seed of type to dnun-shaped seeds; rogue seeds average smaller and in green state
bitter as compared with sweet type seed. Sterile rogues rarely occur. Usually rogues equal
or surpass in productiveness the type. Author mostly worked with rogues from Gradus vari-
ety. Per cent of rogues to type in rogue-producing Gradus families was 9.6 (actual figures 5
rogues: 51 type.) Out of 150 Gradus plants selected at random, only one had rogues among
progeny. Summarizes data of Bateson and Pellew and confirms their results. In addi-
tion, finds in seedling stage, rogue plants are more variable in regard to ratio of length to
breadth of stipules than are type plants. Hybrids (rogue X type) resemble rogue parent in
this respect. Some evidence that rogues crossed with typical plants of non-rogue-throwing
varieties in F2 and following generations show segregation of width of stipule. Rogues not
comparable to any existing variety of pea. Observations are similar to those of White as
regards rarity of cross-pollination in peas under field conditions. Cites statement of Starr
that percentage of crossed Gradus plants under ordinary field conditions during one season
was very high. — Orland E. White.

868. Burns, W. Some aspects of plant genetics. Agric. Jour. India 15 : 250-276. 1920. —
Author's Presidential Address to the Botany Section of the Seventh Indian Science Con-
gress, Nagpur, 1920. Importance of genetics in college or university curriculum is empha-
sized, and some pedagogical features of the subject are discussed.— Attention is called to
problems of bud variation, seedlessness in fruits, and inheritance of sex in plants, and to the
intimate relation of plant genetics to cytology and taxonomy. — Limitations in plant genetics
are pointed out, and the present lack of knowledge concerning causes of non-adaptive varia-
tions, and of mutations is discussed. — C. M. Woodworth.

869. Clawson, Benjamin Junior. Varieties of streptococci with special reference to
constancy. Jour. Infect. Diseases: 26: 93-116. 1920. — Author sought to discover relation-

No. 2, March, 1921] GENETICS 129

ship between classes of streptococci, and their source, habits, pathogenicity, or other char-
acteristics. More than 160 strains were isolated from various sources, pathogenic and non-
pathogenic. Cultural characteristics were ascertained from growth on different media,
chiefly blood agar, carbohydrates and salicin. Agglutination and complement fixation were
applied. — Author concludes that no relationship of source, habitat, or pathogenicity, of the
streptococci classes was established; a basis of classification is lacking.— Morphology and car-
bohydrate fermentation is variable; hemolysis is fairly constant; the hemolytic group is
heterogeneous; agglutination shows a high degree of uniformity.— Andrew /. Dawson.

870. Cleaver, S. M. Merino history and merino breeding. 15 X 23 cm., 48 p., SS fig.
S. M. Cleaver: Delaware, Ohio, 1918.— A popular account of the history of Merino sheep
breeding in America, with a discussion of the various types which have been developed and
the difficulties met in trying to combine all good qualities in one type. — Sewall Wright.

871. CoRRENS, C. Eine gegliickte Verschiebung des Geschlechtsverhaltnisses. Botan-
ische Versuche zur Frage nach der Entstehung des Geschlechts. [A successful modification
of the sex-ratio. Botanical researches on the origin of sex.] Natur u. Technik 2:65-71.
2 fig. 1920.— Review of sex determination in animals and plants and experiments on the
dioecious plant M eland rium (Lychnis) which show that the staminate plants are heterog-
amous and the pistillate homogamous. Results agree with those of Strasburger and
of Shull in showing excess of pistillate over staminate plants. Deficient amount of pollen
applied also resulted in excess of pistillate plants but when large excess of pollen (more than
100 grains per ovule) was applied, so that competition between male- and female-determining
gametes took place, there was even greater excess of pistillate plants: 44 to 56 per hundred
in the first case and 32 to 68 per hundred in the second. A moderate excess of pollen of 7
grains to 1 ovule gave an intermediate ratio of 40 to 60.— The faster growth of the female-
determining pollen tubes was also shown by comparing the seeds from the top half with those
from the bottom half of the same capsule. The seeds resulting from the shorter growth of
pollen tubes gave 68, and the seeds from the longer growth 56, per cent pistillate plants. In
this plant the pollen tubes enter the ovary at a common point and are all free to fertilize
the first ovules to be reached. This was tested by pollinating a white-flowered plant with a
small quantity of pollen from a red-flowered plant and 24 hours later with pollen from a
white-flowered plant: 71 per cent of the crossed, red-flowered plants came from seeds out of
the upper third of capsule as compared to 29 per cent from the lower two thirds. Conclusion:
Unequal production of heterogametes and unequal rate of growth of pollen tubes modifies
sex-ratio in Melandrium. — D. F. Jones.

872. Crandall, C. S. Observations on characters of forms of Malus. Proc. Amer. Soc.
Hortic. Sci. 16 (1919) : 131-135. 1920.— The writer bases his observations on 44 standard
horticultural varieties and 45 crab forms, and upon 495 parental combinations of them.
Most botanical characters of genus are variable. "Petals, 5:" Vary from 4 to 8. Seedlings of
variable parent had 10. "Carpels, 2 to 5:" Four out of 32 varieties had constantly 5 carpels;
two out of 28 crabs had constantly 5 carpels; in M. Mains fl. pi.— 81 per cent of fruits varied
from 5 to 9 carpels; in M. speciabilis 87 per cent had 5 to 12 carpels; in M. Arnoldiana 99 per
cent and in M. atrosanguinea 96 per cent had less than 5 and one of each had 2 carpels. Of
6000 fruits from 23 crab forms, 33.95 per cent varied from 5 carpels. "Ovules, 2 per carpel:"
Of 21 standard varieties, only 2 were constant, the variation averaging 8.23 per cent with a
maximum of 84.63 per cent. In crabs (25 varieties and species) 12 were constant. In 4 forms,
ovules were suppressed, from 1 to lb less than normal. In remainder there was an excess of
ovules from 1 in Yellow Siberian Crab to 300 in M. spectabilis. "Calyx lobes persistent or
deciduous:" This is a distinctive varietal and specific character. Most cultivated varieties
are persistent. Of 41 crab forms, 16 were deciduous, 13, persistent, and in 12, part on each
tree were deciduous and part persistent. The writer believes that the instability of this
character in most crab forms indicates their hybrid origin. — In Fi of large leaf X large leaf
and small leaf X small leaf (standard varieties), there is a predominance of large-leafed
forms, with some small and some intermediate. When large-fruited forms were crossed with

130 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

and on small-fruited forms, as M. floribunda, M. Sargentii, M. Toringo, M. atrosanguinea,
Fi seedlings resemble small-fruited parent in tree characters, though sometimes in an invig-
orated form. Some groups of Fi seedlings in no way resemble parents in vegetative char-
acters.— C. H. Connors.

873. Crow, J. W. Plant breeding from horticultural standpoints. Ontario Dept. Agric.
Ann. Rept. Agric. and Exp. Union 41 : 50-52. 1919. — Plant breeding work in the Department
of Horticulture of the Ontario Agricultural College is briefly outlined, and the need of further
work is emphasized. — A. N. Wilcox.

874. Crow, J. W. Vegetable seed growing and breeding. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 1918:
88-93. 1918. — The experience in growing and breeding vegetable seeds at the Ontario Agri-
cultural College, and methods used there in growing and curing celery, carrot, parsnip, beet,
and onion seeds are briefly outlined. — A. N. Wilcox.

875. Dalcq, Albert. Note sur la spermatogenese de I'Drvet. [Note on the spermato-
genesis of the orvet.] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83: 1302-1304. Oct., 1920.

876. Daniel, Lucien. Sur la stabilite et I'heredite des Crataegomespilus et des Pirocy-
donia. [On the stability and heredity of Crataegomespilus and of Pirocydonia.] Compt.
Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 169: 513-515. 1919. — Daniel has grown 6 forms of chimera, or sup-
posed chimera, none of which bore viable seeds. — (1) The two hawthorn-medlar chimeras of
Bronvaux have been grown for over twenty years, and showed no reversions for about fifteen
years. — (a) The form most like the medlar has borne twigs of hawthorn, of both chimeras, and
twigs resembling medlar. These last, regrafted, gave chimeras again. — (b) The forms most
like hawthorn has produced few twigs of hawthorn or of other forms. — (2) The two hawthorn-
medlar chimeras of Saujon have been grown for about ten years. — (a) The form nearest
the medlar produced some twigs resembling the medlar, but no twigs with spines. — (b) The
form nearest the hawthorn bore some twigs of hawthorn, which, however, still showed some
characteristics of the chimera. — (3) A pear-quince chimera has been grown for 7 years. It
arose from the callus of a graft, is intermediate in its leaves, and can be grafted on either
pear or quince. It has formed no flower-buds. — John Belling.

877. Daniel, Lucien. Obtention d'une race nouvelle d'Asphodele par Paction du climat
marin. [The appearance of a new variety of Asphodelus through the action of the marine
climate.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1332-1333. 1920.

878. Doncaster, L. Genetic studies in Drosophila. [Rev. of: Morgan, T. H., C. B.
Bridges, and A. H. Sturtevant. Contributions to the genetics of Drosophila melanogaster.

V + 388 p., 12 p. Carnegie Inst. Washington, Publ. No. 278. Washington, 1919.] Nature
105:405-406. 1920.

879. Doncaster, L. Mendelism. [Rev. of: Punnett, R. C. Mendelism. Sth ed.
IS X 19 cm., XV + 219 p., 7 pi., 52 jig. Macmillan and Co.: London, 1919.] Nature 104:
655-656. 1920. — "One of the best introductory treatises on the modern study of genetics.
We note with regret that the hypothesis of multiple allelomorphs is nowhere fully discussed."
[See Bot. Abst. 6, Entry 714.]— O. A. Stevens.

880. Duarte d'Oliveira, Jose. Sur la transmission de la fasciation et de la dichotomic
a la suite de la greffe de deux vignes portugaises. [The transmission of fasciation and dichoto-
mous branching through the grafting of two Portuguese varieties of grapes.] Compt. Rend.
Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 615-616. 1920. — Scions of a Portuguese variety of grapes, Albino de
Sauza, were grafted on stock of another variety, Goncalo Pires. The latter varietj'' is char-
acterized by dichotomous branching and the frequent production of fasciated branches. The
former never exhibits these peculiarities. The grafts were made in March. The following
June the author noted that the new growth from the scion showed the fasciations and dicho-
tomous branching characteristic of the variety used as the stock and has since continued to
exhibit these characteristics. — C. B. Hutchinson.

No. 2, March, 1921] GENETICS 131

881. East, E. M. Population. Scientific Monthly 1920: 603-604. June, 1920.— The
author discusses the question of population increase in relation to increase of food. He
shows that present figures as to the world's population and food and their rates of increase
are entirely in accord with the conclusion of Malthus. Discussing the increase by races, he
concludes that the white race is increasing much more rapidly than either the yellow or
black race. China is practically stationary as to population, India and the South Seas have
a slow increase, and Japan has a high rate. The blacks are increasing only in this country,
the number of negroes in Africa remaining practically stationary. On the other hand, all
the white races except in France are increasing at fairly high rates. Wars, even one as great
as the last, seem to have no appreciable effect on the upward march of population. — Turning
to the United States, he shows that the law of diminishing returns has begun to apply to
agriculture and he calls attention to the fact that future increase in agricultural production
is definitely limited. To prevent the population of this country from crowding too closely
on the means of subsistence he offers the following remedies : First, a restriction of immigra-
tion; second, education; third, equitable readjustment in many of our economic customs;
and, last, natural marriage selection — a somewhat increased birth rate in families of high
civic value, and among the rank and file a restriction of birth commensurate with family
resources. — Lowell J. Reed.

882. Engledow, F. L. Inheritance in barley. I. The lateral florets and the rachilla.
Jour. Genetics 10: 93-108. 3 fig. Aug., 1920.— Data are offered showing Mendelian segrega-
tion in F2 generations of crosses between smooth and bristly rachillae. A one-factor difference
is found. The problem of the inheritance of lateral florets is discussed and data bearing on its
solution presented. Several forms of lateral floret differing either in fertility or shape and
size of glume afford to this author instances of multiple allelomorphism. Histological study
of the developing lateral florets at different stages is needed to correlate Mendelian char-
acters with histological structures. — F. P. Bussell.

883. Faber, Harold. Foreword by Sir Robert Greig. Forage crops in Denmark.
ix + 100 p. Longmans, Green & Co. : London, 1920.— See Bot. Abstracts 7, Entry 22.

884. Garber, R. J., and P. J. Olson. A study of the relation of some morphological char-
acters to lodging in cereals. Jour. Amer. Soc. Agron. 11: 173-186. 1 pi, 2 fig. May, 1919.—
Authors mention the perplexing problem of producing non-lodging small grains possessing
high yielding capacity. In 1916 a project was organized to determine whether some simple
morphological character is closely related to lodging or non-lodging. Extreme varieties for
lodging in wheat, oats and barley were selected and study made of correlation between lodg-
ing behavior and average size of culm, average size of vascular bundles, average area of
sclerenchyma, thickness of culm wall, length of lignified cells, and thickness of lignified cell
wall. None of these characters except thickness of cell wall seems closely related to lodging.
Lodging in cereals is dependent on so many factors of unequal value that no one factor seems
correlated closely enough with lodging to be of much value as selection index. In oats and
barley the average number of vascular bundles was found to be correlated with average diame-
ter of culm. — Geo. K. York.

885. Gates, R. Ruggles. Heredity and eugenics. Eugenics Rev. 11: 193-201; 12: 1-13.
1920.— Summarizes with comments and some discussion recent research as bearing on human
heredity under the main subjects of physical characters, mental characters, the limits of
heredity and the eugenical, social and world aspects, with a bibliography of fifty numbers.—
H. J. Banker.

886. Georgesoix, C. C. Summary of the work at the several stations. Rept. Alaska
Agric. Exp. Sta. 1917: 5-33. PI. 1-2. 1919.— The author describes some new varieties pro-
duced by crossing; and presents the results of variety and cultural tests of horticultural and
farm crops; and also briefly discusses the value of various ornamental crops for Alaskan
conditions. — H. K. Hayes.

132 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

887. Gersdorff, C. E. F. Germination of gladiolus seed. Flower Grower 7: 73. 1920.
-A table shows the time required for germination, the percentage of germination and the

percentage of conns harvested, based on 3261 seeds of various varieties and hybrids. Seeds
were previously selected for plumpness. Sixty per cent of the total number of seeds germi-
nated and thirty per cent yielded conns which were harvested. The time required for germi-
nation varied from sixteen to eighty-five days. Most of the seeds "should have germinated
in thirty-one days." — The method of raising young corms from the seed is described. — A. N.
Wilcox.

888. GowEN, John W. Self-sterility and cross-sterility in the apple. Maine Agric. Exp.
Sta. Bull. 287. 61-88 p. May, 1920. — Many varieties of apples are commonly self-sterile.
Results are the same whether stigmas are pollinated from the same flower, a flower from
another cluster or from another tree of the same variety. Of 12 varieties, tested, 8 were
wholly self-sterile; four — Baldwin, Wealthy, Duchess and Northern Spy — were, in slight
degree, self-fertile, Duchess and Northern Spy being doubtfully so. Only 42 of a compiled
list of 119 varieties that had been tested are known to have set self-fertilized fruits, and only
15 of these produced fruit in quantity. Varieties do not give the same results in all regions;
those self-sterile in one state may be, in some degree, self-fertile in another. In a test of
cross-fertility 43 combinations were tried; 20 of these proved compatible and formed fruit.
The most successful combinations were Grimes Golden X Ben Davis, Baldwin X Golden
Russet and Ben Davis X Mcintosh. Of a list of 243 combinations of varieties, made up of
tests in several states, 57 are recorded as not producing fruit and 186 as producing fruit.
Cross compatibility of varieties can be determined only by trial. Yields of orchards of self-
sterile varieties may be increased by introduction of other varieties. The number of good
seeds in crossed apples is greater than in those which are selfed. — Causes of self-sterility are
external and internal. The chief internal cause is the slowness of growth of the pollen tube
in the selfed style as against that in the crossed style. Other internal causes are degenerate
pollen and lack of proper development of ovule. — C. S. Crandall.

889. GuTER, M. F., AND E. A. Smith. Studies on cytolysins. II. Transmission of
induced eye defects. Jour. Exp. Zool. 31: 171-223. 4 V^-, '^ fid- Aug. 30, 1920.— Preparation
of lens from eyes of rabbits, injected into peritoneal cavity of fowls, leads to formation of spe-
cific anti-body. Blood serum from fowls thus treated was injected into veins of pregnant
rabbits. In a small proportion of cases, young were born with defective lenses and other eye
defects. From young of one such brood five further generations with defective eyes have been
propagated. Defects tend to increase rather than decrease in later generations. Defects are
transmitted through males as well as females. They behave in some respects as a Mendelian
recessive character. Although these six defective generations have all arisen from a single
original treated female, full safeguards have been taken against possibility of having bred
from a strain which chanced to carry eye defects of this sort, prior to any operative treatment.
Also defective young born of an operated mother quite unrelated to the first stock are now
being reared for test of heritability of the modifications in independent strain. One case is
recorded in which normal appearing offspring of a treated mother gave rise to defective young.
This is not in harmon}' with interpretation of transmission of induced defect as due to direct
influence of defective organ upon germ-cells; i.e., inheritance of an acquired character, sensu
stricio. On the other hand, parallel induction theory is not in keeping with fact that germ-
cells of originally-treated mother were in no case affected, but that only those of her off-
spring which were in utero at time of treatment were affected. Authors are not prepared
to adopt definite theoretical interpretation. — F. B. Sumner.

890. Hammond, J. On the relative growth and development of various breeds and crosses
of cattle. Jour. Agric. Sci. 10: 233-289. July, 1920.— Data from the Smithfield Club of fat
stock exhibits at Islington 1893-1913 were studied to determine the average weights attained
by different breeds, dressed weight of carcase, suet fat, gut fat, tongue, head, heart, tripe, hide,
blood, intestine and unaccounted for. Similar data are presented for sex, age, and Fi crosses
between breeds. Individual variation is noted. Correlation between weight of one part

No. 2, Makch, 1921]

GENETICS 133

and that of another is indicated. Effect of selection over periods 1893-1899, 1900-1906, 1907-
1913 and effect of season are discussed.— Steers are shown to weigh about 10 per cent more than
heifers at the same age. About 77 per cent of steers' and 81 per cent of heifers' weight at 33
months old, is put on in the first 22 months. Steers have larger proportion of gut fat, head,
hide, carcase; heifers a larger proportion of suet fat, tongue, tripe, intestine. Increasing age
increases proportion of carcase, suet fat, gut fat; decreases proportion of tongue, head, heart,
tripe, hide.— Cross-breeding showed no increase in weight over the heavier parent, where two
heavy breeds are crossed, the Fi is usually heavier than the mean of the two parents; where
a heavy and light breed is crossed the Fi is not so heavy as the mean of the parents either
way the cross is made. Crossing tends to obliterate sexual differences. The general effect
of cross-breeding is not, as has often been stated, to increase the rate of maturity in weight.
Crosses give a slightly larger proportion of carcase, gut fat, tongue and heart than the pure
breeds. The pure-breds are heavier in hide, head and blood.— The coefficient of variation of
live weight ranged between 7.29 and 11.98. This coefficient decreased between 1893 and
1913. The coefficients of variation for steers 33 months old were, carcase 4.0; suet fat 20.4;
gut fat 24.7; tongue 10.4; head 6.3; heart 12.5; tripe 15.8; hide 10.1; blood 17.2; intestine 21.8;
unaccounted for 23.5. — John W. Gowen.

891. Hansen, W. Die Pflanzenziichterische Buchfuhrung und Bewertung der Zucht-
pflanzen. [Plant-breeding book-keeping and evaluation of the parent plants.] Zeitschr.
Pflanzenzucht. 6: 119-138. 2 fig. Dec, 1918.— The methods followed at the plant-breeding
station of Eckendorf near Bielefeld, Germany, in the collection and recording of field data on
breeding-plats with field crops are described in this article. The several observations may be
grouped as follows: (a) pedigree work; (b) observations on growing plants, harvest data, and
plans of selection plats; (c) notes taken during selection work; (d) behavior of the characters
in the various strains and families; and (e) guide to working methods, diary of work per-
formed, meteorological data, and germination tests.— Numerous specimen observation and
breeding forms specially arranged for recording various data on the cereal grasses, legumes,
and fibers, are included. — H. M. Steece.

892. H(arland), S. C. The new theory of the origin of Sea Island cotton. Agric. News
(Barbados) 19: 100-101. 1920.— "Facts suggest that Sea Island cotton originated from a nat-
ural cross between a glabrous, broad-leaved West Indian native, with botanical affinities to
G. brasiliense, and some variety of American Upland." Author crossed a West Indian native
cotton of this type with an American Upland and obtained an Fi which was morphologically
almost indistinguishable from Sea Island and had fine silky lint more than 40 mm. long. Sev-
eral Fa plants also resembled Sea Island. "Actual reconstruction of Sea Island cotton by
this means has not been accomplished" but West Indian native type comprises many dif-
ferent strains. "Synthesis of Sea Island cotton could probably only be effected as a result of
the segregation of some rare gametic combination." — T. H. Kearney.

893. Harrison, J. W. Heslop. A preliminary study of the effects of administering ethyl
alcohol to the lepidopterous insect Selenia bilunaria, with particular reference to the offspring.
Jour. Genetics 9: 39-52. Dec, 1919.— High mortality resulted from raising this insect, from
egg to adult, in alcohol fumes. The one male and four females that survived this treatment
were crossed with controls. Offspring from these crosses (100 eggs used) were "greatly
superior in several respects" to the controls; namely, in regard to viability of the eggs and
larvae, rate of development, pupal weight, and vigor (shown by pigmentation). In spite of
the small numbers, the author feels certain that these results are real, more especially since
Pearl's work with fowls seems to offer support. Pearl's hypothesis of the selective effect
of the alcohol treatment is explained at length.— £^. C. MacDowell.

894. Harrison, J. W. Heslop. The inheritance of melanism in the genus Tephrosia
fEctropis) with some consideration of the inconstancy of unit characters under crossing.
Jour. Genetics 10: 61-86. S fig. July, 1920.— In crosses within limits of species T. crepuscu-
laria, inheritance of melanism proceeds on ordinary Mendelian lines. On the contrary, in

134 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

interspecific crosses between T. crepuscularia and T. bistortata a nondescript series of inter-
grades results in F2 in respect to this same character. Thus, what behaves as a single unit
character in one cross shows itself highly inconstant in another, owing, author believes, to
"contamination of the gametes." This difference is intunately connected with inability of
chromosomes in wider crosses to play their normal parts, owing to "incompatibility." If
genetic factors may thus be modified by hybridization, possibility of their modification by
other agents seems not excluded. — F. B. Sumner.

895. Hartman, Carl G. The free-martin and its reciprocal: Opossum, man, dog. Sci-
ence 52: 46&-471. Nov. 12, 1920.— The author describes very briefly an intersexual opossum:
"externally, normal penis, empty scrotum, small malformed pouch, head rather like that
of a female; internally, reproductive organs distinctly of the female type, infantile in devel-
opment, consisting of vaginal canals, uteri. Fallopian tubes, and small round bodies in the
situation of the ovaries." These bodies consisted of a thin albuginea, and a mass of tubules
of uniform size consisting apparently of Sertoli cells only.— The history of the specimen was
not known. The author, arguing from analogy, interprets it as a "reciprocal free-martin";
i.e., a sex-intergrade zygotically male, which in its ontogeny develops female characters.
He points out the opportunity that exists in the crowded pregnant uterus of the opossum
for anastomosis of foetal circulations, which might account for such a condition if the female
of a fused pair developed sex hormones in advance of the male. Fusion of placentae has
been observed in dog embryos by Evans; and Eschricht describes a case of fused placentae
in a case of two-sexed human twins in which the male was similar to the opossum described
above, and the female was normal. The principles involved are considered to throw much
light on the entire subject of hermaphroditism in mammals. — Frank R. Lillie.

896. Hendrickson, H. C. . The selection of seed corn in Porto Rico. Porto Rico Agric.
Exp. Sta. Circ. 18. 22 p., 7 fig. Sept. 2, 1920.— Intended as a practical guide to farmers.
Contains no new methods. [See also Bot. Absts 7, Entry 614.]— .E. E. Barker.

897. Henry, A. Sports and varieties of trees : A new sport of the lime tree. Gard. Chron.
68: 180. Oct. 9, 1920.— A large secondary branch of Tilia vulgaris bore leaves which were
white with rare patches of green. The white leaves yielded to alcohol less than one-twen-
tieth of the chlorophyll found in normal leaves. — John Belling.

898. Herlant, Maurice. L'acide carbonique comme agent de parthenogenese experi-
mentale chez I'^oursin (Paracentrotus). [Carbonic acid as an agent of experimental partheno-
genesis in the sea-urchin (Paracentrotus).] Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 83: 188-190. 1920.—
Delage found eggs of sea-urchin, unlike those of starfish, were not activated by exposure for
an hour to sea water saturated with carbon dioxide. Author obtains development in sea-
urchin egg by exposing it to carbon dioxide one and one-half to two minutes, returning to sea
water for 20 to 30 minutes, then putting into hypertonic solution equal time. He conceives
first treatment to activate egg as whole, second to produce asters by which division is
effected. — A. Franklin Shull.

899. Hovasse, R. Le nombre des chromosomes chez les tetards parthenogenetiques de
grenouille. [The number of chromosomes in parthenogenetic tadpoles of the frog.] Compt.
Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 1211-1216. May, 1920.

900. Hume, A. N., M. Champlin, and M. Fowlds. The influence of length of wheat
heads on resulting crops. South Dakota Agric. Sta. Bull. 187: 139-158. 1919.— Twelve hun-
dred plants of Bluestem wheat were grown under nearly identical conditions. From these,
two hundred and sixty were selected, having as nearly as possible the same number of stools
—the reason for this selection being that stooling differences should be eliminated as a factor,
if possible. The length of the central head of each plant was measured. From each of those
heads twenty seeds were selected at random and were planted at uniform spaces in individual
head-rows. The yield of grain from each row was recorded and correlated with the length

No. 2, March, 1921] GENETICS 135

of the mother head. A slight positive correlation (r = 0.17 ± 0.04) was found. — Seed was
preserved from these head-rows and was planted in similar rows the following year, and a
correlation coefficient determined for yields of rows and length of the original mother heads.
There was found to be no correlation in the second, third, fourth or fifth generations after
the selection of the original mother heads. — These results show that the length of the cen-
tral spike cannot be considered as an indicator of the relative yielding-ability of mother
plants. — A. N. Wilcox.

901. Ibsen, Heman L. Tricolor inheritance. IV. The triple allelomorphic series in
guinea-pigs. Genetics 4: 597-606. Nov., 1919. — Presentation of data on 19 of the 21 possible
matings corroborating theory of triple allelomorphism of complete (E), partial (e*^), and no
(e) extension of black or chocolate pigment. Also data are given on litter size and sex ratio
for the various matings. Departures from the expected ratios are found and explanations
are suggested. — P. W. Whiting.

902. Jordan, Edwin O. The differentiation of the paratyphoid enteritidis group. Jour.
Infectious Diseases 26: 427-434. May, 1920. — Article is based on the results of 6 years' obser-
vation. A culture, isolated from human blood, supposedly paratyphoid-B type, at first
gave typical cultural reactions (especially on sugars) and agglutination. Twelve colonies
regrown from the plating of the original culture displayed varying characteristics in the fer-
mentation of carbohydrates, end products, agglutination, and absorption of heterologous
immune serum; this is shown in several tables. Author concludes that substrains differing
from the parent strain are not only possible, but most frequent; this is proven both in vivo
et in vitro. — The limits of variability were not determined. — Andrew I. Dawson.

903. Kalt, B. Der Begriff "Originalsaatgut" und seine Anwendung bei der Ziichtungs-
anerkennung. [The concept "Original seed" and its application in the recognition of breeding.)
Fiihlings Landwirtsch. Zeit. 1919: 460-471. 1919. — Much confusion is found concerning
conceptions of "Original seed." That seed which is first offered for sale as the product of a
well-planned system of breeding, and which is produced by the breeder or under his super-
vision is called "Original seed." Author emphasizes the need of organizations adopting
uniform rules and regulations for the inspection and certification of such seed. [See
also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 619.]— C. M. Woodworth.

904. Kniep, H. [German rev. of: Burger, Owen F. Sexuality in Cunninghamella.
Bot. Gaz. 68: 134-146. Aug., 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2097.)] Zeitschr. Bot. 12:
518-520. 1920.

905. Law, S. C. An albino bulbul. Avic. Mag. 11:111-112. July, 1920.— An albino
specimen of the black Indian bulbul was found in a nest with another youngster of the usual
color. According to the description and colored plate the albino was pure white and pink-
eyed. — Sai-ah VH. Jones.

906. Lecaillon, A. Sur la reproduction et le developpement des bivoltins accidentels et
de la premiere generation qui en derive, chez le Bombyx du Miirier. [On the production and
development of accidental bivoltins and the first generation derived from them in the silkworm
(Bombyx mori).] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 168: 366-368. 1919.— The author has shown
previously (Compt. Rend. 165: 603 et 683, 1917), that accidental bivoltin eggs appearing in
races of univoltins undergo a change of color from yellow to white, the embryos developing
within ten days in place of ten months. — To study the history of accidental bivoltins further,
the author selected five pairs of accidental bivoltin moths. These oviposited in the
summer of 1917, the eggs hatching in the spring of 1918, simultaneously with eggs of uni-
voltin parents oviposited two months earlier. — In the next generation, descendants differed
with different females. — In one case, bivoltins were produced, in a second case, although eggs
became white as with bivoltins, some eggs only hatched, eggs that failed to hatch becoming
rose-color (arrested development). In a third case some eggs were univoltin and some

136 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

bivoltin, the latter hatching at once. Females of the fourth and fifth pair produced uni-
voltins only. All bivoltin moths of 1918 produced yellow eggs which hatched in the spring
of 1919. — Thus while in the typical univoltin race only one kind of egg exists, in the acci-
dental bivoltins there are two kinds, summer eggs and winter eggs, the latter hibernating. —
Accidental bivoltins, therefore, do not transmit wholly and immediately to all their descend-
ants the aptitude to produce alternatingly summer and winter eggs, but to a certain num-
ber only. J'he new character appearing in bivoltins is not, therefore, represented by a
mutation in the de Vriesian sense. — Isabel McCracken.

907. Lehmann, Ernst. Neuere Oenotherenarbeiten. (Sammelreferat II). [New work
with Oenothera. (Composite review).] Zeitschr. Bot. 12:61-85. U fig- 1920.— Paper is
second of a series of composite reviews of the latest Oenothera literature, the first having
appeared in 1917 (loc. cit., 10:517), and presents in an extended discussion amplified by
original diagrams the work of Atkinson, Bartlett, Davis, Kranichfeld, Lotsy, Renner,
and DE Vries (1915-1920) in so far as the investigations of these authors throw new light
upon the two chief questions:— (1) Is Oe. Lamarckiana a hybrid or a pure species? (2) How
do mutations appear and thus build up new species in the genus Oenothera? — The following
classification of recent investigations is also included: (1) de Vries, evidence obtained from
crossing, (a) The establishment of the hypothesis of heterogamy; (b) Twin hybrids. (2)
Honing, anatomical evidence upon the hybrid nature of Oe. Lamarckiana. (3) Heribert-
NiLSSON, the red-nerve factor and the impossibility of its existence in a homozygous con-
dition. (4) Bartlett, mass-mutation in Oe pratincola. (5) Renner, sterile seed and selec-
tive pollen-tube growth. (6) Lutz. Gates, Stomps et al., chromosome counts in gigas and
lata forms. — Paul A. Warren.

908. Linhart, G. a. A new and simplified method for the statistical interpretation of
biometrical data. Univ. California Publ. Agric. Sci. 4: 159-181. 12 fig. 1920.— Graphic
method of fitting Gaussian and Galton-McAlister frequency curves. Use of latter urged
when deviations are large in comparison with mean. — Raymond Pearl.

909. LiPPiNCOTT, Wm. a. Improving mongrel farm flocks through selected standard-
bred cockerels. Kansas Agric. Sta. Bull. 223. 48 p., 30 fig. Jan., 1920.— Four pens, ten
each, of mongrel females were mated respectively with a standard-bred White Orpington
male, a standard-bred Barred Plymouth Rock male, a standard-bred South Carolina White
Leghorn male, and an unselected mongrel male. Standard-bred males in most cases had
high-laying pedigree. In second year, offspring from these matings were again bred in same
numbers to other males of same varieties. This was repeated with second generation.
Decided improvement in laying qualities was obtained through the Plymouth Rock and
White Leghorn males. Through the mongrel males nearly as good results were obtained.
The White Orpington males produced no improvement. Latter is explained through lack of
pedigree in standard-bred males. In all cases fair uniformity in type and color was obtained
by the third generation through the standard-bred males. Laying records are given for
those offspring only that were selected for mating. — H. G. May.

910. Little, C. C. Note on the occurrence of a probable sex-linked lethal factor in mam-
mals. Amer. Nat. 54:457-460. Sept.-Oct., 1920.— The sex ratio of a highly inbred strain
of Japanese waltzing mice, all descendants of one pair of individuals, was 53.2 ± 5.7, while
that for inbred non-waltzing mice was 103.1 ± 2.8, a difference in the ratios of 7.9 times the
probable error. Further expected results were obtained in the number of males resulting
from reciprocal crosses of waltzing by non-waltzing stock. Data obtained from back-crosses
of the lethal-carrying females on Fi's of normal by waltzing and the litter size of a pure strain
of waltzing mice, were also in keeping with the assumed recessive sex-linked lethal. Pre-
liminary report. — Sarah VH. Jones.

911. Little, C. C. Factors influencing the growth of a transplantable tumor in mice.
Jour. Exp. Zool. 31: 307-326. Oct. 5, 1920.— The tumor used in the experiments was found
as a spontaneous growth in a strain of Japanese waltzing mice by Tyz?er. It had been

No. 2, March, 19211 GENETICS 137

propagated by continued inoculation for 40 implant-generations, during seven years.—
675 mice were used, of two kinds, common domestic mice of European strains, and animals
which had one European parent and one Fi, European X Japanese, parent. It had been
found previously that the susceptibility to the transplanted tumor of the Japanese parent
was completely dominant in the Fi. Genetic analysis of the genes responsible for this dif-
ference in susceptibility will be published later. Author states presence of several factors
necessary to produce susceptibility. Among animals of the Fi X European class there is
therefore great genotypic diversity. In this paper the whole Fi X European class is treated
statistically and its susceptibility compared to the pure European class. In this latter class
11.12 per cent of the observations made showed positive tumor-growth, in the Fi X European
class, 17.54 per cent of the observations were positive. In this class there was found a dis-
tinct difference in tolerance for tumor-growth between younger and older mice of female
sex. Certain factors of the Japanese genotype must in some cases, even when separated,
exert a favorable influence upon temporary growth of tumor. The Japanese strain, which
was found to possess twelve to fourteen independent genes absent from European mice and
favoring growth of a different tumor if present in combination was found to be remarkably
pure. (The Japanese waltzer is a variety of the common Oriental domestic mouse, which is
zoologically quite different from MurS mtisculus and is probably derived from Mus wagneri
Ret.) — A. L. Hagedoorn.

912. Llotd-Jones, O., and J. M. Evvard. Studies on color in swine. I. The heredi-
tary relationship of the black of the Hampshire and the red of the Duroc-Jersey. Iowa Agric.
Sta. Res. Bull. 53: 203-208. 1919.— Authors point out that while the white of Yorkshires or
Chester-Whites is completely dominant to the black of Berkshires or Poland-Chinas, a blue
roan generally with a white belt results when a Hampshire (black with white belt) is crossed
with a Chester-White. They also point out that while the Berkshires or Poland-Chin as crossed
with red breeds (Duroc-Jerseys or Tamworths) give red animals with black patches, black
animals sometimes having white belts are produced when Hampshires are crossed with
Duroc-Jerseys. Evidence is also given to prove that in the last-mentioned cross black is a
simple dominant. — H. L. Ibsen.

913. MacCubdt, H. M. Division, nuclear reorganization and conjugation in Arcella vul-
garis. Michigan Acad. Sci. Ann. Rept. 21:111-113. 1919.— The number of daughter cells
produced by a single individual is limited, and varies from none to twenty-seven. The mem-
bers of a pair of ex-conjugants tend to produce the same number of daughter cells at about
the same rate. In lines derived from a single individual, "depression" periods and conjuga-
tion occur at intervals of from four to six weeks; while some members of a line are depressed,
others undergo conjugation. Individuals may pass successfully through a period of depres-
sion and enter upon a new period of division. Preparations of cells made during the time of
depression show the vegetative nuclei inactive or breaking up, and "secondary" nuclei form-
ing from part of the chromidial net. Preparations of conjugating individuals show remark-
ably similar conditions. In many cases, the secondary nuclei have been observed to enter
daughter cells, while the old vegetative nuclei remain in the old shell. If the nuclei consti-
tute the germ-plasm, its continuity is interrupted at the time the old vegetative nuclei cease
to divide and begin to disintegrate, and the secondary nuclei are organized from the chromidial
net and pass into the daughter cells. If chromidiogamy occurs at the time of conjugation,
as is maintained, nuclear continuity is still interrupted, and is only secured in the process of
construction of new nuclei out of the chromidial net. There is thus a discontinuity of nuclei
with a nuclear cycle of development. If the nuclei are successively similar at corresponding
stages, the lines run true; if not, variations due to their dissimilarities are produced.-
Bertram G. Smith.

914. Macoun, W. T., and M. B. Davis. Progress in apple breeding for the Canadian
prairies. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 1919: 13-18. 1919.— The Canadian prairies are situ-
ated between 49° and 53° north latitude and between 97° and 114° west longitude. Altitudes
range from 700 feet to 4200 feet. Spring is early; buds swell in April. Summers are rela-

138 GENETICS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

tively warm. Winter begins the last of October and winter temperatures are sometimes
— 40° to — 50° or lower. The most trying times for trees are ( 1 ) Spring ; severe frosts after buds
swell are frequent and kill all growth. (2) Late autumn or early winter when trees are badly
frozen while foliage is still on. (3) Winter. Long-continued spells of severe cold. All these
factors require closer investigation. It has been found difficult and practically impossible
over most of the area to bring commercial varieties of apples to bearing age. — For the past
30 years many varieties have been tested at Experiment Stations and by individuals in Mani-
toba, Saskatchewan and Alberta, but few trees have borne and, when they have, they have not
lived long afterwards. Seedlings of Pyrus baccata from seeds obtained in Russia were dis-
tributed to Brandon, Manitoba, and Indian Head, Saskatchewan, in 1890. These proved
hardy and fruited well in 1894. Crossing in the hope of increasing size and quality while still
retaining hardiness was begun in 1894. With Pyrus baccata and Pyrus prunifolia as pistillate
parents and 21 varieties as pollen parents, 800 seedlings were grown from the crosses. These
were distributed in 1902 to various places at altitudes from 740 to 4200 feet. At the lower
elevations in southern Manitoba most of the trees proved hardy and, had the fruit been larger,
would have been satisfactory; but at higher altitudes only two of the 17 best proved hardy in
exposed places. These two are named Columbia and Osman. Columbia is from the cross
Pyrus baccata X Broad Green, a summer Russian variety. Osman is from the cross Pyrus
baccata X Osimoe, which is also a Russian variety ripening in August. In 1904 Dr. Saunders
recrossed the best of the first generation crosses, using 18 varieties of apples, still with the hope
of increasing size and quality and retaining hardiness. There were 407 trees obtained from
these second crosses the first of which fruited in 1910. Most of the trees were grown at Ottawa
and fruits have been described from 223 of them. The fruit of 171 or 76.68 per cent was under
two inches in diameter, or little or no larger than fruit from Fi crosses. The fruit of 48 or
21.52 per cent was between 2 and 21 inches and three bore fruits between 2J and 2^ inches.
One bore fruit 2.62 inches in diameter. Fruits of most second generation crosses have long
slender stems, thin tender skin and the crisp breaking flesh characteristic of crabs. From
the very few Fi generation which proved hardy under the most trying conditions, it is
doubtful if any second generation seedlings will prove hardy in the high altitudes, but
several have fruited at Morden, Manitoba, and it is hoped that some of them will extend
the area over which apples may be grown. — Details are given of some of the second gener-
ation crosses and it is shown that Pioneer (Pyrus baccata X Tetofsky) X Mcintosh gives
a higher percentage of comparatively large apples and higher percentages of fruit of good
quality and high color than when Ontario, Northern Spy, or Cranberry Pippin are used
as pollen parents. — Results lead to the conclusion that in breeding for quality it is necessary
to choose as one of the parents a variety possessing the desired character developed to the
highest possible perfection. From experience to date, production of varieties hardy enough
to survive the test of the Canadian prairies, by methods thus far used is regarded as doubtful.
It is proposed in future work to use Pyrus baccata as the male rather than as the female
parent as it is believed a large percentage of the Fi crosses will be apples of marketable size and
at least a few of them may prove hardy. — C. S. Crandall.

915. Marshall, F. R. Some experiences in breeding range sheep. National Wool
Grower 8: 35-37. Jan., 1918.— A description of some of the work of the Bureau of Animal
Industry at Laramie, Wyoming. Comparison is made of the lambing and shearing records
of Rambouillet, Lincoln-Merino crossbreds and Corriedales under range conditions. The
records indicate that very fine wool is usually associated with shorter staple and lighter
fleece. — G. F. Finlay.

916. McEwEN, Geo. F., and Ellis, L. Michael. The functional relation of one variable
to each of a number of correlated variables determined by a method of successive approxima-
tion to group averages: A contribution to statistical methods. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts Sci.
55:95-133. Dec, 1919.— The authors attempt to develop a method of multiple regression
independent of any assumption as to form of regression lines. Material is grouped with
respect to each independent variable, and simultaneous equations formed expressing group

No. 2, March, 1921] GENETICS 139

averages of dependent variables when all but one independent variable are held constant.
These equations may be solved directly, but authors prefer method of successive approxima-
tion. Corrections are also obtained for variability within the group. — John Rice Miner.

917. Meunissier, A. Observations faites a Verrieres par Philippe de Vilmorin, sur le
caractere "Hile noir" chez le pois. [Observations made at Verrieres by Philippe de Vilmorin
on the character "black-eye" in the pea.] Jour. Genetics 10: 53-60. July, 1920. — Most peas
have seeds with uncolored hilums or "eyes." Several varieties of black-eyed peas are de-
scribed. Black-eye X "white-eye" gives black-eye in Fi and 3 black-eye: 1 white-eye in F2
(TscHERMAK and Vilmorin). Exceptional results sometimes obtained, such as some black-
eyed progeny from crosses between two white-eyed varieties. Occurrence of plants from
such crosses with both black-eyed and white-eyed seeds in same pod or on same plant. Acci-
dental crossing responsible for some cases, but not when both kinds are on same plant. A
cross between uncolored seed-coats X garnet (reddish brown) seed-coats, produced in about
the Fs generation a few seeds with purple seed-coats (fluctuating unfixable character). Three
years later this purple-seed-coat race produced black- and "white-eyed" peas on the same
plants. Association of purple and "garnet" in same seed-coat gives appearance of black.
Purple seed-coat color and black eye tend to be genetically associated in some peculiar man-
ner. Tables showing observations given. Totals show 615 black-eyed seeds gave 407 progeny
with violet seeds to 208 plants with non-violet seeds; 562 white-eyed seeds produced by the
same plants from which the 615 black-eyed seeds came, gave 58 progeny with violet seeds to
504 with non-violet seeds. — Orland E. White.

918. Meunissier, A. De quelques idees sur la selection des legumes. [Some ideas on
the selection of vegetables.] Rev. Hort. 91:300-303. June, 1919.— Popular discussion of
pure lines, genotypes, phenotypes, and modern ideas of selection in relation to horticulture.—
Orland E. White.

919. Morgan, T. H. Castration of hen-feathered Campines. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med.
17: 70. 1920.— The results were the same as with hen-feathered Seabrights; namely, the
development of male plumage following the operation. — H. D. Goodale.

920. Morgan, T. H. The endocrine secretion of hen-feathered fowls. Endocrinology
4: 381-385. 5 fig. July-Sept., 1920.— A restatement of the author's findings that in Sea-
brights, and Campines, the hen-feathered condition depends upon the presence of luteal cells
both in the ovary and testes. — H. D. Goodale. •

921. Morgan, T. H. Whitman's work on the evolution of the group of pigeons. [Rev. of:
Whitman, Charles Otis, 1919. Posthtmious works of, edited by Oscar Riddle. Carnegie
Inst. Publ. No. 257. 3 vol.] Science 51: 73-80. Jan. 23, 1920.— Reviewer finds no real con-
tradictions between the results of Whitman, or even his interpretations, and the idea of discon-
tinuity or mutation. Unit characters, when their development and manifestations are inter-
preted from the standpoint of chemistry, need not be so absurd as Whitman conceived them
to be. Since any or all steps in ontogeny may be modified by a single factor. Whitman
seems to have put undue emphasis upon ontogenetic development in his interpretation of
phylogenetic relationships. — H. G. May.

922. Nevens, W. B. Breed and size of cows as factors affecting the economy of milk
production. Jour. Dairy Sci. 2:99-107. 3 fig. 1919.— A ratio, based on the geometrical
theorem that the surface of two solids of similar shape are to each other as the squares of
the cubes of their weights, is worked out to show the relation between the maintenance require-
ments of animals of different weights. Thus the maintenance requirements of a cow of known
weight being available, the maintenance requirements of cows of any known weight may be
calculated.— A study of the records, weights and feed consumption of the cows used in the
Wisconsin cow competition indicates that the larger cows of the Holstein, Guernsey and
Jersey breeds consumed less feed in proportion to size than did the smaller cows. Also the

140 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

larger cows were more economical producers than the smaller cows. The Holsteins of the
heaviest class produced 29.2 pounds more milk for each 100 feed-units than did the Holsteins
of the lightest class, while the largest Guernseys produced 20.5 pounds more milk than the
lightest class, and the heaviest-class Jerseys produced 21 pounds more milk per 100 feed-
units consumed than the lightest class. The larger animals are also shown to be more eco-
nomical producers of total solids and butter-fat than the smaller animals. — The Holsteins
in this contest were the most efficient producers of milk and total solids, while the Guernseys
and Jerseys were the most efficient producers of butter-fat. — R. R. Graves.

923. Onslow, H. Inheritance of wing colour in Lepidoptera IV. Melanism in Boarnia
abietaria. Jour. Genetics 10: 135-140. / pi. Aug., 1920. — Inheritance of melanism was
previously described by author in related species, — Tephrosia consonaria and Bosnaria con-
sortaria. These three species are confined to Kent and Surrey (with another melanic variety
Tephrosia extensaria (luridata)). [Onslow, Jour, of Genetics, 9: 53, 339. Dec. 1919, Mar.
1920.] In melanic form has wings of female uniform velvety black, of male, slightly browner,
distal streak and veins traced in deeper black, otherwise unmarked. Type strain varies in
color and markings from very dark to golden brown. Females slightly darker than males. —
Character of matings made: Melanic X melanic, where one parent at least was homozygous
(DD X DD (DR) ; melanic X melanic where both parents were heterozygotes (DR X DR) ;
melanic X type where melanic parent was homozygous (DD X RR); melanic X type
where melanic parent was heterozygous (DR X RR). In each of these crosses the melanic
parent behaves as a simple Mendelian dominant to type forms. In a certain brood from
melanic X type, the male parent being comparatively very light, light offspring and melanics
appeared in equal numbers as expected, the light offspring appearing lighter than in other
strains but not so light as male parent. — Results in agreement with conclusions of Bowers
^Ent. Rec. 11: 82, 1899), and Stallman (Ent. Rec. 28: 21, 1916) in experimental breeding of
melanics. — Isabel McCracken.

924. [Pearson, Karl.] Peccavimus. Biometrika 12: 259-281. Nov., 1919.— This paper
cites certain errors which have crept into publications of biometrical formulae. The cor-
rections are indicated. — John W. Gowen. .

925. Pennypacker, J. Y. Observations on the beach plum. A study in plant variation.
Contrib. Bot. Lab. Univ. Pennsylvania 4: 231-270. PI. 66-70. 1920.— Author is impressed
with marked variation in the beach plum {Prunus maritima) and suggests that this species is
undergoing mutational variation along several lines due to environmental factors. Primi-
tive color is supposed to have been greenish yellow or red. Through transformation of
chloroplastids to chromoplastids pure yellow fruits arose along one evolutionary line.
Development of purple and then blue considered another line. Reference is made to Bur-
bank's hybridization work with P. maritima. Detailed description is given of nine varie-
ties of the species of interest especially to taxonomists. — James P. Kelly.

926. Pridham, J. T. Breeding cereals at the experiment farms. Agric. Gaz. New South
Wales 31: 697-698. 1920. — Summary is given of plant-breeding work and nursery trials at
several of the experimental farms. — L. R. Waldro7i.

927. PuNNETT, R. C. The early elimination of surplus cockerels. Jour. Bd. Agric,
London 25: 1319-1323. 1 fig. 1919.— Author shows how appropriate crosses of races of
poultry, involving sex-linked factors which manifest themselves in the down, make it
possible to distinguish the sex of the offspring at hatching. Suggests possible practical
applications. — William A. Lippincott.

928. Richardson, C. W. Some notes on Fragaria. Jour. Genetics 10:39-46. 2 fig.
July, 1920. The work is a continuation of that published in the same Journal 3 : No. 3, 1914,
and 7: No. 3, 1918. [See Bot. Absts. 2, Entry 494.] The results of certain crosses are given
with regard to the inheritance of flower color, double flowering, shape of foliage, variegation in

No. 2, March, 1921]

GENETICS 141

foliage, fruit flavors, size of fruit, runners and sex. Pink flowers and doubleness were found
ta be dominant over white flowers and singleness. Because of its heterozj'gous condition
with regard to leaf shape Fragaria grandiflora is considered to be a hybrid of F. chiloensis
or chinensis and virginiana. Crosses of 9 X cT or 9 have thus far given 203 9 and 173 d"
or 9.—W. D. Valleau.

929, RiCHEY, Frederick D. The inequality of reciprocal corn crosses. Jour. Amer.
Soc. Agron. 12:186-196. 1920.— Reciprocal crosses between varieties or strains of maize
are sometimes unequal. Possible causes of such inequalities are suggested as a difference
in the food materials furnished the young plants by the different maternal parents and a
difference in germinal reactions with different cytoplasms. The experiments show that
some type of sex-linked inheritance must at least be considered as a possible cause of inequality
between reciprocal maize crosses, by the unequal transmission from No. 199 as staminate and
as pistillate parent.— F. M. Scherti.

'130. RiEBESELL, P. Einige zahlenkritische Bemerkungen zu den Mendelschen Regeln.
[Some remarks critical of ratios in Mendelian inheritance.] Biol. Zentralbl. 38 : 329-.340.
Aug., 1918.— An investigation of the criteria for goodness of fit of theoretical Mendelian
ratios to be observed. On any given hypothesis as to relation of hereditary factors to exter-
nal characters, number of factors may be found by mathematical process. Thus if one

3" _ n,
character occurs only with presence of all factors, equation will be: ^„_^„ - ~ where to -

number of factors, Ux and ni = observed frequencies of alternate characters, whence m =

log n - log ni ^^^ ^ ^^ ^ ^^^^ ^^^ probability of two hypothetic ratios may be compared
log 4 —log 3

in several ways: (1) by their deviation from the observed; (2) by the ratios of these devia-
tions to their standard deviation; (3) by the probabilities that the theoretical ratios shall
be found in a population in which the observed ratio has occurred; (4) by the ratio of the prob-
ability of the observed to that of the most probable value; (5) by the probability of a deviation
.ns great as or greater than that of the observed from the theoretical. For small numbers of
observations no one ratio can be picked out as the only likely one. All criteria depend on
assumption of Gaussian distribution, which is violated by hypothesis of linkage and other
extensions of Mendelian theory. Where more than one hypothesis is admitted by criteria,
ratios in F3 will often determine right hypothesis.— Jo^n Rice MiJier.

931. Salaman, R. N. The technique of cross-fertilization in potatoes. Potato Mag. 3:
8, 12, 26. 1 fig. 1920.— Brief description is made of female and male organs of potato flowers
and difficulties encountered in cross-fertilizing are mentioned. Instruments and materials
required in crossing are given and the various operations of selecting buds, sterilizing, emas-
culating, labeling, covering, pollinating, protecting seed in field, harvesting and extracting
seed, sowing seed and growing seedlings are described in detail. A simple and less certain
method is also described as well as operations required in self-fertilizing. Successful fer-
tilizations are never more than 5 per cent of individual blossoms treated.— Richard Wellington.

932. Salaman, R. N., and J. W. Lesley. Genetic studies in potatoes. The inheritance
of an abnormal haulm type. Jour. Genetics 10: 21-38. 4 pi. July, 1920.— Two distinct types
of potato stems were found and named respectively "prostrate" and "procumbent." The
former differed mainly from the normal in that the stems were either deficient or entirely
wanting in interfascicular secondary growth, consisting mostly of xylem, and in that upright
habit of growth was absent. The latter seemed to be an intermediate between "prostrate"
and "upright" varieties, as it resembled the "prostrate" in stem structure and the "upright"
in growth habit. In a study of the inheritance of the "prostrate" habit, it was found to be-
have as a recessive character, the ratios indicating that it differed from the "upright" in at
least two and probably three factors. No correlation was found between the "prostrate"
habit and other characters. — Richard Wellington.

142 GENETICS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

933. Salmon, E. S. On forms of the hop (Humulus lupulus L., and H. americanus Nutt.)
resistant to mildew (Sphaerotheca humuli (D. C.) Burr.). IV. Ann. Appl. Biol. 6: 293-310.
1920. — In continuation of studies previously published the author now reports three groups of
hop plants immune or resistant to hop mildew (-S. humuli). Group 1 comprises several forms
of a variety having yellowish-green leaves and known as the "Golden Hop." A female
form is immune and a male form is susceptible to the attacks of mildew both when grown in a
greenhouse and in the open. Another female form of this type is slightly susceptible to this
fungus in the greenhouse only. — Group 2 comprises individual seedlings of the wild hop (H.
lupulus) raised from seed obtained from Vittorio, Italy. Certain individuals proved to be
immune, others highly susceptible to mildew. It is stated that the seedlings which are
immune when grown in the greenhouse may, when grown in the open, show susceptibility,
which as a rule is slight. The conclusion is drawn that different seedlings have distinctive
physiological or constitutional characters, which are constant under the same environment
and confer immunity or susceptibility upon the respective seedlings.— Group 3 comprises a
male form of H. americanus which is immune to mildrew when grown in a greenhouse. Under
the same conditions several American cultivated varieties proved susceptible.— TT^ W.
Stockberger.

934. Skupienski, F.-X. Sur la sexualite chez les Champignons Myxomycetes. [On
sexuality in the Myxomycetes.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. 167: 31. July, 1918.

935. Slocum, Rob R. Selection and care of poultry breeding stock. Bur. Anim. Ind.,
Farmers Bull. 1116. 10 p., 6 fig. 1920.— Practical suggestions concerning management of a
breeding stock. — William A. Lippincott.

936. Slonaker, James R. Some morphological changes for adaptation in the mole.
Jour. Morphol. 34:335-372. 4 pi. 1920.— In adaptation to fossorial habits, the sternum,
pectoral girdle and fore-limbs of the American mole, Scalops aquaticus, have been greatly
enlarged and modified, thus increasing the size of the anterior part of the body. To allow the
enlarged anterior part of the body to pass the posterior part when the animal turns in its
burrow, the pelvic girdle has been very much reduced in diameter. The reduction in the
size of the pelvis has so narrowed the pelvic outlet that it is impossible for the urogenital and
alimentary tracts to pass through it and still function; this necessitates their passage outside
the bony arch— a condition very unusual in mammals. The eyes are so degenerate that
they are doubtless able to function only in perceiving the difference between light and
darkness. To compensate for the deficiency in sight, special tactile organs have been devel-
oped on the snout and on the margins of the fore-feet.— Bertram G. Smith.

937. Steinach, E. Verjiingung durch experimentelle Neubelebung der Alternden
Pubertatsdriise. [Rejuvenation through experimental revitilization of the senile sex glands.]
68 p., 9 pi. Julius Springer: Berlin, 1920.

938. Thomson, J. A. Modern study of heredity. [Rev. of: Morgan, Thomas Hunt.
The physical basis of heredity. 14 X 21 cm., SOO p., 117 fig. J. B. Lippincott Co. : Philadel-
phia, 1919. (See Bot. Absts. 5, Entry 422.) Jour. Roy. Microsc. Soc. 1920: 354-357.
Sept., 1920.

939. Tischler, G. Ueber die sogenannten "Erbsubstanzen" und ihre Lokalisation in
der Pflanzenzelle. [On the so-called hereditary substances and their localization in the plant
cell.] Biol. Zentralbl. 40: 15-28. 1920.— Resume of literature on composition and behavior
of chromosomes in relation to their function as bearers of Mendelian hereditary factors.
Discussion of their chemical composition, cytological behavior and their role in heredity.—
E. G. Anderson.

940. van de Weyer, W. Hybrid Buddleias. Card. Chron. 68: 181. 1 fig. Oct. 9,
1920.— An account of hybrids of B. globosa with B. variabilis magnifica, and with B. Mada-
gascariensis. Segregations as to foliage, color, seed characters, fertility and fragrance are
briefly indicated. — J. M. Shull.

No. 2, xMarch, 19211 HORTICULTURE 143

941. Whipple, O. B. Line selection work with potatoes. Jour. Agric. Res. 19: 543-573.
Sept., 1920. — Data are given on the performance of numerous hill selections made within the
Russet Burbank, Rural New Yorker, Green Mountain, and Early Six Weeks potato varieties.
The results show that selection is practically valueless in isolating high-yielding strains except
during the first season. No definite correlation was found between number of tubers produced
per plant and yield in pounds, but high-yielding plants were usually correlated with vigor and
health. From the commercial standpoint, the results demonstrate the value of making selec-
tions each season and of using vigor and health as an index of productiveness. — Richard
Wellington.

942. WiSTER, John C. Notes on the history of the bearded iris. Jour. New York Bot.
Gard. 21: 181-191. Oct., 1920.— A historical sketch of the various Iris breeders from the
earliest recorded work to present time. All varieties cultivated prior to 1890 or 1900 were
derived from two species, /. pallida and I. variegata. — J. Marion Shull.

943. Yasui, Kono. Genetical studies in Portulaca grandiflora. Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34:
55-65. 1 pi., 1 fig. 1920. — The author describes crosses between single and double races
belonging to 7 color types. Doubleness is dominant. Yellow is due to a yellow flavone
derivative, which in the presence of a reducing factor {R) yields a magenta anthocyanin.
White races lack either the chromogen factor (C) alone or both (C) and (R). Yellow single
by white single (CCrr X ccRR) gives magenta Fi (CcRr) and Fj by selfing of 9 magenta, 3
yellow, and 4 white. Hybrid double magentas (CcRrDd) by white singles (ccRRdd) give
magenta doubles, magenta singles, white doubles, and white singles in equal numbers. By
yellow single they give equal numbers of yellow and magenta (CcRrDd X CCrrdd =
iCCRrDd : iCcRrDd : iCCRrdd : iCcRrdd : iCCrrDd : iCcrrDd : iCCrrdd : iCcrrdd).
Double whites (CcRrDd) by pale yellow singles (CCrrdd) give equal numbers of magenta and
yellow doubles and singles. Single scarlet by double white gives magenta double, which
mated to single white gives equal numbers of magenta and white doubles and singles. The
selfed singles from this give singles only; the selfed doubles, 3 doubles to 1 single. The
singles mated to the doubles give 1 : 1 ratio. — L. L. Burlingame.

HORTICULTURE

J. H. GouRLEY, Editor
FRUITS AND GENERAL HORTICULTURE

944. FiNDLAY, Hugh. The handbook for practical farmers. 558 p., 258 fig. D. Appleton
& Company: New York and London, 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 609.

945. Alderman, W. H. The status of orchard fertilization experiments. Proc. Amer.
Soc. Hort. Sci. 16: 109-113. (1919) 1920.— Attention is drawn to the fact that the orchard
fertilization work during the past 30 years in about 30 different experiment stations in this
country has all been carried on in about the same general way. The information obtained
up to the present time about which there is little contention narrows down to about four
general headings; namely, (1) there are many apple orchards, growing under a wide range of
conditions which do not respond to any fertilizer ; (2) orchards in sod are most likely to respond
to fertilizers; (3) starved orchards give a ready response to fertilization; and (4) nitrogen in
a readily available form seems to be the only element of plant-food that is uniformly a factor
in the favorable responses— when such are secured. The author states, "We may readily see
and safely say that a normal plant probably has a definite arrangement of conditions within
itself, which fit into its functions of growth and fruitage or reproduction. It is when the
arrangement is distributed that we get reduced vigor, feeble growth or lack of productive-
ness." He suggests that either pruning, cultural methods, fertilization, or some combination
of all of these may restore the normal optimum in the plant and produce the results desired.
Instead of a fertilizer problem, the problem may be one of pruning or cultural practices, or a

144 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

combination of all. He suggests that we look into the inside of the tree rather than into the
soil or other external factors. In other words, we should attempt to diagnose the trouble,
and then make an attempt to discover a treatment for it. This means a need of men trained
in physiology and chemistry, and of considerable laboratory work under more controlled
conditions. It is suggested that, to start with, we should eliminate the error introduced by
miscellaneous stocks and scions; and the writer suggests that buds or scions from a single
parent tree should be worked upon root stocks, developed by cuttings or other asexual propa-
gation from a single parent plant. It is suggested that in place of a "fertilizer project" we
should have a "nutrition project," and that most of the old type of fertilizer experiments
should be carried on as demonstrations by extension workers.— J?. C. Anchter.

946. Allen, W. J. Three new varieties of plums. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:
744-745. 1920.— Two new local seedling varieties, Higgins' Seedling and Wilson's Seedling,
are described; also Tucker's Beauty, originated by Ltjther Btjrbank, is described. The
two local seedlings are of the cherry-plum tj'pe.- L. R. Waldron.

947. Allen, W. J., and R. G. Bartlett. Spring work for the banana grower. Agric.
Gaz. New South Wales 31: 738-743. 1920.— Practical instructions are given covering selec-
tion of suckers, thickness and depth of planting, pruning, and depth of cultivation.— L.
R. Waldron.

948. Anonymous. Original description of the Turley apple. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc.
1917: 27. 1 pi. 1918.— The Turley apple, a seedling of the Winesap, was originated in 1900
in Lawrence County, Indiana, by Joe A. Burton, Mitchell, Indiana. A detailed description
of the apple is given.— £^. C. Anchter.

949. Anonymous. Espaco entre coqueiros. [Space between coconuts.] Bol. Agric. Nova
Goa [Portuguese East India] 1 : 17-19. 1919.— Considers the proper spacing of coconut
palms for best results. — John A. Stevenson.

950. Anonymous. Formacion del olivo. [Shaping the olive tree.] Informacion Agric.
[Madrid] 10: 148-149. Sfig. 1920.— Describes a method of pruning young olive trees to give
the desired shape. — John A. Stevenson.

951. Anonymous. Grafting the mangosteen by inarching. Missouri Bot. Gard. Bull.
8: 61-63. 1920.

952. Anonymous. The elements of hardy fruit culture. [Rev. of: Staward, R. Prac-
tical hardy fruit culture. 216 p. Swart hmore Press: London, 1920.] Nature 105: 545. 1920.

953. Anthony, R. D. Methods of interpreting results in orchard fertilizer experiments.
Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 113-117 (1919) 1920.— It is shown that many of our fertilizer
experiments were planned and laid out before there was much published information on the
subject. As a result, many errors were made in planning the experiments and in interpreting
the results. Some points which should be noted and studied are the following: (a) Weighted
results are often given without giving the methods of deriving these or the original values.
(b) If four-year overlapping averages were used it would tend to smooth the yield curves
and make it easier to compare the records of different plots, (c) the cultural treatment of the
orchard is not always given, (d) A s'trip of sod in the tree rows of cultivated orchards should
be noted, (e) The contour of the land is not always given, (f) Not only should checks be
repeated, but often the different treatments, (g) Soil variations should be recorded, (h)
Cross-feeding should be prevented or acknowledged, (i) The performance of a single ele-
ment cannot always be detertained by subtracting the performance of a two-element plot
from a three-element one. (j) There is a big variation in individual-tree performance.
(k) We must not make too wide an application of a single fertilizer experiment even in the
same country. (I) To find out how much variation there is between plots, without any fer-

No. 2, March, 1921] HORTICULTURE 145

tilizer treatments, it would be well to keep yield records for two or, even better, three years
on the different plots before applying the fertilizer. It is stated that the partial failure of
some of the early experiments should not discourage the continuance of such a fundamental
line of investigation, and that pomological research will be improved by the passing out of
the old types of fertilizer experiment. — E. C. Auchter.

954. Auchter, E. C. Some influences of thinning, pollination, and fruit spur growthon
the yearly performance record of fruit spurs and on the size of fruit produced. Proc. Amer.
Soc. Kort. Sci. 16: 118-131. (1919) 1920.— Investigations in apple thinning, pollination, and
fruit-spur growth were carried on from 1912 to 1919, inclusive, at the West Virginia Experi-
ment Station. Results of the studies were as follows: (1) Apple-thinning experiments, car-
ried on from 1912 to 1919, inclusive, show that neither the tree as a whole nor the individual
fruit spurs are influenced by the removal of part of the crop so that the tree or spurs bloom
again the following season. Fruit thinning, then, does not affect the annual bearing of
apple trees.— (2) The size of the individual specimens left on the tree after thinning is greatly
increased during the same year as a result of the removal by thinning of part of the crop.
More marketable fruit is produced by the thinned trees and increased size of each apple in
cases where the trees are bearing a good crop of fruit. This influence on size is lessened or
lost altogether when trees are bearing light crops.— (3) The spurs on certain varieties of
apples bloom more regularly than those of other varieties, but this does not mean that such
spurs and varieties bear more regularly. A more likely explanation, with reference to fruit
spurs only, of why certain varieties are annual bearers, is given in Nos. 7 and 8. — (4)
Spurs which set fruit one year, generally do not blossom the next year. — (5) Spurs which
blossom one year but do not set fruit, often blossom the next year. Others do not however. —
(6) These results indicate for the varieties studied that the spurs, which blossom two years in
succession make a greater yearly growth, have more leaves and a greater total leaf area in
the year preceding the second successive blooming year. Such spurs have a greater total
length and thus all indications show that they are more vigorous. Thus growth and vigor
to a certain degree do not oppose, but rather encourage, fruitfulness. — (7) These results indi-
cate that a variety is not an annual bearer because the same spurs bear in succession. They
indicate that either a certain percentage of the total spurs on such varieties do not bloom
in the heavy crop year and thus such spurs bloom and set fruit in the next year, or if all the
spurs do bloom, a certain percentage of the spurs do not set and thus more readily bloom
and set the next year.- (8) These results suggest that probably a larger proportion of the
spurs on the biennial bearers not only bloom, but also set fruit in the crop year. Such
spurs then do not readily bloom the next year. Observation shows that trees bearing heavy
crops make very little spur growth during such years. We would expect then from No. 6
that very few spurs on such trees would bloom the following year. If greater spur growth
was s,ecured on the annual bearing varieties, then, a greater proportion of spurs would bloom
in the off year, especially the non-blooming spurs of the year before.— (9) Certain varieties
which produce fruit yearly, form fruit buds terminally and laterally on one year old
growths to such an extent that the production of fruit from these sources is often enough to
class a variety as an annual bearer without reference to its fruit spurs. It is also possible
that some varieties produce a higher percentage of fruit spurs yearly than do others, and as
these gradually form fruit buds, some annual fruit may be produced. However, there are
many so-called annual bearers that do not produce fruit by any of these methods and a more
reasonable explanation of their annual bearing is given in Nos. 7 and 8. — (10) If the state-
ments under Nos. 7 and 8 finally prove to be justified in later work, then the whole prob-
lem of biennial and annual bearing appears to be affected to a degree by the sterility and
pollination problem and is not one of growth and nutrition only. — (11) It may be possible
to break up the biennial bearing of certain varieties of apples either by altering certain
cultural, fertilizer, or pruning methods as suggested by different investigators, and after
seeing what light certain pollination studies may throw on the problem, but at this time,
we have no definite information to offer on this point, based upon investigational work of
this station.— (12) There appears to be a good correlation between the weight of the indi-

146 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

vidual apples produced on a tree and the weight on seeds in each fruit. Since the number of
good seeds and weight of seeds are correlated, this correlation would probably hold between
weight of fruit and number of good seeds.— (13) Weather, including temperature, wind, sun-
shine, etc., exerts a marked influence, through its effect on the length of the blooming
period, light and bee activity, on the number of good seeds and the weight of seeds in indi-
vidual'apples on a tree. More good seeds and a greater weight are produced in warm sunny
seasons when the pistils are more receptive and the bees can work longer and more effec-
tively.—(14) With the same crops per tree and the same cultural practices, thus keeping good
vigorous spurs, the size of the individual apples of a tree should be larger in those seasons
which have good weather at pollination time.— (15) If the crops per tree are much larger in
certain seasons than others, then the fruit will not be larger, even though there are more
good seeds and a greater weight of seeds. The correlation between weight of seeds and
weight of individual apples will hold true, however, in each of the separate years.— £', C.
Auchter.

955. Balme, Juan. El frambueso y su cultivo, [The raspberry and its culture.] Rev.
Agric. [Mexico] 5: 120-123. 1 fig. 1919.— A popular account of the cultivation of the rasp-
berry in Mexico, including varieties recommended and uses of the iruit.— John A. Stevenson.

956. Beckwith, Charles S. The effect of fertilizers on blueberries. Soil Sci. 10:309-
313. PL 1. 1920.— Field experiments are reported, indicating that the use of fertilizers
increases the yield of blueberries. With 170 pounds of sodium nitrate, 230 pounds of dried
blood, 340 pounds of steamed bone, 340 pounds of phosphate rock, and 170 pounds of Nebraska
potash per acre, the yield was tripled.— TF. J. Robbins.

957. Brierley, W. G. Comparison of fall, winter and spring pruning of apple trees in
Minnesota. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 102-104 (1919) 1920.— Experiments were con-
ducted in Minnesota to see what the effect would be of pruning apple trees during the dif-
ferent months of the fall, winter, and early summer. The author concludes as follows:
"The conclusions to be drawn from these observations are that pruning in fall or winter in
Minnesota is not detrimental to tree vigor, maturity of shoots, hardiness of growth or wound
healing, and that the tips of shoots pruned in the fall and winter do not die back more than
the tips of shoots pruned at other times. Apparently the apple grower in Minnesota can
prune at a time most convenient for him, just as the growers in the East, South and West
are doing." — E. C. Auchter.

958. Chandler, W. H. Some results as to the response of fruit trees to pruning. Proc.
Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 16:88-101. (1919) 1920.— A progress report .is given of the pruning
experiments now being carried on at the Cornell University Experiment Station. The general
purpose of the experiment, as given, is to test systems of training for some of the different
fruits. In addition to merely keeping fruit yields and top growth, other data are being
taken, in order to find out if possible the fundamental activities that determine yield or top
growth.— Attention is drawn to the fact that the response of a tree to dormant or early sum-
mer pruning is an appearance of greater vigor. The leaves are larger and greener, and the
twigs continue length growth later into the season. The general opinion is that this
increased vigor is explained by the fact that a reduced number of growing points and a
reduced cambial area make use of the reserve food supply of the tree. The author gives
tables to show the pounds of dry weight, pounds of starch, and pounds of saccharose in the
one-year twigs, older branches, trunk, large roots, and small roots of a seven-year-old Bis-
marck apple tree. The total amount of starch in the one-year twigs was relatively small,
and if all the twigs were removed, the reduction in total carbohydrates for the tree would be
small. Yet if all the twigs were pruned off, a greatly increased vigor would result. Although
there would be a slight increase in carbohydrate supply for the opening buds, after pruning,
still, the author states, it does not seem probable that this slight increase in reserve carbohy-
drate supply could account for the increase in vigor of twig growth, for this reserve, according
to Price, is quickly exhausted. Price shows that practically all the starch disappears

No. 2, March, 1921] HORTICULTURE 147

from the live tissue above ground in about eighteen days after the leaves open, and Chandler
shows that the soluble carbohydrates decrease greatly as growth begins. He states that
pruming on June 1 resulted in increased vigor, even though the reserve carbohydrate supply
must have been nearly exhausted. It is shown that pruning reduces the leaf surface, and
thus by reducing transpiration, the demand for water from the roots is reduced. By reduc-
ing the number of growing points and the amount of cambial area, it should reduce the demand
for mineral nutrients. The author states, "It would seem probable then that the increased
vigor of top growth would continue until the reduced size of the tree would be balanced by a
reduction in root growth due to the reduction in leaf surface. Thus pruning would be a
dwarfing process. Experiments and tables are included to show that different branches on
the same tree cannot be used in pruning experiments, because the one pruned branch would
not have a fair chance or would not get the same amount of water, from the rootsy due to the
reduced leaf area, if the other branches were unpruned. This tends to explain the ease with
which one branch on a tree is suppressed as compared with the others by pruning. — The effect
of pruning on nursery trees was studied as was also the effect of nitrogen on newly planted
peach trees. Tables were included to show the effect of the pruning, necessary to secure
an open head, on the leaf surface of the trees. — An experiment was also carried on in 1919 to
test the influence of summer pruning. — E. C. Auchter.

959. Chevalier, Aug. Recherches sur les poiriers, noyers, chataigniers des parties
froides de I'Indo-Chine et du Sud de la Chine. [Research on pears, walnuts, and chestnuts in
the colder regions of Indo-China and southern China.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:
1335-1336. 1920. — The following species are reported as wild : Pirus Pashia, Pirus granulosa,
Juglans sagillata, and Castanea Duclouxii. The cultivated forms are Pirus communis and
P. Simonii and Juglans duclouxiana. — C. H. Farr.

960. CoLLisoN, R. C. A progress report of fertilizer experiments with fruits. New York
Agric. Exp. Sta. [Geneva] Bull. 477. 53 p. 1920.— Experiments M-ere conducted with apples
in a nursery and in orchards, with cherries and pears in orchards, and with grapes in a vine-
yard. In Baldwin apple orchards the results as regards growth and yield were erratic. The
growth of Spy apple trees in the orchard was generally increased by fertilizers, but not con-
sistently. There was no significant difference in color or size of fruit. The growth of apple
trees in the nursery was increased by the application of fertilizers containing potassium and
phosphorus, but nitrate of soda was without effect. The growth and yield of cherry trees was
increased by the use of fertilizers, and there were indications that the supply of available
nitrogen may be a factor of some importance in vineyards. The author concludes that, in
positive results, the experiments up to date have been very disappointing. Evidently, the
effects of other factors operative in the experiments have masked any results of a positive
nature which may have been due to the fertilizers applied.— F. C. Stewart.

961. Cunningham, G. H. Mortality among stone fruit trees in Central Otago. New Zea-
land Jour. Agric. 20: 359-364. 1920.— Excess of water is the cause of much injury in irrigated
orchards. Stone-fruit trees are more susceptible than apples to such injury. Many orchards
are set in soil which is too alkaline for fruit trees. Valsa Leucostoma, and Nectria cinnabarina
were found as weakling parasites in some instances. — N. J. Giddings.

962. Bearing, Charles. The muscadine grapes — their culture and uses. Proc. Amer.
Pomol. Soc. 1917: 52-59. 6 pi., 19 fig. 1918.— Attention is drawn to the fact that the musca-
dine grapes were the first native American grapes to be brought under cultivation in this
country and that the Scuppermong is the oldest named native, cultivated grape. The mus-
cadine grapes are grown mainly in the southeast. After having briefly given the early history
of the development of the muscadine grape industry, the author explained the investigational
work with muscadine grapes of the United States Department of Agriculture.— A general
field survey was first made to gather accurate information concerning the existing industry,
and cultural experiments were started. These tests showed that (a) it is better to propa-

148 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

gate by cuttings than by layers; (b) nitrogenous fertilizer was beneficial, especially for
young vines; (c) it is advantageous to practice regular plowing and harrowing; and (d)
proper pruning is not only desirable but actually essential. — Pollination studies showed that
the varieties were practically self-sterile and that male vines and bees were necessary for
cross pollination. This question is now losing its importance, since the breeding work of
the department has produced a new race of muscadine grape varieties which are perfect
flowered and self-fertile. — Extensive experiments have been carried on to demonstrate the
value of muscadine-grape by-products, and several have been originated. — The author
summarizes his work as follows: "With the development of better cultural methods, greater
and more varied utilization and the production through plant breeding of new and im-
proved varieties, the Muscadine Grape industry seems to oflfer great promise of filling in the
future a far more important role in American viticulture than it has in the past." — E. C.
Auchter.

963. Dehn, W. M., and M. C. Taylor. A chemical method for the detection in fruit of
a prior frozen condition. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12 : 977. 1920.— The method is based
upon the fact that in the freezing of fruits the sucrose concentration is decreased, with an
increase in the concentration of invert sugar. — Henry Schmitz.

964. DuNLAP, H. C. The California prune and apricot growers. Monthly Bull. California
State Commission Hort. 8: 401-403. 1919.

965. Ellenwood, C. W., and Paul Thayer. Thinning of apples, peaches and plums.
Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5' : 136-140. 1920.— A brief discussion is given, including
reasons for thinning and the time when the practice can be followed to the greatest advan-
tage. General suggestions for thinning are given. — R. C. Thomas.

966. Evans, H. H. Report of district field inspector, Vernon. British Columbia 14th
Ann. Rept. Dept. Agric. 1919: 24-25. 1920.

967. Evans, H. H. Soil-fertility and crop production. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia]
4: 53. 1919.

968. Fisher, Hugo. Pflanzenwuchs und Kohlensaure. [Plant growth and carbonic acid.]
Naturwissenschaften 8: 413-417. 1920.— See Bot. Absts., Entry 1301.

969. FoRTiER, S. Relation to orchard irrigation practice. Monthly Bull. California State
Commission Hort. 7: 361-367. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1392.

970. Ginarte, Benjamin MuiJoz. Consideraciones sobre el cultivo de la pifia en Cuba.
[Cultivation of the pineapple in Cuba.] Estac. Exp. Agron. Cuba Bol. 45: 1-43. 16 fig. 1919.
— The writer discusses the cultivation of the pineapple in Cuba under the following heads:
botanical classification, varieties, soils adapted to the culture, planting systems, propagation,
time of planting, cultivation, fertilization, picking, packing, pests, yields and returns, and
uses of the fruit. — John A. Stevenson.

971. Goj6n, Carlos. Trabajos ejecutados en la estacion agricola experimental para
frutas tropicales, Cordoba. [Work of the experiment station for tropical fruits at Cordoba,
Mexico.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5:109-112. 2 fig. 1919. A report of plantings made of
varieties of Citrus Mangifera indica, Vitis, and other tropical fruits. — John A. Stevenson.

972. Grabham, Michael. The alligator pear. Nature 105:517-518. 1920.— Note on
cultivation of Persea gratissima in Madeira, where it is now in general cultivation for orna-
ment and fruit. From seed, the trees bear in seven to ten years, reaching full maturity in
twenty. — 0. A. Stevens.

No. 2, March, 1921] HORTICULTURE 149

973. Grant, J. A. Grading and packing fruit for market. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia]
4:358-359. 1919.

974. Green, W. J., Paul Thayer, and J. B. Keil. Apples adapted for Ohio culture.
Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5'" : 270-271. 1920.— A discussion is given of the varietal
characteristics and bearing habits of the Yellow Transparent which render it suitable for
culture in Ohio. — R. C. Thomas.

975. Green, W. J., Paul Thayer, and J. B. Keil. Varieties of apples adapted for
Ohio culture. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5«: 180-186. 1920.— This is a discussion
of the relative merits of the Baldwin, Ben Davis, and Northern Spy varieties for Ohio cul-
ture.— R. C. Thomas.

976. Hedrick, U. P. European grapes in eastern America. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc.
1917: 46-52. / pL, 1 fig. 1918. — A general account of the results of investigations at the New
York (Geneva) experiment station with Vitis Vinifera is given. In 1911 cuttings of one
hundred and one varieties of European grapes were obtained by the experiment station and
cleft-grafted below ground onto several different species of Vitis. During the seven fol-
lowing years, several unfavorable seasons were encountered. The grapes passed through
several very severe winters and some unusually hot, dry summers. The author states,
"These test seasons have proved that European grapes will endure our (New York) climate
as well as the native varieties except in the matter of cold, — they must have winter protec-
tion." Two methods of winter protection were used; some vines were covered with earth
while others were wrapped with straw. The earth cover proved to be cheaper and more
efficient. The vines are laid down and covered with a few inches of earth. Special pruning
practices are necessary, due to the necessity of laying the vines down in winter, and a prac-
tical system is explained. The growing of European grapes is encouraged, and a list of good
table-varieties is given. The author finally suggests that much more experimental evidence
and information concerning the growing of European grapes in this country is needed, and
exhorts different investigators to carry on experiments in this field. — E. C. Auchter.

977. Heinicke, Arthur J. Concerning the shedding of flowers and fruits and other
abscission phenomena in apples and pears. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 76-83. 1920. —
Studies made of the shedding of leaves, fruit, petals, etc., showed that such abscission was
due to the behavior of living cells near the base or at the node of the organ doomed to fall.
In flowers and fruits, which were allowed to abscise in a humid atmosphere, a band of glisten-
ing tissue appeared around the base of the pedicel one to three days before abscission
occurred. This band was the rim of a plate of cells that lie between the pedicel and cluster
base. Just prior to separation, the walls of two to six tiers of cells on the abscission region
gave a red color when treated with hydrcholoric acid, thus indicating that lignificationhad
occurred. Tests for reducing sugars showed a heavy but non-localized brick-red precipitate
both before and during the abscission process. Tests for nitrates showed no localization
with reference to the separation region. The same was true of iron compounds. Catalase
activity was especially marked in the separation zone. — Fruits doomed to fall, especially in
cool, humid weather, did not gain in size as rapidly as the others. They appeared to be more
matured, showing more of the normal color, and the flesh appeared and smelled more like ripe
tissue. Fruits which fell did not appear to have as high a sap concentration as shown by
depression of freezing point. — Flowers or young fruit injured by cold usually fall. Flowers
are often similarly influenced by nutritional conditions, as was shown by some nitrate and
sugar studies. Flowers with short stems did not set so well as those having longer stems.
When the fleshy portion of the fruit was removed, the stem abscissed. Flowers exposed to
illuminating gas fell off, and when fruit was coated with grafting wax, abscission generally
followed. It was suggested that severe root pruning in early spring might be a factor in the
abscission of immature fruits. — Water forced or pulled through twigs, spurs, etc., seemed to
check abscission. Nitrogen in the tissues appeared to be an important factor in delaying
leaf fall. This was shown practically when certain apple trees which had received an appli-

150 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

cation of nitrate of soda held their leaves much later in the fall than similar trees which
had received no nitrate. When excised spurs with fruit were immersed in water, abscission
did not occur.— The author concludes as follows : "The facts here presented and those recorded
in the literature are not sufficient to afford an entirely satisfactory explanation of the behavior
of the cells in the abscission zone. Undoubtedly, the causes that stimulate or excite the
peculiar changes in this region are associated with variations in nutrition and water supply.
If the tissues above the plane in which separation may occur is abundantly supplied with
water and other substances that counteract maturity or favor translocation or utilization of
assimilated material, conditions apparently are not favorable for manifestation of the meris-
tematic nature of cells in the potential abscission zone. In many fruits effective fertilization
helps to bring about these desirable conditions, but it should be remembered that develop-
ment of seeds is only one of several possible means of causing a set. Self fruitfulness may be
associated with the fact that the cells at the base of the pedicels of flowers on such varieties
are not as easily stimulated into abscission activity as similar cells of self-barren trees." —
E. C. Auchter.

978. HiGGiNS, J. E. The litchi— Litchi chinensis. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917: 59-66.
1918. — This paper gives a general discussion concerning our present knowledge of the litchi.
A brief history of its origin and present distribution is included. Its cultural and fertilizer
requirements are stated, and methods of propagation are discussed. In general, the trees
do best on a deep, moist, alluvial soil and respond well to heavy applications of various
manures. Air-layering is generally used as a means of propagation. A few trees are now
growing in California and Florida, but the bulk of the crop is produced in southern China,
India, Ceylon, and other parts of the Orient. Trees of the litchi are also found in Japan,
Formosa, Australia, Hawaii, Mauritius, Brazil, and the West Indies. The fresh fruit is eaten
in these countries, where the trees grow, but the dried litchi nut is the product generally
found in our markets. — E. C. Auchter.

979. Hoy, B. Report of district horticulturist and inspector of fruit pests, Okanagan
Valley, British Columbia 14th Ann. Rept. Dept. Agric. 1919: 20-24. 1920.

980. Hunter, W. T. Report of district field inspector, southern Okanagan, Similkameen
and boundary districts. British Columbia 14th Ann. Rept. Dept. Agric. 1919: 22-24. 1920.

981. HusMANN, George C. Growing currant grapes.— A promising new industry for this
country. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917:66-69. 4 pL, 5 fig. 1918.— Currant grapes were
grown extensively in France until the Phylloxera destroyed the vineyards. At this time
the plantings were greatly increased in Greece and were very profitable until the re-establish
ment of the French vineyards on Phylloxera-resistant grape stocks introduced from the
United States.— The U. S. Department of Agriculture has demonstrated that these currant
grapes can be profitably grown in this country. These grapes are among the earliest to
ripen, and the crop can be dried and put away before the earliest rains occur in districts
where other raisin varieties are too late in ripening. — Currant grapes were introduced into
California in 1861. In 1901, David Fairchild introduced the Panariti variety from Greece.
This proved to be greatly superior to the other varieties. When grafted on Phylloxera-
resistant stock and stock suited to the soil and climate under which it is grown, it has proven
extremely fruitful and profitable in California, Arizona, and southern Nevada. The author
states, "It has been ascertained that to make the blossoms set and secure a full crop of fruit,
the vines must be incised." This should be done while the vines are in blossom. When vines
are planted eight by eight feet apart, they will yield an average of 10| tons, or conserva-
tively from two to five tons, of dried currents to the acre. — E. C. Auchter.

982. Kains, M. G. Home fruits as educators of public taste. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc.
1917:94-98. 1918.— Attention is drawn to the fact that in many of our large commercial
orchards, varieties of fruit, often with only fair or even poor quality, are planted. It is shown
that in the older home orchards or small fruit plantations, only fruits of the highest quali-

No. 2, March, 19211 HORTICULTURE 151

ties were planted. This tended to create a love of and demand for more fruit. The noted
early pomologists were mostly amateurs, who loved good fruit. The statement is made
that many of our fruit specialists of to-day were probably reared on farms, which had excel-
lent home fruit plantations of high quality. The importance of replacing decrepit or old home
orchards with fruits of the highest quality as well as the establishment of such new planta-
tions on all farms is emphasized. It is suggested that such plantations will train future
fruit lovers and specialists among the rising generation, and thereby home fruits will natu-
rally continue, as in the past, to be educators of public taste. — E. C. Auchter.

9S3. Lyne, W. H. Horticultural quarantine in B. C. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia]
4: 132-133. 1919. — This is an address given by Mr. Ltne at the Interstate Plant Quarantine
Conference, Riverside, California in May, 1919.— J. M. Eastham.

984. Lyne, W. H. Report of chief inspector of imported fruit and nursery stock. British
Columbia 14th Ann. Rept. Dept. Agric. 1919: 45-49. 1920.

985. Macoun, W. T. Apple breeding in Canada. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917: 11-27.
1 pL, 1 fig. 1918. — A great deal of the apple-breeding work in Canada has been done at the
Central Exp. Farm, Ottawa, Ontario, although considerable work has been done at the
Ontario Agric. Coll. Guelph, Ontario, and at the Hortic. Exp. Sta. at Vineland, Ontario.
At the Central Exp. Farm an orchard of about 3000 trees grown from seed imported from
Russsia, was planted in 1890. These started to fruit in 1897 and were mostly summer apples.
Only a few, such as Claire, Neville, Oscar, Percival, Roslin and Rupert, were considered
sufficiently promising to propagate. — In 1898, seeds were saved from a variety orchard; and
seedlings, about 2000 in all, were grown. During the past 14 years, 1211 of the seedlings
fruited. Three hundred and seventy-eight were considered promising enough to propagate,
and 99 of the best were named. It was noted that the seedlings resembled their female parent
in many particulars. A brief description of the seedlings originated from different varieties
is given by the author. A descriptive table of the various seedlings is included, also a table
giving the names of the named seedlings and such information as female parent, date of
sowing seed, date of planting tree, date of first fruiting, etc.— A brief record of the early work
of Wm. Saunders was given. In 1887 seeds of the "Berried Crab," Pyrus baccata, obtained
from Russia were planted. The resulting seedlings proved very hardy. In 1894, many of
the hardiest and best sorts of apples grown in Ontario were crossed on Pyrus baccata with
the hope of improving the size and quality of fruit. In 1896 similar crosses were made on
P. prunifolia, and in 1902 on P. Malus. Many of the best of the crosses have been recrossed,
thus introducing a second portion of the characteristics of the larger apple. Many of Dr.
Saunders' hybrids have proved hardier than any other varieties of apples or crab apples
tested and are much larger than the original crabs. — The author states that it is important
to obtain apples suitable for the prairie provinces of Canada as soon as possible. In 1910
seed from some of the hardiest Russian apples were sown. Many seedlings have been obtained,
and it is hoped to secure valuable hardy sorts. — Some cross breeding has been done yearly since
1895, and, as a result, about 1000 trees are now growing. So far, not many apples that have
fruited were thought worthy of propagation, but there were a few promising ones in the
Mclntosh-Lawver crosses where the object was to obtain varieties which would keep better
than Mcintosh. Following are those which have been named: Lawver X Mcintosh, Holz,
Vermac; Mcintosh X Lawver, Mavis, Rustler. — E. C. Auchter.

986. Manaresi, Angelo. Sui danni prodotti ai fiori degli alberi fruttiferi dalle gelate
primaverili in genere e da quelle in particolare dei giorni 28, 29 e 30 marzo 1918. [Damage to
flowers of fruit trees by spring frosts and in particular the frosts of the 28, 29 and 30 of March
1918.] Rev. Patol. Veg. 10: 1-26. 1919.— At the time of these frosts the flowers of almonds
and apricots had lost their petals, peaches were in full bloom, cherry blossoms were open-
ing, and the floral buds of the plum, pear, and apple were swelling. In the almond and peach
it was noted that many stigmas, styles, and ovaries turned brown and dried. The stamens
were little injured. The pollen of several varieties of peaches germinated as well after as

152 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

before the frosts. The same pollen in maltose solution subjected to a temperature of — 8°C.
germinated very little. A temperature of — 2.5°C. reduced the germination about half.—
Notes are given on the relative amount of injury to different varieties of peaches and cherries,
and tables show the same for pears and apples. The greatest injury was suffered by the
almonds, and then in order of decreasing injury came peaches, pears, plums, apples, and
cherries. Bibliography is appended. — F. M. Blodgett.

987. Matons, August. La poda de I'olivera. [Pruning of the olive.] Rev. Inst. Agric.
Catalan de San Isidro 69: 22-24, 37-38. 1920.

988. Matthews, C. D. Report of the division of horticulture, North Carolina Agric.
Exp. Sta. Ann. Rept. 42: 59-64. 1920.— A statement concerning the subject matter of inves-
tigations in progress, including tests on dehorning of peach trees and hardiness of peach
varieties, variety testing, breeding, and top working of pecans, cultural practices with
strawberries, and variety testing, storage, and selection of sweet potatoes. — F. A. Wolf.

989. Meek, B. B. Oranges for Thanksgiving. Monthly Bull. California State Com-
mission Hort. 8:367-370. 1919.

990. Moore, J. G. Scion root production by apple trees in the nursery. Proc. Amer.
Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16:84-88. (1919) 1920.— Studies were made at the Wisconsin experiment
station concerning the possibility of producing apple trees on their own roots through using
long scions in root grafting and planting such grafts deep in the nursery row. There were
found to be wide differences in the ability of different varieties to produce scion roots.
Although there was fluctuation from year to year in the relative percentages of trees of
given varieties which produce roots, still for the most part the relative ability held fairly con-
stant. A table of eighteen varieties showing the percentage of trees which rooted each year
during the years 1914 to 1918, is included. It was found that with most varieties, even after
three years in the nursery, the number of trees having sufficient scion roots to support them-
selves was very small. A table is included which shows that a higher percentage of grafts
produce strong scion roots when grown in moist soil than when grown in dry soil. Groups
of trees were planted at varying depths of from two to six inches. While there were some
instances in which deeper planted grafts did not produce scion roots as well as the shallower
ones, still, for the most part, the increase in root production was in proportion to the depth of
planting. It was suggested that this was true because there was more soil moisture sur-
rounding the basal portion of the deeper planted scions. The author states that two-year-old
trees did not, under ordinary nursery conditions, possess sufficient roots to sustain them-
selves if the stock roots were removed. He also states, "It is clearly evident that if a large
proportion of apple trees purchased by fruit growers are to possess at the time of planting
scion roots sufficient to support them, it will be necessary to devise some new methods of
propagation. Doubtless many of the long scion trees, which show few or no roots at planting
in the orchard, develop them within two or three years after planting. However, if this is
not so, then the additional care and expense in propagating trees from long scion grafts as
now practised is largely wasted." — E. C. Auchter.

991. Munson, K. W. Grafting the fruit-tree. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4:49.
1919.

992. Munson, K. W. Intensive fruit-culture in Fraser Valley. Agric. Jour. [British
Columbia] 4: 104. 1919.

993. Munson, K. W. Pruning the balanced fruit-tree. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia]
4: 14-15. 1919.

994. Pachano, Abelardo. El mildew de la vina. [Downy mildew of the grape.] Quinta
Norma. Estac. Exp. Circ. 9. 22 X 15 cm., 8 p. Ambato, 1918.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry
1198.

No. 2, March, 1921] HORTICULTURE 153

995. Partridge, N. L. Growth and yield in apple trees. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci.
16: 104-109. (1919) 1920. — Studies made at the Delaware experiment station on the growth
and yield, during the previous three years of ten-year-old Jonathan, Yellow Transparent,
and Stayman Winesap apples, indicated strongly that there was a very consistent relationship
between the growth that the tree made and the amount of fruit produced. It was shown
that if the growth was smaller in 1918 than in 1917, the yield was larger in 1918; and the
reverse was also true. Thus the author states, "There is an alternate habit of growth as well
as an alternate habit of bearing in these trees. However in the case of the tree with an
increasing yield this is not the case." It was suggested, however, that when trees with in-
creasing yields finally had sufficient fruit produced in some year to depress the growth, such
trees would then fall in the biennial habit of bearing and growth. — E. C. Auchier.

996. Pierce, G. W. The almond industry. Monthly Bull. California State Commission
H or t. 8:355-357. 1919.

997. PoPENOE, WiLso.v. The natural groups of mangos cultivated in Florida. Proc.
Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1917: 70-81. 5 pi., 5 fig. 1918. — The varieties of mangos now grown in
Florida have been classified by the autjjor into a natural classification. The different varie-
ties which resemble one another in certain general characters have been placed in groups
according to these natural resemblances. In defining the groups, consideration was given
to characters of growth, foliage, inflorescence, fruiting habits, and the fruit itself. — Two
main divisions of the several groups are first made; namely, (1) bark rough; leaves having
commonly 18 to 24 pair of primary transverse veins; and (2) bark smooth; leaves having
commonly 2G to 30 pairs of primary transverse veins. — In the first division are included the
following groups: Mulgoba, Alphonse, Sandersha, Madras, and Julie groups. — In the second
division is included the one group — Cambodiana. — Detailed descriptions of each group are
given in the paper, and the varieties which fall in each group are enumerated. — E. C.
Auchier.

998. Rice, W. H. Orchard sanitation. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 238-242. 1920.—
A general discussion showing the importance of sunlight, air circulation, drainage, cultiva-
tion, and general cleanliness in orchard practices. — .V. J. Ciddirtgs.

999. Roberts, R. H. Studies in biennial fruiting. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc. 1919: 28-33.
1918. — Careful studies were made at the Wisconsin experiment station concerning the bien-
nial fruiting of certain apple varieties. The effects of blossom formation, spur growths, and
leaf areas during one year on the amount of bloom the following year were noted. The
author's general conclusions are as follows : "While no definite solution of the off-year question
is attempted, two statements bearing upon this matter can be made as a result of the investi-
gations.— (1) Biennial blossoming and fruiting is not due to a constitutional habit of the tree.
If it were due to a definite plant habit, successive blossoming could not have been induced
by blossom removal. Investigations with other plants show that blossom-bud production is
associated with the amount of plant-foods present. Qualitative tests indicate the same
condition in the apple. The off year, then, evidently results from a condition of nutrition
within the plant and not from a growth habit. — (2) Annual bearing by successive blossoming
of individual spurs cannot be expected. When the spur produces blossoms and develops
them to the point of setting fruit, it seldom blossoms again the next year. The develop-
ment of blossoms to the stage at which the fruit can be said to have set together with the
presence of excessive numbers of blossom spurs, seems to be the determining factor in the
ability of the spur to blossom in successive seasons. If annual bearing can be produced,
it must apparently be brought about by having a double system of spurs, which fruit in alter-
nate seasons. How this may be accomplished fully cannot be stated further than to refer
to the condition as pointed out before, that excess growth as well as very weak growth was
associated with the failure to form blossom buds. The normal blossom spurs are usually
one-eighth to one-half inch in length. If their growth is increased to one to two inches, they

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS, VOL. VII. NO. 2

154 HORTICULTURE [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

usually fail to produce blossom buds. Such a change, which must come from an influence on
individual spurs, would require pruning of a rather detailed nature. The influence of
cultivation and soil fertility in increasing the general growth of the tree would also have a
large part to play in causing an increased growth that is associated with the failure to pro-
duce an excessive number of blossoms. These factors have been shown by practice and ex-
periment to have a marked corrective influence on biennial bearing. — Blossom bud formation
is due to a condition within the plant. This condition is subject to modification by a num-
ber of external factors. In working to obtain annual bearing, it may be necessary to modify
the orchard cultivation, the amounts of fertilizer applied, the available moisture content
of the soil, the pruning, or various combinations of these factors. — E. C. Auchter.

1000. Stark, Paul C. The small orchard — how to make it profitable. Proc. Amer.
Pomol. Soc. 1917:99-106. 1918. — The author shows that the small home orchard plays an
important part in the nation's food supply. He compares the food value of fruits with
that of meats, etc. He points out, that as a whole the returns per acre are as large if not
larger from fruits as from other crops. In summarizing, he urges (1) that people plant and
grow back yard fruit gardens along with their vegetable gardens, (2) that every farm have its
own home orchard for home consumption and sell the surplus on the local markets; (3) that
farmers be shown how to renovate their neglected orchards so that they will be the best paying
part of the farm, and that they be shown how simple it is to produce first-class fruit instead
of wormy culls. — E. C. Auchter.

1001. Stewart, John P. Fertilization of apple orchards. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc.
1917:34-45. 1 pL, 1 fig. 1918. — The results of the past nine-years' experimental work in
apple orchard fertilization as carried on by the Pennsylvania experiment station is given.
Similar experiments were carried on in several different orchards throughout the state.
Applications of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash, singly and in different combinations, were
made in the various orchards. Tables showing the fruit yields and tree growths, as influ-
enced b}"- the various treatments, are given. The results in the Johnston orchard, 20 years
old at the start of the experiment, and in the Brown orchard, 21 years old at the start, show
that nitrogen (nitrate of soda) influenced the yields more than any of the other elements.
Greater returns from the nitrogen applications seemed to result when phosphorus was also
added. In j'ounger orchards such as the Strode orchard, nitrogen increased the growth of the
trees but did not materially increase the yield of fruit. In the Tyson orchard, potash seemed
to give the best results. A plan for local orchard fertilizer tests is given. It is stated that the
best time to apply the fertilizer, especially nitrogen, is in the early spring before the blos-
soms open. It should be spread over the surface of the ground beneath the spread of the
limbs. It is suggested that it might be well to apply part of the nitrogen before the blossoms
open and part after the fruit had set. — E. C. Auchter.

1002. Thayer, Paul, J. B. Keil, and W. J. Green. Varieties of apples adapted for Ohio
culture. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5': 252-255. 1920.— A discussion is given of
the relative merits of the banana and ensee varieties of apples for culture in Ohio. — R. C.
Thomas.

1003. Tufts, W. P. The so-called "New system of pruning." Monthly Bull. California
State Commission Hortic. 8: 424-42b. 1919. — The lighter the pruning, the heavier and
stockier the tree becomes. By intelligent pruning during the early life of the fruit tree, it
can be brought into bearing two or three years sooner than has generally been the case in
California. — Author reports upon data found in Bull. 313 of the University of California. —
E. L. Overholser.

1004. Wester, P. J. Vegetative propagation of tropical fruit. Proc. Amer. Pomol. Soc.
1917: 82-94. 9 pi., 40 fig. 1918. — Attention is drawn to the fact that there are great oppor-
tunities for improvement of the tropical fruits merely by the discovery of a practical method
of propagating the various species asexually. Considerable experimental work in shield

No. 2, March, 1921] HORTICULTURE 155

budding has been carried on by the writer with tropical fruits at the Lamao Experiment
Station, Philippine Islands. Brief directions for the vegetative propagation of 110 tropical
and semi-tropical fruits are given. — E. C. Auchter.

1005. White, E. W. Report of Assistant Horticulturist and Inspector of fruit pests,
Vancouver Island and Lower Mainland districts. British Columbia 14th Ann. Rept. Dept.
Agric. 1919: 15-19. 1920.

1006. White, E. W. The prospects in strawberries. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia]
4:178-179. 1919.

1007. White, E. W. The queen of fruits. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4: 47. 1919. —
A popular article on strawberry growing in British Columbia. — J. W. Eastham.

1008. Whitten, J. C. The relation of experiment station work to practical fruit growing.
Monthly Bull. California State Commission Hortic. 8 : 421-423. 1919.— The detail study of the
fruit tree, its structure, composition and nutrition, and the influence of heat, cold, etc., has
revealed the fruit tree as a living, plastic, shapable thing, which has a very sensitive response,
to the various stimuli of its environment. The revelation has completely revolutionized
the old systems of pruning.—^. L. Overholser.

1009. Yeager, A. F. Horticulture. North Dakota Agric. Coll. Ext. Circ. 40:13-16.
1920.— Discusses trees, shrubs, fruits, and vegetables for the state. — L. R. Waldron.

FLORICULTURE AND ORNAMENTAL HORTICULTURE

1010. Anonymous. Alpine plants for rock-gardens. [Rev. of: Farrer, R. The Eng-
lish rock-garden. Vol. 1. XIV + 504 p., 52 pi. Vol. 2. VIII + 554 p., 50 pi. T. C. and
E. C. Jack: London and Edinburgh, 1919.] Nature 104:664-666. 1 fig. 1920.— Reviewer
finds it "a real compendium of sound information and learning, though unduly biased in
certain respects" and burdened with superfluous language. — 0. A. Stevens.

1011. Anonymous. Aquarium exhibit. Missouri Bot. Card. Bull. 7:63-67. 1919. — A.
list of thirty plants suitable for aquaria. — O. T. Wilson.

1012. Anonymous. Native plants suitable for the gardens of Missouri and adjoining states.
Missouri Bot. Card. Bull. 8:35-46, 52-59, 63-67, 69-77, 85-94, 104-110. 1920.— Shrubs and
other plants are listed as follows : plants suitable for rock gardens; hardy native plants for the
water garden and native vines and climbing plants ; native trees and shrubs with conspicuous
flowers ; native perennials for the hardy border ; native perennials for natural and wild gardens,
and hardy native ferns and plant.s of similar culture; native shrubs for mass planting (flowers
inconspicuous); native trees and shrubs with brightly colored foliage in autumn and con-
spicuous fruit and bark in autumn and winter, and native evergreen trees and shrubs. —
O. T. Wilson.

1013. Anonymous. Commercial mushroom cultivation. Jour. Ministry Agric. Great
Britain 27: 678-680. 1920.

1014. Balfour, F. R. S. Rhododendron at Dawyck Stobo, Tweed-Dale. Rhododen-
dron Soc. Notes 1 : 223-224. 1920.— The hardiness of many species is recorded.— AZ/red
Rehdei-.

1015. Balfour, I. Bailey. Some large leaved Rhododendrons. Rhododendron Soc,
Notes 1 : 204-222. 1920.

1016. Bean, W. J. The Fortunei group of Rhododendrons. Rhododendron Soc. Notes 1 :
187-194. 1919.

156 HORTICULTURE [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

1017. DoMiNGUEZ, Ignacio. El cultivo de las plantas florales ornamentales. [Cultiva-
tion of ornamental plants.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5 : 208-218. 16 fig. 1919.— Outlines methods
of propagating ornamentals in general.— Jo/in A. Stevenson.

1018. Hopkins, S. H. A svpeet-pea farm on V[ancouver] I[sland], Agric. Jour. [British
Columbia] 4: 238. 1919.

1019. LoDER, Edmund Giles. List of Rhododendron species growing at Leonardslee,
near Horsham, Sussex, September, 1918. Rhododendron Soc. Notes 1 : 197-200. 1919.— A
list of about 200 species and a iew varieties, with introductory notes on the nomenclature of
some species. — Alfred Rehder.

1020. Magor, E. J. P. Notes from Lamellan Garden, 1919. Rhododendron Soc. Notes.
1: 229-231. 1920.— The flowers of some rare species are described, and three new hybrids
mentioned. — Alfred Rehder.

1021. Moore, H. Armttage. Rhododendrons at Rowallane, Co. Down. Rhododendron
Soc. Notes 1 : 233-235. 1920.— Notes on rare species.— ^Z/red Rehder.

1022. Se CREST, Edmund. Protection for shade trees. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp.
Sta. 5«: 163-169. 1920.— A discussion is given of the relative merits of various types of tree
guards in current use, and of the importance of tree surgery. — R. C. Thomas.

1023. Stoddard, W. B. Alaska flower and vegetable gardens. Seed World 8«: 17-18.
1920.

1024. Williams, J. C. Some notes on the raising of Rhododendron seedlings. Rhodo-
dendron Soc. Notes 1 : 237-238. 1920.

1025. Williams, P. D. Notes on Chinese Rhododendrons as grown in Cornwall. Rho-
dodendron Soc. Notes 1 : 239-240. 1920.— Chiefly notes on flowers of ornamental species.—
Alfred Rehder.

VEGETABLE CULTURE

1026. Burdett, James H. Summary of the first season's work of the national garden
bureau. Seed World 7^2 : 13-15. 1920.

1027. Hood, G. W. Keeping qualities of hubbard squash. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic.
Sci. 16: 186-188. (1919)-1920. Hubbard squashes were kept in storage from November 1
until last of March. The temperature of the storage room fluctuated between 40-50° F.
Fourteen average-sized specimens were placed in storage two succeeding years. The aver-
age shrinkage, due primarily to water loss, was 23.18 per cent; the greatest monthly shrinkage
was in March. — H. A. Jones.

1028. Hood, G. W. Varietal variations as seen in similar methods of training tomatoes.
Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 183-185 (1919)-1920.— Stone, June Pink, and Earliana varie-
ties of tomatoes were handled as follows in the open field: (1) staked and pruned to one stem,
(2) staked and not pruned, (3) pruned and not staked, and (4) neither staked nor pruned.
All varieties produced the greatest amount of ripe fruit when the vines were neither pruned
not staked. The Stone and June Pink produced the least amount of ripe fruit when the
vines were both staked and pruned, while the Earliana produced the least amount of
ripe fruit when pruned and not staked. In no case did the plants that were neither pruned
nor staked produce the maximum amount of green fruit at the end of the season. H. A.
Jones.

1029. Keil, J. B. Cellar storage of vegetables. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta.
S><>: 266-269. 1920.— The farm storage cellar is the type particularly in mind. The impor-
tance of keeping the storage sanitary and of maintaining correct temperatures is pointed out.

No. 2, iMarch, 1921] HORTICULTURE 157

Certain vegetables are classified according to the effect of freezing upon them. Proper stor-
age conditions for potatoes are outlined. The importance of a spring with running water for
regulating temperature and humidity is referred to. — R. C. Thomas.

1030. Keil, J. B. Home production of vegetable seeds. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp.
Sta. 5': 216-219. 1920. — This is a discussion of methods of selection, improvement, care,
and storage of vegetable seeds. — R. C. Thomas.

1031. Lloyd, J. W. The need of vegetable investigations. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic.
Sci. 16: 171-175. (1919)-1920.— The author cites the following lines of work as being espe-
cially in need of further investigation: (1) variety nomenclature, (2) structure and composition
of vegetables, (3) development of varieties tolerant of particular conditions, (4) disease resist-
ance and disease control, (5) manure substitutes, (6) storage, and (7) the preservation of
perishable produce. — H. A. Jones.

1032. McCall, F. E. The farm and garden. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic. Sci. 16: 188-190.
(1919)-1920. — Results are given of cooperative farm-garden demonstrations carried on in
South Dakota during the years 1916-1919, inclusive. — H. A. Jones.

1033. McMeans, a. Vegetable-seed growing on Pacific Coast. Agric. Jour. [British
Columbia] 4: 5. 1919.

1034. Rosa, J. T. Nature of hardening in vegetable plants. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hortic.
Sci. 16: 190-197. (1919)-1920.— Tomato represents the group of plants that cannot be hard-
ened to any great extent, while the cabbage and lettuce represent the group which develop
hardiness to a considerable degree. In hardening, cabbage becomes a lighter green and
often shows some pink coloration. The amount of bloom increases; leaves become more leath-
ery and stems more woody; there is a gradual increase in the percentage of dry weight; the
area of the palisade cells decreases; and the freezing point of the sap is lowered. Carbohy-
drate changes accompanying hardening are also significant. There is an accumulation of
sugar, but this increase is much greater in plants exposed to low temperature than in those
subjected to desiccation. "There is also an increase in starch and total polysaccharids in
hardened cabbage plants." Practices that slow up or check the rate of growth of cabbage,
lettuce, or tomatoes induce a greater degree of hardiness to cold. — H. A. Jones.

1035. WiRTHLE, F., AND E. Rheinberger. Uber Rangoonbohnen. [Lima beans.]
Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39: 346-349. 1920.— This article deals with
morphology and chemical composition of lima beans. The cyanide content of lima beans
from Wiirzburg varied from 6.1 to 12.2 mgm. in 100 grams. — H. G. Barbour.

HORTICULTURE, PRODUCTS

1036. Anonymous. La harina de platano. [Banana flour.] Agric. Mexicano y Hogar
36:180-181. 1920.

1037. Anonymous. La industria italiana del aceite de pepitas de uva. [The Italian
grapeseedoil industry.] Informacion Agric. [Madrid] 10: 406-408. 1920.— The method of
extraction is given. — John A. Stevenson.

1038. BaSo, Jose de. Conservacion de los racimos de uvea fresca. [Preservation of fresh
grapes.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5:265-267. 5 fig. 1919.— The author discusses various
methods of preserving and shipping fresh grapes, by using ground cork, sawdust, or other
materials. — John A. Stevenson.

1039. Brierly, W. G. Cider- and vinegar-making qualities of Minnesota apples. Minne-
sota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 185. 23 p., 5 fig. 1920.

158 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

1040. Campbell, C. H. Jelly. Jour. Indust. Eng. Chem. 12: 558-559. 1920. A
method for the quantitative determination of pectin is given. Ten cc. of filtered juice
is added drop by drop from a pipette, with vigorous stirring, to 180 cc. of alcohol. The solu-
tion is filtered, immediately dissolved in boiling distilled water, evaporated to dryness, heated
two hours at 70°C. in vacuo, weighed, burnt to ash, and reweighed. The loss in weight
multiplied by ten gives the percentage of pectin in the juice. — Henry Schmitz.

1041. Krug, O., and Hans Filchner. Die Weinerte 1919 in der Pfalz. [The 1919 yield
in the Palatinate.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39: 153-157. 1920.

1042. Kryz, F. Der essbare Anteil einiger westindischer Obstsorten. (Edible portion
of certain West Indian fruits.) Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 38: 366-367.
1919.

1043. Kryz, F. Der Gehalt der Karobenfriichte an essbarem Anteil und Samen. [Edible
portion and seed content of locust bean.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel
39:353-355. 1920.

1044. De Manjaries, Ramon. Aprovechamiento de orujos y alpechines de la aceituna.
[Utilization of olive bagasse.] Rev. Inst. Agric. Catalan de San Isidro 69: 261-263. 1920. —
The author advises the use of the waste products remaining after the oil is extracted from the
olive as fertilizers or for distillation. The material is said to yield the same products as
wood, the supply of which in Spain is very limited. — John A. Stevenson.

1045. ScHMiTT, R. Untersuchung von 1919-er Traubenmosten Frankens. [Musts of
Franconia.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39: 198-204. 1920.

1046. Sprinkmeyer, H., and O. Gruenert. Uber Vanillinerzeugnisse. [Vanilla prod-
ucts.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39: 145-148. 1920.— Methods of pre-
serving aroma. — H. G. Barbour.

1047. Wellenstein and Seiler. Uber Zuckerung und Saureruckgang von Moselweinen.
[Sugaring and souring of Mosel wine.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel 39:
1-30. 1920.

MORPHOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY OF VASCULAR

PLANTS

E. W. Sinnott, Editor

1048. Anonymous. [Rev. of: Small, James. The origin and development of the Com-
positae. Reprint No. II from the New Phytologist. 334 V- Wesley & Son.] Jour. Bot-
any 58: 202-204. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 333.

1049. H., W. P. [Rev. of : Church, A. H. On the interpretation of phenomena of phyllo-
taxis. Oxford Botanical Memoirs, No. 6. 58 p., 18 fig. 1920.] Jour. Botany 58: 228-230.
1920.

1050. Anonymous. A university course in botany. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Botanical
Memoirs. 4. Elementary notes on structural botany. 27 p. 5. Elementary notes on the repro-
duction of angiosperms. 24 p. Oxford Univ. Press: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 162.
1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 717.

1051. Arber, Agnes. On the leaf structure of certain Liliaceae, considered in relation to
the phyllode theory. Ann. Botany 34: 447-465. 88 fig. 1920.— The phyllode theory of the
monocotyledonous leaf is here applied in many selected cases from the Liliaceae, and the

No. 2, March, 1921] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 159

author's interpretation of the leaf structure on the basis of that theory is given. The species
studied belong for the most part to the Asphodeloideae and Allioideae. The evidence, which
is given in detail for each species studied, is considered to indicate that in different cases the
leaf is morphologically (1) leaf-base phyllode, (2) petiolar phyllode, (3) chiefly leaf-base with
small petiolar region, and (4) chiefly petiole with small leaf-base region. — W. P. Thom-pson.

1052. Arber, Agnes. The vegetative morphology of Pistia and the Lemnaceae. Proc.
Roy. Soc. London B. 91 : 96-103. 8 fig. 1920. — Engler's early work on lemnaceous homology
of Pistia is confirmed and extended. Presence of row of inverted bundles in "limb" of Pistia
indicates that it is a petiolar phyllode, and this finding is applied to Spirodela, in which the
inverted bundles are missing. In the latter plant, buds are borne in lateral pockets formed by
ligules on either side of limb or frond. In Pistia the limb is fused along its median line
with the rudimentary plant axis, leaving no space for axial buds; consequently buds occur
at one side in recessed pockets com.parable with those in Spirodela. — Paid B. Sears.

1053. Boodle, L. A. The mode of origin and the vascular supply of the adventitious
leaves of Cyclamen. Ann. Botany 34: 431-437 6 fig. 1920. — When seedling tubers of CycZa-
7nen are decapitated, adventitious leaves develop usually from near the margin of the cut and
occasionally from the cut surface itself. The development of these leaves and particularly of
their vascular supply is described. The internal tissues of the leaf are always derived from
the sub-epidermal tissues of the tuber; but the epidermis of the leaf may be either epidermal
or subepidermal in origin, depending on whether periderm had previously been developed.
The procambial strands develop rapidly from the leaf rudiment inwards, soon forming con-
nections with two or three bundles of the tuber. All the cells in a transverse section of a
strand are derived from a single cortical cell. No definite opinion is reached in regard to the
nature of the stimulus requisite for the initiation of the leaf trace, but reference is made to
Simon's conclusion that in somewhat analogous cases the stimulus depends on the distri-
bution of water in the tissues.— W^. P. Thompson.

1054. Brewster, A. A. Aril of Cupania and Synoum. Australian Nat. 4: 170. 1920.

1055. Brewster, A. A. Microzamia or burrawang. Australian Nat. 4:162-164, 167,
169. PI. 3. 1920. — A popular account of the morphology of the flower, seed, and seedling.—
T. C. Frije.

1056. Brown, Elizabeth Dorothy Wuist. Apogamy in Osmunda cinnamonea and O.
Claytoniana. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47:339-345. 10 fig. 1920.— Only one case has pre-
viously been reported of apogamy in Osmunda. Descriptions are given in this paper of
one case in 0. cinnamonea, and of three in 0. Claytoniana, but none occurred in cultures of
0. regalis. — P. A. Munz.

1057. Brown, Forest B. H. The silicious skeleton of tracheids and fibers. Bull. Torrey
Bot. Club 47: 407-424. 5 fig. 1920.— Secondary xylem, when it shrinks or swells, does not
change in length, yet details of anatomy have not shown why one dimension of the cells con-
cerned should vary independently of another. A study of the minute structure of the sec-
ondary thickening of the walls in fibers and tracheids of wood and in fibers of bast, shows
that there is a greater mineralization in parts of this wall than in the rest. These mineralized
tracts run longitudinally and form a skeletal structure going from one end of the cell to the
other. These rods imbibe little or no water and allow practically no change in length, but the
matrix between them, by swelling or shrinking, permits tangential or radial change in volume.
The structure of the fiber wall was found to be essentially the same in some 500 species
studied, the skeleton consisting of sparingly branched rods which become reticulate in the
vicinity of pits or have transverse connections. These skeleton rods seem to be silicious in
many cases, although there is variation in different families, genera, or even species as to com-
position. They can be demonstrated by partial combustion of a section on a slide, the por-
tions along the burned margin showing small noncombustible rods. — P. A. Munz.

160 MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

1058. Brown, J. G. The cycads. [Rev. of: Chamberlain, Charles J. The living
cycads. Univ. of Chicago Press: Chicago, 1919.] Plant World 22: 364-365. 1919.

1059. Browne, Isabel M. P. Phylogenetic considerations on the internodal vascular
strands of Equisetum. New Phytol. 19: 11-25. 7 fig. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1101.

1060. Btjgnon, p. Dans la tige des Graminees, certains faisceaux liberoligneux longi-
tudinaux peuvent etre des faisceaux gemmaires. [In the stem of grasses, certain longitudinal
fibrovascular bundles seem to arise from the "gemmaire" bundles.] Compt. Rend. Acad.
Sci. Paris, 170: 1201-1203. 4 fig. 1920.— The longitudinal bundles are prolongations of leaf
traces, but the transverse bundles at the nodes may be variously interpreted. The "gem-
maire" bundles of Poa annua may take a longitudinal course like those of the leaf traces.—
C. H. Farr.

1061. Drummond, Montagu. Besleria lutea Linn., a new example of water-calyx. Ann.
Botany 34:551-553. 1920.— A description is given of the water-calyx of Besleria lutea, a
Gesneraceous shrub native in the West Indies and South America. This is the first record of
a water-calyx in the family, most of the other examples being found in the related Bignoni-
aceae. The greatly inflated calyx tube is filled with a clear liquid from the early bud stage
until the corolla is fully open. The liquid is probably secreted by capitate glands on the
inner epidermis of the calyx.— IF. P. Thompson.

1062. Griebel, C. Die mikroskopische Untersuchung der Tee-und Tabakersatzstoffe.
[Microscopy of tea and tobacco substitutes.] Zeitschr. Untersuch. Nahrungs-u. Genussmittel
39:225-299. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1283.

1063. Grier, N. M. Notes on comparative regeneration in Elodea and Ceratophyllum.
Amer. Botanist 26: 80-84. 1920.— Segments of Elodea canadensis must contain a localized
bud- and root-forming region, which occurs about every tenth node, in order to regenerate.
Each segment of Ceratophylhim demersum seems capable of budding. If more than one node
is included in the segment, only certain favorably located buds develop.— S. P. Nichols.

1064. Hill, A. W. Studies in seed germination. Experiments with Cyclamen. Ann.
Botany 34: 417-429. PI. 20, 15 fig. 1920.— The seedling of Cyclamen possesses a single coty-
ledon and a rudimentary curved protuberance lying opposite to it. Morphological evi-
dence is given to show that this rudimentary organ is really a suppressed second cotyledon.
This evidence is supported by the results of experiments. It may be induced to develop by
the removal of the first cotyledon, and then responds to the removal of its lamina by regener-
ating a new lamina or new laminae, just as does the first cotyledon when its lamina only is
removed. Plumular leaves are unable to respond in this way. The seedling of Cyclamen,
therefore, through aberrant in type, is truly dicotyledonous in nature.— IF. P. Thompson.

1065. KusTER, Ernst. Botanische Betrachtungen iiber entwicklungsmechanische Be-
griffe. [Botanical considerations of the principles of the mechanics of development.] Natur-
wissenschaften 8: 453-457. 1920.— A discussion from the standpoint of the botanist of how
far the general principles of the mechanics of development, as formulated by Roox, apply
to theproblems in plant development. This issue is devoted to Roux's work and is in honor
of his seventieth birthday. — Orton L. Clark.

1066. Markle, M. S. Some abnormalities in plant structure. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci.
1918:117-124. 9 fig. 1920.— The author discusses briefly, and figures: some embedded
archegonia and antheridia of ferns; an embryo-sac of Lilium with cells all at one end; a
"3-story" reproductive branch of Vaucheria; and a megaspore tetrad of Selaginella with wall
around group instead of individual spores. — F. C. Anderson.

1067. Mattirolo, Oreste. Commemorazione di Saverio Belli. [Memorial to Saverio
Belli.] Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino 55: 8-30. 1919-1920. See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 704.

No. 2, March, 1<J'21] MORPHOLOGY, ETC., VASC. PLANTS 161

1068. Ogura, Yudsuru. Some observations on the growth in thickness of trees, especi-
ally with regard to that of Cryptomeria japonica. Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34 : 81-109. 1920.— An
English abstract of a fuller account in Japanese in the same volume. The author's observa-
tions agree in general with those reported by earlier observers except that he did not find
any close agreement between precipitation and the thickness of annual rings. — L. L.
Burlingame.

1069. [P., D.] James William Helenus Trail. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B, 91:vii-xl.
1920.— Born at Briasy, Orkney, Mar. 4, 1851; died Sept. 18, 1919. Classical and medical
education. 1873-75 naturalist South American expedition, displaying exceptional ability.
1877 became Professor of Botany at Aberdeen. Linnean Society, sometime editor Scottish
Naturalist, later botanical editor Annals Scottish Natural Histortj as well as member various
European learned societies, being well known for work on galls. President Botanical Section
British Association 1910. Death leaves unfinished Flora of Northeastern Scotland.— Paul
B. Sears.

1070. Patton, R. T. On the growth, treatment and structure of some common hardv/oods.
Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria 31 (N. S.) : 394-411. PI. 21, 7 fig. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry
811.

1071. RivETT, Maud F. The anatomy of Rhododendron ponticum L. and of Ilex aquifo-
lixmi L., in reference to specific conductivity. Ann. Botany 34:525-550. 1920.— See Bot.
Absts. 7, Entry 1297.

1072. S., M. James William Helenus Trail, M.A., M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S. New Phytol.
19 : 46-48. 1920.— A brief biography of Professor Trail. [See also Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1069.]—
7. F. Lewis.

1073. Sources, Ren£. Embryogenie des Solanacees. Developpement de I'embryon chez
les Nicotiana. [Embryogeny of the Solanaceae. Development of the embryo of Nicotiana.]
Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:1125-1127. 9 fig. 1920.— The proembryo develops as
does that of Chenopodium Bonus- Henricus, except that the apical cell of the two-celled stage
divides before the basal. The division of both these cells is horizontal. In these respects
it differs from Capsella. — C. H. Farr.

1074. St. John, Harold. A teratological specimen of Aralia hispida. Rhodora 22: 152-
153. 1920. — A description of an abnormal specimen of this species collected on Rattlesnake
Mountain, Tyrone, Blair Co., Pennsylvania, in which the umbels of the inflorescence seemed
from a distance to be crowned by tufts of green leaves instead of the white flowers or dark
angular fruits. Closer examination revealed several types of abnormality in the individual
flowers. Apparently the condition was not traumatic— James P. Poole.

1075. Uphof, J. C. Th. Contributions towards a knowledge of the anatomy of the genus
Selaginella. The root. Ann. Botany 34: 493-517. 13 fig. 1920.— The greater part of this
paper is devoted to a description of the histological details in the root and rhizophore of
eighteen species of Selaginella. Each species is taken up individually. The more general
results are as follows: There is no important anatomical difference in any species between root
and rhizophore, while both differ markedly from the stem, notably in lacking lacunae and
trabeculae; both are, moreover, negatively heliotropic. It is therefore concluded that the
rhizophores are true roots and not leafless stems, as is commonly believed. The vascular
system in both is monarch with well developed xylem; endodermis and pericycle are always
present; the elements of the phloem are arranged as in the stem. — W. P. Thompson.

1076. Uphop, J. C. Th. Physiological anatomy of xerophytic Selaginellas. New Phytol.
19:101-131. 12 fig. 1920.

162 MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY, BRYOPHYTES [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

1077. Weatherwax, Paul. A misconception as to the structure of the ear of maize.
Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 359-362. 6 fig. 1920.— The fact that the rows of an ear of corn
always occur in pairs and that, if one member of a pair is dropped part way up the ear, both
are, has led to the natural inference that "these irregularities are due to the discontinuance
of one or more rows of paired spikelets." Collins, in his recent theory as to the origin of the
ear, maintains that each pair of spikelets is yoked structurally with another pair on the oppo-
site side and that reduction in number from base to tip is due to the loss of spikelets from
yoked pairs. Observation, hov/ever, does not bear out Collins' contention. Examples are
given in which loss of only one pair, and not of yoked pairs, occurs. [See also Bot. Absts. 7,
Entry 246.]— P. A. Mum.

MORPHOLOGY AND TAXONOMY OF BRYOPHYTES

Alexander W. Evans, Editor

107S. Andrews, A. LeRoy. Tortula caroliniana, new species. Bryologist 23 : 72-76.
PL 5. 1920. — A description and figures of a new propaguliferous Tortula from North Caro-
lina are given, with extended discussion of its relationships and of the apparent identity
with it of certain specimens from central and western Mexico.—^. B. Chamberlain.

1079. Arnell, H. W., and C. Jensen. En bryologisk utflykt till Vastmanland. [A
bryological trip to Vastmanland.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. 12:298-323. 1918.— In the latter
part of September, 1915, the authors, in company with G. Samuelsson and E. Melin, visited
the northern portion of Vastmanland, Sweden, and the results of this trip are recorded in
the present paper. The bryophytes collected are first listed separately for each of the locali-
ties explored, with definite notes regarding substrata. A systematic catalogue of all the species
found is then given. This includes 87 hepatics, 29 Sphagna, and 190 mosses, giving a total
of 306 species. Two new varieties are described under Bryum inclinatum, and Martinellia
mucronata (H. Buch), originally published as Scapania niucronata, is proposed as a new com-
bination. In conclusion attention is again drawn to some of the more noteworthy forms
collected, and the various species of Sphagnum are tabulated according to their special
habitats.— M^ W. Gilbert.

1080. Brewster, A. A. Dawsonia polytrichoides, a hardy moss. Australian Nat. 4:
164-166, 168-169. PI. 4. 1920. — The author gives a somewhat popular discussion of the
structure and reproduction of Dawsonia polytrichoides R. Br. — T. C. Frye.

1081. Bryan, Geo. S. The fusion of the ventral canal cell and egg in Sphagnum subsecun-
dum. Amer. Jour. Botany 7: 223-230. PL U, 15. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 979.

1082. Dixon, H. N. Contributions to antarctic bryology. Bryologist 23:65-71. PL 4-
1920. — The article deals with two collections of mosses, one from Deception Island, South
Shetlands, and the other from South Georgia. Deception Isalnd, which has been isolated
from a remote period, is a high mountain shell surrounding a sea-filled crater; a small lagoon
fed by hot springs maintains a temperature considerably above the surrounding ocean.
These conditions seem unique. One small collection yielded 8 species of mosses, one of
which, Bryum crateris, was new to science. The moss flora of South Georgia contains about
45 per cent endemic species. In the present article 8 species are listed, two, Andreaea sub-
remotifolia and Verrucidens intermedius, being new to science. — E. B. Chamberlain.

1083. Fleischer, M. [Rev. of: Schiffner, V. Uber Lophozia Hatcheri und L. Bauer-
iana. (On Lophoria Hatcheri and L. Baueriana.) Oesterreich. Bot. Zeitschr. 66: 83-88.
Ifig. 1916.] Hedwigia 60: (Beiblatt) 35-36. 1918.— In comparing L. i^aic^eri of Patagonia
with the closely related L. Baueriana of Europe and North America Schiffner reached the
conclusion that these two species ought not to be considered synonyms. In commenting on

No. 2, March, 1921 J MORPHOLOGY AI>fD TAXONOMY, BRYOPHYTES

163

this conclusion the reviewer emphasizes the danger of regarding two similar plants as distinct
species merclj' because they occur in widely separated regions and are absent from inter-
vening areas. He shows how it is possible for a species to have a discontinuous distribution
of this type and advises that each case be decided on its own merits after careful study of
all available data.— A. W. Evans.

1084. Fleischer, M. [Rev. of: Timm, R. Neue wichtige Moosfunde aus dem nordwest-
lichen Deutschland. (Important new discoveries of mosses in northwestern Germany.)
Allg. Bot. Zeitschr. 1916: 17-27. 1916.] Hedwigia 60: (Beiblatt) 38. 1918.— The reviewer
expresses the opinion that certain species of Drepanocladus and Slereodon, listed by the author,
represent forms or varieties rather than true species.—^. W. Evans.

1085. Fleischer, M. [Rev. of: Kern, F. Beitrage zur Moosflora der Bayrischen Alpen.
(Notes on the moss flora of the Bavarian Alps.) Jahresber. Schles. Ges. Vaterl. Kultur. 1917:
1-6. 1917.] Hedwigia 60: (Beiblatt) 127-128. 1918.— The reviewer comments on the
nomenclature of a few of the mosses listed by the author.— .4. W. Evans.

1086. H[iERONYMUs], G. [Rev. of: Van den Broeck, H. Les muscinees de I'Herbier
beige du Jardin botanique de I'Etat Sl Bruxelles. (Bryophytes of the Belgian herbarium of
the National Botanical Garden at Brussels.) Bull. Jard. Bot. Bruxelles 4:243-303. 1914.]
Hedwigia 60: (Beiblatt) 129. 1918.— The reviewer emphasizes the importance of this con-
tribution to the bryophytic flora of Belgium.— il. W. Evans.

1087. Fleischer, M. Die Moosvegetation im Urwald von Bialowies. [The moss vege-
tation in the primitive forest of Bialowies.] .Bot. Jahrb. 55 (Beiheft) : 113-124. 1919.— See
Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1506.

1088. Haynes, Caroline C. Illustrations of six species of Riccia, with the original descrip-
■ tions. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47: 279-287. PL 10-13. 1920.— Descriptions and figures are

given of the following North American species of Riccia: R. Donnellii Aust., R. dictyospora
M. A. Howe, 7?. Beyrichiana Hampe, R. nrvensis Aust., R. hirta Aust., R. Curtisii James.—
P. .4. Mvnz.

1089. LoRCH, W. Die Torsionen der Laubmooseta. [Torsions in the setae of mosses.]
Hedwigia 61 : 40-91. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1351.

1090. Pearson, W. H. Diplophyllum taxifolium in Westmoreland. Naturalist 1918: 234.
1918.— The discovery of Diplophyllum taxifolium on Hart Crag, Westmoreland, England, by
L. J. Cocks, is reported. The species is new to the county of Westmoreland.— IF. H. Pearson .

1091. RiCKETT, H. W. Regeneration in Sphaerocarpos Donnellii. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club
47: .347-357. Fig. 1-25. 1920.— Regeneration, or the production of adventitious shoots from
vegetative tissue, was observed in Sphaerocarpos Donnellii either when the thallus as whole was
partly dead, or when portions of it were separated partly or wholly from the rest. In gen-
eral regeneration originates from a single cell, with a tendency in early stages toward a forma-
tion of a two-sided apical cell. A typical thallus develops from the first cell-mass in a way
analogous to the development of a mature thallus from the tube formed by a germinating
spore. — P. A. Munz.

1092. RxjBNER, K. [Rev. of: Grebe, C. Studien zur Biologic und Geographie der Laub-
moose. I. Biologie und Okologie der Laubmoose. (Studies on the biology and geography of
mosses. I. Biology and ecology of mosses.) Hedwigia 59: 1-208. 1917.] Forstwiss. Cen-
tralbl. 41 : 431-433. 1919.— See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 610.

1093. Theriot. I. Contribution a la flore bryologique de Madagascar. [Contribution to
Madagascan mosses.] Recueil Publ. Soc. Havraise Etudes Diverses 87: 95-111. PI. 1. 2.
1920.— The paper gives a list of 66 species of mosses and 8 of hepatics, the latter without

164 PALEOBOTANY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

data. The moss list contains precise statements of locality, together with distributional or
diagnostic notes upon many of the species, even the commonest. Campylopus Echernieri
Besch. and Amblysteguim riparium (L.) B. & S. are reported from Madagascar for the first
time, and the fruiting plant of Leucoloma albocinctum R. & C. is here first described. Funaria
delicatula, Brachymenium argenteum, Bryum Perrieri, Philonotis Perrieri, and Rhacopilum
Perrieri are described as new. There are likewise discussoins of Brachymenium capitulatum
Mitt, and its Madagascan occurerence; of the generic characters of N anomitriopsis R. & C,
and of the variability of Pogonatum subformosum Besch., a new variety being described
and figured. Leucomium mahorense Besch. is reduced to a synonym of L. debile (Sull.)
Mitt. — E. B. Chamberlain.

1094. Williams, R. S. Calymperaceae of North America. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 47:
367-396. PI. 15-17. 1920.— A discussion is given of the Calymperaceae to be treated in the
North American Flora and comprising the genera Syrrhopodon and Calymperes. In the former
genus are described the following species: S. rigidus Hook. & Grev., S. Bernoullii C. Miill.,
S. floridanus Sull., S. incompletus Schwaegr., S. Berterianus (Brid.) C. Mull., S. martini-
censis Broth, S. Gaudichaudii Mont., S. inflexus Mitt.,S. Husnoti Besch., S. flavescens C.
Mull., S. tenuifolius (Sull.) Mitt.,*S. lycopodioides (Sw.) C. Miill., S. recurvulus Mitt., S.
graminicola Williams sp. nov., S. elongatus Sull., S. texanus Su\l.,S. ligulatus Mont., 5. para-
siticus (Sw.) Besch., S. filigerus (Aust.) Williams comb, nov.; in Calymperes the following
are given: C. Richardi C. Miill., C. cubense Williams sp. nov., C. emersum C. Miill., C. disci-
forme C. Mull., C.Donnellii Aust., C.nicaraguense Ren. &Card., C. Herifeawdi Paris & Broth.,
C. Nashii Williams sp. nov., C. Guildingii Hook & Grev., C. lonchophyllum Schwaegr., C.
Levyanum Besch. and C.fluviatile'WiUiamssp. nov.— P. A. Mum.

1095. Williams, R. S. Sematophyllum Smallii, sp. nov. Bryologist 23:76-78. PI. 6.
1820.— Under the above name the author describes and figures a new moss from Florida.-
E. B. Chamberlain.

1096. Willis, M. A. Notes on two hepatics. Ann. Rept. and Trans. Manchester
Microsc. Soc. 1916: 44-45. 1918.— The author briefly describes the gametophytes of
Sphaerocarpus michelii and the capsule of Anthoceros laevis. — C. E. Allen.

PALEOBOTANY AND EVOLUTIONARY HISTORY

E. W. Berry, Editor

1097. Anonymous. Ancestral studies of Compositae. [Rev. of: Small, J. The origin
and development of the Compositae. New Phytol. Reprint No. 11. XI + SS4 p., 6 pi. Wm.
Wesley and Son: London, 1919.] Nature 105: 450. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 333.

1098. Akber, E. a. N. and F. W. Lawfield. On the external morphology of the stems
of Calamites, with a revision of the British species of Calamophloios and Dictyocalamites of
Upper Carboniferous Age. Jour. Linn. Soc. Bot. London 44:507-530. PI. 23-25. 1920.— A
treatment of the morphology of the rather rare casts or impressions of the external features
of Calamite stems with a short systematic revision of the best known British members of the
genera Calamophloios and Dictyocalamites, genera recently proposed by Arber for these
fossils in order that they may be distinguished from the much more common pith casts.
The following external features are discussed in detail: nodes, internodes, leaf scars, branch
scars, and root scars. There is much difliculty in correlating specimens showing external
features with those represented only by pith casts; this correlation, however, is made in
several cases. — A. J. Eames.

1099. Berry, Edward W. The geological history of the sweet gum and witch hazel.
Plant World 22 : 345-354. 2 fig. 1919.— The present distribution of the sweet gum and witch
hazel is shown on a map. The disconnected distribution is a sure indication of ancient line-

No. 2, March, 1921] PALEOBOTANY 165

age and a former occupation of areas where now they are extinct. The oldest authentic
fossils of sweet gum are found in the Eocene of Greenland, Alaska, and Oregon. Records
in the Oligocene are very rare, the only species having been found in Italy. The Miocene
shows nine species, surprisingly like the modern sweet gum. In the Pliocene the gums were
cosmopolitan in the northern hemisphere, but the succeeding glacial period killed them out
in Europe, whereas they survived in North America and Asia. High mountains and seas in
southern Europe prevented the escape of the gums to more genial climes in that conti-
nent ; but in Asia and North America southern migration and return after the glacial period
was possible. The witch hazels shows similar distribution today in America and Asia. Witch
hazel occurs as fossils in Europe before the glacial epoch, but is extinct there now. — Charles
A. Shull.

1100. Berry, E. W. Paleontology and pragmatism. Science 52:529-531. Dec. 3, 1920.

1101. Browne, Isabel M. P. Phylogenetic considerations on the internodal vascular
strands of Equisetum New Phytol. 19:11-25. 7 fig. 1920. — The internodal strands of
Equisetum are phylogenetic units that may conveniently be termed bundles, though it is not
suggested that they are in any strict sense equivalent to the ordinary internodal bundles
of angiosperms. The types of bundles found in axes of recent species are considered to have
been derived from a single continuous xylem strand, with the metaxylem on its flanks, by the
replacement of xylem with parenchymatous elements. — I. F. Lewis.

1102. Dahms, p. tJber rumanischen Bernstein. [On Roumanian Amber.] Centralbl. f.
Miner. 1920: 102-118. Fig. S. 1920. — The author discusses the sparingly fossiliferous fossil
gum or resin "Rumanite" from the Tertiary of Roumania. — E. W. Berry.

1103. Fisher, Hugo. Pfianzenmetamorphose und Abstammungslehre. (Plant meta-
morphosis and evolution.) Naturwissenschaften 8: 268-271. 1920. — The change is noted
from Goethe's concept of Morphologic and from its early descriptive literature to that of
modern developmental history of plant organs, in which through experimentation the inves-
tigator has obtained an insight into the causes underlying changes in plant forms. The deep-
ening of the meaning of plant metamorphosis when interpreted in light of the evolution of
plants is then pointed out with numerous examples. We see a development in a certain direc-
tion (Orthogenesis of Eimer) but no inheritance of acquired characters is proven. The
causes of such evolution are still unknown, but outer causes play only a small part. Meta-
morphosis is not purposeful except, perhaps, in certain cases, such as adaptations found in
changes from a water to land habitat. — Orton L. Clark.

1104. Florin, Rudolf. Einige chinesische Tertiarpflanzen. [Chinese tertiary plants.]
Svensk. Bot. Tidskrift 14: 239-243. Fig. 11. 1920.— The author records the following Ter-
tiary plants from near Han-nor in Mongolia: Pinus sp., Comptonia anderssonii n. sp., Car-
pinus sp., and Phyllites. — E. W. Berry.

1105. Johansson, Nils. Neue Mesozoische Pflanzen aus Ando in Norwegen. [New
Mesozoic plants from Ando in Norway.] Svensk. Bot. Tidskrift 14: 249-257. Fig. 2S. 1920.
— From the upper Jurassic or Lower Cretaceous of Ando — the only known Mesozoic plant
locality in Norway — the author records Cladophlebis, Taeniopteris, Feildenia, and three
species of Sciadopitytes, of which two — S. lagerheimii and S. persulcata — are considered as
new. — E. W. Berry.

1106. Krasser, F. Die Doggerflora von Sardinia. [The Dogger flora of Sardinia.]

Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien 1 (no. 129) : 3-26. 1920.— In a continuation of previous studies
the author records 37 species of plants from the middle Jurassic of Sardinia. Twenty-three
of these are common to the Oolite of the English Yorkshire coast region. A new William-
sonialian fructification is described as Laconiella sardinica, an Araucarian seed is described
as Araucarites sardinicus, and a new type of stem is described as Sardoa robitscheki. — E. W.
Berry.

166 PALEOBOTANY [BoT. Absts,, Vol. VII,

1107. Kryshtofovich, A. A fossil walnut from Tsurumi in the district of Konagawa,
Japan. Jour. Geol. Soc. Tokyo. 1920. 6 p., 1 pi. 1920.— The author describes a walnut
close to the existing Juglans sieholdiana from the supposed Tertiary of Tsurumi, Japan.—
E. W. Berry.

1108. Mayas, G. Funde neuer Pflanzenreste aus dem Kulm von Chemnitz-Borna. [New
fossil plants from the Culm (Lower Carboniferous) of Chemnitz-Borna.] XX Bericht Naturw.
Gesell. Chemnitz. 55-68. 1 fig., -4 pl- 1920.— The author records the following from the
Lower Carboniferous of Chemnitz-Borna: Fourteen Archaeopteridae, of which Adiantites
neuropteroides, Sphenopieridium beckerti, S. divaricatum, and S. latilobatum are new;
thirteen Sphenoptcridae, of which Rhodea minima and R. nindeli are new; two Pecopteridae;
tw^o Neuropteridae; and two ferm stems.— £'. W. Berry.

1109. Menzel, p. tJber Pflanzenreste aus Basalttuflfen des Kamerungebietes. [On
plant fossils from the Basalt tuff of Kamerum.] Beitr. Geol. Erfors. Deutschen Schutz-
gebiete 18: 17-32. Fig. 6, pl. 1. Geol. Landesanstalt: Berlin, 1920.— The author lists 234
species in 48 families of tropical African plants preserved in a volcanic tuff in Kamerun, one
of the former German colonies in western Africa. The only species described and figured
is a species of Sterculia close to the existing S. tragacantha Lindley. All of the fossils are
extremely close to still-existing species of the region, and their age is not determined, but
may be anything from late Tertiary to recent. The probabilities all point to the very modern
age of the fossil flora.— E. W. Berry.

1110. MoHR, H. tJber Funde von Holzkohle im Loszlehm von St. Peter bei Gratz. [On
the finding of Lignite in the loamy loess at St. Peter near Gratz.] Ver. Geol. R.-A. 1919: 327-
332. 1919.— The author records lignite in the loamy loess of the Pleistocene from near Gratz
in Styria.— -E. W. Berry.

nil. MooDiE, R. L. Thread moulds and bacteria in the Devonian. Science 51:14.
Jan., 1920.— While making a study of the skeletal parts of ancient vertebrates, the attention
of the writer was attracted to enlarged and distorted shapes of lacunae in the carapace of
Borthriolepis and Coccosteus, and to the occurrence of thread moulds and bacteria in the
lacunar spaces. The course of growth of these organisms is briefly described. The conditions
as outlined by the author are regarded as those of decay of ancient times, and not of disease.
He considers that agents of decay similar to those of the present time have been at work for
many millions of years, at least since Devonian times.— A. H. Chivers.

1112. MooDiE, R. L. Evolution's most romantic moment. Sci. Monthly. 11:464-469.
5 fig. 1920.— The Mazon creek in northern Illinois has just cut through 40 feet of glacial
deposit and into the shales and rock of the Coal Period. These red shales contain an occa-
sional rounded nodule which cracks open and reveals a Paleozoic insect, fish, leaf, or one of
the first animals with legs, such as our present day mud-puppies.— L. Pace.

1113. Moore, R. L. Ancient bacteria and the beginnings of disease. Sci. Monthly 11:
362-364. 1920.— Germs are among the oldest inhabitants of the earth. Walcott discov-
ered bacteria in the oldest fossil-bearing rocks of North America in central Montana. They
were rock builders and were found in association with algae. An analogous form is especi-
ally active in the Coral reefs in the West Indies today. These ancient ones are called Micro-
coccus. They were harmless. It is only after the Coal Period that infected wounds are
found. The action of early parasites on the shells of ancient animals is the oldest evidence
of disease.— Early man may have acquired some of his diseases from animals; for, as seen
from the diseased appearance of their bones, men of the stone ages were often afflicted with
the same maladies as the cave-inhabiting animals.— L. Pace.

1114. NiNDEL, F. Ein Beitrag zur Foyolia sterzeliana (Weiss) aus dem OberKulm von
Chemnitz-Borna. [Notes on Fayolia sterzeliana from the upper Culm (Lower Carboniferous)
of Chemnitz-Borna.] XX Bericht Naturw. Gesell. Chemnitz. 49-54. Fig. 3. 1920.

No. 2, March, 1921] PALEOBOTANY 167

1115. Patton, R. T. Notes on eucaljrpt leaves occurring in the tertiary beds at Bulla.
Proc. Roy. See. Victoria 31 (N. S.) : 362-363. 1919. — Fossilleaves were found in fine muclstone
deposited along the banks of the stream beneath the newer basalt. They were among other
leaves and lycopodinaceous casts and casts of crushed stems. The material was not sufficient
for positive identification. All leaf specimens were of one general type: moderately broad,
lanceolate, and slightly falcate; with marginal vein moderatelj"^ rem.ovcd from edge, slightly
indented; with lateral veins diverging at an angle of 50°, and margin fading into petiole.
Leaves are beyond earliest stage of eucalypt evolution and show resemblances to E. rostrata.—
Eloiae Gerry.

1116. Raineri, R. Alghe fossili corallinacee della Libia. [Some fossil Corallinaceae
from Libya.] Atti della Soc. Ttal. Sci. Nat. e del Museo Civico Milano. 59: 137. 1920.— The
author calls attention to the abundant algal flora preserved in the Upper Cretaceous, Ceno-
manian, and Turonian stages in the territories of Homs and Cussabat in northern Tripoli.
The following forms are recorded from Africa for the first time: Archeolithoihamniwn turoni-
cuni Rothpletz, A. aff. gosaviense Rothpletz, A. Paronai n. sp., Lithothamnium amphiroae-
fonnis Rothpletz, Lithothamnium or Corollina sp. indet., Amphiroa Mottiroliana n. sp., and
Arthrocardia cretacica n. sp. This is the first record of the genera Amphiroa and Arthrocardia
in the Cretaceous, neither having been heretofore known in deposits earlier than the Tertiary.
— R. Pampanini.

1117. Rather, F. A. Fossils and life. Sci. Monthly 11: 429-435. 1920.— Extracts from
an address given at the Cardiff meeting of the British A. A. S. Form, habitat, tempo of evo-
lution, the rhythm of life, and the future and man's relation to it arc discussed, using only
animal fossils as illustrations. — L. Pace.

1118. Strausz, E. Ein verkieselter Kletterfarn von Chemnitz-Hilbersdorf. [A silicified
climbing fern from Chemnitz-Hilbersdorf.] XX Bericht Naturw. Gesell. Chemnitz. 46.
1920. — Records a silicified Zygopteris from the Carboniferous of Chemnitz-Hilbersdorf. —
E. W. Berry.

1119. Strausz, E. Eine Medullosa stellata mit Blattnarben. [A Medulla stellata with
leaf scars.] XX Bericht Naturw. Gesell. Chemnitz. 47-48. 2 fig. 1920.— The author
describes a stem of Medullosa stellata from the middle Rothliegende (Permian) which shows
leaf scars. — E. W. Berry.

1120. Stutzer, O. Uber Torfdolomite in Kohlenfiozen. [On calcareous concretions in
coal.] Braunkohle. 19: 146-147. 1920. — A summary of the old discussion by Stopes and
Wat.son on the calcareous concretions "Coal balls" found in the British Coal Measures. —
E. W. Berry.

1121. T(ansley), a. G. The evolution of plants. [Rev. of: Church, A. H. Thalassio-
phyta and the subaerial transmigration. Oxford Bot. Mem. 3. 99 p. Oxford Univ. Press:
London, 1919.] New Phytol. 19: 1-10. 1920.

1122. Thomson, J. A. The system of animate nature. 2 vol. 23 cm. H. Holt and Co. :
New York, 1920.

1123. WiELAND, G. R. Recedent lake shores of the Cretaceous. Science 52:537-538.
1920. — Tufaceous concretions in the southern Black Hills and near Medicine Bow, Wyoming,
are thought to mark the receding shores of Cretaceous lakes, and these concretions are thought
to be indicative of algal activity. — E. W. Berry.

1124. Zalessky, M. D. Uber einen durch eine Zyanalge gebildeten marinen Sapropel
silurischen Alters (Kuckersit). [A Silurian blue-green algal marine Sapropelite.] Centralbl.
f . Miner. 1920 : 77-94. Fig. 10. 1920.— The author describes the new genus Gloeocapsomorpha,
a supposed blue-green alga, Cyanophyceae, which forms the Silurian Sapropelite known as
Kuckersite. — E. W. Berry.

168 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

PATHOLOGY

G. H. Coons, Editor
C. W. Bennett, Assistant Editor

PLANT DISEASE SURVEY; REPORTS OF DISEASE OCCURRENCE AND SEVERITY

1125. Anontmoxjs. [Rev. of: Jar vis, E. Sugar cane diseases at Highleigh. Cairns
Post.] Australian Sugar Jour. 12: 363. 1920.— Reports presence of a sugar-cane disease at
Highleigh, near Gardonvale, which was due to the presence of the very free occurrence of two
fungi— cane rust ( Uromyces Kuhnii) and Cercospora sacchari—th&t normally cause little or
no injury. These fungi are always more or less in evidence on older leaves of half-grown
cane, but this year owing to wet weather they multiplied in places to injurious degree. If
these appear in March or April it is suggested that the lower leaves be stripped and burned
at once, but only when the trouble may be considered as being likely to extend to and
destroy young foliage. If the disease appears at the end of June or July, the risk of damage
is far less, for the sunny weather checks the growth of the fungus. Such factors as proper
cultivation, drainage, manuring, and the planting of varieties less susceptible to leaf dis-
eases and the burning of trash after harvesting, are to be recommended.— S. Koch.

1126. Arnaud, G. Notes de Pathologie vegetale. [Phytopathological notes.] Bull. Soc.
Path. Veg. France 7 : 54^56. 1920.— Report of observations in the department of Gard,
France, April, 1920. The diseases are regarded as due to a period of dry, north winds. The
following diseases, which had apparently developed during a moist period preceding the
dry period, were observed: Peach pocket {Exoascus deformans) on peach and almond; Cory-
neum beijerinckii on walnut, peach, apricot, almond, cherry, and prune; Monilia cinerea on
cherry; Taphrina bullata and Nectria ditissima on pear; Stromatinia cydoniae on cydonia;
Cycloconium oleaginum on olive; and chlorosis of grape. — C. L. Shear.

1127. Arthur, J. C. Two destructive rusts ready to invade the United States. Science
51 : 246. 1920.— Two rusts which seem to have possibilities of great harm, but which have not
yet invaded the United States, are mentioned. The first is Uredo arachidis, a rust of peanuts,
which is widely distributed in South America and is common in the West Indies. The rust has
been known to mycologists since 1884, but only recently has it attracted the attention of the
cultivator. Mr. Robson reports from Montserrat that in some years the disease is a serious
menace to the peanut crop of the British West Indies. This rust appears to be working its
way northward, since it was reported from Porto Rico in 1913, and from Cuba in 1915. The
second rust, Puccinia pitteriana, infects potatoes and tomatoes. It was found in Costa
Rica in 1904 and 1916, and in Ecuador in 1918. Only one kind of spore, the teliospore, is
produced in the life cyple, and this spore germinates at once. The habit of this fungus and
its mode of distribution are essentially those of the hollyhock rust. The author points out
that both of the above rusts may be capable of great damage if established in a region where
suitable host crops are extensively grown. — .4. H. Chivers.

1128. Baudys, E. Prinos gljiva Bosne i Hercogovine. [Fungous flora of Bosnia and
Herzgovinia.] Glasnik zemaljskog Muzeja u Bosni i Hercegovini 30: 317-328. (1918)-1919.—
Phaneroascus quercinus n. g., n. sp. (Plectascineae) on living leaves of Quercus schneideri.
Phyllosticta allii n. sp. on living leaves of A. ampeloprasum. AUernaria holcina (new?) on
Holcus mollis.— Midgedium panciHi is a new host for Puccinia mulgedii. [Through abst. by
Matouschek in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 30: 147. 1920.]— D. Reddick.

1129. Birmingham, W. A. A condition resembling American "peach rosette." Agric.
Gaz. New South Wales 31: 581-582. 1 fig. 1920.— Conditions appeared upon young trees,
cions of which had come from America. This disease has evidently been unknown from
Australia. Descriptions and suggestions for control are given.— L. R. Waldron.

No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 169

1130. Cockayne, A. H. Fire blight. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 15&-157. 1920.—
Fire blight due to Bacillus amylovorus has appeared in New Zealand. Control methods are
suggested, and hope of eradication is expressed. — N. J. Giddings.

1131. Cruchet. Etudes mycologiques. Les champignons parasites du "brome dresse,"
Bromus erectus Huds. [Fungous parasites of B. erectus.] Bull. Soc. Vandoise Sci. Nat. 51:
583-586. 1918.

1132. Drayton, F. L. The essentials of a Dominion plant disease survey. Ann. Kept.
Quebec Soc. Protection of Plants 12: 31-33. 1920.— A paper pointing out the advantages to
be derived from a well-organized plant-disease survey of the Dominion of Canada and the
necessity for cooperation in this survey. — B. T. Dickson.

1133. DucoMET, V. Un oidium de la pomme de terre. [A powdery mildew of the potato,]
Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7: 57-58. 1920.— An oidium is reported on potato (var. Czarine)
in Lotet-Garonne in September. Several species have been reported on potato. It is thought
this is probably Erysiphe polygoni, which was also found on weeds among the potatoes. —
C. L. Shear.

1134. Eastham, J. W. Report of the Provincial Plant Pathologist. Dept. Agric. British
Columbia Ann. Rept. 14:41-44. 1920.— Yellow rust of raspberries (Phragmidium imitans)
caused some alarm by its unusual prevalence early in the season, but did not seem to result
in much injury to the crop. Gymnoconia interstitialis has not been recorded in British Colum-
bia. Walnut bacteriosis ( Pseudomonas jiiglandis) was severe on certain trees near Vancouver.
Western tomato blight (cause uncertain) brought about loss in the southern Okanagan.
Experimental spraying for the control of apple tree anthracnose (Neofabraea malicorticis)
shows that one early application of 3-4-40 Bordeaux mixture gave good control, and in the
case of the variety chosen (Baldwin) gave no extra cost in marketing, the spray material
having all disappeared from the fruit during storage preceding packing. As a result of spray-
ing, the fruit also kept better. — J. W. Eastham.

1135. MtJLLER, N. C. Bericht iiber die Tatigkeit der Agrikulturchemischen Kontroll-
station und der Versuchsstation fiir Pflanzenkrankheiten der Landwirtschaftskammer fiir die
Provinz Sachsen fur die Jahre. 1916 und 1917. Halle a. s. 60 p. 1918.— On pages 25 to 29 E.
MoLz reports on diseases occurring in the province. Early blight of potato (A. solani) was
wide-spread. Ftisarium culmorum in roots of asparagus was investigated. Stem rot of red
clover (Gloeosporium caulivorum) occurred to the extent of 50 to 60 per cent. [Through abst.
by: O. VON K[irchner1 in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 30: 22. 1920.]— D. Reddick.

1136. Pachano, Abelardo. La enfermedad de California o de Anaheim. [The California
vine disease.] QuintaNormalEstac.Expt.Circ.il. 8 p. 1918.— The California vine disease
has been discovered at Ambato, Ecuador. The symptoms are described, and the theories as
to the cause are reviewed. — F. M. Blodgett.

1137. PtJTTEMANS, A. Sur I'Oidium du Chene au Brazil. [The powdery mildew of oak in
Brazil.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7: 37-40. 1920.— Quercus pedunculata, which has
been introduced into Brazil, has been found to be attacked by several fungi, and in 1912 the
powdery mildew was first observed on it in the vicinity of San Paulo. The disease was so
severe in September and October that the plants were defoliated. The weather was cold and
wet.— The fungus is thought to have been introduced from Europe. In order to determine
whether or not the conidia would live for a sufficient period to allow of transmitting the dis-
ease from Europe to Brazil, experiments were tried, and it was found that the spores retained
the power of germination for a period of from ten to twelve days; this would permit of its
transporation from Madeira to Brazil. — C. L. Shear.

1138. Ramirez, Roman. Dos parasites de la remolacha. [Two beet parasites.] Rev-
Agric. [Mexico] 5: 141-142. 1 fig. 1919.— An insect pest and a leaf spot due to Septoria sp.
are reported on the beet (Beta vulgaris). — John A. Stevenson.

170 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

THE PATHOGENE (BIOLOGY, INFECTION PHENOMENA, DISPERSAL)

1139. BisBY, G. R. Studies of Fusarium disease of potatoes and truck crops in Minne-
sota. Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 181. 58 p., 11 pi., SO fig. Mar., 1919.— Fusarium
oxysporum is the cause of potato wilt. It may attack any part of the potato plant and may
cause rot of the seed tuber under field conditions. In the fall it may attack plants which have
previously produced a normal crop of tubers. Tubers from affected plants are less satis-
factory for planting than those from healthy plants. Any measures which tend to keep the
plants vigorous, particularly during the latter part of the season, lessen the danger of wilt. —
Fusarium discolor sulphureum gains entrance through wounds or through the uninjured sur-
face, and causes dry rot in storage potatoes. Tubers from normal potato vines are subject
to this rot. None of the varieties tested were resistant to this dry rot. It may develop on
unsprouted tubers even under dry conditions at temperatures below 2°C. At temperatures
below 16°C. this fungus produces abundant aerial mycelium, and at 20° to 30°C. a dense
pseudopionnotes. This fungus does not affect the starch grains. Wilt in potato plants is
not produced, but affected tubers may produce weak sprouts or none. — Careful handling to
avoid injury and cleanliness in storage houses are important measures in avoiding injury
by rot. The indications are that wilt- or root-rot-producing species of Fusarium may
show a selective tendency toward host plants. No single species of Fusarium is responsible
for storage rots in vegetables, cucumbers, and tomatoes. Species of Fusarium were found
to produce substances that inhibited the germination of spores of the same or other species.
After being boiled, solutions of these substances allowed normal germination. Fusarium
produced substances injurious to excised leaves of potato, coleus, and ragweed. Boiling
did not destroy this property. The species of Fusarium examined could withstand drying,
low temperatures, and alternate thawing and freezing. They were able to utilize a wide
variety of food substances. — A. C. Amy.

1140. Clinton, G. P., and McCormick, Florence A. Artificial infection of pines with
Cronartium ribicola. Amer. Plant Pest Committee Bull. 4: 12. 1920.— Same work as re-
ported in Connecticut Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 214: 428-459. PI. 37-43. 1916-1918.— See Bot.
Absts. 6, Entry 225.

1141. Dastur, J. F. The mode of infection by smut in sugar cane. Ann. Botany 34:
391-397. Fig. 1-10. 1920.— Experiments with sugar-cane smut ( Ustilago sacchari) showed
that infection takes place in susceptible "thin" varieties through the tender buds, but not
through old buds unless wounded. The infecting germ tube was found to enter the host
tissues through unthickened scale hairs. Infection did not occur through the cut ends of the
sets. "Thick" varieties of cane were only infected through wounded tender buds.— R^ P.
Fraser.

1142. Jensen, C. N. Blossom infection by smuts. Utah Acad. Sci. 1: 106-113. 1918.—
Paper presented to the Academy, April, 1913. A review of the work of Brefeld on infection
processes in the Ustilagineae. — D. Reddick.

1143. KuNKEL, L. O. Further data on the orange rusts of Rubus. Jour. Agric. Res. 19:
501-512. PI. D {colored) and 92-94. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 367.

1144. Schweizer, Jean. Die Spezialisation von Bremia lactucae Regel. [Specialization
of B. 1.] Verhandl. Schweiz. Naturf. Gesell. 99: 224. 1918.— Abst. in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr.
30:24. 1920.

1145. TocHiNAi, YosHiHiKo. Studics on the food relations of Fusarium lini. Ann.
Phytopath. Soc. Japan P: 22-33. 1920.~See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 419.

1146. Treherne, R. C. Synopsis Report of the Dominion Entomological Branch in British
Columbia. Dept. Agric. British Columbia Ann. Rept. 14:49-53. 1920. [Also Agric. Jour.
British Columbia 5: 25-29.]— Includes observations on insect carriers of fire blight (Bacillus

No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 171

amylovorus). Empoasca mali and Lygus pratensis were shown to be carriers. "So far as early
spring distribution is concerned, ants, honey-bees, click-beetles, apple aphis, and bark beetles
are incriminated. Of the click-beetles, Cardiophorus fenestralus was observed commonly
on the stumps of pear trees which had been cut down for blight and was seen to be feeding
on blight exudate." — /. W. Eastham.

1147. TuBEUF, C. V. Riickinfection mit Peridermium pini (Cronartium asclepiadeum)
von der Schlangenwurz auf die Kiefer. [Infection with Peridermium pini (Cronartium ascle-
piadeum) from snake root to the pine.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst- u. Landw. 18: 99-101.
1920. — Infection was secured on the green shoot and primary needles of 2-year old pine seed-
lings with teliospores from Cynanchnm vincetoxicum in August of 1915. At the end of Sep-
tember, 1919, the region beneath the lowest whorl of one of the pines was swollen and covered
around with yellow bead-like pycnidial masses. The three upper internodes showed no
infection. — /. Roeser.

1148. Wartenweiler, A. Zur Biologic der Gattung Plasmopara. [Biology of the genus P.]
Verhandl. Schweiz. Naturf. Gesell. 99: 223-224. 1918.— Abstract in Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr. 30:
24. 1920.

1149. WoBER, A. Die fungizide Wirkung der verschiedenen Metalle gegen Plasmopara
viticola Berl. et de Toni und ihre Stellung im periodischen System der Elemente. [Fungicidal
action of different metals on Plasmopara viticola.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenkrankh. 30: 51-59.
1920.

THE HOST (RESISTANCE, SUSCEPTIBILITY; MORBID ANATOMY AND

PHYSIOLOGY)

1150. Anonymous. The red coloring matter of plant galls. [Rev. of: M. Nierenstein.
Trans. Chem. Soc. 1919 (cxv) : 1328-1332.] Nature 104:707. 1920.— See Hot. Absts. 7,
Entry 408.

1151. Bailey, C. H., and A. M. Gurjar. Respiration of cereal plants and grains. V.
Notes on the respiration of wheat plants affected with stem rust. Jour. Biol. Chem. 44: 17-18.
1920. — The rate of respiration of the infected plants was materially lower than that of the
sound plants. — G. B. Riggs.

1152. Bertrand, Gabriel. Action de la chloropicrine sur les plantes superieures. [The
effect of chloropicrine on the higher plants.] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170:8.58-860.
1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 438.

1153. Boodle, L. A. The scorching of foliage by sea-winds. Jour. Ministry Agric.
Great Britain 27: 479-486. 1920.— A theoretical discussion of some of the literature bearing
on the subject from which the general conclusion reached is "that the scorching of foliage
by sea-winds is chieflj' due to the drying action of the wind, but that salt may perhaps occa-
sionally contribute towards the production of an injurious effect." — M. B. McKay.

1154. Brick, C. Die Widerstandsfahigkeit gewisser Sorten unserer Kulturpflanzen
gegen Parasiten. [The resistance of certain varieties of our cultivated plants to parasites.]
Naturwiss. Wochenschr. 18:391-394. 1919.— Susceptibility of plants to diseases is not due
to degeneration, old age, and other similar causes enumerated by practical horticulturists,
but usually is the result of certain differences in morphological or anatomical structures of
the host itself. The increased acid and sugar content or tannin also have a bearing upon the
resistance of a variety to parasites. Some plants escape because their season of blossoming
or maturimg does not coincide with the development of the parasitic organism. These state-
ments are supported by citations of literature dealing with susceptibility and resistance to
Tilletia iritici, Ustilago tritici, U. nuda, Puccinia glumarum, P. triticina, P. graminis, P.

172 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

dispersa, P. malvacearum, Phytophthora infestans, Plasmopara viticola, Fusicladium den-
dritium, Sphaerotheca mors-uvae. Hemileia vastatrix, Chrysophlyctis endobiatica, Fusarium
vasinfectum, F. tracheiphilum, F. niveum, and Heterodera radicicola. — Charles Chupp.

1155. Ehbenberg, p. Der Einflusz des Bodens und der Diingung auf Pflanzenkrank-
heiten. [The effect of soil and manuring upon plant diseases.] Fuhlings Landw. Zeitung 68:
402-412. 1919. — A popular discussion touching on various soil conditions and various manurial
additions to the soil that may directly or indirectly cause plant diseases. — A. T. Wiancko.

1156. Fofix, Et. La necrose du liber de la tige der pomme de terre atteinte de la maladie
dite "de I'enroulement." [The necrosis of the wood of the stem of potato occurring in the
disease called "leaf roll."] Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 170: 133(>-1339. 1920.— At the
beginning of the necrosis there is first a pectic reaction with ruthenium red safranin, or
carmin alum. Later there appears lignin and either cutin or suberin. It therefore appears
that the disease is in the nature of a pectic degeneration. — C. H. Farr.

1157. Heinricher, E. Zur Kenntnis der Verhaltnisse zwischen Mistel und Birnbaumen.
[Relation between mistletoe and pear.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenkrankh. 30:41-51. 1 fig. 1920. —
In certain localities mistletoe occurs on pear trees very abundantly; in others it is exceed-
ingly rare. An attempt is made to explain this contrast and especially the local frequency
of the "pear mistletoe." It is emphasized that abundant development of the mistletoe on
the main trunk of pear trees, particularly of younger trees, is most injurious. Several cases
are referred to in which young bearing trees were killed through attacks by the mistletoe.
In nature, however, attacks occur less frequently on young trees than on older ones. An
infection of the main axis of young trees is not frequent. Mistletoe prefers tree tops. One
case is related wherein a pear tree reacted most rapidly against a first infection with mistle-
toe. A second infection also failed at first, but developed later with considerable vigor.
This case, the author states, is of interest, since it does not seem to permit of any other expla-
nation, but that the reactions against seed and viscin of mistletoe are due to antagonistic
action of the pear tree. The author suggests the possibility of the development of an "anti-
toxin" in the pear tree through the toxin of the mistletoe. — H. T. Giissow.

1158. JoDiDi, S. L., S. C. MouLTON, AND K. S. Markley. The mosaic disease of spinach
as characterized by its nitrogen constituents. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42 : 1061-1070. 1920. —
See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 442.

1159. JoDiDi, S. L. A mosaic disease of cabbage as revealed by its nitrogen constituents.
Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 42: 1883-1893. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 441.

1160. Levine, Michael. The behavior of crown gall on the rubber tree (Ficus elastica).
Proc. Soc. for Experimental Biology and Medicine 7: 157-158. 1920.— After summarizing
briefly the present status of studies upholding the crown gall in its analogy to animal cancer,
the author reports that "It was found that Bacterium tumefaciens inoculated into the apical
internode of the branches, into the leaves or main stem of the rubber tree, Ficus elastica,
stimulates the development of a neoplasm in the region of inoculation of a benign or malig-
nant nature. The crown galls so formed, in this plant, are of two kinds, one in which growth
is uniform and appears to be a swelling, the other is the characteristic convoluted type indi-
cating a peripheral growth of isolated nodules. The crown gall in Ficus elastica after a
number of months of active growth becomes hard and finally dies. This is associated with the
differentiation of the tissue which converts the gall into a mass of parenchymatous cells and
nodules of woody fibers. The central portion of the crown gall which generally lies near
the wood cylinder disintegrates. — The invasion of the stem by the new growth does not
destroy the entire conducting system of the stem, yet that portion of the stem above the gall
dies as well as considerable portion of the stem below. Cultures made from pieces of the
crown gall and stem above and below the gall yield only a schizomycete which in appearance
is not unlike Bacterium tumefaciens and which when inoculated into the stems of young

No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 173

geraniums and rubber plants produce crown galls in the region of inoculation. It is alto-
gether possible that substances of the disintegrating crown gall or products of the crown gall
forming organism are carried into the circulation of the stem and are responsible for the
progress of the death of the stem from the gall upward and downward. The death of the
plant due to crown gall is at least suggestive of the death caused by the invading and disin-
tegrating malignant growths in animal cancer." — G. H. Coons.

1161. LoscH, Hermann. Notiz zur Atiologie der Durchwachsungen bei Birnenfrxichten.
[Etiology of leafy proliferation of pear fruits.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenkrankh. 30: 71-73. 2 fig.
1920. — A description of this teratological aberration, disputing Sorauer's explanation of
cause as "over-nourishment" of the buds, and referring it as due to freezing of the primary
normal buds. Secondary buds then develop during the time of maximum leaf production
instead of at a period of low leaf formation, thus giving the leafy proliferation. — H. T.
Giissow.

1162. MoNTEMARTiNi, LuiGi. Nuove osservazioni sopra I'azione eccitante del sulfate di
rame sulle piante. [The stimulating action of copper sulfate on plants.] Rev. Pathol. Veg. 10:
36-40. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 1375.

1163. Opitz. Fusariumbetall und Auswinterung verschiedener Winterweizensorten.
[Fusariimi blight and the over-wintering of various winter wheat varieties.] Mittheil. Deutsch.
Landw. Ges. 35:488-489. 1920. — The author describes field plat experiments conducted at
two different stations to determine the relation between Fwsa?-iwm-infected winter wheat
and winter injury. He planted 20 varieties, using the same varieties at each station. His
germination results were uniformlj^ good, running from 02 to 100 per cent. The vigor of the
plants in early stages of development ranged from 79 to 09 per cent. Percentage of infection
ranged from none at all to 77 per cent. It was expected that the experiments would show a
relation between growth-vigor of host and severity of infection, but the results indicated no
such relation. There was, however, some indication of varietal susceptibility, but the
author purposely omitted the names of the varieties used, pending the time when more defi-
nite facts are made known concerning susceptibilitj'^ of different wheat varieties. According
to the experiments of the author there is a relation between severity of infection and over-
wintering ability of the host. This relationship, however, seems manifest only when growth
conditions are peculiarly favorable to the development of the invading fungus. Seed treat-
ment combined with careful selection of disease-free seed is recommended as a control meas-
ure. The author agrees with Hiltner in his recommendation of "uspulum" as a fungicide
for prevention of the type of Fu.^arivm infection described. — H. B. Humphrey.

1164. Petersen, Federico. Los trigos seleccionados de la hacienda Amalucan. [Se-
lected wheats.] Rev. Agric. [Mexico] 5: 112-118. 4 fig- 1919. — Rust due to one or more
species of Puccinia causes heavy losses to Mexican wheat growers. Three selected varieties,
Flor, Maravilla I, and Maravilla II. were found to be somewhat more resistant than the types
ordinarily grown. — See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 639. — John A. Stevenson.

1165. Rao, P. S. Jivanna. The cause of spike in sandal (Santaltun album). Indian
Forester 46: 469-487. 1920.— The spike disease of sandal is closely related to the parasitism
of the plant and may depend upon the sap density of the parent plant. On plants with a
high sap density, sandal has greater difficulty in maintaining itself than on species with low
sap density; and in plants with a high oil content, the plants do better than where the oil is
absent. With depleted water supplies in the host plants, haustoria may be unable to develop
sufficiently rapidly to make up the deficit, and the unbalanced circulation comes about.
The decreased water supply is accompanied by an increased deposition of starch owing to the
absence of a sufficient amount of the transporting fluid. Spike is held not to be due to para-
sites on the sandal, but is regarded as an abnormal physiological reaction, and the remedy
for the condition lies in the use of a strong host with high osmotic values. Lantavas and
shrubs should be avoided because of their short lives and inferior quality as hosts, and the
care of the host is of greater importance than the care of the parasite. — E. N. Munns.

174 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

1166. Reed, George M. Varietal resistance and susceptibility of oats to powdery mildew,
crown rust, and smuts. Missouri Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 37. U p. 1920. — The resist-
ance of oats, Avena spp., to powdery mildew (Erysiphe graminis DC. f. avenae), crown rust
(Puccinia coronata Corda), loose smut (Ustilago avenae (Pers.) Jens.), and covered smut
{Ustilago levis (K & S.) Magn.) was tested by inoculation experiments. Of 98 varieties and
strains belonging to 14 species, tested with powdery mildew, negative results were obtained
onlj' with Avena bromoides and ^. sempervriens. Vigorous infection occurred on all cultivated
species. Of 132 strains and varieties belonging to 7 species, tested with crown rust, all were
found susceptible, the least infection being 42 per cent, on Avena brevis. Of 154 varieties
and strains belonging to 7 species tested with loose smut in the field during 5 seasons, Ave7ia
brevis, Avena sativa var. nigra, the variety Black Mesdag, and Avena strigosa gave consist-
ently negative results; Burt, Earlj- Ripe, Fulghum and other varieties of Avena sterilis gave
very low percentages of infection, while the Avena nv.da group proved entirely suscept'ble.
One hundred and forty-six varieties and strains were tested with covered smut during four
seasons, and in general they reacted to this test in the same way as they did to loose smut. —
L. J. Stadler.

1167. SuEMATSu, Naoji, and Kikuji Ktjwatsuka. Studies on the varietal resistance
of the peach to artificial inoculations with Gloeosporium laeticolor Berk. Ann. Phytopath.
Soc. Japan 1': 1-12. 1920. — Experiments in which 66 varieties of peach important in Japan
were inoculated proved that none are resistant. Various degrees of susceptibility were found,
and two varieties, Tachibanawase and Jitsugetsuto, which ripen early and possess good
qualities, proved to be especially resistant. Seven other varieties, which possess somewhat
less desirable qualities, . are also especially resistant. Chinese species are generally more
resistant than the Persian. No evidences of biologic forms of the fungus, nor of the phe-
nomenon of "adaptation" were found.—//. M. Massey.

DESCRIPTIVE PLANT PATHOLOGY

1168. Anonymous. Forestry, tree diseases and timber. [Rev. of: Rankin, W. H.
Manual of tree diseases. XX + 398 p. Macmillan & Co.: New York and London, 1918.]

Nature 105:579. 1920.— "The first American text book on the subject The

account of Keithia thvyina, a dangerous fungus which has recently appeared in England on
the valuable forest tree, Thuya gigantea, is of considerable interest." — 0. A. Stevens.

1169. Anonymous. Black scab in potatoes. Jour. Dept. Agric. Ireland 20:238-241.
3 fig. 1920.

1170. Anonymous. Potato leaf-curl. Jour. Ministry Agric. Great Britain 27:287-289.
2 fig. 1920. — A brief popular description of potato leaf-curl, including a discussion of the
cause and control. — M. B. McKay.

1171. Ball, E. D., and F. A. Fenton. Potato leaf hopper and the leafburn. Potato
Mag. 212:6-7. 2 fi^. 1920.

1172. Bewley, W. F. "Damping off" of tomato seedlings. Jour. Ministry Agric. Great
Britain 27: 670-673. 1920. — An abridged account of an investigation to be published in full
in the Annals of Applied Biology, vol. 7, No. 2, 1920.

1173. Birmingham, W. A. Crown gall of fruit trees. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales 31:
717-718. 3 fig. 1920. — A brief description of the disease is given with suggestions as to
preventive measures. Destruction of the diseased tree is recommended. Grafts may be
treated with bluestone paste before planting. — L. R. Waldron.

1174. Birmingham, W. A. Root rot of fruit trees due to Armillaria mellea. Agric. Gaz.
New South Wales 31:669-673. 4 fig- 1920.— The appearance of various varieties affected
by the disease, methods of dissemination, effect of the disease and control measures are
given. "Bluestone paste" may be applied to cut root surfaces after the necessary root
pruning has been done. — L. R. Waldron.

No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 175

1175. BiSBY, G. R., AND A. G. Tola as. Potato diseases in Minnesota. Minnesota
Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 190. 44 P-, ^7" fifJ- 1920. — The most common potato diseases with
control measures are discussed. The use of certified seed and seed plot methods are urged
in order to keep up vigor. Soil management and cultural directions are given. Suggestions
are also given regarding methods of handling and storing. — A. C. Amy.

1176. Brandes, E. W. Mosaic disease of corn. Jour. Agric. Res. 19:517-521. PI.
95-96. 1920. — Maize {Zea mays) is subject to the same mosaic disease as sugar cane and cer-
tain wild grasses. The disease on maize has been noted particularlj' in sugar cane regions
of southern United States and in Porto Rico. The symptoms are essentially like those of
sugar cane mosaic. Seed production is suppressed. Aphis maydis transmits the "virus." —
D. Reddick.

1177. Cobb, N. A. A newly discovered parasitic nematode (Tylenchus mahogani n. sp.)
connected with a disease of the mahogany tree. Jour. Parasitology 6: 188-191. 3 fig. 1920. —
Technical description of a new species of nematode parasitic in the tissues of the bark of the
mahogany {Sxvietenia mahogani) in the Barbados. — E. A. Bessey.

117S. Cromwell, R. O. Fusarium blight of the soy bean and the relation of various fac-
tors to infection. Nebraska Agric. Exp. Sta. Res. Bull. 14: 1-43. 5 fig. 1919. — Investi-
gations carried on in North Carolina and Nebraska. This disease was first reported by author
in Jour. Agric. Res. 8: 421-440. The following conclusions were reached: The blight is char-
acterized by a chlorosis and shedding of the leaves or leaflets, followed by the death of the
plants. Soy bean blight has been observed in several localities within North Carolina on
soils infected with cowpea wilt. What is probably the same disease has been recently observed
by others in .\labama and possibh' in Wisconsin. Fusarium iracheiphihim (section Elegans)
is the causal organism. Cultural and morphological studies which are regarded as of primary
importance in distinguishing species of Fusarium show that the strain of Fusarium on soy
bean is identical with the organism producing the wilt of cowpeas. Reciprocal inoculation
experiments in field and greenhouse with the strains from soy beans and cowpeas show that
cross-inoculations can be made. Phj-sical structure and acidity of soil under natural condi-
tions are not the limiting factors in infection, but acidity under certain conditions may have
some influence. Infection occurs through the roots, but nematodes appear not to increase
the percentage of blight materialh^ Other organisms, such as Rhizoctonia and Sclerotium
rolfsii, and other root injuries are believed to materially increase the percentage of diseased
plants in the field. The Black Eyebrow variety of soy beans shows some evidence of resist-
ance. The Brown variety, while not resistant, is tolerant and seems to develop remarkably
well in spite of numerous fungous filaments and nematodes within the roots. Fifteen other
varieties tested were severely affected. Velvet beans are not subject to infection. — T. A.
Kiesselbach.

1179. Cunningham, G. H. Mortality among stone fruit trees in Central Otago. New
Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 359-364. 1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 961.

1180. Darnell-Smith, G. P. "Bunchy-top" in bananas. Agric. Gaz. New South Wales
31:583-584. 1920.— Description of internal lesions of this disease is given. Growers are
advised to avoid planting any plants shov/ing such lesions and to destroy growing plants
showing bunchy-top characters. The organism responsible, if any, has not been determined.
Bacteria have been isolated from diseased tissues, and a Fusarium has been found. It is not
known with certainty that the disease is infectious. — L. R. Waldron.

1181. Dastur, J. F. Choanephora cucurbitarium (B, and Rav.) Thaxter, on chillies
(Capsicum spp.). Ann. Bot. 34: 399-403. PI. 19. 1920. — A new disease of chillies is described
which caused a considerable amount of damage north of the Ganges, India, in 1917. The
characters of the fungus causing the disease are given. — W. P. Fraser.

176 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

1182. Dickson, B. T. Some plant diseases in the greenhouse. Ann. Rept. Quebec See.
Protection of Plants 12 : 46-48. 1920. — A brief account of the most important plant pathogenes
occurring in the greenhouses at Macdonald College, Quebec, Canada. Those discussed were:
Uromyces carophyllinus on carnation, Puccinia anlirrhini on snapdragon, Microsphaera alni
on sweet pea, Alternaria violae on violet, Cladosporium fulviim on tomato. Mosaic of tomato
and a mosaic-like affection of Cineraria were also considered. — B. T. Dickson.

1183. Eastham, J. W. Notes on potato diseases. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 210.
1920.

1184. Eastham, J. W. Bitter-Pit or Baldwin Spot. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 4:
292. 1919.

1185. Eastham, J. W. Guard against Apple Powdery Mildew. Agric. Jour. [British
Columbia] 4: 44. 1919.

1186. Fischer, W. Die Brennfleckenkrankheit der Bohnen. [The anthracnose of beans.]
Fuhlings Landw. Zeitung. 68:241-259. 1919. — A popular review of the literature of the
anthracnose of beans caused by Gloeosporium lindernuthianum, covering its nature, conditions
of infection and development, and various methods of treatment. The author also discusses
some experiments conducted by himself and others at Bromberg in 1915 and 1916, in which
seed from apparently disease-free plants in rows in which diseased seed had been inter-
spersed was selected for planting the following year to see if immune plants could be found.
The result was 23 per cent infected plants as against 63 per cent infected plants in rows
planted from infected plants of the year before. In 1917 and 1918 tests of selections of dis-
ease-free seed from apparently disease-free plants were made on a field which had never
grown beans and was located far from the previous trial grounds. There was considerable
reduction in disease but still as much as 20 per cent, with an average of 8.2 per cent. This
method of getting rid of the disease is not regarded as very promising. The selection of
disease-free seed from immune plants in badly diseased fields seems more promising. It is
suggested that crossing of different species of beans or beans with related plants may be
worth trying; to support this suggestion, attention is called to the observations of several
investigators who found that species differed in susceptibility to the disease. — A. T. Wiancko.

1187. Hemmi, Takewo. Kurze Mitteilung iiber drei Falle von Anthraknose auf Pflanzen.
[Short report on three cases of anthracnose of plants.] Ann. Phytopath. Soc. Japan 1': 13-21.
PI. 1, 5 fig. 1920.— Anthracnoses of Mahonia japonica (Thumb.) DC, Linum usitatissimum
L., and Illicium anisahim L.. occurring in Japan, are briefly discussed. The cause of the
leaf spot of Mahonia was found to be a new species of Colletotrichum, the author giving it the
name Gloeosporium (Colletotrichum) japonicum. The pathogene attacking stems and cotyle-
dons of flax is identical with Colletotrichum. linicolum described by Pethybridge and Laf-
PERTY. The leaf spot of Illicium is caused by a new species, Gloesporium Illicii H. Symp-
toms of the three diseases and technical descriptions of the two new species are given. —
L. M. Massey.

1188. HiLEY, W. E. The fungal diseases of the common larch. XI + 204 p., 73 fig.
Clarendon Press: Oxford, 1919. — This book opens with a description of the general anatomy
of the larch, in which the author defines technical terms which he uses later. The discussion
falls under 4 heads: (1) larch canker, Dasyscypha calycina; (2) Fomes annosus, and other less
important heart-rotting fungi; (3) Armillaria mellea; (4) leaf and seedling diseases. Ap-
proximately 150 pages are given to the discussion of Dasyscypha calycina, Fomes annosus, and
Armillaria mellea. Other heart-rotting fungi — e.g., Polyporus schweinitzii, Poria vaporaria,
Polyporus sulphiireus, and Trametes pini — are less important than Fomes annosus on larch.
The leaf and seedling diseases are not important except under unfavorable conditions, or in
nurseries where alternate hosts of the needle rusts are not excluded. The author describes the
injury resulting from attack by a given fungus, the relations of host and parasite, the fungus

No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 177

itself, pure culture experiments, artificial infection, natural infection, and methods of pre-
vention. The researches of Hartig and Brefeld are reviewed critically in the light of
extensive recent field observations and experiments, and the author is of the opinion that
Dasyscypha calycina enters its host by way of dead branches or branch stubs, Fomes annosus
through dead roots, and Armillaria mellea through damaged or dead roots. The importance
of small wounds may have been greatly overestimated. Hard subsoil conditions in culti-
vated fields are particularly unfavorable to the first rotation of larch planted on such sites,
because the tap roots, being unable to penetrate the subsoil, soon die; and Fomes annosus
almost inevitably attacks these dead roots. First-rotation larch should be planted in mixed
stands — e.g., with hardwoods — so that the roots of the latter may break up the subsoil,
speed up aeration, and render conditions more favorable for the larch roots. Reasons for the
various control methods suggested are thoroughly discussed. The author closes with a
general summary of the important points brought out in the book. — Reginald H. Colley.

1189. HousER, True. Root rot of tobacco. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 232.
1920. — A short discussion of symptoms of the disease, influence of soil and water, character of
soil in plant beds, and methods of control is given. — R. C. Thomas.

1190. Kawakama, Koichiro, and Suehiro Yoshida. Bacterial gall on Milletia plant.
(Bacillus milletiae n. sp.). Bot. Mag. Tokyo 34:110-115. PL 2. 1920.— In Japan the
authors found that this organism causes rough, irregular, round galls from 5 mm. to 10 cm.
in diameter on the stems of Milletia floribunda. It is a motile organism about 2.1 -I- 0.6
microns, with 7 or 8 peripheral flagella; it produces no spores and is gram negative. — Leonas
L. Burlingame.

1191. KiLLiAN, Karl. Ueber die Blattfleckenkrankheit der Tomate hervorgerufen durch
Septoria lycopersici. [Leaf spot of tomato (Septoria lycopersici).] Zeitschr. Pfianzenkrankh.
30:1-17. 7 jig. 1920. — The following constitutes the author's summary: Spring infection
with Septoria takes place exclusively through ejection of pycnospores from previous year's
infected leaf. Infection may be recognized in the moist chamber after five days by browning
and dropping oflf of the cotyledons. Eight days later spots appear at first on the lower leaf
surface; these when dry exhibit fruiting bodies. Similarly the young stems and older stems,
but not the fruits (!) are aflfected. The incubation period is directly related to weather
conditions. Artificial cultures indicate that Septoria is readily grown on various nutrient
materials. Vegetative development is favored by presence of sugar. Fruit bodies develop
only after vegetative development is arrested. The fungus penetrates the epide mis, later
the intercellular spaces, destroys the tissues of the lower-leaf surface, and finally the upper
surface becomes involved. Lastly its offensive action becomes weakened. In cases of
severe attack the diseased foliage should be burned in the fall and the surrounding soil dug
deeply. Compost which has come into contact with diseased plant remains should be
avoided. Rotation is recommended, using plants not subject to attack. — H. T. Gussow.

1192. Lo Priore, G., and G. Scala. L'arrossamento delle foglie del Sommaco. [The
reddening of the leaves of sumac] Staz. Sper. Agrarie Ital. 52: 227-237. PI. 7-8. 1919.

1193. LuTMAN, B. F. Tip burn of the potato and other plants. Potato Mag. 3^: 6-7, 20,
22-24; 32 : 12, 20-21. 1 fig. 1920.— Reprint of Vermont Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 214.

1194. MoLLiARD, M. Tumeurs presentees par les racines du Chou-Rave et de la Bet-
terave. [Tumors occurring on the roots of kohl-rabi and beet.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France
7 : 17-19. 1920. — Large tumor-like outgrowths were found on the roots of kohl-rabi and beets
in different parts of France. In some cases they arose from the main root and in others
from secondary roots. Those on kohl-rabi were at first thought to be caused by Plasmo-
diophora brassicae, but a histological study failed to show any evidence of this. The tumors
found on beets were very similar in structure and appearance to those on kohl-rabi. Myce-
lium of a Fusarium was found on the surface of the tumor on the beet, but is not believed

178 PATHOLOGY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

to have any causal relation to the tumor. The possibility of this malformation being caused
by the crown gall organism or by other parasites or insects is discussed, and it is concluded
that the tumors are the result of some form of parasite not yet determined. — C L. Shear.

1195. NowELL, W. The red wing or root disease of cocoanut palm. Tropic. Agric. 54:
240-245. 1920.

1196. NowELL, W. Root disease of cacao. Jour. Jamaica Agric. Soc. 24 : 173-174. 1920.
— A partial reprint from Bull. Dept. Agric. Trinidad and Tobago 18. 1920.

1197. NowELL, W. Mosaic disease of sugar-cane. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 14. 1920.
— A review of Bulletin 829 of the U. S. Department of Agriculture, by E. W. Brandes, and of
Bulletin 19 of the Insular Experiment Station, Rio Piedras, Porto Rico.

1198. Pachano, Abelaedo. EI mildew de la vina. [Downy mildew of the grape.]
Quinta Normal Estac. Exp. Circ. 9. 8 p. Ambato, 1918. — Introductory note by Martinez
states that grapes are raised in quantity only in a small part of the Province of Tungurahua,
but that conditions are such that grape growing might be greatly extended. Variety tests
are being conducted. The variety "White Muscatel of Alexandria" does not ripen at the
"Quinta Normal," but should do well in the valley of Patata. A summary of the symptoms,
cause, and control of the downy mildew caused by Plasmopara viticola is given. It is believed
that it was introduced from North America eight or ten years previously. — F. M. Blodgett.

1199. Pachano, Abelardo. Dos enfermedades de las papas. [Two diseases of pota-
toes.] Quinta Normal Estac. Exp. Circ. 7. 11 p. Ambato, 1918. — Discusses symptoms,
cause, and control of late blight caused by Phytophthora infestans and early blight caused by
Alternaria solani. In the comparatively dry climate about Ambato, the early blight is
much the more serious, and spraying with bordeaux mixture gave poor results. — F. M.
Blodgett.

1200. Pole, Evans, I. B. Anthracnose or zwart roest of the grape (Gloeosporium ampelo-
phagum, Sacc.) South African Fruit Grower 7: 219. PI. 1-2. 1920.

1201. PuTTEMANS, A. Unc nouvelle maladie de la vigne. — L'arrachement des grappillons.
[A new grape disease. — Pulling off of the grapes.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7: 34-36. Fig. 1.
1920. — The Isabella grape {Vitis labrusca) in Brazil has recently shown a diseased condition
in which the grapes are partially torn from the rachis; they then become livid and shrivel up.
Other grapes immediately surrounding the first soon become diseased and finallj' fall off;
this suggests a parasitic disease spread by contact. But no parasitic organism has yet been
found. In some cases one-third or even one-half of the grapes are destroyed bj'' this dis-
ease. The author thinks that the trouble may be due to certain climatic conditions, espe-
cially to the sudden variations in temperature, which amount to as much as 30 or 40 degrees C.
in 24 hours. Heat and humidity may be able to cause so great disturbance in the activities
of the plant as to produce these results. The most compact bunches are affected. The
berries grow to abnormal size and crowd each other until some are torn loose by the pressure.
— C. L. Shear.

1202. Ramirez, Roman. Enfermedad de los arboles de limon. [A lemon disease.] Rev.
Agric. [Mexico] 5:278-279. 1 fig. 1919. — A leaf spot due to Cladosporium sp. and Macro-
sporium sp. — John A. Stevenson.

1203. SPAtJLDiNG, Perlet. Scientific research in 1919 conducted by the OflSce of Inves-
tigations in Forest Pathology. Report on white pine blister rust control in 1919. Amer. Plant
Pest Committee Bull. 4: 10-11. 1920. — The author reports experimental work on Cronartium
ribicola by H. H. York at North Conway, New Hampshire, and L. H. Pennington at Lewis,
New York viable aeciospores have been caught in traps after having been blown for a distance
of 15 or 20 miles and carried upward 5000 feet. Viable urediniospores were caught up to a

No, 2, March, 1921]

PATHOLOGY 179

distance of 3200 feet from their source. Similar spores caught at a distance of 3400 feet failed
to germinate. Viable sporidia were caught in shrubbery up to a distance of 75 feet from
their source and 600 feet in an open meadow. Those caught 2400 feet away failed to germi-
nate. Longevity of sporidia is less than 10 minutes with humidity at 90 and temperature
of 22-25°C. In other experiments viable sporidia were caught at distance of 180 feet, and
those at 300 feet did not germinate. In nine areas where the source of sporidia was localized
it was proved that serious infection of pines occurred up to less than 200 feet from the
currants. Surgical treatments of diseased pines have shown that where the cut was made
at least one and one-half inches back from the visibly affected part, the eradication was
successful. — W. H. Rankin.

1204. Stakman, Louise J. A Helminthosporium disease of wheat and rye. Minnesota
Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 191:24 p., 5 pi. 1920.— A disease of wheat due to a Helminthosporium
causes foot rot in seedlings, and death of the seedlings often results. Secondary infections
often occur on any part of the plant, including the seeds, above ground. The common
wheat, durum, club, emmer, einkorn, and rye, and many other grasses were found suscep-
tible. The organism is carried on the seed and is not destroyed by formaldehyde treatments.
Control measures consist in using seed from uninfected fields, and in following good cropping
methods.— .4. C. Amy.

1205. Taubenhaus, J. J. Diseases of greenhouse crops, x + 429 p. 82 pi. Button
and Co.: New York City, 1920.— In this book "intended as a guide to practical growers,
teachers, students and investigators in plant pathology," the author aims to "bring together
available information on the subject and to place it at the disposal of the greenhouse men."
Following a statement that the total value of forced plants and flowers, as estimated for
1909, was $24,930,000, it is pointed out that a conservative estimate, however, may place
these losses (from plant disease) at about 30 per cent.— The book is divided into six parts,
under the following heads: (1) The soil, healthy and "sick;" (2) Cultural considerations,
in which breaking the rest period of plants is included; (3) Diseases of greenhouse vege-
tables (includes also mushrooms); (4) Diseases of ornamentals; (5) Greenhouse pests, under
the topics plant pests (red spiders and mites) and thrips (includes also mealy bugs, scale
insects, white fly, aphids, soil insects, ants, millipeds, sow bugs, slugs, etc.); (6) Methods of
control, in which are outlined methods of preparing insecticides and fungicides, methods of
fumigation (with burning sulphur and cyanides) and hygienic considerations. Sections (4)
and (5) make up the bulk of the book, and here the diseases are briefly discussed, and litera-
ture citations made. The book terminates with a simple glossary of technical words.—

G. H. Coons.

•

1206. Traverso, G. B. La "lebbra" ed il "vaiolo" del Sommaco. [The "lebbra" and
the "vaiolo" of the Sumac] Staz. Sper. Agrarie Ital. 52: 213-226. PI. 5 {col.) and 6. 1919.

1207. Van der Bijl, P. A. A leaf spot of the peanut or monkeynut plant caused by the
fungus Septogloeum arachidis Rac. Jour. Dept. Agric. Union of South Africa 1:528-530.
Fig. 1-2. 1920.— This disease has been noticed especially along the Natal coast, and occa-
sionally becomes sufficiently serious to warrant the application of a protective spray.—
E. M. Doidge.

1208. Waters, R. Take-all disease in wheat. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20: 137-143.
S fig. 1920.— The disease is extremely destructive in Australia, and has evidently been
present in New Zealand for some years. The fungus (Ophiobolus graminis) is found upon
typically affected plants. Fruiting bodies of the fungus have been identified. Inoculation
experiments have not been conducted. Diseased plants usually occur in circular or oval
patches. The plants are stunted, more or less bleached, and finally show black masses of
the fungus on the underground parts. A similar dwarfing of the plants may be due to crowd-
ing by weeds, but in such cases there is no bleaching. Water-logged soil, and the grass grub
{Odontriae zealandica) also cause dwarfing, but the presence of the black mycelium of Ophio-

180 PATHOLOGY [Box. Absts., Vol. VII,

lobolus late in the season will distinguish this disease. Other susceptible hosts are Hordeum
sativum, Secale cereale, Hordeum murinum, Bromus sterilis, and Agropyron repens. Control
measures suggested are burning of stubble, rotation, deep tillage and heavy applications of
lime. Good drainage is an important factor in control, and the land must be kept free from
susceptible plants. — N. J. Giddings.

1209. Waters, R. Take-all disease in whea\ New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20:287-288.
1920. — Cultures of Ophiobolus graminis were secured from ascospores. On standard agar the
mycelium was white. There was no evidence of fruiting in culture. Wheat plants from dis-
infected seed grown in sterilized soil were inoculated by placing near the plant a bit of medium
containing the fungus. Four inoculated plants died in from 28 to 36 days, while controls
were in good condition at the end of 58 days. Re-isolations were secured from the rootlets
of some of the dead plants. Several other methods of inoculation gave no infection. — A''. /.
Giddings.

1210. Welten, Heinz. Pflanzenkrankheiten. [Plant diseases.] 199 p., 5 pi., 76 fig.
Phil Reclam, Jr. : Leipzig, 1919.

1211. Whipple, O. B. Degeneration in potatoes. Montana Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 130.
29 p., 16 fig. Apr., 1919. — The results are given from five-years' work upon potato projects.
Degeneration includes various potato ailments which are not, so far as known, traceable to
the attacks of parasitic organisms, and includes spindle sprout, curly dwarf, and probably
mosaic and leaf roll. Characteristic symptoms are the loss of vigor of the plant, and a cor-
responding loss in yielding power. For control it is necessary to turn to seed selection and
better cultural methods. In the experiments the plots were planted on the tuber-unit and
tuber-line plan. Regarding spindle sprout and yellow top, probably a stage of spindle sprout,
the deterioration is apparently sudden and complete, and may be brought about by improper
storage of the tubers or unfavorable growing conditions.— Curly-dwarf is the most serious
condition. It is a gradual deterioration; the transition from normal to curly dwarf covers a
period of two, three, or more seasons. Supposed mosaic degenerates have in their behavior
resembled typical curly-dwarfs and are in this paper so considered. The first indications of
curly dwarf are a slight crinkling and reduction in the size of the leaf. A plant showing the
above foliage symptoms would be classed as an intermediate. Experiments prove that inter-
mediates of one season are, as a rule, the curly dwarfs of the next. Tubers from curly-
dwarf vines if planted produce no marketable tubers. Tubers from degenerate types are,
as a rule, shallow-eyed, when compound with those from normal vigorous plants, and efforts
to improve the type of tubers by the selection of shallow-eyed seed tubers should be under-
taken, according to the author, with extreme caution.— H. E. Morris.

1212. White, E. W. Apple-tree Anthracnose or Black Spot Canker. Agric. Jour. [British
Columbia] 4: 206-207. 1919.

1213. Wolf, F. A. Report of the Division of Plant Pathology and Bacteriology. North
Carolina Agric. Exp. Sta. Ann. Rept. 42:65. 1920.— Subject matter of this report is cov-
ered in bulletin on clover stem rot in: North Carolina Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 16: 15-18. S pi.
1919. [See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 1669.]— F. A. Wolf.

ERADICATION AND CONTROL

1214. Anonymous. La "anthracnosis" de la vid. [Anthracnose of the grape.] Infor-
macion Agric. [Madrid] 10: 153. 1920.— Treatment for grape anthracnose {Gloeosporium
ampelophagum) . — John A. Stevenson.

1215. Anonymous. Tumores bacterianos. [Bacterial tumors.] Informacion Agric.
[Madrid] 10: 170-171. 2 fig. 1920.— The nature and control of the olive knot disease due to
Bacterium savastanoi). — John A. Stevenson.

No. 2, Makch, 1921] PATHOLOGY 181

1216. Anonymous. Control of silver blight. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20:374-377.
1920.— The experiments deal principally with stone fruits. The treatments include tests
with a number of fertilizers, with lime, and with copper sulphate and Bordeaux mixture.
The only materials which appeared to be of any possible value were the copper sulphate
and the Bordeaux mixture. — A^. J. Giddings.

1217. Anonymoits. Spraying calendar for apples in North Carolina. North Carolina
Agric. Ext. Service Circ. 101. 4 p. 1920.— Directions for spraying apples to prevent attacks
by insects and plant diseases. — F. A. Wolf.

1218. Beck, Olga. Uber eine Methode der Saatgutuntersuchung auf Brand und iiber
das Versagen der Kuperfvitriolbeize. [A method of testing wheat for smut contamination and
possible omission of the blue vitriol disinfection.] Naturwiss. Zeitschr. Forst-u. Landw.
18 : 83-99. 1920.— The author describes an original method for determining arithmetically
the number of smut spores in any sample, and from this predicting the percentage of infection
likely to result in the subsequent crop. Under certain conditions seed treatment may be
safely omitted. — J. Rueser.

1219. BiSBY, G. R., AND A. G. Tola as. The use of Bordeaux mixture for spraying pota-
toes. Minnesota Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 192. 31 p., 4 fig- 1920.— Bordeaux mixture is a pre-
ventive of late blight in potatoes. It also reduces the injury from other leaf diseases and
repels certain insects. A 5-5-50 mixture has been found better than weaker ones. The
indications are that spraying may result in the production of more vigorous tubers. —
.4. C. Amy.

1220. Blair, R. E. The work of the Yuma reclamation project experiment farm in 1918.
U. S. Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 75. 77 p., 32 fig. 1920.— Preservative treatments for willow
posts.

1221. Braun, Harry. Presoak method of seed treatment; a means of preventing seed
injury due to chemical disinfectants and of increasing germicidal efficiency. Jour. Agric.
Res. 19: 363-392. PI. 69-82. 9 fig. 1920.— Full experimental data in support of conclusions
previously published.— See Bot. Absts. 3, Entry 2576.— D. Reddick.

1222. Bryce, p. I. Can we improve potato storage? Ann. Rept. Quebec Soc. Protection
of Plants 12: 53-59. 1920.— The article deals with statistics showing the importance of the
crop in Canada, the chief storage rots, and suggestions on storing potatoes both in small and
large lots. — B. T. Dickson.

1223. Coons, G. H. Safeguarding next year's wheat. Michigan Agric. Exp. Sta. Quart.
Bull. 31:9-11. 1920.

1224. Detwiler, Samuel B. White pine blister rust control in 1919. Amer. Plant Pest
Committee Bull. 4. 10 p. 1920.— A summary of the proceedings of the fifth annual Inter-
national Blister Rust Conference held at Albany, New York, on December 8-9, 1919. As
the result of four-years' field work it is now proved that white pine blister rust (Cronartium
ribicola) can be controlled locally if the currant and gooseberry bushes are destroyed within
200-300 feet of the pines. It has been proved that unskilled laborers with trained supervision
remove on the average 95 per cent of the bushes in the first working of an area. It has been
found that Ribes does not multiply rapidly in an eradication area, and a second eradication
does not seem necessary for five or ten years after the first. No new pine infections were
found in 1919 on four control areas carefully examined. The labor costs per acre for eradi-
cation in the New England States average between 24 and 42 cents. The number of pines
that are affected in the New England States is said to be increasing rapidly. On an area of
72 square miles in New Hampshire it was estimated that one-fourth of the pines are affected.
The Conference believes that it is necessary in the infected regions for white pine owners to

182 PATHOLOGY |BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

destroy currants and gooseberries within 200 feet of the pines if they are to save the pines.
The rust has not been found in Western United States, and the existing quarantines are con-
sidered a safeguard. The resolutions adopted urgently recommend that the destruction of
the currants and gooseberries in white pine stands be adopted generally in infected regions;
that pine and currant growing regions be segregated by law; that the cultivated black cur-
rant be outlawed; that state and federal experimental work be continued; that scouting in
the western states be continued; and that an accurate census of the white pine in the country
be made by the federal government. The experimental and practical control work done on
control areas in the various states is summarized by states. No blister rust was found on
pines in 1919 outside the New England States, New York, Minnesota, and Wisconsin. —
W. H. Rankin.

1225. Du COMET, V. De la lutte centre le Phytophtora infestans. [Combating Phyto-
phtora infestans.] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7:59-65. 1920.— The principal work car-
ried on in different countries in the prevention of late blight of potato is reviewed. In the
author's region — Grignon — four applications of Bordeaux mixture are sufficient in the worst
seasons, and usually two suffice. — C. L. Shear.

1226. DuTTON, W. C. Dusting and spraying experiments of 1918 and 1919. Michigan
Agric. Exp. Sta. Special Bull. 102. 50 p., 20 fig. 1920.— Comparative dusting and spraying ex-
periments with fungicides and insecticides were carried on in 1918 and 1919 in several orchards
in various parts of Michigan, the fruits being apple, cherry, plum, peach and currants. A few
experiments were also made with potatoes. For apples, the scab was as well, and in some
cases better, controlled by the sulphur dust than by the lime-sulphur spray. Dry lime-
sulfur dissolved in water and sprayed gave poor control, as did barium tetrasulphide (B. T. S.).
The latter caused russeting of the fruit in some varieties. The lime-sulphur sprays injured
the leaves a little, while the sulphur dust did no harm. Of the insecticides, lead arsenate
gave uniformly good results. Calcium arsenate burned the foliage somewhat and gave only
fair control of coddling moth. Magnesium arsenate, on the contrary, was unsatisfactory as a
control and caused serious burning. On cherries, dusting with sulphur (90 parts) and lead
arsenate (10 parts) did not control, although it delayed for about two weeks the onset of leaf
blight {Coccomyces hiemalis). The trees were badly defoliated by the middle of September.
The trees sprayed with lime-sulphur (plus arsenate of lead) remained free from the disease
until late in September, more than two months after the last spraying, when a small amount
of infection occurred. In the same orchard the dusted and check trees showed serious loss
from Coniothyrium, which caused cankers at the point of attachment of the fruit pedicel,
causing the drying up of the fruit. The sprayed trees did not show this trouble. Other
spraying and dusting experiments with cherry and plum were inconclusive because of lack of
insect and fungous trouble in the unsprayed plots. For leaf curl {Exoascus deformans) of the
peach the 90-10 dust mixture (sulphur and lead arsenate) applied March 7 was practically of
no value. The Niagara soluble sulphur was only very slightly better. The dry-lime-sulphur
dissolved and applied as a spray showed much better results than the dust treatments, but
still did not give good control. Magnesium arsenate as an insecticide caused almost com-
plete defoliation of the peach. Currants sprayed with bordeaux mixture remained healthy
throughout the season; those dusted and those sprayed with lime-sulphur showed yellowing
of the leaves and lost much foliage. Bordeaux mixture controlled the anthracnose (Pseudo-
peziza ribis) successfully. The other treatments reduced the anthracnose but did not con-
trol it. Of the varieties tested, the untreated bushes showed great variation in suscepti-
bility to anthracnose. Prince Albert is very resistant; London Market resistant. Wilder,
Perfection, Fay's Prolific, La Versailles, Cherry and Red Cross are susceptible; and Red
Dutch is very susceptible. With potatoes, calcium arsenate applied as a dry dust (85 parts
with 15 parts of talc as a filler) or sprayed on at the rate of 1^ lbs. in 50 gallons give equally
perfect control of the Colorado potato beetle. — E. A. Bessey.

1227. Evans, N. H. Report on experiments for the control of Apple Scab. Ann. Rept.
Dept. Agric. (British Columbia) 14: 25-27. 1920.

No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 183

1228. EwERT. Brauchbare Ersatzmittel fxir altbewahrte Mittel zur Abwehr von Pflanzen-
krenkheiten im Obst- und Gartenbau. [Useful substitutes for well-known mixtures in the
control of plant diseases in orchard and garden.] lUust. Schlesische Monatsschr. Obst-,
Gemiise- und Gartenbau 1918: 96-97. 1918.

1229. GossARD, H. A. Dust spraying. Monthly Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 147-149.
1920.— This is a report of tests during 1916-1917 comparing dusting with liquid applications
and giving the respective costs. — R. C. Thomas.

1230. Hardenburg, E. V. Potato inspection in New York in 1919. Potato Mag. 2'2: 9,
38. 1920.

1231. HiLTNER, L. Ueber die Beizung des Wintergetreidesaatguts. [On the treatment of
winter-wheat seed.] Mitteil. Deutsch. Landw. Ges. 35:486-487. 1920.— The Agricultural
Institute in Munich has worked for the development of an organization involving the em-
ployment of inspectors charged with the duty of instructing farmers in the details of seed
treatment and enforcing the requirements that all seed be treated. The author recommends
"fusariol" as a practical fungicide for prevention of bunt (Tilletia sp.), and adds that its use
results in improved stand and yield. He compares "fusariol" with formaldehyde, "uspu-
lum," "fusafine," and a new fungicide, "sublimoform." The author warns against the use
of copper sulphate because of injurious effect on germination. For control of barley stripe
disease {Helminthosporium graminium) he recommends a 0.25 per cent solution of "uspu-
lum" as the most satisfactory of fungicides employed in his experiments. In the preven-
tion of Fusarium infection in rye the author obtained best results as to stand and yield when
he used fusariol. Very satisfactory results were obtained also from the use of "uspulum." —
H. B. Htimphrey.

1232. Howard, W. L. Brown rot of apricots and its prevention. Better Fruit 15^: 7.
1920.

1233. Hunt, E. C. Report of Assistant Horticulturist and Inspector of Fruit Pests, East
and West Kootenay districts. Ann. Rept. Dept. Agric. (British Columbia) 14: 36-39. 1920.
—Spraying for control of apple scab with (1) Bordeaux mixture containing excess of lime,
"soluble sulphur" being used for the calyx spray, (2) lime-sulphur solution, and (3) sulphur
dust. The first gave best control, and in the case of Mcintosh Red, a slightly greater yield
than lime-sulphur. Sulphur dust gave very poor control, 86.95 per cent of the fruit of
Mcintosh Red being scabby. — J. W. Eastham.

1234. Johnson, A. G., and J. G. Dickson. Stem rusts of grains and the barberry in
Wisconsin. Wisconsin Agric. Exp. Sta. Bull. 304. 16 p., 6 fig. 1919.— A general statement
of the relation of the common barberry to the spread of the stem rust {Puccinia graminis)
of cereals and grasses. The difference between the stem rust and leaf rust is explained by
photographs, and a chart shows the extent of spread of the stem rust from an infected
barberry hedge. — E. M. Gilbert.

1235. Laffer, H. E. Bordeaux powders vs. home-made bordeaux mixtures. Agric.
Gaz. New South Wales 31:595. 1920.— Trials with proprietary Bordeaux powders showed
them to be ineffective in controlling grape downy mildew. — L. R. Waldron.

1236. Leiby, R. W. Spraying Irish potatoes. North Carolina Agric. Ext. Serv. Circ.
103. U p. 1920.— A popular treatment of subject matter in Bull. North Carolina Dept.
Agric. 40^:7-38. 10 fig. 1919.— F. A. Wolf.

1237. Letteer, C. R. The work of the San Antonio experiment farm in 1918. U. S.
Dept. Agric. Dept. Circ. 73. 38 p., 4 fig. 1920.— Effect of rotation and tillage on cotton
root rot.- See Bot. Absts. 6, Entry 1423.

184 PATHOLOGY [BoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

1238. Macrum, C. a. Combined bordeaux oil emulsion spray. Better Fruit 14^:9, 39.
1920.— Directions are given for making a combination spray solution by the addition to each
200 gallons of 1.5 per cent Bordeaux mixture (6-6-50) of 1^ pounds glue and 12 gallons oil
emulsion. — A. E. Murneek.

1239. Maheux, Georges. Spraying to increase potato production. Ann. Rept. Quebec
Soc. Protection of Plants 12:43-46. 1920. — Results of potato spraying on sixty experi-
mental plots in forty countries are given. The yield for 1919 was 50 per cent higher in plots
sprayed four times than the check plot, and the net profit $30.00 per acre more. — B. T.
Dickson.

1240. Martin, W. H. The relation of sulfur to soil acidity and to the control of potato
scab. Soil Sci. 9: 393-409. 1920. — In the experiments reported, five types of soil and two
varieties of potatoes were used. It was found that when sulphur was added to the soils the
decrease in scab corresponded to the increase of soil acidity as measured by the hydrogen-ion
concentration. The increase in acidity depended not only upon the amount of sulphur
added, but upon the percentage of sulphur which was oxidized. Where the hydrogen-ion
concentration of water extracts of the soil was Ph 5.8 or less before sulphur was applied, 300
to 500 pounds per acre gave approximately as good control as heavier applications. Where
the initial hydrogen-ion concentration exceeded 6.0 heavier applications (600-1200 pounds)
gave best control. — Dorothy Wilson.

1241. McCuBBiN, W. A. The seed potato question. Seed World 8^: 24-25. 1920.

1242. Newell, W. Citrus canker eradication in Florida. Monthly Bull. California State
Commission Hort. 8: 394-395. 1919. — The rapid spread of the citrus canker disease, in Florida
after 1912, when it was first observed by Dr. E. W. Berger is noted. Through the aid of
the state appropriations, however, work was conducted from 1912 to 1919 which practically
eradicated all signs of the disease. — E. L. Overholser.

1243. Nowell, W. Red ring disease of coco-nuts. Agric. News [Barbados] 19: 222.
1920. — A method for the disposal of nematode-infested material is given. It consists in dig-
ging up the palm by the roots and sawing the trunk into 3-foot lengths over the pit formed
by the digging. Each length is then split longitudinally into about 6 pieces, and the whole
lot of material, including leaves, sawdust, etc., is placed in the pit over some brushwood in
the manner in which it is usual to place material for burning charcoal. The heap is then set
on fire and left to burn slowly under a covering of earth until all has been burnt to ashes.
The method is somewhat expensive, but the results obtained justify its employment. —
J. S. Dash.

1244. Pethybridge, F. R. Potato spraying trials in the Cambridge Fens, 1919. Jour.
Ministry Agric. Great Britain 27:282-286. 1920.— Results are given from some potato-
spraying trials conducted during 1919 in which 1 and 2 per cent Bordeaux and Burgundy
mixtures were used at the rates of 85 and 200 gallons per acre. In all cases some scorching
of the foliage was obtained, and in a few cases it was severe. The weather was hot and dry
during a part of the season, and this was said to be the cause of the scorching. The yields
were less in the sprayed than in the unsprayed plots. — M. B. McKay.

1245. PiPAL, F. J. The barberry and its relation to the stem rust of wheat in Indiana.
Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1918: 63-70. 2 fig. 1920.— The author discusses briefly the his-
tory of Berberis vulgaris in its relation to wheat rust and cities 13 specific cases of rust out-
break investigated during the summer of 1917. — F. C. Anderson.

1246. Regan, W. S. The destruction of Ribes by chemical means. American Plant Pest
Committee Bull. 4: 12. 1920.— Dip oil, containing 25 per cent cresol, sprayed on tops or
crown of bushy species kills in the majority of cases. Dilutions of dip oil with fuel oil, 36.3
degrees Beaum^, at the rate of 1 to 5 and 1 to 8 is advised for areas of skunk currant {Ribes

No. 2, March, 1921] PATHOLOGY 185

cynosbati), two or three applications being necessary to kill. Spraying the foliage kills in
from a half hour to a few hours. Efficiency of dip oil is little effected by rain, sunlight,
absence of foliage, or season. Fuel oil alone is effective if two or three applications are made.
Neither oil is poisonous to animals. Treatment is economical where pulling is difficult.
Compressed-air hand sprayers were used. — W. H. Rankin.

1247. Robertson, W. H. Commercial and home-made lime-sulphur spray. Agric. Jour.
[British Columbia] 4: 375. 1919.

1248. RoDDA, T. E. Control of brown rot on peaches. New Zealand Jour. Agric. 20:
20-23. 1920. — Brown rot did not develop to any extent on account of the dry season. Fruit
was treated to prevent development of brown rot after picking. Dipping in bluestone 1-10
or 1-20 caused fruit injury, while 1-40 was apparently safe. Formalin solution 1-50 produced
spots on the fruit, while 1-100 did not injure it. Lime-sulphur solution 1-15 and 1-30 did
not affect fruit, but the 1-15 left too heavy a deposit on the peaches. Permanganate of
potash 1-640 did not injure fruit. Applications of Bordeaux powder, sulphur dust, and a
lime-sulphur dust were unsatisfactory. Fumigation with sulphur (i oz. per 100 cu. ft.)
and with formalin (§ oz. per 100 cu. ft.) injured the fruit. — A'. J. Giddings.

1249. ScHAFFxiT, E. Versuche zur Bekampfung des Kartoffelkrebses im Jahr 1918/19.
[Control experiments against Potato Canker (Black wart.] Zeitschr. Pflanzenkrankh. 30: 59-67.
1920. — Author states that soil disinfection experiments gave no practical results. He then
discusses the results of experiments relative to resistance of potato varieties to Chryso-
phlyctis endobiotica. Of the varieties tested for five years the following proved immune:
(1) Early: Sechswochen (verbesserte lange), Poppehurt; (2) Medium Early: Koralle, Lech;
(3) Medium Late: Danusia, Jubel, Ada; (4) Late: Agraria, Erika. A number of the varie-
ties tested for a period of four years also remained without attack. — It is important to note
that some varieties proved immune for one year or several years, but were slightly attacked in
other years. This observation is explained as due to the use of "deteriorated" seed. Author
suggests that the immunity of the varieties mentioned is not absolute, but only relative;
that varieties showing immunity under normal conditions may lose this faculty as soon as
the plant no longer exhibits its normal form of development and is weakened in its physio-
logical functions, as a result of pathological conditions transmissible through the seed tuber.
The contrasting results given by author in support of his argument seem to substantiate his
findings. Hence there exists in these varieties and in their behaviour towards the causal
agent of potato canker a classical example of immunity and "predisposition" (in Sorauer's
sense) of plants according to their constitution in their relation to a pronounced parasite.
The use of varieties of proven immunity on infected lands is recommended under proper
legislative safeguards. — H. T. Giissow.

1250. ScHOENE, W. J. Twelfth report of the State Entomologist and Plant Pathologist
1918-1919. Quart. Bull. Virginia Crop Pest Commission 1^: 1-28. 1920.— Contains brief
notes on the following topics: Inspection for pine blister rust; cedar rust and cedar eradica-
tion; "Take-all" disease of wheat in Virginia. — F. D. Fromme.

1251. Selby, a. D., and R. C. Thomas. Bordeaux mixture an active fungicide. Monthly
Bull. Ohio Agric. Exp. Sta. 5: 220. July, 1920.

1252. Shapovalov, Michael. The potato-scab control problem as it stands to-day.
Potato Mag. 2'i: 8-9, 26. 3 fig. 1920.

1253. TiCE, C. Certified potato seed production. Agric. Jour. [British Columbia] 5: 197.
1920.— See Bot. Absts. 7, Entry 665.

1254. Vayssiere, P. [Rev. of: Vermorel (V) and Dantont (E.) Composition chimique
des Bouillies sulfo-calciques employees centre les Insectes et les Maladies des plantes. W p.
Montpellier et Villefranche, 1919. (Chemical composition of lime sulphur used in combating
insects and diseases of plants.)] Bull. Soc. Path. Veg. France 7: 86. 1920 — C. L. Shear.

BOTANICAL ABBTRACrS, VOL. vn, NO. 2

186 PATHOLOGY iBoT. Absts., Vol. VII,

1255. Westerdijk, Johanna. Das Spritzen der Kartoffeln in den Niederlanden.
[Spraying potatoes in Holland.] Jahresb. Verein. Angew. Bet. 16: 132-138. 1918. — Spraying
for potato blight (Phytophthora) is much commoner in Holland than in Germany. It is
particularly necessary in the provinces near the sea. Two treatments beginning late in
June are important. A third treatment often is necessary. In Friesland six treatments
may be made, depending on conditions. Bordeux or Bungundy mixture is used of 1.5 per cent
strength and is applied at the rate of 750 to 1000 liters per hectare. Increased yield from
spraying is sufficient to pay the cost of application. — Brief discussion is given of resistant
varieties. — D. Reddick.

REGULATORY MEASURES

1256. Federal Horticultural Board, U. S. Dept. Agric. [Restrictive legislation and
notices of quarantines in U. S. A.] Service and Regulatory Announcements 68: 52-111. 1920.
— Correspondence relating to legislation in state of Texas with respect to pink boUworm
of cotton shows some of the difficulties involved in enacting effective eradication provisions,
especially when "states rights" are involved. The Texas and the Louisiana pink bollworm
acts of 1920 are reproduced in full. — Notice of domestic federal quarantine 45 on account of
g3rpsy moth and brown tail moth, with regulations. An extension of the area in which there
are restrictions upon the movement of all forest and quarry products. — Notice of domestic
federal quarantine 46 on account of pink bollworm of cotton with rules and regulations.
This notice is also issued as an unnumbered leaflet by the U. S. Secretary of Agriculture. —
Notice of quarantine 47 against Hawaiian and Porto Rican cotton, cotton seed and cotton
products, with regulations. Previous quarantine restrictions are simply brought into one
document. — List of current quarantine and other restrictive orders. — D. Reddick.

1257. Friedrichs, K. Zur Organisation des Koloniales Pfianzenschutzes. [Organiza-
tion of plant protection for the colonies.] Tropenflanzer 21;

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Botanical abstracts"

See other formats